FAMOS Users Manual

© 2008 imc Meßsysteme GmbH

FAMOS

15.05.2008 FAMOS Version 6.0

imc Meßsysteme GmbH, Voltastrasse 5, 13355 Berlin

Users Manual

Rev. 1

2

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

FAMOS Users Manual

................................................................................................................................... 121.1 Customer Support - Hotline

................................................................................................................................... 131.2 Important Notes

......................................................................................................................................................... 131.2.1 Guidelines

.................................................................................................................................................. 131.2.1.1 Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity

.................................................................................................................................................. 131.2.1.2 Quality Management

................................................................................................................................... 141.3 imc Guarantee and Software-License Agreement

......................................................................................................................................................... 141.3.1 imc Software License Agreement

................................................................................................................................... 161.4 Product Improvement

Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 172.1 Foreword

................................................................................................................................... 172.2 Additional Help Resources

................................................................................................................................... 182.3 System Requirements

................................................................................................................................... 182.4 Installation

................................................................................................................................... 192.5 Start

................................................................................................................................... 192.6 Start with Parameters

......................................................................................................................................................... 192.6.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 202.6.2 Registry-Key for Configurations Data

......................................................................................................................................................... 212.6.3 Opening a measurement value file

......................................................................................................................................................... 222.6.4 Running a Sequence/ Dialog

......................................................................................................................................................... 222.6.5 Executing Operations

......................................................................................................................................................... 222.6.6 Running a project

......................................................................................................................................................... 232.6.7 Starting Data Browser

User Interface

................................................................................................................................... 243.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 253.2 Variables List

......................................................................................................................................................... 253.2.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 253.2.2 Operation

......................................................................................................................................................... 273.2.3 Options

................................................................................................................................... 283.3 The Functions List

......................................................................................................................................................... 283.3.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 293.3.2 Operation

................................................................................................................................... 313.4 Editor Box

......................................................................................................................................................... 313.4.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 323.4.2 Editing Text

......................................................................................................................................................... 333.4.3 Commands for Editing Text

......................................................................................................................................................... 343.4.4 Active line, executing formulas

......................................................................................................................................................... 343.4.5 Help and Assistant

......................................................................................................................................................... 353.4.6 Bookmarks

......................................................................................................................................................... 363.4.7 Options: Editor

......................................................................................................................................................... 373.4.8 Options: Colors

......................................................................................................................................................... 373.4.9 Printing in the editor box

.................................................................................................................................................. 383.4.9.1 Page setup

.................................................................................................................................................. 393.4.9.2 Print preview

.................................................................................................................................................. 393.4.9.3 Print

................................................................................................................................... 403.5 Output Box

................................................................................................................................... 413.6 The Plug-in box

3


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 413.7 File Menu

................................................................................................................................... 423.8 Variable Menu

................................................................................................................................... 443.9 Sequence Menu

................................................................................................................................... 453.10 Sequence Menu, more commands

................................................................................................................................... 483.11 Extra Menu

................................................................................................................................... 493.12 Project Menu

................................................................................................................................... 503.13 Window Menu

................................................................................................................................... 513.14 "?" (Help) Menu

................................................................................................................................... 513.15 Administering Favorites

......................................................................................................................................................... 513.15.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 523.15.2 Creating a new favorite

......................................................................................................................................................... 523.15.3 Setting / changing properties of favorites

......................................................................................................................................................... 533.15.4 Organizing favorites

................................................................................................................................... 543.16 Customizing the User Interface

......................................................................................................................................................... 543.16.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 543.16.2 Changing sizes

......................................................................................................................................................... 543.16.3 Hiding windows

......................................................................................................................................................... 553.16.4 Load configuration

......................................................................................................................................................... 553.16.5 Save configuration

Tutorial

................................................................................................................................... 564.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 564.2 Starting FAMOS

................................................................................................................................... 574.3 Specifying Directories

................................................................................................................................... 584.4 Loading Files

................................................................................................................................... 594.5 Showing Variables

................................................................................................................................... 594.6 Zooming

................................................................................................................................... 604.7 Unzooming

................................................................................................................................... 604.8 Measuring

................................................................................................................................... 614.9 Viewing Variable Properties

................................................................................................................................... 624.10 Interpolation

................................................................................................................................... 644.11 More Waveforms in Curve Window

................................................................................................................................... 674.12 Changing a Formula

................................................................................................................................... 674.13 Single Values

................................................................................................................................... 684.14 Calculations

................................................................................................................................... 694.15 Waveform Editor

................................................................................................................................... 694.16 Saving Results

................................................................................................................................... 704.17 Deleting Variables

................................................................................................................................... 704.18 Spectrum

................................................................................................................................... 714.19 Complex Waveforms

................................................................................................................................... 724.20 Creating Sequences

................................................................................................................................... 734.21 Executing Sequences

................................................................................................................................... 744.22 Changing Sequences

................................................................................................................................... 744.23 Saving Sequences

4


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 744.24 Favorites

................................................................................................................................... 754.25 Using the File Browser to load files

................................................................................................................................... 774.26 Loading and Displaying Files from a Directory

................................................................................................................................... 784.27 Loading and Displaying Files from Different Directories

File Management

................................................................................................................................... 795.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 805.2 Loading Files

......................................................................................................................................................... 825.2.1 FAMOS Format

......................................................................................................................................................... 855.2.2 DSP Format (DIGISKOP(c))

......................................................................................................................................................... 865.2.3 WFT Format

......................................................................................................................................................... 885.2.4 ASCII Format

......................................................................................................................................................... 915.2.5 Binary format

......................................................................................................................................................... 955.2.6 Excel (XLS)-Format

................................................................................................................................... 985.3 Saving Files

......................................................................................................................................................... 985.3.1 Saving Individually

......................................................................................................................................................... 985.3.2 Saving Together

......................................................................................................................................................... 995.3.3 FAMOS Format

......................................................................................................................................................... 995.3.4 ASCII Format (export template)

.................................................................................................................................................. 995.3.4.1 Overview

.................................................................................................................................................. 1005.3.4.2 Administering ASCII-export templates

.................................................................................................................................................. 1015.3.4.3 Defining ASCII export templates

......................................................................................................................................................... 1105.3.5 ASCII Format (3.2 compatible)

......................................................................................................................................................... 1125.3.6 Excel (XLS)-Format

.................................................................................................................................................. 1125.3.6.1 Overview

.................................................................................................................................................. 1135.3.6.2 Administering EXCEL-export templates

.................................................................................................................................................. 1145.3.6.3 Defining EXCEL export templates

................................................................................................................................... 1225.4 Default Directories

Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1246.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 1256.2 Variable Names

................................................................................................................................... 1266.3 Data Types

......................................................................................................................................................... 1266.3.1 Normal Waveforms

......................................................................................................................................................... 1276.3.2 Single Values

......................................................................................................................................................... 1286.3.3 XY-Waveforms

......................................................................................................................................................... 1286.3.4 Complex Waveforms

......................................................................................................................................................... 1306.3.5 Text Variables

......................................................................................................................................................... 1306.3.6 TimeStamp-ASCII

......................................................................................................................................................... 1316.3.7 Data Groups

................................................................................................................................... 1316.4 Structured Waveforms

......................................................................................................................................................... 1326.4.1 Segments

......................................................................................................................................................... 1326.4.2 Events

................................................................................................................................... 1326.5 Indexing Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1336.6 Data Formats

................................................................................................................................... 1356.7 Showing Variables

......................................................................................................................................................... 1356.7.1 Showing Variables Individually

......................................................................................................................................................... 1356.7.2 Showing Variables Together

......................................................................................................................................................... 1356.7.3 Loading Curve Configurations

......................................................................................................................................................... 1366.7.4 QuickView-Window

5


Table Of Contents

......................................................................................................................................................... 1366.7.5 Showing Variables in an Existing Curve Window

................................................................................................................................... 1376.8 Showing and Changing Characteristics

......................................................................................................................................................... 1376.8.1 Properties Dialog

......................................................................................................................................................... 1386.8.2 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms)

......................................................................................................................................................... 1406.8.3 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Texts)

......................................................................................................................................................... 1416.8.4 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Groups)

......................................................................................................................................................... 1426.8.5 Dialog Properties/ Structure

......................................................................................................................................................... 1436.8.6 Dialog Properties/ Display

......................................................................................................................................................... 1446.8.7 Dialog Properties/ Data Format

................................................................................................................................... 1456.9 Deleting Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1456.10 Group/ Ungroup variables (data groups)

................................................................................................................................... 1466.11 Permanent variables and temporary variables

................................................................................................................................... 1466.12 Exporting/ Importing Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1466.13 Playing Back Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1476.14 Constants and Predefined Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1486.15 Units

................................................................................................................................... 1516.16 Memory management / Data Manager options

Functions

................................................................................................................................... 1547.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 1547.2 Formulas

................................................................................................................................... 1577.3 Data Groups as Function Parameters

................................................................................................................................... 1587.4 Indirect Use of Text Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1587.5 Error and Warning Messages

................................................................................................................................... 1607.6 Data Format of Results

................................................................................................................................... 1607.7 Options / Functions Dialog

................................................................................................................................... 1617.8 Function Assistant

................................................................................................................................... 1627.9 imc Kit Interface

......................................................................................................................................................... 1627.9.1 Introduction

......................................................................................................................................................... 1637.9.2 Registering Kits

......................................................................................................................................................... 1647.9.3 Calling External Kit Functions

......................................................................................................................................................... 1647.9.4 Curve Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1647.9.5 File Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1657.9.6 Dialog Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1657.9.7 Report Generator Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1657.9.8 Sound Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1657.9.9 Format Kit

......................................................................................................................................................... 1657.9.10 Other Kits available

................................................................................................................................... 1667.10 Standard DLL Interface

......................................................................................................................................................... 1667.10.1 Introduction

......................................................................................................................................................... 1667.10.2 Registering DLL's in FAMOS

......................................................................................................................................................... 1727.10.3 Calling external DLL functions

......................................................................................................................................................... 1747.10.4 Tips for users of previous FAMOS versions

Function Reference

Sequences

................................................................................................................................... 1769.1 Introduction

6


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 1779.2 Sequences and the editor box

................................................................................................................................... 1789.3 Administering Sequences

......................................................................................................................................................... 1789.3.1 Creating a new sequence

......................................................................................................................................................... 1799.3.2 Loading a sequence

......................................................................................................................................................... 1809.3.3 Saving sequences

.................................................................................................................................................. 1819.3.3.1 Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs

......................................................................................................................................................... 1839.3.4 Closing sequences

................................................................................................................................... 1839.4 Testing and Running Sequences

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.1 Run

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.2 Run line

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.3 Start (Debug)

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.4 Continue

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.5 Single step

......................................................................................................................................................... 1849.4.6 Single step in subsequence

......................................................................................................................................................... 1859.4.7 Response to errors

......................................................................................................................................................... 1859.4.8 Canceling / interrupting sequence runs

......................................................................................................................................................... 1859.4.9 Breakpoints

......................................................................................................................................................... 1869.4.10 Sequence-Status

................................................................................................................................... 1879.5 Sequence commands

................................................................................................................................... 1889.6 Sequences with Parameters

......................................................................................................................................................... 1889.6.1 Concept

......................................................................................................................................................... 1899.6.2 Call

......................................................................................................................................................... 1899.6.3 Multiple Parameters

......................................................................................................................................................... 1899.6.4 Comments

......................................................................................................................................................... 1909.6.5 Process Directories

......................................................................................................................................................... 1909.6.6 Incrementing Numbers

................................................................................................................................... 1919.7 Use of Text Variables

................................................................................................................................... 1949.8 Dialogs During Execution of Sequence

Sequence Commands (Reference)

................................................................................................................................... 19510.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 19510.2 Overview of Commands by Group

................................................................................................................................... 19710.3 Alphabetical Overview of Commands

................................................................................................................................... 19910.4 Application

................................................................................................................................... 20010.5 ASCII

................................................................................................................................... 20110.6 ASCOption

................................................................................................................................... 20210.7 ASCSave

................................................................................................................................... 20310.8 Binary

................................................................................................................................... 20510.9 Clipboard

................................................................................................................................... 20510.10 Comment

................................................................................................................................... 20610.11 Control

................................................................................................................................... 20710.12 CurveSetup

................................................................................................................................... 20810.13 Delete

................................................................................................................................... 20910.14 DSPLoad

................................................................................................................................... 21010.15 ELSE

................................................................................................................................... 21010.16 END

................................................................................................................................... 21110.17 ExitSequence

7


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 21210.18 Export

................................................................................................................................... 21210.19 FAMOS

................................................................................................................................... 21310.20 FASLoad

................................................................................................................................... 21410.21 FFTOption

................................................................................................................................... 21510.22 IF

................................................................................................................................... 21710.23 Import

................................................................................................................................... 21710.24 Layout

................................................................................................................................... 21810.25 LDIR

................................................................................................................................... 21910.26 Load

................................................................................................................................... 22110.27 MDIR

................................................................................................................................... 22110.28 Pause

................................................................................................................................... 22210.29 Rename

................................................................................................................................... 22310.30 Request

................................................................................................................................... 22410.31 Save

................................................................................................................................... 22510.32 SDIR

................................................................................................................................... 22610.33 Sequence

................................................................................................................................... 22710.34 Show

................................................................................................................................... 22810.35 TimeCopy

................................................................................................................................... 22810.36 TimeSet

................................................................................................................................... 22910.37 WFTLoad

................................................................................................................................... 23010.38 WHILE

................................................................................................................................... 23110.39 Xdelta

................................................................................................................................... 23210.40 Xunit

................................................................................................................................... 23310.41 Xoffset

................................................................................................................................... 23310.42 Yunit

Data Editor

................................................................................................................................... 23511.1 Introduction

................................................................................................................................... 23511.2 Start

................................................................................................................................... 23511.3 Interface Elements

................................................................................................................................... 23611.4 Context Menus

................................................................................................................................... 23611.5 Opening and Closing Table

................................................................................................................................... 23611.6 Activating Tables and Columns

................................................................................................................................... 23711.7 Showing a Variable

................................................................................................................................... 23911.8 Inserting and Deleting Columns

................................................................................................................................... 24011.9 Positioning the Input Cell, Scrolling and Marking

................................................................................................................................... 24011.10 Entering and Changing Individual Values

................................................................................................................................... 24111.11 Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete

................................................................................................................................... 24111.12 Insert Values

................................................................................................................................... 24211.13 Creating a New Variable

................................................................................................................................... 24211.14 Go To...

8


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 24211.15 Value Search

................................................................................................................................... 24311.16 Copying a Selection to Clipboard

................................................................................................................................... 24411.17 Show Curve

................................................................................................................................... 24411.18 Characteristic Values

................................................................................................................................... 24511.19 Height and Width of Cells, Font

................................................................................................................................... 24511.20 Configure Scale Column

................................................................................................................................... 24711.21 Configure Data Column

................................................................................................................................... 24711.22 Display Modes

................................................................................................................................... 25011.23 Scroll-Linking of Tables and Curve Window

................................................................................................................................... 25111.24 Printout

................................................................................................................................... 25311.25 Transfer to Report Generator

......................................................................................................................................................... 25411.25.1 Drag & Drop

......................................................................................................................................................... 25411.25.2 Copying and Pasting

DDE Interface

................................................................................................................................... 25612.1 Overview

................................................................................................................................... 25612.2 FAMOS as DDE Client

......................................................................................................................................................... 25712.2.1 DDE Client Dialog Box

......................................................................................................................................................... 25812.2.2 Send Control Commands

......................................................................................................................................................... 25812.2.3 Send Data (FAMOS)

......................................................................................................................................................... 25812.2.4 Send Data (Text)

......................................................................................................................................................... 25812.2.5 Send Text

......................................................................................................................................................... 25912.2.6 Request Data

......................................................................................................................................................... 25912.2.7 Request Text

................................................................................................................................... 25912.3 ''DDE Settings'' Dialog

................................................................................................................................... 26112.4 FAMOS as DDE Server

......................................................................................................................................................... 26112.4.1 Sending Instructions

......................................................................................................................................................... 26112.4.2 DDE Info Request

......................................................................................................................................................... 26212.4.3 Sending and Requesting Data Variables

......................................................................................................................................................... 26212.4.4 Sending and Requesting Text Variables

File Browser

................................................................................................................................... 26313.1 Overview

................................................................................................................................... 26413.2 The Folder List

................................................................................................................................... 26513.3 The File List

................................................................................................................................... 26613.4 Display options

................................................................................................................................... 26713.5 Loading Files

......................................................................................................................................................... 26713.5.1 Overview

......................................................................................................................................................... 26813.5.2 Specifying and Configuring a File Format

......................................................................................................................................................... 26813.5.3 Options for Loading with the File Browser

......................................................................................................................................................... 26913.5.4 Selecting / Deselecting Files for Loading

......................................................................................................................................................... 27013.5.5 Response to Change of Directory

................................................................................................................................... 27013.6 Deleting Files

................................................................................................................................... 27113.7 Additional options

Project Management

................................................................................................................................... 27314.1 Concept

9


Table Of Contents

................................................................................................................................... 27314.2 The Project Explorer

................................................................................................................................... 27414.3 Creating a new project

................................................................................................................................... 27414.4 Loading and running a project

................................................................................................................................... 27514.5 Special Characteristics of an Active Project

......................................................................................................................................................... 27514.5.1 Opening files relevant to a project by command

......................................................................................................................................................... 27614.5.2 Saving project-relevant files by command

......................................................................................................................................................... 27614.5.3 Manual opening of project-relevant files

......................................................................................................................................................... 27714.5.4 Manual saving of project-relevant files

................................................................................................................................... 27714.6 Project properties

................................................................................................................................... 27814.7 Save, Close, Delete

................................................................................................................................... 27814.8 Current/ Last session

User-Defined Dialogs

................................................................................................................................... 27915.1 Introduction and Terminology

......................................................................................................................................................... 27915.1.1 Design

......................................................................................................................................................... 28015.1.2 Programming

................................................................................................................................... 28015.2 The Dialog-Editor

......................................................................................................................................................... 28015.2.1 Calling the Dialog-Editor

......................................................................................................................................................... 28115.2.2 Main window

......................................................................................................................................................... 28215.2.3 Creating, opening and saving a dialog

......................................................................................................................................................... 28215.2.4 Changing a dialog’s size

......................................................................................................................................................... 28215.2.5 Adding dialog elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 28215.2.6 Selecting dialog elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 28315.2.7 Dialog element properties

......................................................................................................................................................... 28615.2.8 Moving dialog elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 28615.2.9 Aligning elements with each other

......................................................................................................................................................... 28715.2.10 Elements overlapping each other

......................................................................................................................................................... 28715.2.11 Changing the size of elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 28715.2.12 Deleting elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 28815.2.13 Clipboard

......................................................................................................................................................... 28815.2.14 Grid

................................................................................................................................... 28815.3 Programming

......................................................................................................................................................... 28815.3.1 Principles

......................................................................................................................................................... 28915.3.2 Editing event-sequences

......................................................................................................................................................... 29015.3.3 Testing and running dialogs

................................................................................................................................... 29115.4 Dialog Elements

......................................................................................................................................................... 29115.4.1 Button

......................................................................................................................................................... 29215.4.2 Text box

......................................................................................................................................................... 29315.4.3 Single-line edit box

......................................................................................................................................................... 29515.4.4 Multi-line edit box

......................................................................................................................................................... 29515.4.5 Check boxes

......................................................................................................................................................... 29615.4.6 Groupbox

......................................................................................................................................................... 29615.4.7 Image

......................................................................................................................................................... 29615.4.8 Slider control

......................................................................................................................................................... 29815.4.9 Datepicker

......................................................................................................................................................... 29915.4.10 Timepicker

......................................................................................................................................................... 29915.4.11 Listbox (single selection)

......................................................................................................................................................... 30015.4.12 Listbox (multiple selection)

......................................................................................................................................................... 30115.4.13 Droplist

......................................................................................................................................................... 30215.4.14 Combobox

......................................................................................................................................................... 30315.4.15 Treeview

......................................................................................................................................................... 30415.4.16 Tableview

10


Table Of Contents

......................................................................................................................................................... 30515.4.17 Curve Window

......................................................................................................................................................... 30715.4.18 Menu- and Toolbar

......................................................................................................................................................... 30915.4.19 Status bar

Data-Browser

................................................................................................................................... 31016.1 Basic concepts and terms

......................................................................................................................................................... 31116.1.1 Data selection

......................................................................................................................................................... 31116.1.2 Assigning the channels to measurements

......................................................................................................................................................... 31216.1.3 Selection/Numbering

................................................................................................................................... 31316.2 Elements of the main window

......................................................................................................................................................... 31416.2.1 Toolbox

......................................................................................................................................................... 31616.2.2 Files list

.................................................................................................................................................. 31716.2.2.1 Load a single file

.................................................................................................................................................. 31816.2.2.2 Load multiple files

.................................................................................................................................................. 31916.2.2.3 Load a whole folder

.................................................................................................................................................. 31916.2.2.4 File list options

......................................................................................................................................................... 32116.2.3 Measurements and Channels lists

.................................................................................................................................................. 32116.2.3.1 Numbering and Locking

.................................................................................................................................................. 32316.2.3.2 Example of numbering/locking

.................................................................................................................................................. 32416.2.3.3 Sorting

.................................................................................................................................................. 32416.2.3.4 Filtering

.................................................................................................................................................. 32516.2.3.5 Remove measurement

.................................................................................................................................................. 32516.2.3.6 Rename measurement

.................................................................................................................................................. 32516.2.3.7 Key combinations for making selections

.................................................................................................................................................. 32616.2.3.8 Drag&Drop from the Measurements/Channels lists

......................................................................................................................................................... 32816.2.4 Data Bindings (References)

................................................................................................................................... 32916.3 Toolbox

......................................................................................................................................................... 33016.3.1 Curve Window

......................................................................................................................................................... 33116.3.2 Standard

.................................................................................................................................................. 33116.3.2.1 Label

.................................................................................................................................................. 33316.3.2.2 Image

.................................................................................................................................................. 33416.3.2.3 Table

.................................................................................................................................................. 33516.3.2.4 Line

.................................................................................................................................................. 33616.3.2.5 Pushbutton

.................................................................................................................................................. 33816.3.2.6 Editbox (single line)

.................................................................................................................................................. 33916.3.2.7 Editbox (multi line)

................................................................................................................................... 34016.4 Databinding

......................................................................................................................................................... 34116.4.1 Placeholder

................................................................................................................................... 34216.5 QuickStart

......................................................................................................................................................... 34216.5.1 Starting the Data-Browser

......................................................................................................................................................... 34316.5.2 Loading data

......................................................................................................................................................... 34516.5.3 Dragging a channel onto the page

......................................................................................................................................................... 34716.5.4 Curve window

......................................................................................................................................................... 34816.5.5 Selecting other channels

......................................................................................................................................................... 34916.5.6 Adding a label/ binding to a variable

......................................................................................................................................................... 35016.5.7 Creating a sequence/ opening a panel

................................................................................................................................... 35116.6 Menues

......................................................................................................................................................... 35216.6.1 Menu: Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 35316.6.2 Menu: Edit

......................................................................................................................................................... 35416.6.3 Menu: Page

......................................................................................................................................................... 35516.6.4 Menu: View

......................................................................................................................................................... 35616.6.5 Menu: '?'

................................................................................................................................... 35616.7 Toolbar

11


Table Of Contents

Application Examples

................................................................................................................................... 35917.1 Low-Pass Filter, First Order

................................................................................................................................... 36417.2 Analysis Using the "Smo" Function

................................................................................................................................... 36917.3 Transfer Function Calculation

................................................................................................................................... 37117.4 Error Correction with a Fitted Line

................................................................................................................................... 37217.5 Correlation Coefficient

................................................................................................................................... 37417.6 AC Power Calculation

................................................................................................................................... 37617.7 Tolerance Test

................................................................................................................................... 37817.8 Histogram Test for ADC

................................................................................................................................... 38217.9 Convolution, Digital Filter

................................................................................................................................... 38417.10 Analysis Using the "Chrct" Function

................................................................................................................................... 38617.11 Digital Filter

................................................................................................................................... 39217.12 Report Generator

Appendix

................................................................................................................................... 39918.1 Concepts and Abbreviations

................................................................................................................................... 40018.2 Constants and Predefined Variables

................................................................................................................................... 40118.3 Units

................................................................................................................................... 40218.4 Maximum Values

Index 403

12


FAMOS Users Manual

FAMOS Users Manual

1.1 Customer Support - Hotline

In case of problems or questions, our customer service will be happy to help:

Germany:

imc Meßsysteme GmbH

Phone: ( +49 (30) 46 70 90 - 26

Fax: 4 +49 (30) 46 31 57 6

WWW: http://www.imc-berlin.de

e-mail: [email protected]

For our international partners see http://www.imc-berlin.de/en/and click to International Distributors

When requesting telephone consultation, please be prepared to state the serial numbers for your deviceand for your software's data carrier, and have this manual present. Thanks!

http://www.imc-berlin.de

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.imc-berlin.de/en/

13FAMOS Users Manual


1.2 Important Notes

Please be sure to read!

Dear system user,

1. Before using, please always verify that this manual version matches the software version which youhave obtained. If it does not, or if you discover any discrepancies, please contact our Customer Supportright away (see: imc Customer Support - Hotline).

2. Please also be advised that the software you have obtained, as well as the associated Users Manualare directed toward competent and instructed users and not uninitiated one-time users.

3. Please also be aware that continuously and rapidly advancing developments in the field of software cancause portions of the Users Manual to become outdated and make it necessary to obtain updates. Ifyou notice any discrepancies of this type, we request that you contact our Customer Support by thetelephone number above.

4. We also request you contact our hotline number if you find material in the manual which you believecould be misunderstood and thereby lead to personal injury.

Your partners at imc Meßsysteme GmbH.

1.2.1 Guidelines

1.2.1.1 Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity

We certify that our software products imcDevices, imc-CRONOS, LOOK, FAMOS1, SEARCH, FilterDesign, FRAME and Online-FRAME as well as our hardware products busDAQ, SPARTAN, imcCRONOS-PL(SL), imc C-Series, imc C1, imc F1 and F2 and imc-CRONOS meet the "C-EURO YEAR2000" requirements. There should be no problems in the interpretation of dates. All data recorded afterthe year 1980 (the year DOS was introduced) will be correctly interpreted until the year 2079.

This means in particular (i.a.):

· Processing of the date will at no time lead to system interruptions.

· Date-based processing operations return the same results regardless of the value for the datasupplied, whether prior to 2000 A.D. or after (up until 2079 A.D.), unless otherwise defined.

· The value for the date is defined either explicitly or by an unequivocal algorithm or by a derivablerule, in all interfaces and memory areas.

1Some FAMOS sequences return the year number in two digits (see Manual "FAMOS Function Reference"). Your application mayrequire testing for this circumstance.

1.2.1.2 Quality Management

imc Meßsysteme GmbH holds DIN-EN-ISO-9001certification since May 1995. imc's conformity to theworld-wide accepted standard DIN EN 9001 is attested to by the Certificate issued May, 1998 by theaccredited TÜV CERT certification body of TÜV Rheinland Anlagentechnik GmbH. The certificateregistration number of imc Meßsysteme GmbH is 0910085152.

14


FAMOS Users Manual

1.3 imc Guarantee and Software-License Agreement

imc Limited Warranty*

Subject to the general terms and conditions of imc Meßsysteme GmbH.

*The specifications stated in this documentation are subject to change without prior notice.

imc may hold rights to patents, trademarks, copyrights and other intellectual property, to which the statements in thisdocumentation refer. This does not imply that the purchaser of this imc product receives any of these rights,excepting such which are explicitly provided for in the written license agreement.

1.3.1 imc Software License Agreement

F Important Notes

Special contract stipulation

Before opening the enclosed disk package, please read carefully all of the following conditions. They

govern the use of the enclosed software products and documentation for operation of the imcDevices

system. By opening this sealed disk package, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this

agreement.

Below are the contractual conditions for your, the purchaser's ("the licensee"), use of imc products.Please read carefully the following text in its entirety.

Conditions of Agreement

1. Objects of Agreement

The objects of this agreement are the computer program saved on the data storage medium (CD) and itsdocumentation. In the following, the computer program is referred to as the "software".

imc makes no claim that the software runs error-free in all applications and with all platforms.

The imc software is thus only to be considered the object of this agreement when used in the mannerspecified by the documentation.

2. Grant of License

imc grants you, for the duration of this agreement, the single right to use the enclosed copy of the imcsoftware on a single computer (i.e., on a single CPU) and to be used only at one site. If this singlecomputer is a multi-user network, the user rights are valid for all users of this network. You may makecopies of the program solely for backup purposes, provided you reproduce and include the copyright noticeon any backup copy.

As licensee, you are allowed to physically transfer the software (saved on a CD) from one computer toanother computer, under the stipulation it only be used on one computer at any moment.

Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded into temporary memory (i.e. RAM) or installed intopermanent memory on a computer (i.e. hard disk, CD-ROM, etc.).

A more extended use is not permitted by this agreement.

3. Special Restrictions

The licensee is forbidden,

a) to distribute copies of the software and/or documentation to third parties;

b) to provide use of the program through a computer service business, network or other data transferchannel;

c) to translate, reverse-engineer or alter the software and its documentation;

d) to rent, lease, or grant sublicenses or other rights to the program;

without the prior written consent of imc.

15FAMOS Users Manual


4. Rights of Possession

The purchase of this product only entitles you, the licensee, to ownership of the physical data carrier wherethe software is saved. You do not acquire any rights to the software and documentation. imc reserves allpublishing, copying, processing and management rights for the software and documentation.

5. Copyright

imc owns this software program and its documentation. Both the program and documentation arecopyrighted with all rights reserved by imc.

For software not equipped with copy protection, you may make one single copy of the program solely forbackup purposes, provided you reproduce and include the imc copyright notice on the backup copy. Thecopyright incorporated in the software is not to be removed or altered in any way.

It is strictly forbidden to copy or reproduce the software and documentation: a) entirely or partially, b) in itsoriginal form, c) in an altered form, d) in combination with other software or, e) contained in other software.

This software product is licensed to you as a unit. You are not entitled to separate it into components withthe intent to use these simultaneously in different computers.

6. Transfer Of User Rights

The software license may only be transferred to a third party with the prior written consent of imc and onlyunder the conditions of this contract.

It is explicitly forbidden to rent, lease, or grant sublicenses or other rights to the program without the priorwritten consent of imc.

7. Duration Of License Agreement

The duration of the contract is indefinite. Your license to use the program and documentation willautomatically terminate if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement. If this license is terminated,you agree to destroy all copies of the program and documentation, or any altered versions thereof, in yourpossession.

8. Compensation In Case Of License Termination

imc draws attention to the fact that you will be held liable for any damage which may ensue followingtermination of this license agreement.

9. Software Updates And Improvements

imc reserves the right to update and improve the software as deemed appropriate.

10. Additional Provisions

Subject to the general terms and conditions of imc Meßsysteme GmbH.

16


FAMOS Users Manual

1.4 Product Improvement

Dear Reader!

We at imc hope that you find this manual helpful and easy to use. To help us in further improving thisdocumentation, we would appreciate hearing any comments or suggestions you may have.

In particular, feel free to give us feedback regarding the following:

· Terminology or concepts which are poorly explained

· Concepts which should be explained in more depth

· Grammar or spelling errors

· Printing errors

Please send your comments to the following address:

imc Meßsysteme GmbH

integrated measurement & control

Customer Service Department

Voltastrasse 5

D - 13355 Berlin

Telephone: +49 (30) 46 70 90 - 26

Fax: +49 (30) 46 3 15 76

e-mail: [email protected]

17Introduction


Introduction

2.1 Foreword

FAMOS (Fast Analysis and Monitoring of Signals) is a software program for analysis and evaluation ofmeasurement results. With an extensive range of functions conceived especially for the needs ofmeasurement and control applications, FAMOS eliminates much of your routine work in a comfortablefashion.

With FAMOS, you can process large waveforms quickly and efficiently and create computationalprocedures using standard mathematical notation. No specialized programming expertise is required!Furthermore, FAMOS offers powerful means for displaying your data in charts or tables and for printingthese in individually designed reports.

One of the most difficult problems when processing data is reading data with a special file format into ananalysis program. FAMOS is not only able to process data recorded using an imc system (e.g. MUSYCSor µ-MUSYCS, CRONOS) and existing in the FAMOS data file format, but can also read various binaryand ASCII data formats. To accomplish this, FAMOS provides the File Assistant, which can help youcreate an import filter so that any kind of data can be read in to FAMOS. On imc's home page you canfind a large number of ready-made import filters, e.g. for many other instrumentation suppliers' standardformats.

FAMOS is principally conceived for use in offline evaluation of data and cannot be used to controlmeasurement instruments

FAMOS can be expanded with add-on modules and function libraries. Expansions are available which, forexample, make it possible to design digital filters or to classify measurement data. Furthermore you canadd your own self-written function libraries to FAMOS.

Required Reading

The following chapters contain important information concerning the installation and operation FAMOS.We highly recommend going through this manual - even if you are familiar with Windows applications ingeneral. You'll probably discover many new features which you were previously not aware of!

Note

Some screen shots appearing in the text were adopted from older FAMOS versions.Therefore, the appearance of the user interface as depicted in this manual may be slightly different fromthe actual appearance of the user interface of your system.

2.2 Additional Help Resources

To supplement this manual, additional information and help are available in the form of online help files,which are included with the installation of FAMOS. Along with the context-sensitive FAMOS Online Help,which mainly presents excerpts of the manual, you can also find other help topics specially tailored tobeginners or to users who changed from other FAMOS versions. The imc Start menu contains the calls tothe display of these help topics. Here you will additionally find the complete manuals in PDF format in thesubmenu "Manuals".

Information on the hardlock

Use this resource to find help if you encounter problems with the installation or recognition of the FAMOShardlock (dongle). If these notes don't solve the problem, please contact the imc Hotline.

FAMOS Update-Info

This section is particularly interesting for users who are already familiar with previous FAMOS versions.Here you can find an overview of the technical innovations implemented in this version as well as noteswhich simplify learning the difference.

FAMOS ReadMe

This presents info on changes and extensions in FAMOS which were implemented after this manual wentto print.

18


Introduction

2.3 System Requirements

Supported operating systems:

· Windows2000 SP4 with Update Rollup 1, Windows XP SP2, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista

Addtional runtime environment:

· Microsoft .NET 2.0 SP1 Runtime Environment (included in the delivery)

The following minimum system configuration is required:

· PC with Pentium microprocessor or higher

· 256 MB RAM (or minimum requirement of the operating system respectively)

· Hard disk with at least 200 MB available disk space

· CD-ROM drive

· Modern graphics card and appropriate color monitor with usable screen resolution of at least 800 x600 pixels and High-Color (16-bit color resolution) color output

· Mouse or trackball

The following items are not required, but can greatly improve the performance of FAMOS:

· Extended memory >= 1 GB

· True Color (32-bit color resolution), screen resolution 1024*768 or better

· Color printer

· Large, fast hard disk with more than 2GB available disk space.

2.4 Installation

Windows must be correctly installed before installing FAMOS.

To install FAMOS, start the program "setup.exe" from the root directory of the installation CD.

Alternatively you can select the "Software" icon and subsequently the command "Install".

Your first step in installing the software will be to specify the base directory onto which all it's files will becopied.

The base directory must be on the PC's local hard drive. FAMOS cannot be installed on a network drive.

This base directory will be structured with various subdirectories where, for example, sample files will bedeposited. The subdirectory \BIN, for instance, contains all executable files and program libraries; thesubdirectory "\SEQ" sample sequences (macros); the subdirectory "\DAT" has measurement data filescontaining information in various data formats.

At installation, you must also supply a name for the program group; the installation program will thensupplement the Windows Start menu with a corresponding entry. If, for instance, you specify "imc" as yourgroup name, you will be able to call the program from the submenu "Start/ Programs/ imc".

19Introduction


2.5 Start

Start FAMOS either via the corresponding entry in the Windows Start menu, or by clicking on the shortcuton the Windows-Desktop which was created during the installation, or directly by calling the file "FAMOS.exe" from the Windows Explorer.

FAMOS comes with a dongle (hardlock) for copy protection, which, depending on the model, should beconnected to any USB or parallel interface. Your PC should not have any problems recognizing thedongle.

If an error message appears when starting FAMOS stating that the dongle is not present, read the helpfile "Hints about the dongle", which can be found in the program group placed in the start menu by theinstallation process, to learn about possible error sources. If you have further inquiries, please contact theimc Hotline.

We now recommend working through the Tutorial chapter.

2.6 Start with Parameters

2.6.1 Overview

It is possible to set parameters which initiate certain processes upon starting FAMOS, or which influencethe general functioning of the application.

The following options are defined:

/C Set registry key for configuration file

/L Open measurement data file

/D Open and display measurement data file

/F Establish file format for /L and /D

/S Run FAMOS sequence or dialog

/E Execute FAMOS operation

/P Load and start FAMOS project

/B Open Data Browser and load panel

/X In conjunction with /S or /P: Close FAMOS after running

You can select the above options either when calling FAMOS by typing command text (Windows inputprompt or "Start/ Run"), or, more easily, by creating a program shortcut.

To make a new FAMOS shortcut having starting parameters, first create a shortcut to the file "FAMOS.exe". For information on creating program shortcuts, please refer to your documentation for Windows.Once the shortcut exists, a right-click on its icon calls its context menu, in which you must select the item"Properties". In the dialog which then appears, enter the desired parameter in the entry box "Target" whichis on the index card "Shortcut".

Observe the following rules on command line syntax:

· Between the option appendage and the parameter text (e.g., file name), there must be at leastone space.

· If the parameter text contains spaces, it must be written inside quotation marks.

· If the parameter text itself contains quotation marks, they must be preceded by a '\' character.

20


Introduction

Example

The settings shown above instruct FAMOS to look for the configuration settings with the key "Peter". Thesequence "Eval" is to be run when FAMOS is started.

Hint:

If FAMOS has already been started, the open FAMOS window is made active and the command line isimplemented (except in the case of /C).

2.6.2 Registry-Key for Configurations Data

Syntax

/C keyname

Explanation

The configuration settings for FAMOS are saved to the Windows system registry when the application isclosed. At the next start, the registry is referred to and the settings indicated there are implemented.

The settings are saved separately for each user. Therefore, if you wish to work with many differentconfigurations, you can simply log in to Windows under different names.

Another possibility would be to specify an additional key under which configuration data are to bedeposited in the registry.

As the default, all configuration data are stored under the keys

HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software imc Measurement and Control Default

With the command line option switch "/C", followed by a name, you can replace the valid subkey "Default"with a subkey having the name you entered. In this way, it's possible to create multiple shortcuts whicheach call FAMOS with a different starting configuration.

21Introduction


Example

c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /C PetersConfigurations

2.6.3 Opening a measurement value file

Syntax

/L FileName /D FileName /F FileFormat

Explanation

These option appendages cause measurement data files to be opened. The switch /L opens the file, while/D opens the file and displays its contents in a curve window.

As the default, FAMOS file format is used at a session's start. The switch /F lets you specify a differentformat:

/F BIN Binary format

/F ASC ASCII-format

/F NIC Nicolet WFT-format

/F DIG Digiskop-format

/F FormatName User-defined import filter

If you enter a file name as the parameter text without supplying a complete path, the default directorystated under FAMOS is used.

If the file name contains spaces, it must be written inside quotation marks.

With the standard formats

The valid file format options, such as options for reading binary and ASCII files, remain as they are set forFAMOS.

With user-defined format, the syntax for the /F-parameters is identical with the corresponding entry for thefunction FileOpenFAS:

If importing is accomplished by means of an import filter created using the File Assistant, the import filter'sname (*.fas) is specified as the /F-parameter:

/F ImportFilter.fas

On the other hand, if importing is accomplished by means of an expansion library, The format is specifiedas follows:

/F "#DLLName|FilterName|Parameter"

All specifications needed for this are available from the expansion library's maker; while <FilterName> and<Parameter> can often be omitted. Further information on the topic is provided with the description of thefunction FileOpenFAS.

Example

c:\imc\bin\famos /D slope.datc:\imc\bin\famos /L c:\imc\ascii\tab.asc /F ASCc:\imc\bin\famos /L c:\lecroy\c1.001 /F lecroy.fasc:\imc\bin\famos /D "c:\imc\dat\Datei 12.5.96.dat"c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /D "c:\1.mat" /F "#MatLab_Imp.DLL"

22


Introduction

2.6.4 Running a Sequence/ Dialog

Syntax

/S SequenceFile Parameter1 Parameter2 .. [/X]

Specifying parameters is optional.

/S DialogDatei [/X]

Explanation

This option switch instructs FAMOS to open and execute the specified sequence- or dialog file file uponstarting. If the sequence needs to know certain parameters to run, these must be entered after the filename.

Unless a full directory path is entered, FAMOS looks for the file in the default sequence directory.

With dialog files, it's absolutely necessary to supply the filename extension (.dlg).

If you enter parameters, or if the filename contains spaces, the entire call must be written inside quotationmarks. If the text of the call itself contains quotation marks, these must be preceded by the '\' character.

You can also enter the switch /X. By this means, FAMOS is closed as soon as the dialog or sequence hasbeen run. The parameter is ignored if FAMOS was already open before.

Example

c:\imc\bin\famos /S c:\imc\seq\evaluate.seqc:\imc\bin\famos /S "evaluate slope.dat" \Xc:\imc\bin\famos /S "evaluate2 \"Joe Blow\""c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /S "c:\My Dialogs\Dialog1.dlg" \X

2.6.5 Executing Operations

Syntax

/E OperationsText

Explanation

It is also possible to pass a command to FAMOS, which it must execute when it starts, as a parameter.As the parameter text, you can enter any command which can be entered in the FAMOS Input Box.

This option appendage is included in the application out of considerations of compatibility; most purposescan be achieved more conveniently by writing the commands involved in a sequence file and then usingthe option appendage "/S".

If the operations' text contains spaces, the text must be written inside quotation marks; and if the text itselfcontains quotation marks, they must be preceded by a '\' character.

Example

c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /C Conf1 /E "SEQU eval.seq"c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /E erg=Ramp (0,1,100)c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /E "Name =\"Herbert\""

2.6.6 Running a project

Syntax

/P ProjectFolder [/X]

Explanation

With this switch, FAMOS is instructed to load and run the specified project upon starting.

You can also enter the switch /X. By this means, FAMOS is closed as soon as the dialog or sequence hasbeen run. The parameter is ignored if FAMOS was already open before.

Example:

c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /P "c:\projects\evaluation" /X

23Introduction


2.6.7 Starting Data Browser

Syntax

/B PanelDateiName

Explanation

With this switch, FAMOS is instructed to start the Data-Browser and load the specified panel file.

If the filename contains spaces, the entire call must be written inside quotation marks. If the text of the callitself contains quotation marks, these must be preceded by the '\' character.

Example

c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /B "C:\imc\Seq\Evaluation.panel"

24


User Interface

User Interface

3.1 Introduction

When you start FAMOS, the main window appears as it was at the end of the last session. To restore thedefault configuration, click "Window" in the menu bar [1] and select "Load configuration/ Default". Thenthe main window will assume the following appearance.

FAMOS: application window

The main toolbar [2] is found under the menu bar and contains soft keys (screen buttons) for fast accessto the most important functions. Below the menu bar and toolbar you have the "work space" composed offive boxes.

Above left is a box with the title "Variables". This box contains the variables list [3]. Any variablespresently loaded in FAMOS are registered in this list.

Below the variables list is the function list [4], displaying the available functions and commands. Theseare arranged in major groups, which always include "Standard" (offering the core FAMOS functions) and"Favorites" (a list which the user can compile of frequently used functions and formulas). By clicking on agroup's index, it is possible to move from group to group.

Beside the functions list you have the output box [6]. Here, output for the user's attention, such as helptexts, warnings and calculation results, is displayed.

Above this is the editor box [7]. Formulas are entered here in standard mathematical notation andcalculation is started by pressing the button labeled Execute [10]. In the same box, it is also possible toprogram and execute sequences (macros). Due to the large number of commands which apply to theeditor box, it has its own toolbar [8].

At the upper right is the Plug-in box [9]. This is where expansion modules having their own userinterfaces are displayed. The File Browser plug-in is always present for fast access to the measurementfiles. By default, this box is minimized, meaning that only its icon is visible.

Status messages and short explanatory notes about the menu options appear in the status line [5] underthe output box.

25User Interface


The general position of these boxes is set permanently, but how large each one is or whether it is visiblecan be adjusted as desired. You can grab with the mouse the dividing lines between boxes and shiftthem, and you can use the buttons in the boxes' respective title bars [9] to minimize or maximize them.Any boxes not needed at the moment can be hidden entirely.

Reference

Section 'Customizing the user interface'

3.2 Variables List

3.2.1 Overview

All variables currently being used in FAMOS are shown in this list. The names of the variables (and forsingle values, their actual values) are displayed next to a symbol representing the variable type.

Variable list

For more information on FAMOS variables, for instance a description of the individual data types, refer tothe Chapter "Variables".

The Variables list represents the centerpiece of FAMOS' operating design. Most of the basic FAMOSfunctions either change the contents of the Variables list (e.g., loading of measurement files or executionof math functions) or they take effect upon the current selection in the Variables list (e.g. the display ofwaveforms in the curve window or saving of waveforms).

3.2.2 Operation

Selection

Many menu items, especially in the "Variables" menu, take effect on the variables currently selected inthe list. To select a variable, simply click on its entry with the mouse. If the variables list currently has theinput focus, entering a letter selects the next variable in the list starting with that letter.

Multi-selection

To select a group of entries which are not adjacent to each other in the list, click on each desired entrywhile holding down the CTRL-button. To select a group of adjacent entries, there are the followingoptions:

· Select the first item in the group of desired entries and next select the last item while holdingdown the SHIFT-key

· Use the arrow keys while holding down the SHIFT-key

· Click on an entry not selected and then brush the mouse cursor over the region containing thedesired entries while holding down the mouse button

Copying a name to the editor box

26


User Interface

If you double-click on a variable, its name is copied into the editor box. This fact can be used to savetime spent in writing formulas.

Drag & Drop

If you click on a selected entry and move the mouse while holding down its button, this activates theDrag&Drop-mode (denoted by a change in the mouse cursor's appearance). It is then possible to dragthe variables selected at the moment to different positions. The appearance of the mouse pointer isconstantly updated as is moves over the screen, reflecting whether its current position is a legitimate siteto drop the variable. You can drop a variable by releasing the mouse button while the pointer is at one ofthe following positions:

· in the editor box ; this inserts the variable into the formula line at the mouse position.

· on a function name in the function box; this opens a Formula Assistant dialog pertaining to theselected function and when applicable, designates the variable as the first parameter of thefunction.

· in a curve window: this causes the curves for the dropped variables -if applicable- to bedisplayed along with any curves already present; see section 5-7 "Displaying variables".

· in the Waveform Editor: the variable(s) are displayed in the selected column(s) in the WaveformEditor.

· in the Report Generator: the variables are transferred into the current document. Either a newcurve-, textual or tabular item is created or an existing report-item is updated to reflect the newvariable's content.

Context menu

Clicking on the variable list with the right mouse button opens a context menu offering commands whichoperate on the current variable selection, as well as providing options for registering variables in theVariables list:

Sort Alphabetically: variable names are displayed in alphabetical order. Otherwise, the variables areindicated in the order in which they were loaded into FAMOS.

If the option Show Channels is set, data objects (variables) contained in data groups are independentlyregistered in the list. Double-clicking on the [+]- symbol (variable "Group 2" in illustration) "opens" and"closes" data groups individually.

Show Components: the individual components of two-component data objects (complex and XY-waveforms) are indicated independently.

As a default, the contents of text variables and single values are also displayed directly in the variablelist. This can suppressed via the "Options/ Display" dialog.

The remaining commands from the context menu are also available from the sub-menu "Variables" of themain menu.

27User Interface


3.2.3 Options

The FAMOS Options menu (under "Extra/ Options") has a "Variable list" dialog containing settings for thedisplay and operation of the variables list. Some of these controls are also available in the context menu.

Dialog : Options/ Variable list

Display variables alphabetically

If this option is active, the variables are ordered alphabetically by their names. Otherwise, the list isordered according to the times at which the variables were created in FAMOS.

Display channels in groups

If this option is activated, entries for the data objects which belong to data groups are displayed in the list.By clicking in the [+]-symbol next to a group's entry, it is possible to collapse or expand the data group.

Display components

If this option is activated, then the individual components of 2-component data types (complex and XY-data) are also displayed.

Single values: display contents

If this option is activated, the values of single value variables are displayed alongside their names.

Text variables: display contents

If this option is activated, the content of text variables are displayed alongside their names.

Show Comment

If you choose this option, the comment will be displayed in the variable list right to the variable name, asseen in this example:

28


User Interface

Comment in the variable list("Sine wave with interfering noise")

About comments, see also chapter Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms).

[DEL]-key deletes selected variables

If this option is activated, the DEL-key on the keyboard can be used directly to delete variables from thelist (the same function as the menu item "Variable/ Delete") as long as the Variable list has the inputfocus.

3.3 The Functions List

3.3.1 Overview

The Functions list presents all available functions and commands. These are divided into a number ofmain groups.

Standard

This group contains all the internal FAMOS-functions and commands. These approx. 260 functions aredivided among about 25 sub-groups. A short description if the functions in each group can be found at theend of each of the chapters 'Functions' and 'Sequences'.

Reference

Chapter 'Functions', Chapter 'Sequences'

Kit

This group contains all functions provided by imc extension libraries (so-called "Kits"). These Kits must beexplicitly registered in FAMOS in order to be ready for uses ("Extra/ Options/ Extensions/ Register Kits").If no Kit is registered, this group is not displayed.

Reference

Chapter 'Functions', Section 'imc-Kit Interface'

DLL

Along with imc-Kits, general WINDOWS-libraries (so-called DLLs) can be integrated into FAMOS. TheDLL-functions registered in FAMOS ("Extra/ Options/ Extensions | Register DLL functions") are then listed

29User Interface


in this group. If no DLL-function is registered this group is not displayed.

Reference

Chapter 'Functions', Section 'Standard DLL Interface'

Favorites

The Favorites list can be compiled by the user himself. Here, functions and formulas used often can beplaced here for ease of access. The Favorites can be organized in hierarchical groups as desired.

Reference

Section 'Administering Favorites'

Symbols

The list entries are represented by special symbols indicating their respective types:

Function (internal or from Kit or DLL)

Sequence-command

Constants

Group (collapsed)

Group (expanded)

Kit or DLL

Favorites-entry (formula or command)

Executable Favorites-entry

Favorites-entry (project)

3.3.2 Operation

Selecting a group

A different main group can be accessed by simply clicking on the corresponding card rider. If theFunctions window is too narrow to display all the riders, arrow buttons are displayed at the right edge ofthe row of riders. Clicking on these arrow buttons shifts the next card in the corresponding direction intoview.

The combination of keys "CTRL" + "TAB" switches forward to the next group present; the combination ofkeys "SHIFT"+ "CTRL"+ "TAB" switches backwards to the previous group.

Context menu

Right-clicking the mouse once over the functions list calls the context menu. This contains commandsand options affecting the functions list.

What commands are available depends on which main group is currently selected; for instance, in theFavorites-list there are additional commands for creating and changing entries.

30


User Interface

Configuring the display

The functions list can either be organized as a hierarchical tree diagram in which the entries appear asmembers of groups or as a continuous alphabetical list.

The switch between these two display modes is made via context menu using the commands "Treedisplay" and "List ordered by...".

To expand or collapse a group in tree display, click on the [+] or [-] -symbol in front of the group name ordouble-click on the group name.

The menu item "Expand tree" in the context menu expands all groups; whereas "Collapse tree" closes allgroups.

Copy to input window

Double-clicking on a function entry copies the function name with argument brackets into the activeEditor window.

If the current selection in the functions list is a function's entry (and not a group's name), you can use thecommand "Copy to input window" as an alternative. If the function list currently has the input focus, justpressing the <ENTER> key has the same effect.

You can also use Drag&Drop to take an entry from the function list to the desired position in the editor(or: input) box. Here, too, a parameter mask is copied to the editor box, if appropriate.

Function Assistant

To open the Function Assistant, hold the <Shift> key while clicking on the desired function. A dialogappears in which you can specify various parameters of the desired function. Alternatively, you can usethe combination of keys <SHIFT> + <F1> or the context menu.

Reference

Chapter: Functions, Section: 'Function Assistant'

Help text

When the selection in the Function list is changed, the help text for the current selection, if available, isautomatically posted in the output box. Alternatively, the combination of keys CTRL+F1 or the contextmenu command "Show help" can be used to have the help text for the current function displayed.

Notes on the Favorites list

The menu item 'Add to favorites' adopts the current selection in the Favorites list. If the Favorites list itselfis active, the context menu contains additional items for creating, deleting and editing favorites. How toadminister the favorites is described in the chapter 'Administering Favorites'.

Transferring entries from the Favorites to the editor box, as well as calling the help texts and the Assistant(if available) are accomplished in the manner already described.

As a special feature, operation of the Favorites list supports the combination of keys CTRL + ENTER (orCTRL + double-click) as the call for the Favorites-Properties dialog, and the ability to edit the order andgrouping of the favorites through the use of Drag&Drop.

31User Interface


Reference

Section 'Administering Favorites'

3.4 Editor Box

3.4.1 Overview

The editor box is for entering and executing formulas and also for administering, entering, testing andexecuting complete sequences. Sequences are macros consisting of a sequence of individualcommands an/or formulas. In this section, we will concentrate on the basic operation of the editor forentering text and executing individual formulas.

Reference

See the chapter 'Sequences' for a detailed description of how to administer (meaning: load and save)sequences. Sequences can also be components of user-defined dialogs (so-called 'event-sequences').For details, see the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

Editor box

The standard interface designated "Input" is always present. It is primarily used for entering formulas andexecuting them by command. The content of this interface is automatically saved upon exiting FAMOSand restored at the start of the next session.

If sequences are also loaded to FAMOS, the title bar displays a row of riders bearing the names of thesequences. To switch to the display of another sequence, click on the corresponding rider or use thecombination of keys CTRL+TAB or SHIFT + CTRL + TAB, to move forwards or backwards, respectively,between the displays.

If the window is too narrow to display all the riders, arrow buttons are displayed at the right edge of therow of riders. Clicking on these arrow buttons shifts the next card in the corresponding direction into view.

Right-clicking the mouse on the title bar opens a context menu primarily containing commands foradministering (Load/ Save/ Close) and executing sequences. The commands are also available from theFAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence".

32


User Interface

Reference

See the chapter 'Sequences' for a detailed description of these commands.

Below the title bar is the toolbar. This contains often-used commands affecting the editor box. To learnthe function of a certain symbol, move the mouse cursor over the symbol and wait a short time to see asmall window containing a short description (called a "tool-tip") appear. All of the commands offered herecan also be accessed from the FAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence", or they can be called viaone of the two context menus.

Below the toolbar is the actual input box. Right-clicking the mouse over the input box opens a contextmenu containing commands mainly concerning text editing:

In the editor box, you can enter formulas and commands completely "by hand", or, as already described,they can be transferred from the variable list and function list at a click of the mouse, or compiled usingDrag&Drop.

3.4.2 Editing Text

The editor box supports the usual Windows shortcut keys and editing commands, such as the use of theClipboard (Copy/ Past) and multi-step Undo/ Redo.

Additionally, the editor has special functions intended to make entering formulas and sequences easier.These include, for instance, configurable color-coded syntax (where particular syntax elements arevisually distinguished by a special color), parameter-tips (while typing in a function, a small windowappears indicating what parameters are expected), automatic formatting according to the processstructure, automatic indenting of new lines as well as bookmarks and breakpoints for use in testingsequences.

33User Interface


Function and variable names can also be directly adopted from the corresponding list (by double-clicking on the corresponding list entry or by using Drag&Drop).

Commands for editing text are presented in the next chapter.

3.4.3 Commands for Editing Text

The commands described below are available via the FAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence"and/or the context menu of the editor box.

Undo

This reverses the effect of the last command executed.

Redo

Restores the state prior to the last "Undo" command executed.

Cut

Place the mouse cursor at the beginning of the text you wish to cut out and drag the cursor while holdingdown the mouse button over the region to be cut out. Alternatively, you can mark the text to cut out usingthe cursor buttons while holding down the SHIFT key. The text so highlighted is removed to the Clipboard.

Copy

Place the mouse cursor at the beginning of the text you wish to copy and drag the cursor while holdingdown the mouse button over the region to be copied. Alternatively, you can mark the text to copy usingthe cursor buttons while holding down the SHIFT key. The text so highlighted remains in place and a copyof it is written to the Clipboard.

Paste

Place the mouse cursor at the position in the text box at which you wish to insert it. The text stored in theClipboard is inserted by selecting the menu item "Paste".

Select all

The entire contents of the editor box are selected, for example, for the purpose of subsequently deletingor copying the whole text.

Breakpoint on/off

A breakpoint is inserted in the line containing the cursor, or an existing breakpoint is removed. The use ofbreakpoints to test sequences is described in detail in the chapter "Sequences".

Find

Select this menu item to locate a particular text in a sequence. Enter the text to be found in the "Searchfor:" dialog box and activate the options buttons according to your requirements. Then click on the button"Continue search".

Find next

Repeats the search for text set in the last call of the menu item "Find...".

Replace

Enter the text to be replaced into the text box "Search for:" and enter the replacement text in the text box"Replace with:" and activate the desired option buttons. Click on the "Continue" button and then on"Replace", to replace the located text, or again on "Continue" to find the next position of the text. Click on"Replace all" to replace all instances of the same text.

Format automatically

34


User Interface

Performs automatic formatting of the sequence displayed, meaning that the indentations of the lines areset automatically. The indentation depends on the logic of the sequence's procedural structure, forinstance, a condition (IF- or WHILE- command) commences a block of commands concluded by an END-command.

Insert boilerplate

Inserts a pre-defined chunk of text at the current cursor position. The available boilerplate texts aredefined in the text file "Famosbps.txt" in the FAMOS/BIN-folder (e.g. "c:\imc\bin\famosbps.txt") and can beedited by the user using a word processor (such as "Notepad"). See also the notes in the file header.

Insert / Overwrite-mode

Hitting the INS-key toggles between insert and overwrite mode. The current mode is indicated in theFAMOS status bar.

3.4.4 Active line, executing formulas

Every command or formula must be placed on a separate line; spaces are allowed.

Only one line is defined as "active". The "active line" is the command line to be carried out next. This lineis denoted by colored shading, as well as by an arrow button appearing at its left. Clicking on this buttoncauses the command line it points to to be carried out; thus for further reference we will call this button the "Execute"-button.

To set the active line, the following methods are available:

· Double-clicking on the desired lie

· Editor context menu - "Set active line"

· Set cursor on desired line and press ALT + ENTER

To execute the active line, the following methods are available:

· Click on the "Execute"-button

· Title bar context menu - "Run line"

· Title bar context menu - "Single step" or F9: the command line is executed and the next line isactivated

Setting and executing in one step:

· Combination of keys CTRL+ENTER (The line with the cursor becomes the new active line)

When sequences are run and in single-step mode, the position of the active line is changed automatically.

3.4.5 Help and Assistant

If you place the cursor on a function name and press the combination of keys CTRL + F1, a short helpfor this function is displayed.

On the other hand, if you use the combination of keys SHIFT + F1, the Function-Assistant is called. Adialog appears which is helpful for setting the function's parameters. Once they are given, the parametersare immediately adopted in the dialog's corresponding input boxes.

The help and Assistant are also both available via the context menu.

When typing in the parameters for a function or while moving the cursor over a function call in thecommand text, a small window appears providing brief information on the parameters expected (a so-called parameter-tip). The parameter at the cursor's position is written in boldface.

35User Interface


3.4.6 Bookmarks

When entering and testing long sequences, it's sometimes useful to be able to highlight certain commandlines, so that it's possible to jump back to them at will. Such a highlight is called a bookmark, and thenecessary commands are available in the "Advanced" submenu in the editor box context menu. Up to 10bookmarks can be defined, and numbered (0..9) for identification purposes. A bookmark is indicated by acorresponding symbol to the left of a command line:

Editor box with 2 bookmarks set

To set a bookmark, position the cursor at the desired line use the combination of keys CTRL + number(number = 0...9). To delete the bookmark, press the CTRL key together with the desired bookmark'snumber again.

To jump to a particular bookmark, use the combination of keys ALT + (bookmark ID number).

To find the next bookmark, use the combination of keys CTRL + F2 (to go forwards) or SHIFT + F2(backwards).

The combination of keys CTRL+SHIFT+F2 deletes all defined bookmarks.

All of these commands are also accessible via the context menu.

Optionally, the bookmark positions can be saved along with the actual sequence and thus be restoredupon re-opening of the sequence; see the next topic for details.

36


User Interface

3.4.7 Options: Editor

The menu item "Extra / Options / Editor" calls a dialog offering a variety of pre-settings for the editor box:

Dialog: Options / Editor

Change font

With this button, the standard Windows dialog for setting the font is called.

Generally, selecting a proportional font is not recommended, since the different widths of individualcharacters makes it difficult to achieve a uniform indent. Instead, select a font with a fixed character width,such as "Fixedsys" or "Courier".

Tabulator width

Sets the tabulator width for text readout. The specification in the input box pertains to the average width ofa character in the selected font.

Indent automatically

If this option is activated, the indentation of the previous line is used when a new line is created (in otherwords, after pressing the ENTER key).

Parameter-Tip

These options affect the display of the parameter tip for functions described in the last section. If theoption "Display automatically" is active, the tip window automatically appears whenever the cursor ispositioned above a function name or over the corresponding parameter list. The controls "display after"and "display duration" regulate the delay time and the maximum duration of the display; expressed inseconds.

Backup copy when saving

If this option is active, then whenever a sequence is saved under an already existing name, a backupcopy of the sequence is created and has the extension ".seq.bak".

37User Interface


Save breakpoints and bookmarks

If this option is active, the positions of any breakpoints and bookmarks in a sequence are saved alongwith the sequence and are available again the next time the sequence is loaded to the system.

3.4.8 Options: Colors

Selecting the menu item "Extra / Options / Colors" accesses a dialog which lets you set the colors used ininput and output windows:

Dialog: Options / Colors

By default, syntax elements such as function names, strings, comments etc. are color-coded. This isintended as an aid for understanding the structure of the text.

If you deactivate the option "Color-code syntax elements", the color coding is completely disabled.

The button "Return to default!" restores the default settings. Otherwise it is possible to set any desiredcolor for each separate syntax element type.

3.4.9 Printing in the editor box

The contents of the editor box (generally the source code text of a sequence) can be printed out.

38


User Interface

3.4.9.1 Page setup

The menu item "Sequence / Page setup" calls a dialog, in which you can make settings affecting theprintout of sequences (or generally, the printout of editor box contents). You can specify that a header andfooter should be made, as well as specify the orientation and margins.

Dialog: Page setup

Header / Footer

Enter the desired text for the header and footer. The header and footer are each separated from theactual text body by a horizontal line. Both header and footer are left-justified.

Along with permanent text, placeholders can also be set, which are filled during printout. The followingplaceholders are defined:

&f Sequence filename (complete path)

&p Current page number

&t Current system time

&d Current system date

&tf File modified time

&df File modified date

Orientation

Select either landscape or portrait format.

Margins

Enter here the desired margin size; the given margins are kept free when the file is printed out.

The effect of the controls in this dialog can be checked before printout using the menu item "Printpreview".

39User Interface


3.4.9.2 Print preview

The menu item "Sequence / Print preview" provides a preview of a finished printout. The printout'sappearance is mainly influenced by the valid paper format, the font which is set and the settings for themargins, orientation, as well as the header and footer.

Editor box: Page preview

Here you can view the individual pages of the printout one by one and check the formatting. If you aresatisfied with the results, you can start the printout directly.

Use the button "Close" in the window's title bar to return to the normal interface.

3.4.9.3 Print

Menu item "Sequence / Print..." starts printout of the active editor box contents.

First, however, a dialog appears offering the opportunity to set the printer to use, the portion of thedocument to print and the number of copies desired.

40


User Interface

Editor box: Print...

The button "Properties" accesses an additional dialog where more options for the printer can be set. Thisdialog is provided by the printer manufacturer and its appearance and functionality thus depends on theparticular printer used.

By pressing the button "OK", the dialog is closed and printout begins.

3.5 Output Box

Messages to the user are displayed in the output box. Functions post error messages, warnings andsometimes their computational results to this field.

Output box with error message

In addition, brief descriptions for FAMOS functions and commands can be displayed here.

The brief help text for a function can be accessed when the function's name in the function list ishighlighted, or if the cursor is positioned in a function name in the editor box, by pressing the combinationof keys CTRL + F1, or via the context menu.

Output box with function help

41User Interface


3.6 The Plug-in box

The Plug-in box displays the separate user interfaces of expansion modules which come with their ownuser interface. The File Browser Plug-in is always available for quick access to measurement files. Bydefault, this box is minimized, meaning that only its title bar (at the upper right in the FAMOS-mainwindow) is visible.

Other available Plug-ins include the ODS-Browser Plug-in (access to ASAM-ODS data sources) and theVideo Player Plug-in (playback of video files with synchronized coupling to the curve windows).

Plug-in box with File Browser

If more plug-ins are installed, corresponding index card riders appear in the rider bar above the box.

Switching between plug-ins is accomplished by clicking on the corresponding rider. If the box is toonarrow to display all riders present, arrow buttons appear at the right edge of the rider bar. Clicking onthese buttons allows you to access riders which are not currently in view.

The combination of keys "CTRL" + "TAB" proceeds to the next available plug-in; the combination of keys"SHIFT"+ "CTRL"+ "TAB" proceeds to the last one.

Below the rider bar, the user interface for the respective plug-in is displayed.

Reference

Operation of the File Browser is described in detail in the chapter 'File Browser'.

3.7 File Menu

The following is a short description of the FAMOS main menu commands. Most of the menu items aredescribed in detail in pertinent chapters of this manual.

General FAMOS functions and file management functions are found in the "File" menu.

Load...

One or several waveforms are loaded from files and the data sets contained in the files are indicated inthe Variable List.

Reference

42


User Interface

Chapter 'File Management', 'Loading Files'

Save Individually

Variables selected in the Variable List are each saved in a file.

Reference

Chapter 'File Management', 'Saving Files'

Save Together...

Variables selected in the list are stored together in one file.

Reference

Chapter 'File Management', 'Saving Files'

Last files

A submenu with a list of the last files to have been opened. Selecting an entry leads to the correspondingfile being re-opened.

Restart

The variable list is emptied, i.e. all variables are deleted.. All open sequences are closed. Directories forloading and storing files are reset to the Default set-up. This function is equivalent to ending and thensubsequently restarting FAMOS.

End

This closes FAMOS. Alternatively, the system menu or the combination of keys ALT + F4 may be used toclose FAMOS. If changed variables or sequences have not yet been saved, a cautionary message willappear.

3.8 Variable Menu

This menu contains various options for processing variables. Some of these commands are alsoaccessible from the context menu of the Variable list.

Show

Variables selected in the variables list are each graphically displayed in a curve window.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing Variables'

Show Together

43User Interface


Variables selected in the variables list are graphically displayed in one curve window.

Reference


Properties..

A dialog box appears as a stack of several file cards, on which information about variables selected in thevariables list is displayed.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics'

Delete

Variables selected in the variable list are deleted.

Group

Variables selected in the variable list are assembled into one data group.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Group/ Ungroup Variables (Data Groups)'

Ungroup

Data groups selected in the variable list are dissolved and the channels formerly contained in the groupsreappear in the list as independent variables. When a single channel not its corresponding group isselected, only this channel is released from the group, the group itself remains intact.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Group/ Ungroup Variables (Data Groups)'

Export!

Variables selected in the variables list are exported so that they can be imported by other imcapplications.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Exporting/ Importing Variables'.

Import

A variable exported from another imc application is imported and entered in the variables list.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Exporting/ Importing Variables'.

Make Permanent

While working with the file browser, variables may be created which have the property of being temporary.Such files are indicated in the variables list with their own special symbol:

Temporary variables differ from permanent ones in that, among other things, they are automaticallydeleted whenever the current directory in the file browser is changed.

This menu item is blocked if none of the selected variables is temporary.

44


User Interface

Reference

Chapters 'File Browser', 'Variables'

3.9 Sequence Menu

This menu offers commands for the administration, editing and execution of sequences. All thecommands are explained in detail either in this chapter in the section "Editor box", or in the chapter"Sequences".

Sequences can also be components of user-defined dialogs ('event-sequences'). Some of the commandsthen don't refer to the sequence currently displayed, but to the entire dialog. See the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs' for details on editing event sequences.

All these commands are also available from one of the two editor box context menus (right-click over thetitle bar or over the input area), and some are also available in the editor box toolbar.

Load...

Opens a dialog for selecting files, loads the selected sequence- or dialog file and displays it in the editorbox.

New

A new, empty sequence is created with a default name and displayed in the editor box.

Close

The active sequence or dialog in the input box is closed.

Save

The active sequence or dialog is saved under its current name.

Save as...

The active sequence in the editor box is saved under a filename to be set by the user.

Execute>

Opens a submenu offering commands for executing sequences.

45User Interface


Run

The sequence or dialog currently in the editor box is run completely.

Run line

The current command line in the current sequence is run.

Start (Debug)

The current sequence or dialog currently in the editor box is run completely; any breakpoints set areobserved.

Continue

Execution of the sequence is continued from the current position (active command line). Any breakpointsset are observed.

Single step

The active command line of the active sequence is executed and then the next line becomes active.

Single step in subsequence

The active line of the active sequence is executed, then the next line becomes active. If the currentcommand is the call to a subsequence (SEQUENCE-command), the subsequence is loaded, displayed,and its first line activated.

If the current command is a dialog call (DIALOG-function), the dialog is started and interrupted before thefirst line of the first event sequence is carried out.

Additional commands for sequences are presented in the next chapter.

3.10 Sequence Menu, more commands

Sequence status

If the current position of a sequence run's progress is in a subsequence, various information is displayedhere, e.g. about the parameters passed, and if applicable, the number of the sequence run, if thesequence was called with wildcard parameters.

Edit>

Opens a submenu offering sequence editing commands.

46


User Interface

Undo

Reverses the effect of the last action in the editor box.

Redo

Restores the state prevalent before previous "Undo" command.

Cut

Removes highlighted text in editor box to Clipboard.

Copy

Makes a copy of the highlighted text in the editor box in the Clipboard.

Paste

Inserts Clipboard contents at cursor position in the editor box.

Select all

The entire contents of the editor box are selected, for example, for the purpose of subsequently deletingor copying the whole text.

Format automatically

Performs automatic formatting of the sequence displayed, meaning that the indentations of the lines areset automatically. The indentation depends on the logic of the sequence's procedural structure.

Insert boilerplate >

Inserts a pre-defined chunk of text at the current cursor position. The available boilerplate texts aredefined in the text file "Famosbps.txt" in the FAMOS/BIN-folder (e.g. "c:\imc\bin\famosbps.txt") and can beedited by the user using a word processor (such as "Notepad"). See also the notes in the file header.

Loop

Inserts a loop (WHILE..END).

Condition

Inserts a condition (IF...END).

Alternative

Inserts a condition with an alternative branch (IF.. ELSE.. END).

Advanced >

Opens a submenu offering additional commands.

47User Interface


Delete all breakpoints

Deletes all breakpoints in current sequence.

Set bookmark...

Sets a bookmark in the command line in which the cursor is currently positioned.

Goto bookmark...

Finds a particular bookmark in the current sequence.

To next bookmark

Goes to next bookmark; the search begins in the line in which the cursor is currently positioned.

To previous bookmark

Goes to previous bookmark; the search begins in the line in which the cursor is currently positioned.

Delete all bookmarks

All bookmarks are deleted from the current sequence.

Find

Conducts a search for particular text in the current input box.

Find next

Repeats the last text search.

Replace

Conducts a search for particular text in the current input box and replaces all instances of the specifiedtext found.

Page setup...

This menu command calls a dialog, in which you can specify settings affecting the printout of sequences.For instance, you can set a header, footer, or margins

Page preview

Provides a preview of a printout.

Print...

Prints out the current sequence.

Last sequences >

Submenu with a list of the sequences most recently loaded. If you select one of these entries, thecorresponding sequence is re-loaded and displayed in the editor box.

48


User Interface

3.11 Extra Menu

This menu contains commands for creating special work space, for starting FAMOS extensions and forcalling the FAMOS Options dialog.

Waveform Editor

Calls the FAMOS Waveform Editor for tabular display and processing of waveforms and data sets.

Reference

Chapter 'Data Editor'

Data-Browser

Calls the Data-Browser for quick and easy visualization of measurement data.

QuickView Window

A curve window appears with a graphic representation of the variables selected in the variable list. Ifchanges are made to the variable list selections, the QuickView Window is updated to reflect the currentselections. This provides a way to gain a quick overview of the graphic appearance of certain variables.

Reference


Dialog-Editor

Calls the FAMOS Dialog-Editor for creating and editing user-defined dialogs.

Reference

Chapter: 'User-Defined Dialogs'

DDE

A dialog appears to control other applications from FAMOS via DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange).Commands may be sent to other applications and data may be transferred, as well.

Reference

Chapter 'DDE-Interface'

The imc Report Generator is called using this menu item. This allows you to prepare results for printing bycreating tailor-made documents out of texts and graphics.

Reference

49User Interface


Documentation for Report Generator

File Assistant

This calls the imc File Assistant. Because measurement data are stored in various formats, reading aspecial file format into an analysis program is often the Number One Problem in evaluating the data. Theimc File Assistant allows you to design your own file formats. Using the format design file which it thencreates, FAMOS can read your data with as much ease as data in a standard format.

Reference

'File Assistant' Manual

Filter Design

Filter Design is an optionally available software package for FAMOS. If it is installed in the FAMOSworking directory, it can be started using this option. Filter Design provides you with a graphical toleranceband scheme for developing recursive IIR and FIR digital filters. These can be used in FAMOS for filteringwaveforms over the "Dfilt" function.

Options

Calls the FAMOS Options dialog. This dialog compiles all FAMOS presettings, organized in categories.

3.12 Project Menu

This menu offers various functions for creating and managing FAMOS projects.

Reference

Chapter: 'Project management'

Project-Explorer

Starts the Project-Explorer. The Project-Explorer is the headquarters for the management of FAMOSprojects. Here, you can created, open, run and delete projects.

Execute

Starts the execution of the project open at the moment.

Save

Saves all setting for the current project.

Close

The project open at the moment is closed.

Properties

In the dialog which appears, you can specify which additional settings belong to the current project.

Save current session

50


User Interface

Saves the current state of the active FAMOS session. This includes, for example, the contents of theVariables list, the curve windows and sequences open, the layout of the various FAMOS windows and theinput box's contents.

Open last session

Counterpart of the command "Save current session". The last session saved is restored.

3.13 Window Menu

This menu contains the various functions available for arranging individual boxes in the applicationwindow as well as for controlling the curve window display.

Load curve configuration

This lets you load a curve configuration previously save using the curve window's menu item "Save as...".The curve window is opened with the saved settings. The waveforms displayed in the curve window at thetime it was saved are referred to in the configuration record by name, but their data points are not savedas part of the configuration. If a waveform having the name referred to in the configuration exists, it isautomatically displayed right away. And if a variable having that name is only later generated, for instance,as the result of a formula of when a file is loaded, that variable will also be displayed immediately in thecurve window having the relevant configuration.

Reference

Manual 'Curve Window'

Close curve window

All curve windows currently opened by FAMOS are closed.

Optimize curve windows

When curve configurations are first loaded, or as a result of subsequent deletion of waveforms, curvewindows come about which are "missing" waveforms. The curve window is programmed to displaywaveforms which are currently not available to FAMOS. The curve window notes the name of thesewaveforms so that it can automatically display them as soon as they are generated.

This menu item can be used to remove all currently unused entries from the curve windows. Ifappropriate, any empty axes and coordinate systems are also removed from the curve window, or emptycurve windows are closed.

Curve window list >

Opens a submenu listing all currently open curve windows by their titles. The selection of such a menuitem activates the corresponding curve window and brings it into the foreground.

Customize configuration...

Opens a dialog which the visibility of the individual boxes of the main window can be switched on or off.

Reference

Chapter 'Customizing the User Interface'.

Load configuration>

51User Interface


This menu item serves to restore a predefined box arrangement in the main window. Some arrangementsare permanently pre-defined, others can be defined and named by the user himself (menu item "Saveconfiguration").

Reference

Chapter 'Customizing the User Interface'.

Save configuration >

The current arrangement of the main window is saved. Up to 3 different arrangements can be saved bythe user and later restored by using the menu item "Load configuration".

Reference

Section 'Customizing the User Interface'

3.14 "?" (Help) Menu

Help topics

Select this menu item or press function key F1 to call up the integrated on-line help. An overview of theavailable help topics is displayed.

Find...

The integrated On-line help is called up and starts with a dialog in which a search topic can be entered.

Info

This dialog provides information about the currently loaded version of FAMOS.

3.15 Administering Favorites

3.15.1 Overview

The functions and commands available are indicated in the function list on the index cards "Standard","Kit" and "DLL". The user has the additional option to compile a list of favorites under the index card"Favorites". Here, it is possible to store functions, formulas and sequence calls and projects which areused frequently, to that they can be accessed quickly. It is possible to store both complete, ready-to-goformulas and formula masks in which only the currently applicable parameter needs to be entered.

The favorites list can be organized in any hierarchical structure desired.

A "Favorites" entry has the following distinguishing properties:

· The title. The favorite is listed by this name.

· The type. This can be either a formula or instruction, or a project. If it's a formula or instruction,the actual instructions text must be specified. This can be, for instance, a function call with partlyor totally completed parameter list, a complete formula or instruction. If it's a project, the project'sfolder path must be supplied.

· The "Execute" property. This determines what is supposed to happen when a favorite isselected.

"Instruction" type: If this option is not activated, the instructions text is simply copied to the editorbox (just like selection of a built-in function from the "Standard" function list). This is sensible incases, for example, where the instructions text contains a function call which must yet be completedwith current parameter specifications. However, if this option is activated, the instructions areexecuted immediately. This naturally makes sense if the favorite is a complete formula or instruction.The option can be sensibly employed, for instance, to start a sequence by means of theSEQUENCE-command.

"Project" type: If this property is set, the project is run immediately upon being opened.

52


User Interface

· The short description. This is displayed in the favorites list to the right of the title.

· The help text. If applicable, this is displayed in the FAMOS output box.

3.15.2 Creating a new favorite

To store an entry for a new favorite, there are the following possibilities:

· If a function from one of the other index cards, "Standard", "DLL", or "Kit" is to serve as the basisfor the favorite, select the desired function and then select the context menu item "Add tofavorites". Then, once you switch to the Favorites index card, you see a copy of the selectedentry at the end of the favorites list. Using the context menu item "Properties", it is then possibleto edit the entry.

· To use an existing favorite as the basis for a new one, use the command "Duplicate entry" formthe favorite list's context menu. The new entry appears at the end of the favorites list and thedialog for editing the properties is called.

· To define a totally new favorite, select the command "New entry" from the favorite list's contextmenu. The dialog for defining a favorite the appears.

3.15.3 Setting / changing properties of favorites

If you select either of the items "New entry..." or "Properties..." from the favorite list's context menu, thedialog for defining a favorite appears:

Dialog: Define favorites

Designation

Enter here the title for your favorite. It appears in the favorites list under this name.

Formula / Instruction

Activate this option if the favorite is meant to be a formula or instruction. In this text box, you can specifythe text to be linked with this favorite. The cursor position is also noted. When the favorite is later selectedand the assigned text is copied into the active editor box, the cursor it positioned at this location, forinstance, where an updated parameter value is to be entered into the prepared formula line.

In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current operation line". Thiscommand copies the active line in the FAMOS editor box to this box.

53User Interface


Execute!

This option determines what happens when the favorite is selected from the favorites list (by double-clicking on its entry, for instance).

Formula/instruction: If this option is not activated, the instructions text is simply copied to the editor box(just like selection of a built-in function from the "Standard" function list). This is sensible in cases, forexample, where the instructions text contains a function call which must yet be completed with currentparameter specifications. However, if this option is activated, the instructions are executed immediately.This naturally makes sense if the favorite is a complete formula or instruction. the option can be sensiblyemployed, for instance, to start a sequence by means of the SEQUENCE-command.

Project: If this option is not selected, the project is only loaded. This corresponds to the button "Openproject" in the Project Explorer.

If the option is selected, the project is not only opened but run, which means that the sequence "autostart.seq" or the dialog "autostart.dlg" is started in the project folder. This corresponds to the button "Runproject" in the Project Explorer.

In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current operation line". Thiscommand copies the active line in the FAMOS editor box to this box.

Tool tip

The text entered here is displayed in the Favorites list to the right of the title.

Help text

Here you can determine a help text for the favorite. It will be displayed in the FAMOS output window.

In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current help text". Thiscommand copies the current contents of the FAMOS output box to this box.

Delete

The favorites entry is completely deleted.

OK / Cancel

The changes made are applied or rejected, respectively.

3.15.4 Organizing favorites

The Favorites list can be organized in any hierarchical structure desired.

Creating a group

To create a new group, select the command "New group" from the context menu. A new group entry iscreated at the end of the list and an attached input box is opened in which you can enter the name for thegroup, and confirm the entry by pressing the ENTER-key.

Changing the group name

Select the desired group and select from the context menu the command "Properties..". An attached inputbox appears, in which you can edit the name.

Order / Grouping in Favorites list

The order and grouping of the Favorites list can be changed by means of the Drag&Drop technique.

Click on an entry with the mouse and drag it while holding down the mouse button to the new positiondesired. While the cursor is moving, it takes on the appearance either of a horizontal line or of a framearound a group entry.

The horizontal line means that the entry being dragged could be deposited at exactly the current position

The frame means that the entry being dragged would be deposited in the framed group when the mousebutton is released.

Deleting and entry

To delete an entry, select it from the list and then select the command "Delete" from the context menu.

54


User Interface

3.16 Customizing the User Interface

3.16.1 Overview

The basic arrangement of the FAMOS main window's individual elements (Variables list, function list,editor box etc.) is fixed (e.g. the Variables list is at the upper left, the function list at the lower left). Thesize and visibility of the individual boxes, however, can be changed. Thus, it is possible to adapt the userinterface to different applications.

For example, if you use the File Browser to get a visual overview of the data records, you often don't needthe controls for entering and executing operations. Thus, you can minimize the Functions list, the editorbox and the output box to gain space. On the other hand, if you wish to enter and test sequences, youdon't necessarily need to have the Plug-in window with the File browser.

You can save configurations along with the fixed arrangements already provided, so that you can callthem up later.

3.16.2 Changing sizes

To change the arrangement in the FAMOS main window, you can grab and move the border line between2 boxes with the mouse.

Additionally, each title bar comes with buttons for minimizing, maximizing and restoring windows(depending on the window's current state).

"Minimize" means that the window is reduced to a minimum height, while the current window widthremains unchanged.

"Maximize" means that the window extends in the vertical direction as much as possible while thewidth remains unchanged.

Minimizing / maximizing a window results in neighboring windows being automatically re-sizedcorrespondingly (example: when the Variables list is minimized, the Functions list is maximized).

"Restore" means that the window position before the last minimizing/maximizing is restored.

Instead of using the buttons, it is also possible to use the combination of keys CTRL+F9 to switchbetween the maximum and normal view.

3.16.3 Hiding windows

Any windows or boxes not needed can be completely hidden. To do this, select the command "Customizeconfiguration" from the "Window" menu, or the corresponding toolbar icon.

A dialog appears in which the visibility of individual boxes can be switched on or off.

Dialog: Arrange windows

Not all combinations are possible, at least one window must be visible on each of both the right and leftside of the main window.

55User Interface


3.16.4 Load configuration

To restore a pre-defined window configuration saved by the user himself, select the menu item "Window /Load configuration" or the arrow button next to the "Customize configuration" symbol in the tool bar.

A submenu appears in which you can select the desired configuration.

Default

Restores the default arrangement. The Plug-in box is minimized; all other boxes are visible.

Variables list | File Browser

All boxes are minimized except for the Variables list and the Plug-in box. In the Plug-in box, the FileBrowser is activated. This arrangement corresponds to the "File window" mode of earlier FAMOSversions.

Without Plug-in window

The plug-in window is hidden, all other windows are still visible.

(User-defined)

Up to three arrangements can be defined by the user and saved using the menu item "Saveconfiguration".

3.16.5 Save configuration

To save the current arrangement of the boxes, select the menu item "Window / Save configuration". Up to3 user-defined arrangements can be stored and retrieved later using the command "Load configuration".

After one of the menu entries has been selected, an input box appears into which a title for theconfiguration can be entered.

A configuration thus saved then appears under the name given here in this submenu and in the submenuunder "Load configuration".

The "&" - character in the title plays a special role. It denotes that the next character is to serve as akeyboard shortcut for accessing this configuration; in the menu display, the next character appearsunderlined.

56


Tutorial

Tutorial

4.1 Introduction

This chapter has been provided to acquaint you with some of the main features in FAMOS. After workingthrough this chapter, you should be familiar with the basic functions. When performing more complextasks, please refer to the relevant chapters for more detailed information.

The tutorial will demonstrate how to load a waveform from a file and how to perform analysis usingformulas. You will also display waveforms in graphs and create an automatic sequence. Efficient use ofthe File Browser for quick loading of files and for comparing data files .

Many of the commands used below can be called in several ways - via the FAMOS main menu, or via therespective context menu (right-click of the mouse), via the corresponding icon in the toolbar or by acombination of certain keys. In order to familiarize you with all of these options, they are each used in turnin the discussion below, or at least mentioned as alternatives.

If you encounter unfamiliar terms in the discussion below, refer to the chapters 'User-Interface', 'Appendix'and the help for MS-Windows.

4.2 Starting FAMOS

After successfully installing, start FAMOS either by accessing the entry installed in the Windows StartMenu or directly by calling the file FAMOS.EXE.

The main window appears.

FAMOS: Main window in standard set-up

If the main window appears differently from the illustration here, select "Window" / "Load configuration" /"Default" in order to restore the default configuration.

The workspace below the menu bar and tool bar is divided into 5 boxes:

57Tutorial


· Variable list, displaying all waveforms and variables currently being processed.

· Function list, displaying all available functions and commands.

· Plug-in window, in which the separate user interfaces of extension modules are displayed. The FileBrowser plug-in is permanently available for fast access to measurement files. By default, this windowis minimized, meaning that only its title bar is visible.

· Editor window, for entering and executing individual operations and sequences (macros)

· Output window, displaying help texts, error messages and warnings

The basic arrangement of these boxes is fixed (e.g., the variables list is always at the upper left), but thesize and visibility of the boxes can be altered. For instance, it's possible to grab the border between 2boxes with the mouse and move it, or use the corresponding buttons to minimize or maximize a box.

4.3 Specifying Directories

Select the item "Options" in the "Extra" menu. The dialog which then appears presents all the presettingsinfluencing FAMOS' behavior. These are organized in various sections which can be selected from the listat left. Select from here the entry "Folders". A dialog box appears, in which you can set the default folders.

Default Directories Dialog

The selected directory may be changed either in the input box or by calling a dialog with "Browse", whichsearches existing directories or can create a new directory.

When FAMOS is first installed in, for instance, directory C:\IMC, the default directories are:

"Load data files from:" C:\IMC\DAT"Save data files:" C:\IMC\DAT"Sequences:" C:\IMC\SEQ"Curve configurations:" C:\IMC\CCV"Reports:" C:\IMC\DRB"Definition files:" C:\IMC\DEF"Projects:" C:\IMC\DEF

If unwanted directories are entered, simply change the appropriate entries. Confirm changes with <OK>,otherwise <Cancel>.

58


Tutorial

4.4 Loading Files

Select menu item "Load..." in the menu "File". A dialog appears for loading a file. Set the file format"FAMOS" below left in the format list. All waveform examples are listed in the directory box. Double-clickon "slope.dat" or select the entry and then press <OK> to load the file.

Dialog "Load FAMOS file"

The dialog box is closed and the file opened. The variable slope appears in the list.

59Tutorial


4.5 Showing Variables

Select the entry slope in the variable list by clicking on it once. Press function key F4 or select item"Show" in menu "Variable". A curve window displaying the waveform appears, with the variable's name asthe title.

Curve window with variable "slope"

Move and enlarge the curve window somewhat and shift it away from the lower right corner of the screen.

4.6 Zooming

Select "Zoom" in the menu "Edit". The mouse cursor takes the shape of a vertical arrow.

Move the arrow to the middle of the displayed curve. Press and hold down the left mouse button. Movethe mouse. A color-negative rectangle is spread onto the area between the initial mouse-click and thecurrent pointer position.

Curve window with zoomed section

Select a range and release the mouse. The selected range is enlarged.

60


Tutorial

Curve window with zoomed waveform

To enlarge the curve section even more, simply repeat the process.

Reference

'Curve Window' documentation, section 'Zoom'

4.7 Unzooming

Select item "Unzoom" in the curve window menu "Edit". The whole waveform can be seen again.

4.8 Measuring

To open the "Measure" window, select "<>/ Measure". Two measurement cursors (crosshairs) appear inthe curve window. Each of these can be moved using right and left mouse buttons respectively. The datavalues at the crosshair positions are displayed in the measurement value window.

The x-value of the left crosshair is indicated by "xl = ..." and likewise with the right crosshair ("xr = ...").The difference between the two x-values is indicated by "dx = ..." (dx = xr - xl). In the same way, "yl" and"yr" display the y-values of the two crosshairs. To move a crosshair, simply press the right or left mousebutton and drag the it to the desired position. The crosshair follows the path of the waveform.

Measure Window

61Tutorial


Curve window with measurement cursors (crosshairs)

As soon as you release the mouse button, the measurement results are displayed in the "Measure"window. By pressing both mouse buttons simultaneously, you can make different measurements resultsat a constant dx. To quit the "Measure" mode, simply close the "Measure" window.

Reference

'Curve Window' documentation, section 'Measure'

4.9 Viewing Variable Properties

The "Properties" dialog in FAMOS enables you to view and/or edit the waveform characteristics, structure,display parameters and data format. To see how this works, load the FAMOS variable slope.dat andselect it from the variables list by clicking on it once. Next, choose "Variable/ Properties" (or hit the F5 keyor the corresponding toolbar icon) to open the "Properties" dialog:

62


Tutorial

Dialog: Properties

Properties which cannot be edited are displayed in the background color (usually gray). To exit this dialog,select <Cancel>.

4.10 Interpolation

When you zoom in on small regions of a sampled data curve, you will set that the curve moves in "steps"from point to point. This can be seen in the FAMOS variable slope.dat, for example. The reason for thisis simple - a sampled data waveform consists of a finite number of points. When displayed in the curvewindow, the individual points are connected "stair-like" using straight lines. However, this is notnecessarily the last word. You can "interpolate" the curve using the interpol function. Enter the followingformula in the editor window on a new line:

This creates a variable Interpol. This new variable has a point density ten times greater than thewaveform slope. "IPOL" is the name of the FAMOS function which performs such interpolation. Thisfunction has 2 parameters, the waveform to be interpolated (here: "Slope") as well as the interpolationsfactor (here: 10). The result of this calculation is then assigned to the newly created variable "INTERPOL".

Enter the formula by proceeding as follows: first, type

Interpol =

If it's not already active, select the index "Standard" in the functions box at the lower left, in order todisplay the list of internal (meaning: permanently available) FAMOS functions and commands. The listshows the functions either in hierarchical tree structure (dividing the functions into separate groups) or asan alphabetically ordered, continuous list. The display mode can be switched via the menu items "Treedisplay", and "List..." in the context menu (called by right-clicking the mouse over the functions list). Selecttree display and find the function group "5> Interpolation, Approximation". Double-clicking on this entry orclicking on the [+]-symbol expands the list, displaying the functions it contains. Double-clicking on theentry IPOL copies the function name along with its corresponding parameter mask to the current position

63Tutorial


in the editor window.

Interpol = IPol(,)

Now double-click on slope in the variable list.

Interpol = IPol(SLOPE,)

Click once with the mouse between the comma and the right parenthesis and type in 10. The formula isnow complete.

Now, we can test the formula. The line just entered must be denoted as the active formula. To do this,double-click on this line, which then is shaded light gray, and to the left of the line a little arrow button thenappears.

Thus, the currently active line is denoted in an unmistakable way, and by clicking on the button, theformula in this row is carried out.

Click on the button circled to execute the formula. If the formula was entered incorrectly, an errormessage appears. Correct the formula before attempting to execute it again.

Alternatively, you can use the combination of keys "CTRL" + "ENTER" to activate and execute the linewith the input cursor.

Once the formula has been successfully calculated, the entry Interpol appears already selected in thevariables list. Use function key F4 or the appropriate button in the tool list to view waveform Interpol.

Curve window with variable 'INTERPOL'

Close the curve window and activate the window slope. Select "<>/ Unzoom" to view the entire curve.

Remarks

· Function and variable names can also be entered in the editor window using drag & drop. Referto chapter 'User Interface', sections 'Variables List' and 'Function List'.

· As an alternative to the methods of manually entering formulas named, the parameterizingAssistant can be used. To access this, select the function "IPOL" in the functions list and use thecombination of keys "SHIFT" + "F1", or select the corresponding menu item in the function list'scontext menu.

· If you select a function in the functions list or set the cursor on a function name in the input box,then by pressing the combination of keys "CTRL+F1", you can access a short description of thefunction, which appears in the output box. Here, too, the respective context menu can be used

64


Tutorial

as an alternative.

Reference

Chapter 'Functions', Section 'Function Assistant'.

4.11 More Waveforms in Curve Window

For better comparison of two curves, display both in the same curve window.

To do this, right-click in the curve window. In the context menu which then appears, select the item "MoreWaveforms...". In the following dialog, you can select additional variables and configure their appearancein the same curve window.

FAMOS: Dialog "More waveforms in curve window"

All waveforms available for selection are listed in the list at right. The waveforms already displayed areindicated in the list at left.

Click on the waveform interpol in the right list and drag the mouse while keeping its button pressed tothe left list below the variable slope. interpol is entered in the left box as the second curve. By thesame procedure, the leftmost of the three screen buttons can be dragged onto the interpol entry, inorder to cause this waveform to be displayed in the curve window, sharing the x-axis of slope, butfeaturing its own y-axis.

65Tutorial


Curve window with two curves

Click on the screen button <OK>. The dialog is closed and the curve window redrawn, with two y-axes fortwo curves (shown below in a strongly zoomed view, to better distinguish between curves).

Hint

The same result could be achieved by employing Drag & Drop on the waveform's entry in the variableslist; depositing the entry in the middle of the curve window.

In order to compare two curves, it is useful to set the same value range for both curves. Double-click

between labels of the right (2nd) y-axis or select the menu item "Axes"in the curve window menu "Y". Adialog box for scaling the axis appears.

FAMOS: Dialog for scaling y-axes

Select "Range selection/ Like previous axis" (base axis is the left y-axis). Select "Dots" in the menu"Style".

66


Tutorial

We also wish to change the line style with which the curve "INTERPOL" is drawn. To do this, push thebutton "Topic" and from the menu which appears, select the item "Lines...".

Select from the axes list at left the waveform "INTERPOL". Then select under "Line type" the item "Dots".

Select <OK> to end the dialog box. The curve window is redrawn. The right y-axis is deleted; the left y-axis applies to both curves, and is scaled according to the setup in the dialog box for selecting the range.The second curve (waveform interpol) is represented by a dotted line.

Curve window with two curves (common axis)

Hint

The same result can also be achieved using the previously discussed dialog "More waveforms in curvewindow", by selecting the y-axis in the axes list and clicking on the Delete icon.

Zoom into close range to see the dots clearly.

To make the two separate waveforms yet more distinct, display the waveform slope (1st curve) in a stair-step display.

To do this, select the menu item "Configuration/Lines". From the axes list which appears at the left of thedialog, select the item "SLOPE".

Select "Steps" in the menu "Line type" selection list and then select <OK>. Zoom in the new curve display.

67Tutorial


Curve window with two curves in different display types

Here, the function "IPol" was used to interpolate the waveform slope through cubic splines.

4.12 Changing a Formula

Change the formula to get a lower interpolation factor.

INTERPOL = IPol(SLOPE, 3)

Use BACKSPACE or DELETE to delete characters. Press ENTER to execute the formula. Displayedcurves are updated.

Curve window with two curves in different display types

4.13 Single Values

Calculate the maximum of the waveform slope. Enter the following formula in the editor box on a newline:

Maxim = Max(SLOPE)

The function "Max" is found in the group "8> Statistics".

After the formula has been executed by pressing "CTRL + RETURN", a further entry appears in the

68


Tutorial

variable list:

The dice symbol shows that the value is a single value, occupying no extent of time, in contrast to thewaveforms slope and interpol. If the value of the variable "Maxim" is not displayed, activate the option"Single value: show content" in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list...".

The value can also be displayed in a single value window by pressing F4.

Single value window

4.14 Calculations

A new waveform is to be made by freeing the waveform slope of its mean value:

FREE = SLOPE - Mean(SLOPE)

The function "Mean" (in function group "8> Statistics") calculates the arithmetic mean of the specifiedwaveform. This mean value is subtracted from the waveform slope.

Execute this formula and display the waveform "FREE" by clicking on the curve symbol in the tool bar.

Curve window with one variable

You will notice that the waveform "FREE" has the same shape as the waveform slope, but all its valueshave been decreased by the mean value of slope.

69Tutorial


4.15 Waveform Editor

Select "FREE" in the variable list. Then select "Waveform Editor" in the menu "Extra".

A new window appears. A table listing the individual numerical values of the waveform "FREE" is found inthe left column.

Waveform Editor

Use the scroll bar on the right side to view further numerical values. Close the window.

Reference

Chapter 'Data Editor'.

4.16 Saving Results

Select "FREE" in the variable list and "Save Individually..." in the menu "File". A dialog box appears forentering a file name under which the variable should be stored. Set file format to "FAMOS". The file"FREE.DAT" is created by selecting <Save>. This waveform may be reloaded later.

Dialog "Save File"

Reference

Chapter 'File Management'.

70


Tutorial

4.17 Deleting Variables

The variables "FREE", "Maxim" and interpol are no longer needed and should be deleted from thevariable list. First select these variables in the variables list, then select "Delete" in the menu "Variable".The only entry remaining is the variable slope.

4.18 Spectrum

Load file "SIN3.DAT" just as the file "SLOPE.DAT" was loaded at the beginning of the tutorial. Display thewaveform by pressing function key F4.

Curve window with variable "sin3"

The waveform contains several periods of a sine-shaped signal, which has a strong third harmonic(second harmonic oscillation). The distortion of the signal around its zero passages is typical for such acurve.

Enter the following formula to calculate the spectrum of the variable "SIN3":

SPECTRUM = Spec(SIN3)

The function "Spec" is found in the function group "2> FFT, Correlations, Third-octave analysis". Double-click on this line in the functions list, as well as on the variable "SIN3" in the variable list. Complete theformula using the keyboard.

Execute the formula. "SPECTRUM (MP)" appears in the variables list. A complex variable was generatedin Magnitude / Phase (MP) representation.

Press function key F4 to display the spectrum magnitude in the curve window.

The magnitude of the spectrum exhibits a strong fundamental wave and a somewhat smaller second

71Tutorial


harmonic oscillation.

Note that the fundamental wave has a somewhat smaller amplitude than the signal "SIN3". Theamplitudes of the oscillations correspond to those which would be exhibited by a selective voltmeter.

4.19 Complex Waveforms

If "Spectrum.M" and "Spectrum.P" are not indicated in the variables list, move the mouse pointer into thevariable box and right-click the mouse. Click on "Show Components" in the context menu.

This menu item is checkmarked if and when it is active. Additional entries now appear in the variable list:"SPECTRUM.M" and "SPECTRUM.P". These are the magnitude and phase components, respectively, ofthe complex waveform.

Select the entry "SPECTRUM.P" in the variable list by clicking once. Press function key F4 to display thephase of the spectrum in a curve window.

Curve window with phase spectrum

The phase spectrum should be displayed from -180° to +180°.

Double-click in the space between the y-axis labeling in the curve window SPECTRUM.P. A dialogappears for scaling the y-axis.

Under "Range selection", select "Fixed Range: min, max" from the menu "Range", and enter in theassociated text boxes Minimum = -180 degrees, Maximum = 180 degrees and Tick selection = "Ticks atfixed distances" 180 with Small ticks= 3.

72


Tutorial

Dialog for scaling the y-axis

Click on <OK> to close the dialog.

Curve window with phase of spectrum, scaled

FAMOS now attempts to display the specified range from -180° to +180° with appropriate axis labels.

4.20 Creating Sequences

A sequence (also called a macro) is a series of operations which FAMOS executes automatically in thespecified order. Frequently used series of operations can be automated by creating sequences.

Suppose, for example, the "frequency" of signal "SIN3" should be determined. Here we will define the"frequency" as the maximum oscillation occurring in the spectrum of the signal.

First open a new, empty sequence. Right-click the mouse over the editor box's title bar and select the item"New" in the context menu which then appears. Alternatively, you can use the combination of keys"CTRL"+"N" or the corresponding icon at the upper left of the editor box's toolbar.

A new index then appears in the editor box's title bar, "Unnamed0". This is then active and the sequence itpertains to (which is empty at the moment) is displayed. Any other sequences, whether newly created oropened, would be displayed in the same way; to move between sequences, simply click on its index in the

73Tutorial


title bar.

First, activate the standard editor box (with the index all the way to the left) and select the previouslyentered formula

SPECTRUM = Spec(SIN3)

using the mouse. Via the context menu or by means of "CTRL"+"C", copy the formula text to the WindowsClipboard. Switch back to the new sequence and enter the formula text into the sequence as the first lineby way of the context menu or "CTRL"+"V".

Sequence Editor (with command)

Now enter the following formula in the next line:

Freq = Pos( spectrum.m, Max (spectrum.m))

The x-position of the maximum of the spectrum's magnitude is determined. Execute this formula once asa test by double-clicking in the command line and then clicking on the arrow key (appearing at the left ofthe command currently in readiness), or alternatively, CTRL + ENTER. Correct any errors if an errormessage appears.

Now enter the line

SHOW freq

in the text window. This command displays the variable "FREQ" in the curve window.

You have created a sequence consisting of three commands.

Sequence Editor

4.21 Executing Sequences

First delete the variables created in the sequence.

Select entries "SPECTRUM...MP" and (if present) "FREQ" and then select "Delete" in the menu"Variable".

Now select from the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse over the editor box's title bar)the menu item "Execute". Here, too, you have the alternative to use the keyboard ("F7") or thecorresponding icon in the editor box's toolbar.

The sequence is now carried out, starting from the first line.

At the end of the sequence, a single value window is displayed indicating the calculated frequency.

74


Tutorial

4.22 Changing Sequences

The procedure introduced for determining the frequency works only for signals with relatively small meanvalues. Therefore, the signal's mean value shall be removed.

Change the first line in the Sequence Editor as follows:

SPECTRUM = Spec( SIN3 - Mean(SIN3))

Sequence Editor

The calculated waveform "SPECTRUM" should automatically be deleted because it is used as anintermediate result in the sequence. Enter the following line at the end of the editor box:

Delete spectrum

This command deletes the variable "SPECTRUM". Restart the sequence.

4.23 Saving Sequences

Select "Sequence/ Save" in the sequence window. Store the sequence under "FREQU.SEQ".

Close the sequence just created, for instance, by using the menu item "Sequence/ Close". The sequencecreated can now be processed directly. Enter the command

SEQUENCE FREQU.SEQ

in the editor box and execute it. The file "FREQU.SEQ" is opened in the background and the sequence itcontains is executed.

4.24 Favorites

Formulas or sequences used frequently can be entered into a list of favorites, in order to save on timespent typing. Activate the "Favorites" index above the functions list. Open the context menu by right-clicking the mouse over the list and select the menu item "New Entry". In the dialog which then appears,enter a short, descriptive name under "Designation", e.g. "Execute Freq.seq". The actual text is entered inthe formula box. You can, for example, enter the formula manually, or use "Copy" and "Paste" to get itfrom the editor box, or even easier, use the formula input box's context menu to transfer in the currentlyactive line in the editor box. Now you can also enter a short description and a help text.

75Tutorial


Dialog for definition of "Favorites"

Also, the option "Execute!" is activated, and the dialog closed by pressing <OK>.

Favorites list with new entry

The new entry is now shown in the Favorites list; double-clicking on it is enough to have the sequence"FREQU.SEQ" carried out.

Reference

Chapter 'User Interface', Section 'Administering Favorites'

4.25 Using the File Browser to load files

For loading files we have used the command File/ Load" up to now. You can also load files directly fromthe File browser plug-in, instead. Especially when you wish to load and compare files belonging todifferent directories, this method is the quickest and easiest.

Up to now, the Plug-in box, and thus also the File Browser, were in minimized mode at the upper rightcorner of the main window. First click on the "maximize" symbol in the minimized Plug-in window:

Minimized Plug-in box with "Maximize"-button

The box is then maximized (and in consequence, the input/output box below it is minimized). If it's notalready active, make the File browser visible by clicking on the "Files" index. Since the list of functions isno longer needed at the moment, minimize it by clicking on the corresponding symbol in the function list'stitle bar. The main window is now principally composed of the variables list and the File Browser.

76


Tutorial

FAMOS main window with maximized variables list and File Browser

Hint

A similar window configuration can be obtained via the menu item "Window/ Load configuration/ Variableslist | File Browser".

In the File Browser, the default folder for loading files appears as currently selected.

After double-clicking once more on the entry [Experim] (or a single click on the [+] symbol) and thenproceeding to directory [0001], the File Window presents the structure depicted below.

77Tutorial


The directory structure in this example is by all means typical for modern measurement systems. Afterconfiguring a measurement (in this case, the reception of three channels "channel1".."channel3"), themeasuring begins. For consecutive measurements (multi-shot measurements), the data received arestored in consecutive directories.

4.26 Loading and Displaying Files from a Directory

By right-clicking the mouse in the file list you can call the context menu.

Access menu item "Load Options". In the dialog which then appears, select the options "Show afterloading" and "Original name from file". Deactivate the option "Load channels permanently". Close thedialog with <OK>.

Select the three entries "channel1.dat" .. "channel3.dat" and press the screen button in the FileBrowser's toolbar, or, alternatively, press <Enter>.

The three files are now highlighted in preparation for being loaded. They will be loaded in the preset dataformat and will each be displayed in their own curve window. The symbol in the list-entry preceding thefile-name changes color to indicate the status of these files as "marked for loading".

When the directory is changed, the previously loaded waveforms are removed, since these were loadedwith the option "Not permanent" deactivated.

The attempt to load the files already marked for loading continues if the new directory contains files withthe same names. Click, for example, on the directory [0004]. The files "channel1.dat"..."channel3.dat" arepresent here and are loaded, the display in the curve windows, updated. There is no "channel2" in thisdirectory; the corresponding curve window remains, however, and unchanged. Now click on the directory[0003]. All three file names are represented in this directory and all are loaded and displayed.

Suppose you are no longer interested in "channel2". Select it and press <Enter> or double-click on it. Thesymbol in the list-entry preceding the file-name once more changes color, indicating that this file is nolonger marked for loading. It won't automatically be loaded any from now on.

With the arrow heads in the toolbar you can easily change between consecutivedirectories. The double arrows cause the directory to be changed automatically. After a specified time-

78


Tutorial

delay, the next directory on the level concerned. Select the directory [0010] and then press the right"double arrow head" button. You can observe that at every change of the directory the files "channel1.dat"and "channel3.dat" are loaded. The process stops at the directory [0001], since the last directory on thatlevel in the direction specified by the button has been reached.

Hint

You will note that at every update of the curve window, the range of the y-axis changes, since thisproperty is by default subject to automatic scaling. By accessing the menu item "Edit / Fix Axes" you canset the freeze the scaling to its current state, so as to gain a better comparison between the differentcurves.

To compare two curves in the same curve window, first configure one of the curve windows according toyour wishes, as described above in the section "More Waveforms in Curve Window". The other curvewindows, which are no longer needed, can be closed. Then you can continue to scan through thedirectories.

Hint

A desirable curve configuration can be saved. Use menu item "File / Save As.." in the curve window.When needed, for instance at your next FAMOS session, you can restore the configuration (menu item"Extra / Load Curve Configuration").

4.27 Loading and Displaying Files from Different Directories

Now close all open curve windows.

Hint

Menu item "Window / Close Curve Windows!" closes all curve windows at once.

The procedure described above did not enable us to display, for example, the waveform "channel1" of thedirectory [0001] together with the waveform of the same name in directory [0010].

Towards this end, call the dialog for setting the loading options (right-click mouse in the file list, menuoption "Load Options..").

Activate the option "Load channels permanently" in the dialog. Then waveforms once loaded will not bedeleted from the curve window when the directory is changed.

Also select the entry "Append directory name to end" in the list box "Channel naming". This is needed todistinguish between files with otherwise identical names. Since FAMOS requires names to beunambiguous, the last waveform loaded would otherwise replace the already loaded one whose name itshares.

Now if you scan through the directories you should observe that the waveforms are entitled by namessuch as "channel1_0001", "channel1_0002" etc. in the channel list. The option "Show after loading"should be deactivated, since a new curve window would otherwise be opened for every new waveform.

The option "Show automatically in previous curve windows", by contrast, causes a new waveform, whenloaded, to be displayed in an already existing curve window, if a waveform with same original name isalready being displayed there. The waveform "channel1_0002", for example, would be displayed in acurve window already containing "channel1_0001", because the original name ("channel1") is the same.

Reference

Chapter 'File Browser'

79File Management


File Management

5.1 Introduction

In this chapter you will learn how to read in data files of various formats to FAMOS and how to save yourresults in a file.

The format in which values are saved in the file must be determined in order to load a file in FAMOS. Theformat depends on the origin of the file, e.g. the program or measuring device where the file was originallycreated.

As a standard, FAMOS supports the following formats in loading files:

· FAMOS

· WFT (Copyright 1988 Nicolet Instrument Corporation)

· DIGISKOP(c) (Copyright remes GmbH).

· ASCII

· BINARY

· XLS (Microsoft ® Excel must be installed)

Whereas the first three formats show defined, special file formats, the ASCII and BINARY formats can beconfigured freely. This allows several different formats to be read.

Once a file is successfully loaded, waveforms contained in the file are declared as variables in FAMOSand entered in the variable list.

In saving variables, the following file formats are supported as a standard:

· FAMOS

· ASCII

· XLS (Microsoft ® Excel must be installed)

When saving in FAMOS format, any number of FAMOS variables with different data types and formatsmay be filed together in one file. The ASCII format is more restrictive in terms of which data types can besaved, but here, too, multiple waveforms can be stored together in one file.

In addition to the set formats, FAMOS can be enhanced by file filters. Import filters can be defined withhelp of the imc-File Assistant. These filters can be used as easily as using an internal format.

From FAMOS 5.0 on, additional file formats are available as optional import extension libraries which canbe seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS user's interface. This includes the MATLAB-import, forexample, which comes standard with FAMOS.

Function libraries, included in imc kits or the standard DLL interface, may also be used.

Set standard directories for loading and storing files using menu item "Extra/ Options / Folders...".

Reference

Chapter 'Sequences'

Chapter 'imc Kit-Interface'

Chapter 'Standard DLL-Interface'

Chapter 'File Browser'

Online Help for 'File Assistant' (Manual Shared Components).

80


File Management

5.2 Loading Files

Call the dialog for selection of files to be loaded with "File/ Load..." or by clicking on the correspondingbutton in the tool bar.

Hint:

Alternatively, you can also use the integrated File Browser. This provides an especially convenient methodof loading files from different directories one after the other. The chapter "File Window" of this manualexplains how to call and operate the file window.

Choose the files you want to load from the dialog "File/ Load". Several files may be selectedsimultaneously. Set the desired format here. If the format just set is configurable, a dialog for format-specific options can be called (Options button). After selection, these files are loaded in the set format andvariables are created which are then entered in the variable list. These variables can be processed inFAMOS.

The dialog is very similar to the typical Windows dialog for selecting files.

When the dialog is started, the directory last used appears as the default selection. The first time thedialog is called, the standard directory defined in "Options/ Folders" is used. The toolbar at the upper rightincludes an additional button:

81File Management


Clicking on this button with the mouse opens the above menu listing the folders last used. Selecting oneof the menu entries takes you to the corresponding folder.

The list of available file formats is found at the bottom of the dialog. The currently selected format is alsodisplayed in the title bar of the dialog. If other formats were defined with the imc File Assistant, they areautomatically added to the end of the list.

If the currently selected file format is configurable, a dialog containing useful setup options for the formatcan be called up with the button "Options". These option dialogs will be described along with thecorresponding file formats.

A status bar is found in the lower margin of the dialog. A comment about the currently selected file, if oneexists, is displayed in the status bar. If no commentary is present, the date and time of the file's creation isshown.

Several files to be loaded may be selected at the same time. If the files appear consecutively in the list,the following is possible:

· Click with the mouse beside the first file name you want to select and then drag the cursor, withthe mouse button still pressed, to beside the last file name.

· First move the marker with the direction keys to the desired file. Then select all other desiredfiles while holding down the <Shift> key.

To select files not listed consecutively, click on the desired entry while holding down the <Ctrl> key.

Click on <Open> to end the dialog and load the selected files. Variable names are taken from the file, ifpresent, or the file name.

If the variable name may not be used in FAMOS or already exists, a dialog appears for changing thevariable name.

Dialog: Neuer Name

A new variable name can be entered in the text box and confirmed with <OK>. If the variable namealready exists, select <Overwrite> to replace the existing variable. The screen button <Overwrite All> willcause overwriting to occur in all subsequent instances of duplicate names, for files which are due to beloaded because of multiselection, as well as for the current file. The "Auto-Numbering" button causes allsubsequent variables having duplicate names to have a "_" character plus a serial number appended.

Press <Cancel> if the file should not be loaded.

Reference

Following chapters on individual formats

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands LOAD, FASLOAD, FAMOS, ASCII, BINARY,WFTLOAD, DSPLOAD, RENAME

FAMOS Function Reference, Group '13> File functions (FAMOS, FAS)', '14> File functions (ASCII)'

82


File Management

5.2.1 FAMOS Format

To read files in the FAMOS (imc) format, select "FAMOS" in the dialog "Load file..".

The FAMOS data format is suitable for all data types supported by FAMOS. The format contains data andall information about data, such as physical units, sampling times, data type, comment, etc. Datathemselves are filed in compact binary form. Texts may also be saved. This allows several variables withdifferent types to be saved together in one file. A file comment may be added to the file.

This format is used by all other imc applications and devices as the default format. A detailed descriptionof the FAMOS file format is found in the Curve Window documentation.

The file comment is displayed in the status bar when selected individually, if it is present in the file. Thedate and time of the file's creation are displayed if a commentary is not present.

Use the button <Options> to call up a dialog with setups for loading the FAMOS format:

Selection dialog

This group of options controls the behavior when loading FAMOS files with several data objects present.

No dialog

The file is always loaded completely, all waveforms in the file are accepted in the variable list withoutfurther inquiries.

Dialog only when several objects in file

If several data objects are present in the selected file, a dialog is displayed with a list of all waveforms ortexts found in the file.

Select the waveforms you want to load from this list. This dialog is described in detail in the followingsection.

Always call dialog

The selection dialog is called each time a FAMOS file is loaded, even if only one waveform is contained inthe file.

Reduced time waveforms compatible..

This option only applies to waveforms which were recorded using the MUSYCS measurement system

83File Management


(Version 2.X or earlier).

FAMOS 3.0 supports direct management of non-equidistant time waveforms (e.g. in data reduction) in avariable containing time tracks and amplitude values. In FAMOS 2.0, time and amplitude tracks had to bemanaged separately in two variables.

Example

Loading a 6-channel reduced waveform generated by the imc MUSYCS (Version 2.X or earlier)measurement system provides a time channel and six amplitude channels in FAMOS 2.0. These mustthen be overlaid. The same file in FAMOS 3.0 normally leads to generation of six xy-waveforms, each ofwhich consists of time and amplitude tracks.

This option lets you cancel a default setting and have a variable declared analogously to Version 2.0, andis therefore only applicable if you use sequences based on FAMOS version 2.0.

Quick load..

By default, a copy of data contained in the FAMOS Data Manager is created when a file is loaded.Copying large amounts of data requires a noticeable amount of time. By selecting this option, copying isnot executed and the variable is managed internally with a reference to this file.

This has the following effects:

· Loading the variable takes little time and is available almost immediately in the FAMOS variablelist.

· Read access to this variable takes longer, if the variable would also have been created in thePC's main memory. The difference is minimal in short waveforms. On the other hand, for long it'smore likely that the variable would have had to be relocated to a temporary file, anyhow.

· In the first write access to the variable, copying the data must be done now because the originalfile may not be changed under any circumstances. In this case, no time is saved.

· The file may not be changed by other programs, for example by renaming in the File Manager.

The selected options are accepted with <OK>. They also remain when the dialog "Load file" is closed byselecting <Cancel>.

Compatibility

Activating this screen button opens a dialog which offers additional options for correcting compatibilityproblems arising when FAMOS (DSF)-files.

These options are only applicable to files which were not created using imc equipment or programs, butrather data from such sources as "GOULD Instrument Systems" equipment.

Offset correction:

Select this option if you notice a misalignment of files in the y-direction when loading.

Time correction:

84


File Management

Select this option if when loading files you encounter an error message along the lines of "Invalid entry in |NT - Key" or if the trigger time in the loaded waveform is incorrect (day and month switched).

The settings in this dialog apply to manual loading via dialog and or the "Load"-command.

Depending on the setup selected in the option dialog, a selection dialog may be displayed when loadingFAMOS files. This dialog contains information about the file and a list of all data objects found.

Available information about the file is shown at the head of the dialog, such as time, size of file in bytesand the file commentary (if present).

All waveforms present in the file are listed below the dialog. One line consists of a type symbol, the nameof the waveform and if present, the comment.

You may now select those waveforms in the list with which you want to work in FAMOS. When the dialogis ended with <OK>, waveforms selected at this point are loaded. If the dialog is ended with <Cancel>, thefile is ignored completely.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands FAMOS, LOAD

Manual 'Function Reference', Functions: FileOpenDSF, FileObjRead, FileClose

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data Types'

85File Management


5.2.2 DSP Format (DIGISKOP(c))

Select the entry "DIGISKOP" in the dialog "Load File" to read files in DIGISKOP(c) format (defined by thecompany remes).

Once the desired files have been selected and confirmed with <OK>, the following dialog appears foreach file. Selection of channels is determined with this dialog.

At the left of the dialog, individual boards or all boards contained in the file group may be selected.Channels contained in the corresponding boards may be selected in the box on the right side of the dialog(the corresponding board is marked by an arrow). Channel names from the file are listed on the left; onthe right are the names under which the channel will be loaded in FAMOS.

The FAMOS names can be determined by converting automatically into numbered variable names byselecting the button "Names Automatic", by selecting the button "Names from File" with the labelscontained in the file, or by selecting the channels individually in the input box "FAMOS Name".

Remarks

Please note that each variable name in FAMOS must be unique. When several channels are to be readin, it is recommended to use automatic selection of names. Otherwise, FAMOS may overwrite alreadyexisting variables with the same name.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command: DSPLOAD

86


File Management

5.2.3 WFT Format

Select "Nicolet" in the dialog "Load file" to read files in WFT format (defined by the firm NicoletInstrument Corporation).

When the button <Options> is selected, the following dialog appears for specification of the file section tobe read

Dialog for manual loading

When this option is selected, the dialog appears when a file is loaded above the FAMOS menu, so thatoptions for the present file may be selected individually. Please note that this option is canceled when theoption "Default for 1 time base..." is selected.

Please note further that the dialog box automatically appears when a file cannot be loaded with thespecified options. The option "Dialog for manual loading" may be inactive.

Default for one time base, 1..8 segments

When this option is selected, this dialog never appears when WFT files with exactly one time base andmaximum 8 segments are loaded and all segments contained are loaded every time. This option shouldbe selected for convenient loading of simple WFT files. Do not select this option if the "Dialog for manualloading" is active and the dialog box should always appear!

Reset to default

Select this button to shift the dialog to a standard state, from which changes can be made.

Compatible with FAMOS 3.2

This option ensures that variables opened are named in a manner compatible with earlier FAMOSversions. In such versions, the resulting variable name was limited to 8 characters and was alwaysderived from the filename.

Use channel name from file

If a channel name is specified in the file, this option causes it to be used. The option can only be selectedif the option "Compatible with FAMOS 3.2" is deactivated. Otherwise, the variable name is derived fromthe filename.

Time base

Specify the time base to be read in the text box "Time base". Values of 1 to 3 are permitted, dependingon the file.

87File Management


Numbering from...

In this box you can specify the position within a FAMOS variable name, at which an index number is to beinserted. The numbering pertains to different segments. This option is only enabled if the option"Compatible with FAMOS 3.2" is also enabled. Otherwise, numbering may be appended to the filenamein the form of : "_Seg#".

Example

The following examples, which illustrate "FAMOS 3.2-compatible numbering", use the file names "WAVE"and "WAVEFORM".

Rules for numbering

Variables are numbered with as many places as necessary to register all segments in the file. Forexample, if "WAVE" contains 5 segments, they are numbered with "WAVE1"..."WAVE5"; if it contains 150segments, they are numbered "WAVE001".."WAVE150".

If the file name is short enough, numbering is simply appended. A file name may have a maximum of 8characters. For example, if the file name has 6 characters and contains less than 100 segments, the fileis numbered by appending numbers to the name.

If the file name is too long to append numbering, the user can enter the position from which numberingshould start. A file called "WAVEFORM" set for numbering from the second position, a waveform"W01EFORM" or "W100FORM" could result.

If too large a position is specified for numbering, that position is automatically placed at the front. Forexample, in numbering from the 8th position and a file "WAVEFORM" with 1000 segments, the name"WAVE0001"..."WAVE1000" is selected.

No numbering is assigned to a file with only one segment.

Selecting segments

Additional text boxes allow selection of segments. Selection is often necessary due to memory, clarity andloading duration. The user determines from which segment loading should start, which segment shouldbe loaded and how many segments should be loaded in total. For example, if a file contains 80 segmentsand you read in

from segment 10

each 5th segmenttotal of 4th segments,the following segments are read:

10, 15, 20, 25

The following variables are generated from a file "WAVE":

"WAVE10", "WAVE15", "WAVE20", "WAVE25"

The number of available segments is displayed in the dialog box.

A tone is generated when the dialog is ended and if input errors occurred. The input cursor is set to thecorresponding text box.

If, during loading, invalid variable names are generated by numbering or file names themselves, or ifsome of the variables already exist, the program allows these names to be changed.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command: WFTLOAD

88


File Management

5.2.4 ASCII Format

This option is available to load files in any ASCII formats. Select "ASCII" in the dialog "Load file..".

Note: If the ASCII-format to be loaded is used quite frequently, it may be worthwhile to make a specialimport filter using the imc File Assistant. The effort needed to create the filter can pay off due to thesignificant extra speed and comfort of using it, especially where files contain multiple channels and alsoadditional characteristics (such as channel name, sampling rate, etc.) also are to be read out. Also, theimc Homepage offers a number of already created import filters for common standard formats.

Many programs save data in the form of ASCII files, including spreadsheets, text processing programs, aswell as mathematical, data acquisition and data processing programs.

To read the data from these files in FAMOS, a flexible ASCII format has been implemented. There is nostandard for ASCII, each program uses its own conventions. What all ASCII formats have in common isthat data, i.e. the numbers, are listed consecutively and are separated by a string. Texts may be includedin the ASCII files at any position. The user may specify in a dialog box how the special ASCII files are tobe read in order to read the correct numbers.

ASCII files are read according to the following procedure:

· First, the program searches for a specified character string.

· A certain number of values or bytes are skipped. The user may specify either values or bytes.

· Then the numerical values are read. The user can specify which nth value is to be read (e.g.each third); all others are ignored (skipped over).

· Either a certain number of values (e.g. 100 values) or all values are read. The number of valuesread determines the length of the waveform generated in FAMOS.

· Numerical values may be written with a decimal point (e.g. 1.35 V) or decimal comma (e.g. DM3,75).

· All characters between numerical values are ignored.

The button "Options" in dialog "Load file.." calls the dialog for defining your special ASCII format. Thisdialog can also be accessed under "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file | ASCII".

First search for:

First enter the string in the text box which is to be searched for in the ASCII file. If no such string ispresent, leave this box empty.

Skip

Enter the number of values or bytes which should be skipped. This must be an integer greater than orequal to zero.

Byte / Values

89File Management


Select "Byte" to skip a specified number of bytes; select "Values" to skip a specified number of completevalues.

Read every nth value

Enter in the box which nth numerical value should be read. This must be an integer greater than zero.

Read...values

Enter in the text box how many values should be read in. This may be a fixed integer greater than zero ifthe number is to be defined. You may enter "all" or a zero if all numbers are to be read to the end of thefile.

Decimal comma

Select this option when the values have been written with decimal comma instead of a decimal point.

To accept the specified format, press the button "OK"; Select "Cancel" to discard any changes.

Example

All values (without date!) are to be read from the following file:

imc Meßsysteme GmbH 15.6.89 Dear Madame, Dear Sir, Please read the following values: 1, 2, 3.4, 5e-6. Do not forget these values: 7 88 99 Best regards imc ...

Select the following setups:

Read from string: values: Skip 0 values Read each 1st value Read all values Decimal comma no

The following values are then written in the waveform generated during loading:

1.0 2.0 3.4 0.005 7.0 88.0 99.0

ExampleThe first 5 values in the second column are to be read from the following file:

......

...All costs in DM

...1.00 10.00 100.00

...2.00 20.00 200.00

...3.00 30.00 300.00

...4.00 40.00 400.00

...5.00 50.00 500.00

...6.00 60.00 600.00

...7.00 70.00 700.00

...8.00 80.00 800.00

...9.00 90.00 900.00

......

Select the following setups:

Read from string: costs in DM Skip 1. value Read each 3rd value Read 5 values Decimal comma yes

90


File Management

The following values are written in the waveform:

10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0

Remarks

Data read are always created in FAMOS in real 4 byte format (floating point).

During reading of ASCII files, units, x-axis scaling, etc. are not read from the files, they are always set tostandard values. This can be changed after data are read. It is often convenient to create a smallsequence to automate the procedure.

Please note that Windows uses the ANSI character set, which does not correspond to the ASCII set forspecial characters. Files containing special characters may be read incorrectly.

For complex or frequently used ASCII-formats, we recommend creating an import filter with the help ofthe imc File Assistant.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command ASCII, LOAD

Manual 'Function Reference', Functions:FileOpenASCII, FileLineRead

91File Management


5.2.5 Binary format

Choose this option to load files in any binary format. Select "Binary" from the format list in the dialog "Loadfile..".

Note: If the BINARY-format to be loaded is used quite frequently, it may be worthwhile to make a specialimport filter using the imc File Assistant. The effort needed to create the filter can pay off due to thesignificant extra speed and comfort of using it, especially where files contain multiple channels and alsoadditional characteristics (such as channel name, sampling rate, etc.) also are to be read out. Also, theimc Homepage offers a number of already created import filters for common standard formats.

Many programs save data in binary form, for example data acquisition and data processing programs. Aflexible binary format is implemented to read data from such files in FAMOS. Binary format does not havea standard, each program uses its own conventions. Conventional binary formats group data in a compactblock, usually preceded by a header.

You may now specify in a dialog box how the special binary format should be read in order to correctlyread out the values.

· Binary files are read according to the following procedure:

· The program searches for a specified string.

· A specified number of bytes are skipped.

· Either a specified number of values are read or all values are read. This determines the length of thewaveform generated in FAMOS.

· A space of defined width in bytes is skipped between the values to be read. This allows information

between the values to be skipped. It is also possible to read only ever nth value. The space is alwaysspecified in bytes.

The data type is highly significant in reading data. Floating pointing-point numbers in 4, 6 or 8 byterepresentation as well as integers in 1, 2 or 4 byte representation can be read.

Floating pointing-point numbers in 4 or 8 byte representation follow the IEEE standard format.

In addition, floating pointing-point numbers can be read in a special 6-byte format, as used by Turbo-Pascal (? Borland International, Inc) for the data type REAL.

In floating pointing-point numbers, it is not necessary to enter any information about value range, sincethe entire range of values is already included.

Integers in 1-, 2- or 4-byte representation as complement on two, that means with sign, are interpreted,for example for two bytes

0000H 0dffffH -1d0001H 1d

(H = hex, d = decimal).

Integers in 1, 2 or 4-byte representation without sign are interpreted, for example for two bytes

0000H 0d0001H 1dffffH 65536d

To transform the range of values to the actual range of (physical) quantity, the minimum and maximum ofthe physical value range can be specified. The number of bits which determine the measurement rangecan also be defined, i.e. the resolution of the device generating the data.

Integers are transformed according to the following rules:

Signed (two's complement):

Transform = (Range_max - Range_min) * (NumberWS + 2Bits -1) / (2Bits -1) + Range_min

92


File Management

Unsigned:

Transform = (Range_max - Range_min) * NumberUS / (2Bits - 1) + Range_min

Abbreviations:

NumberWS Integer with sign (1, 2 or 4 bytes)

NumberUS Integer without sign (1, 2 or 4 bytes)

Bits Number of bits which compose the measurement range(specify in dialog)

Range_min Minimum of the physical value range(specify in dialog)

Range_max Maximum of the physical value range(specify in dialog)

Transform Transformed number written in the FAMOS waveform.

To open the binary format options dialog, click on <Options> in the "Load File dialog. You can also findthis dialog under "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file | BINARY".

First search for:

Enter which string the program should search for first. Leave the box empty if the program should notsearch for a string.

Spacing...

Enter the number of bytes which should be skipped between the values.

Read...values

Enter the number of values to be read. If all values to the end of the file should be read, enter a zero or

93File Management


"all".

Floating point

Select this option to read floating point numbers (real numbers) from the file.

Integer

Select this option to read integers.

Number of bytes per value

Select the corresponding option for the number of bytes which should be represented with the values. Infloating pointing-point numbers, choose between 4, 6, and 8 bytes; in integers, select between 1, 2, and 4bytes.

Sign

Select this option to read integers present in two's complement representation.

Bit

Enter in the text box how many bits make up the measurement range when integers are read. Thenumber must be greater than zero and smaller than 8 times the number of bytes.

Min. Scale / Max Scale

Enter the minimum and maximum of the value range to specify the range of integer values in FAMOS.

80x86

Select this option to read files in Intel format. In this format, the lowest-value byte is located at the firstposition, as opposed to other formats (e.g. Motorola), in which the highest-value byte is at the firstposition. Do not select the option "80x86" for these formats.

Select the "OK" button to implement the format settings or "Cancel" to discard any changes.

The dialog box is not closed if incorrect values, for example, an invalid number of bytes, are entered in thetext boxes when "OK" is selected.

Example

A file to be read in binary format according to the Intel convention has the following content: first come

18 bytes with text "AD-converter channel 1", next,

2 bytes with unknown content, and then

1000 bytes with 500 integers per 2 bytes, originating directly from an AD-converter, i.e. without sign

(not in two's complement, measurement range -10V...+10V.).

The following setups should then be selected in the dialog box to read the file:

Read from string: Skip 20 bytes Spacing 0 bytes Read all values Value type integer Bytes 2 Sign no Bit 12 Range min -10 Range max 10 80 x 86 yes

ExampleA file to be read contains 10000 bytes with integer samples from four channels in Intel format. The valueshave already been converted into an integer 16-bit format in two's complement by data storage software.The third channel is of interest: an 8-bit channel with a range from 0...5V. The data are arranged asfollows:

2 bytes 1st value channel 1 2 bytes 1st value channel 2 2 bytes 1st value channel 3

94


File Management

2 bytes 1st value channel 4 2 bytes 2nd value channel 1 2 bytes 2nd value channel 2 ...

Select the following setups to read the third channel from the file:

Read from string: Skip 4 bytes Space 6 bytes Read all values Value type integer Bytes 2 Sign yes Bits 8 Range min 0 Range max 5 80 x 86 yes

Example

At the beginning of a file, the date and other information is provided, followed by a unique string toinitialize data and then the data as real numbers with simple accuracy.

7 bytes with date, e.g. "15.6.89", may vary

1 byte with ID for floating pointing-point values

12 bytes with sampling time in ASCII ("dt = 3.5 ms", may vary)

15 bytes with remark "Data on motor "

6 bytes with unique string: "Data##:"

4000 bytes with 4-byte floating pointing-point values in Intel format

Select the following setups to read the file:

Read from string: Data##: Skip 0 bytes Space 0 bytes Read all values Value type floating pointing-point Bytes 4 80 x 86 yesRemarks

The data are always created in FAMOS in real 4-byte format (floating point).

If you want to read a file containing only binary data without preceding information and skip numericalvalues, please note that a number of bytes are always skipped.

To skip numerical values, multiply this value by the number of bytes in a value. For example, to skip tenreal numbers in 4-byte representation, the number of bytes to skip is 40.

Units, x-axis, scaling, etc. are not read from binary files. They are set to default values which can bechanged after the data have been read into FAMOS.

It is convenient to create a short sequence to automate the procedure.

Remember that Windows uses the ANSI character set, which does not correspond to the ASCII characterset. Files containing special characters may be read incorrectly.

For complex or frequently used binary formats, we recommend creating an import filter with the help ofthe imc File Assistant.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands: BINARY, LOAD

Manual for imc File Assistant

95File Management


5.2.6 Excel (XLS)-Format

This functionality is only available to FAMOS if Microsoft ® Excel is installed on the same system. Theprogram versions Excel 95 to Excel 2007 are supported.

XLS-format is the default file format for the widely circulated spreadsheet program Microsoft ® Excel. IfExcel is installed parallel to FAMOS, XLS-files can be imported to FAMOS directly. For this purpose,Excel is remotely controlled by a mechanism called "OLE-Automation". Excel is started in the background,opens the desired file, transfers the data to FAMOS and is closed again.

Constraints

· Only the first table in an XLS-workbook is imported.

· Only numbers and values for the date can be imported.

· Import is performed column-by-column, i.e., the contents of a column make up a FAMOS-variable. The values to be imported must follow "seamlessly" upon each other; an empty cell in atable is interpreted as a column's end.

· Also make note of the various XLS-format versions. Excel 95, for instance, cannot read XLS-filessaved in the Excel 2000-format.

To load an XLS-file, select the menu item "Load file", and in the file selection dialog which then appears,the format list entry "EXCEL XLS".

Excel-import comes with a number of options; the dialog with the controls for these options can beselected via the menu item "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file - Excel XLS", or via the button"Options" in the "Load file"-dialog, if Excel-format is selected in the format selection list.

Dialog: XLS-import options

Range

Here you must specify the portion of the table to be read in. All references to cells are to be entered in the"A1"-notation normally used by Excel, where "A" denotes the first column and "IV" the last column(Number 256). This is followed by the row number.

96


File Management

Examples

A1 Upper left cell

IV65536 Column 256, Row 65536 (max values from Excel 97 on)

Z1 Column 26, Row 1

AA10 Column 27, Row 10

FromDefines the upper left cell of the table portion to be read in.

to

Defines the bottom right cell of the table portion to be read in.

Read-in begins at the specified starting point (cell) and is carried out column-by-column, i.e. a FAMOS-variable is generated for each column. An empty cell in a column is interpreted as a column's end. Readin stops at the first empty column (in other words, if the cell in the selected starting row is empty or doesn'tcontain a numerical value).

"to> maximum ...": Reads column-by-column, until the selected range is imported or until the first emptycolumn.

"to> End automatically:" Reads column-by-column until the first empty column.

Scaling:

One data set is generated for each EXCEL-column. Here, you can enter how it is scaled.

Permanent (x0,dx): A normal waveform is generated and initialized with the x0/dx (or sampling interval/pretrigger) specified here.

1st column contains scaling: The scaling information for all waveforms is derived from the first columnread in.

If the option box "Equidistant" is activated the scaling column is assumed to be equidistant (constantdistance between 2 adjacent readings) and a normal waveform is generated with the calculated x0/dx.

Otherwise, XY-data sets are generated, where the first column is used as the x-component for all furtherdata sets.

Designation

Affects how the data sets loaded are named.

1st row contains name: The first row to read is assumed to contain the channel name and onlyafterwards do the actual data begin. Invalid characters for a variable name, such as <SPACE>,parentheses, etc., are replaced by an underline '_'.

Permanent name + serial index: The specified name is extended with the index of the data set read in(the first data set has the index 1)

Permanent name + column index: The specified name is extended with the Excel column index. This isdifferent from the serial index, if read-in doesn't begin in the 1st column

Table name + ...: The name is formed from the Excel spreadsheet name and a number.

File name + ...: The name is formed from the Excel filename and a number.

Join waveforms into a group

If this option is activated, all the channels which are loaded are joined to form a group. The group's nameis determined by the selection in the list "Group name".

Example

The following Excel table is to be imported:

97File Management


For this purpose, the following options are to be set:

Configuring a sample EXCEL import

Thus, a data group "Workbook2" is created in FAMOS, having 2 channels "Channel_1" and "Channel_2"(both of data type XY). Read-in is stopped at Column 4, since it contains no numerical values; and thecolumn "Temperature" is also not imported.

Reference

In this section, manual loading of XLS-files is described. The options offered only permit loading of tableshaving simple structure. For sequences, corresponding functions exist, see FAMOS Function Reference,functions 'FileOpenXLS', 'FileXLSColumnRead' and 'FileXLSCellRead'. The latter function can also beused to read out individual cells, including cells containing text. Thus, sequences can be programmedwhich import more complex table structures.

98


File Management

5.3 Saving Files

First select the variables to be saved in the variable list in the main window. Then select "File/ SaveIndividually" or "File/ Save Together".

FAMOS variables can be saved in FAMOS file format, and with some restrictions, in ASCII format. IfMicrosoft ® Excel is installed on the same computer, files in Excel-XLS format can also be created. Forsaving in ASCII- and XLS-format, the user can define so-called export templates by operating a dialog.These templates set, for instance, file and column headers, numerical formats and the presence ofscaling columns. Format templates once defined are then available under the selected name for theformat selection.

From FAMOS 5.0 on, additional file formats are available as optional import extension libraries which canbe seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS user's interface. This includes the MATLAB-import, forexample, which comes standard with FAMOS.

Other file formats, such as an enhanced ASCII or a configurable BINARY format can be generated by imcfunction libraries, which are used via the Kit interface in FAMOS.

5.3.1 Saving Individually

The selected variables are saved in succession, each in a file.. Select the menu item "File/ SaveIndividually". A dialog is called up for each variable selected to enter the file name and select the format.

5.3.2 Saving Together

Variables selected are saved together in one file.. Select menu item "File /Save Together" or use thecorresponding button in the tool bar in the main window.

Dialog: Save file

In this dialog, enter the file name under which the selected variables should be saved.

The folder opened upon starting is the last folder used for saving. At the beginning, the folderbelonging to the default FAMOS setting is used. This default setting can be edited in the dialog"Option"/"Folders" and remains intact after the program is closed. The toolbar at the upper right contains

99File Management


an additional button:

Clicking on this button with the mouse opens a small menu offering the most recently used folders.Selecting items from this menu is a fast way to moving to another folder.

In the format selection list, select the desired file format. Along with "FAMOS", you can also find anyASCII- and XLS export templates you defined personally. In "Save individually" mode, the format "ASCII(3.2 compatible)" is also available.

If no filename extension is specified, a default extension is automatically appended. This is ".DAT" forFAMOS-format, ".ASC" for ASCII-(3.2) format and for personally defined ASCII- and XLS exporttemplates the extension defined by the user.

A warning message is generated if the selected file already exists. You may either overwrite the existingfile or cancel the "Save" command.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands SAVE, FAMOS, ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION

FAMOS Function Reference: FileOpenDSF, FileObjWrite, FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

Online Help for 'File Assistant', description of FAMOS file format, (Manual Shared Components).

5.3.3 FAMOS Format

In the "Save as"-.dialog, select the format entry "FAMOS" to save files in FAMOS format

The FAMOS format is the standard format for saving variables. All data types and formats can be savedin this format. All additional information, such as name, unit, comment, etc. is saved along with thevariables. Any number of variables may be saved together in one file. Waveforms of any type and text canbe combined.

If the file name is not extended, ".DAT" is automatically used

The file may also contain a comment. It is displayed in the file selection dialog when loading and helpsmake finding files easier.

Enter the commentary in the edit box at the lower margin of the dialog "Save file".

A detailed description of the FAMOS format is found in the Curve Window documentation.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands SAVE, FAMOS, ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION

FAMOS Function Reference: FileOpenDSF, FileObjWrite, FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

Online Help for 'File Assistant', description of FAMOS file format, (Manual Shared Components).

5.3.4 ASCII Format (export template)

5.3.4.1 Overview

Waveforms can also be saved in a configurable ASCII-format and thus made accessible to otherprograms for further processing. It is also possible, for example, to save multiple waveforms together in amulti-column file, to record extra infos in a file header or in column title, as well as to define numericalformats and column separators.

Such a format definition is called an ASCII export template. A template is defined by the user with the helpof a dialog, and saved under a permanent name. Under this name, the format can later be selected in theformat selection list in the dialog under "File - Save/Export". Thus, it is easy to define the formats youneed and access them later as required.

100


File Management

All settings for an export template are recorded in the form of a text file in the FAMOS definitions folder.This file bears the name of the export template, plus the filename extension ".aet".

To save a file in ASCII-format, select the command "File/ Save individually" or "File/ Save together". In thefile selection dialog which then appears, select from the format list an existing ASCII export template(denoted by the prefix "[ASC]"). The "Options" button accesses a dialog in which settings can be changed,if necessary, and then you can enter a filename and hit the button "Save" to finish.

You can also define and use a completely new ASCII export template. Toward this end, select the entry"Define new export template..." in the format list, then "Options" and in the dialog which then appearsselect the entry "ASCII Export Template". After completed definition of the template, it appears in theformat list under the designated name and can immediately be used for saving.

When saving structured data types (groups, segmented waveforms, waveforms with events, 2-componentwaveforms), the individual parts (group channels, events, segments, components) are branched out in thedisplay, appearing in respective rows.

Text variables cannot be saved.

The definitions dialog for export templates can also be called via the FAMOS options menu, (accessed via"Extra/ Options" in the main menu) under "File - Save/ Export: ASCII".

An export template once defined can also be used in sequences. The corresponding function is calledFileOpenASCII2(..).

5.3.4.2 Administering ASCII-export templates

From the Options menu (opened via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu), access the dialog "File - Save/Export: ASCII". This dialog appears as shown below.

Options/ ASCII export templates

Templates:

In addition to the entry "Create new template...", this list contains all export templates previously definedby the user which are located in the default definitions folder. Along with the name (under which thetemplate also appears in the format selection list) you will find the user-defined comment and thespecified default file extension for the format concerned.

To define a new template, double-click on the entry "Create new template...". Then the template definitiondialog starts with its default settings.

Proceed in the same way to edit an existing template. You can also create a new template based on anold one by first opening the old one and then entering a new name for it.

Note: As an alternative, you can call the export template definition dialog from the "Save file" dialog. Todo this, first select an existing ASCII export template (denoted by the prefix [ASC]) or the entry "Define

101File Management


new export template, and then hit the "options" button.

Open

Starts the definition dialog for the template currently selected in the selection list; just as for double-clicking on a list entry.

Rename

Calls a dialog in which you can edit the name, comment and file extension for the selected exporttemplate.

Dialog: Renaming/ saving ASCII-export template

Delete

Deletes the selected export template.

5.3.4.3 Defining ASCII export templates

The template definition dialog offers controls for all settings necessary for complete definition of an ASCIIexport template. Because of the large amount of available options, the dialog is divided into different indexcards.

102


File Management

The division of the dialog also reflects the basic structure of an ASCII-file.

Example of an ASCII-file with 2 data sets

In general, it consists of a file header [1], which can contain a permanent text and/or general information.Next, the data set readings follow in adjacent columns [2], [3]. Each column, in turn, can have its owncolumn header [2a], [3a], which can feature indications of the column contents, such as channel name,sampling rate, comments or similar things. Below the column header, the actual numerical values appear[2b], [3b]. The individual columns are separated by a defined separator; in this example, by a semicolon.

There is also a distinction between scaling columns [2] and readings columns [3]. A scaling columnreturns the scaling (e.g. the time axis) for all readings columns to its right. In the case of multi-columnfiles, one scaling column at left can be valid for all subsequent readings columns, or each data set cancome with its own scaling column, as illustrated in the example.

This basic structure determines what specifications are necessary for describing such a format.

· The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimalcharacter to use with numbers, along with export template specifications.

· The index card "Data" describes the structure of a readings column, including column header,column width and numerical format.

· Analogously, the index card "Scaling" controls the arrangement and format of the scalingcolumn(s).

· The index card "File header" defines the introductory text at the beginning of a file.

· Under "Miscellaneous", further options mainly affecting only special data types can be found.

· "Preview" enables you to see in advance how the format as currently defined is applied tosample data sets.

Once you have made all settings necessary, you can save the export template definitions to a file byhitting the "Save" button.

This file is stored in the default definitions folder. It bears the export template's name, plus the extension ".aet". If the "Save file"-dialog is opened, the definitions folder is searched and all export templates foundare added to the format selection list.

The button "Close" exits the dialog. If you have made changes previously, a prompt appears asking youto confirm that the template changes are to be saved.

103File Management


Defining ASCII export templates/ General

The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimal character touse with numbers, along with export template specifications.

Format-information

General specifications describing the export template can be made here.

Name

Name by which the template is identified. The format then appears under this name in the formatselection list in the dialog "Save file", as well as in the format list in the options dialog under "Options/ File- Save/ Export/ ASCII". In addition, the template itself is saved under this name, supplemented by theextension "aet", in FAMOS' default definitions folder.

File extension

Default file extension to be used when saving files with this export template. It is appended to thefilename, unless another extension is explicitly specified upon saving.

Comment

Here you can enter brief commentary describing the format. This comment is then displayed in the titlebar of the "Save file" dialog, for example, whenever the corresponding format is selected in the formatselection list.

Example of format information:

As per the illustration above, the export template itself is stored under the filename "My Format.aet" in theFAMOS definitions folder. If you wish to use this export template on another computer, you need onlycopy this file to the corresponding definitions folder.

When this format is selected, the "Save file" dialog appears as follows:

104


File Management

Dialog: Save file with ASCII-format selected

The text in the format selection list consists of a permanent prefix [ASC] denoting an ASCII exporttemplate, the selected name and the specified filename extension. The latter is also used as the displayfilter for the file list.

Column separation

This group of options determines how individual columns are to be separated from each other. In the listbox, you can first select a fixed separator character (Tab, semicolon, Space or comma), or "string".

If "String" is selected, you can enter a string in the adjacent input box. A tabulator can be entered as thespecial character '\t'. The string "\t;\t", for instance, sets the separator between two columns to be thecombination <Tabulator>, semicolon, <Tabulator>.

If the option "No separator after last column" is selected, the last column remains open, meaning that itis not completed by the selected separator.

Decimal separator for numbers

Set here whether the decimal marker in numbers is a point (e.g. "3.142" or a comma ("3,142"). With theoption "Automatic" active, the valid setting in the Windows Control Panel, under "Regional Settings/Number" is used.

105File Management


Defining ASCII export templates/ Data

This index on this index card affect the format of the data readings columns.

Column header

In this input box, you can set the title appearing above each individual column of readings. This can be acombination of fixed text and placeholders. Such placeholders represent specific characteristic valuesbelonging to the data set written in the respective column, and are filled with the current texts (e.g. name,comment, units) or numerical values (e.g sampling interval, length) upon saving. A placeholder can berecognized as a fixed designation surrounded by percent signs.

%NAME%, for instance, means the name, %YUNIT% the y-unit of the data set recorded. In the selectionlist at right, all placeholders defined are listed. Double-clicking on the desired entry (or selecting the entryand hitting the [<<]-button) copies the placeholder to the current cursor position in the input box.

You can also use the input box's context menu (called by right-clicking in the input box) to insert aplaceholder. This also offers a list of available placeholders.

If no column header is needed, simply leave the input box empty (or completely delete its contents).

Minimum column width

Determines the minimum width a data column can have. If the actual contents are narrower than thespecified width, the left side is filled with empty spaces and the contents are right-justified. However, if theactual contents are wider, they are still displayed entirely, and the column is widened for the purpose.

Numerical format

Here, you specify the numerical format and resolution of numerical output. You can choose amongexponential notation (e.g. "1.23E3"), decimal notation ("123.4") and "Automatic". Automatic means, in this

106


File Management

case, that the shortest possible notation is selected for the given numerical value. The "Digits" box is forentering the number of decimal places to be displayed.

Defining ASCII export templates/ Scaling

On this index card, you can find controls for positioning and formatting scaling columns.

Scaling column

Here, you can set whether the file comes with any scaling column. In general, the scaling column statesthe x-position corresponding to a y-value (amplitude) in the data set; a frequent example is a time-axis.This is analogous to the portioning of the (horizontal) x-axis used in graphical data display. How thescaling column is created depends on the data type, according to the scheme below:

Normal(equidistantly sampled) data set

Generated from sampling interval/ pretrigger/ trigger time(or x-delta/x-offset)

XY-data set The data set's X-component is used

Complex data sets The frequency (for magnitude/ phase representation) or theindependent parameter (for real/ imaginary part-representation)

[None]

No explicit scaling column is stored. This can be sensible if the information either isn't relevant or can bederived from other data in the file (e.g. if the sampling rate is specified in the column header of the datacolumn). If this option is selected, all further input controls in this dialog are disabled.

107File Management


[Common]

A common scaling column (at left) is created for all data sets stored. In consequence, it is possible thatgaps can appear in the matrix of data columns if a certain data set has no value assigned to a particularx-position (in other words, there is no interpolation; the corresponding cell simply stays empty).

Thus, this display style is sensible only if all the data sets stored have the same scaling (because, forinstance, they all are derived from the same measurement with a common time base) or at least all coverapproximately the same x-range.

[Per waveform]

Each data set receives its own scaling column, which appears at the left of its respective data column.

Column header

In this input box, you define a title which appears above each individual scaling column. To do so, you cancombine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data setand are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values(e.g. sampling interval, length). A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed fromboth sides by the "percent" character.

%NAME%, for example, denotes the name, and %YUNIT% the y-unit of the particular data set. In the listbox at right, all placeholders already defined are listed. Double-clicking on the entry of the desiredplaceholder (or selecting the entry and hitting the button [<<]) copies the placeholder to the current inputposition in the input box.

You can also use the context menu (right mouse click) of the input box to insert a placeholder. This alsopresents a list of all available placeholders.

If no column header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents).

Minimum column width

Specifies the minimum width of the scaling column. If the current content is narrower than the specifiedwidth, the left side is filled with empty spaces and the content thus right-justified. If, however, the currentcontent is wider, it is displayed in full and the column is widened accordingly.

Scaling in: x-Unit

The scaling corresponds to the data set's x-unit.

Here, you can set the numerical value and the resolution of the numerical values. You have a choicebetween exponential notation (e.g. "1.23E3"), decimal notation ("123.4") and "Automatic". Automaticmeans in this case that the shortest possible notation is used, which depends on what the particularnumerical value is. In the 'Digits' box, you specify the number of decimal places to display.

Scaling in: Time

The scaling output is expressed as absolute time and date. This option, of course, only makes sense ifdata sets recorded over time and having "s" (seconds) as the x-unit are actually involved.

Seconds

Here you specify the resolution for the time display. "None" means display of the time of day in terms of"Hours:Minutes", for instance "23:11". For the setting "1 s", the seconds are also indicated ("23:11:59"),"100ms" also indicates tenths of seconds 1/10 ("23:11:59,4"), etc. The separator in front of the fractions ofseconds (comma or point) depends on the current system setting for "Decimal symbol" (which is set inWindowXP, for instance, under "Settings/Control Panel/Region and Language Options/Regional Options/Customize").

Date

If this is selected, the date (in abbreviated form, e.g. "11.12.01") is output together with the time of day.

108


File Management

Defining ASCII export templates / File header

Here you can configure a file header to be entered at the beginning of the file to be saved.

File header

Enter in this input box the text you wish to have at the beginning of the file. To do so, you can combinefixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and arefilled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g.sampling interval, length). In the case of placeholders referenced to data-sets, the first data set'scharacteristic values are used in the file, if multiple data sets are stored.

A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent"character.



If no file header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents).

You can also divide the file header into multiple columns. To do this, use the arrow buttons associatedwith the "Current column" control, in order to add a column or to switch to another column. Emptycolumns are "optimized" away upon saving and therefore do not need to be explicitly deleted.

109File Management


Defining ASCII export templates / Miscellaneous

This index card offers additional options mainly interesting only for special data types.

Switch rows/ columns

The rows of the data matrix are switched with its columns, including the column header, which means thatwhat once was the first row becomes the first column. This option makes most sense in the case ofsegmented waveforms (matrices), for instance. If the option is deactivated, then for a segmentedwaveform, each segment is written to its own column, but if this option is activated, the values belongingto a single segment are written side by side in a row.

Ignore phase in magnitude-phase waveforms

If this option is selected, then only the magnitude component of complex data sets in magnitude/phaserepresentation is saved.

Placeholder for channel name

These options affect how the placeholder for the channel name %NAME% is interpreted in file or columnheaders.

Prefix group name

In data sets belonging to groups, the group name is placed before the channel name (and is separatedfrom it by a colon).

Append segment/ event index

In the case of segmented or event-based waveforms, each column contains one event or segment. If thisoption is active, the index of the current segment/event is appended (in square brackets). The setting isignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column.

Append component identifier

In the case of complex or XY-data sets, one component per column is stored. If this option is active, thestandard component tag in FAMOS is appended, e.g. ".M" for a complex data set's magnitude or ".X" forthe X-component of an data set. The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header orin the header for a common scaling column.

110


File Management

Defining ASCII export templates / Preview

The effect of the currently valid settings is demonstrated by applying them in a preview based on alreadyprovided sample data sets.

ASCII export template definition dialog / Preview

Thus, this provides help in predicting the results of the settings you make.

5.3.5 ASCII Format (3.2 compatible)

This format has only been retained for the sake of compatibility to older versions of FAMOS. Thepossibilities for configuring it are limited and it can only be used in "Save individually" mode. It is generallypreferable to use ASCII export templates instead.

Waveforms can also be saved in ASCII format. This file may then read by other programs as an ASCIIfile. A simple ASCII data format is used, which saved individual values in lines without special separatingcharacters.

To save data in this format, select the format "ASCII (3.2 compatible) from the format list in the "Save file"dialog. This selection is only available if the dialog is called via the "Save individually" menu item.

Use this format only if you want to save data for processing with other programs. Do not use this format ifyou want to reload the file in FAMOS at a later time.

Please note that this format has a very limited use. Only one waveform per file may be filed; additionalinformation, such as commentary are not filed. Storing texts is not possible.

To generate complex ASCII formats, refer to the section on "ASCII export templates.

To save texts to ASCII-files (for example for protocol-files), you can use the functions for creating rows ofASCII-files ("FileLineWrite").

If no file name extension is specified, ".ASC" is automatically used.

A dialog is called using the button <Options> in which the format for the file to be created can be specifiedin more detail.

111File Management


Define the ASCII file format to be created in more detailed in this dialog. The dialog is called by selectingASCII format in "Save file" and the button <Options>.

Notation

The format of saved numerical values is defined using the option selected in this group. The user mayspecify that values are always displayed in exponential notation, always in decimal notation or mixed.Mixed means that the shortest display is selected for each individual value. The user may also choose tosave values with the standard decimal point or a decimal comma.

Precision

The entry in the text box indicates the number of significant places to be output in 'Mixed' representation.Otherwise, it corresponds to the number of significant places to be output after the decimal point. Thevalue range allowed is 0..7.

Minimum Width

Specify here the minimum number of places to be output. The range allowed is 0..99. If the actual width ofthe number to be output is smaller than the value specified, spaces fill up the number from the left. Thiscan be used to justify the decimal points of all values saved in a column, which significantly increaseslegibility.

Save with header

If this option box is selected, a defined block with various information about the saved waveform enteredat the beginning of the file. Otherwise, only individual values are saved.

This block has the following structure (fixed key words are underlined):

112


File Management

IMC FAMOSName: DSINTime: 10.08.89 17:26:20Length: 1101 Unit X-axis: 4e-006 s1st x-value: 0 s Unit Y-axis: VData:0.00000.2991

....

The waveform is this example has the name DSIN and was generated on 8-10-89. The name is thevariable name before the waveform is saved, it may differ from the file name. The waveform consists of1101 values, recorded at a rate of 4 µs, beginning with the specified trigger time. The y-axis has the unitvolts, indicating that the curve represents voltage with respect to time. The individual values begin in theline after the key word Data:.

Only y-values / Double Column x-> y

Specify using these option buttons whether only the y-values should be saved in a vertical column orwhether each y-value is saved preceded by its corresponding x-value (separated by a tab).

Default

This button creates settings which execute storing in ASCII format analog to previous FAMOS versions(<= Version 1.5), without this option dialog.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequences', commands ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION

Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

5.3.6 Excel (XLS)-Format

5.3.6.1 Overview

This functionality is only available to FAMOS if Microsoft ® Excel is installed on the same system. Theprogram versions Excel 95 to Excel 2007 are supported.

XLS-format is the default file format for the widely circulated spreadsheet program Microsoft ® Excel. IfExcel is installed parallel to FAMOS, XLS-files can be exported by FAMOS directly. For this purpose,Excel is remotely controlled by a mechanism called "OLE-Automation". Excel is started in the background,advised to receive the data from FAMOS and to store the file and is finally closed again.

Constraints

· Excel can only administer a limited number of data sets of limited length. The maximum numberof rows (=maximum length of a data set) is limited to 65536 values (Excel 95: 16384 values).The maximum number of columns is 256 (= number of data sets which can be transferred).

· Only one table per XLS-file can be exported.

· Only data sets (not text variables) can be exported.

· Note also that there are different versions of the XLS-format. Excel 95, for instance, cannot readXLS-files saved in Excel 2000 format.

When saving structured data types (groups, event-based and segmented waveforms, 2-component datasets), the individual parts (channels of the group, events, segments, components) are extracted andwritten out each in its own column.

Data export in XLS-format comes with many configuration options. Naturally, it is possible to save multipledata sets together in a table with multiple columns. A table header, column titles and scaling column(s) allcan also be defined.

Such a format definition is called an XLS export template. A template is defined by the user with the help

113File Management


of a dialog, and saved under a permanent name. Under this name, the format can later be selected in theformat selection list in the dialog under "File - Save/Export". Thus, it is easy to define the formats youneed and access them later as required.

All settings for an export template are recorded in the form of a text file in the FAMOS definitions folder.This file bears the name of the export template, plus the filename extension ".aet".

Technically, there is no difference between an XLS export template and an ASCII export template. Onlythe number of settings available is different, since some specifications needed for ASCII-export are notnecessary for Excel-export.

To save a file in XLS-format, select the command "File/ Save individually" or "File/ Save together". In thefile selection dialog which then appears, select from the format list an existing XLS export template(denoted by the prefix "[XLS]"). The "Options" button accesses a dialog in which settings can be changed,if necessary, and then you can enter a filename and hit the button "Save" to finish.

You can also define and use a completely new XLS export template. Toward this end, select the entry"Define new export template..." in the format list, then "Options" and in the dialog which then appearsselect the entry "XLS Export Template". After completed definition of the template, it appears in the formatlist under the designated name and can immediately be used for saving.

The definitions dialog for export templates can also be called via the FAMOS options menu, (accessed via"Extra/ Options" in the main menu) under "File - Save/ Export: EXCEL".

An export template once defined can also be used in sequences. The corresponding function is calledFileOpenXLS2(..).

5.3.6.2 Administering EXCEL-export templates

From the Options menu (opened via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu), access the dialog "File - Save/Export: XLS". This dialog appears as shown below.

Options/ EXCEL export templates

Templates:

In addition to the entry "Create new template...", this list contains all export templates previously definedby the user which are located in the default definitions folder. Along with the name (under which thetemplate also appears in the format selection list) you will find the user-defined comment and thespecified default file extension for the format concerned.

To define a new template, double-click on the entry "Create new template...". Then the template definitiondialog starts with its default settings.

Proceed in the same way to edit an existing template. You can also create a new template based on anold one by first opening the old one and then entering a new name for it.

114


File Management

Note: As an alternative, you can call the export template definition dialog from the "Save file" dialog. Todo this, first select an existing XLS export template (denoted by the prefix [XLS]) or the entry "Define newexport template, and then hit the "options" button.

Open

Starts the definition dialog for the template currently selected in the selection list; just as for double-clicking on a list entry.

Rename

Calls a dialog n which you can edit the name, comment and file extension for the selected exporttemplate.

Dialog: Save EXCEL export template

Delete

Deletes the selected export template.

5.3.6.3 Defining EXCEL export templates

The template definition dialog offers controls for all settings necessary for complete definition of anEXCEL export template. Because of the large amount of available options, the dialog is divided intodifferent index cards.

Dialog: Define EXCEL export template

The division of the dialog also reflects the basic structure of an `XLS-file:

115File Management


Example of an EXCEL-file with 2 data sets

In general, it consists of a file header [Cells A1 to A5], which can contain a permanent text and/or generalinformation. Next, the data set readings follow in adjacent columns. Each column, in turn, can have itsown column header [Cells 6 to 8], which can feature indications of the column contents, such as channelname, sampling rate, comments or similar things. Below the column header, the actual numerical valuesappear [starting at Row 9].

There is also a distinction between scaling columns [Columns A and C and readings columns [Columns Band D]. A scaling column returns the scaling (e.g. the time axis) for all readings columns to its right. In thecase of multi-column files, one scaling column at left can be valid for all subsequent readings columns, oreach data set can come with its own scaling column.

This basic structure determines what specifications are necessary for describing such a format.

· The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimalcharacter to use with numbers, along with export template specifications.

· The index card "Data" describes the structure of a readings column, including column header,column width and numerical format.

· Analogously, the index card "Scaling" controls the arrangement and format of the scalingcolumn(s).

· The index card "File header" defines the introductory text at the beginning of a file.

· Under "Miscellaneous", further options mainly affecting only special data types can be found.

Once you have made all settings necessary, you can save the export template definitions to a file byhitting the "Save" button.

This file is stored in the default definitions folder. It bears the export template's name, plus the extension ".aet". If the "Save file"-dialog is opened, the definitions folder is searched and all export templates foundare added to the format selection list.

The button "Close" exits the dialog. If you have made changes previously, a prompt appears asking youto confirm that the template changes are to be saved.

116


File Management

Defining EXCEL export templates/ General

This index card contains controls for general descriptive settings for the export template.

Dialog: Define Excel export template/ General

Name

Name by which the template is identified. The format then appears under this name in the formatselection list in the dialog "Save file", as well as in the format list in the options dialog under "Options/ File- Save/ Export/ EXCEL". In addition, the template itself is saved under this name, supplemented by theextension "aet", in FAMOS' default definitions folder.

File extension

Default file extension to be used when saving files with this export template. It is appended to thefilename, unless another extension is explicitly specified upon saving. Set permanently to "XLS".

Comment

Here you can enter brief commentary describing the format. This comment is then displayed in the titlebar of the "Save file" dialog, for example, whenever the corresponding format is selected in the formatselection list.

Example of format information:

As per the illustration above, the export template itself is stored under the filename "XLS Format #1.aet" inthe FAMOS definitions folder. If you wish to use this export template on another computer, you need onlycopy this file to the corresponding definitions folder.

When this format is selected, the "Save file" dialog appears as follows.

117File Management


The text in the format selection list consists of a permanent prefix [XLS] denoting an EXCEL exporttemplate, the selected name and the specified filename extension. The latter is also used as the displayfilter for the file list.

Defining EXCEL export templates/ Data

This index on this index card affect the format of the data readings columns.

Column header

In this input box, you can set the title appearing above each individual column of readings. This can be acombination of fixed text and placeholders. Such placeholders represent specific characteristic valuesbelonging to the data set written in the respective column, and are filled with the current texts (e.g. name,comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length) upon saving. A placeholder can berecognized as a fixed designation surrounded by percent signs.

%NAME%, for instance, means the name, %YUNIT% the y-unit of the data set recorded. In the selectionlist at right, all placeholders defined are listed. Double-clicking on the desired entry (or selecting the entryand hitting the [<<]-button) copies the placeholder to the current cursor position in the input box.

You can also use the input box's context menu (called by right-clicking in the input box) to insert aplaceholder. This also offers a list of available placeholders.

If no column header is needed, simply leave the input box empty (or completely delete its contents).

118


File Management

Defining EXCEL export templates/ Scaling

On this index card, you can find controls for positioning and formatting scaling columns.

Scaling column

Here, you can set whether the file comes with any scaling column. In general, the scaling column statesthe x-position corresponding to a y-value (amplitude) in the data set; a frequent example is a time-axis.This is analogous to the portioning of the (horizontal) x-axis used in graphical data display. How thescaling column is created depends on the data type, according to the scheme below.

119File Management


Normal (equidistantly sampled) data set Generated from sampling interval/ pretrigger/ trigger time(or x-delta/x-offset)

XY-data set The data set's X-component is used

Complex data sets The frequency (for magnitude/ phase representation) orthe independent parameter (for real/ imaginary part-representation)

[None]No explicit scaling column is stored. This can be sensible if the information either isn't relevant or can bederived from other data in the file (e.g. if the sampling rate is specified in the column header of the datacolumn). If this option is selected, all further input controls in this dialog are disabled.

[Common]

A common scaling column (at left) is created for all data sets stored. In consequence, it is possible thatgaps can appear in the matrix of data columns if a certain data set has no value assigned to a particularx-position (in other words, there is no interpolation; the corresponding cell simply stays empty).

Thus, this display style is sensible only if all the data sets stored have the same scaling (because, forinstance, they all are derived from the same measurement with a common time base) or at least all coverapproximately the same x-range.

[Per waveform]

Each data set receives its own scaling column, which appears at the left of its respective data column.

Column header

In this input box, you define a title which appears above each individual scaling column. To do so, you cancombine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data setand are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values(e.g. sampling interval, length). A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed fromboth sides by the "percent" character.



If no column header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents).

Scaling in: x-Unit

The scaling corresponds to the data set's x-unit.

Scaling in: Time

The scaling output is expressed as absolute time and date. This option, of course, only makes sense ifdata sets recorded over time and having "s" (seconds) as the x-unit are actually involved.

The time values are converted to EXCEL time format and transferred. Then the EXCEL-column'snumerical format us set as time (see EXCEL menu item "Format/ Format cells/ Numbers").

Be aware that time statements in EXCEL only have a resolution of approx. 10ms. If your time axis has afiner resolution, the precision will be reduced upon saving.

Seconds

Here you specify the resolution for the time display. "None" means display of the time of day in terms of"Hours:Minutes", for instance "23:11". For the setting "1 s", the seconds are also indicated ("23:11:59"),"100ms" also indicates tenths of seconds 1/10 ("23:11:59,4"), etc.

Date

If this is selected, the date (in abbreviated form, e.g. "11.12.01") is output together with the time of day.

120


File Management

The two specifications Seconds and Date, then, only determine the numerical format displayed initially.The display in EXCEL can be edited later (menu item "Format/ Cell").

Defining EXCEL export templates / File header

Here you can configure a file header to be entered at the beginning of the file to be saved.

File header

Enter in this input box the text you wish to have at the beginning of the file. To do so, you can combinefixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and arefilled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g.sampling interval, length). In the case of placeholders referenced to data-sets, the first data set'scharacteristic values are used in the file, if multiple data sets are stored.

A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent"character.



If no file header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents).

You can also divide the file header into multiple columns. To do this, use the arrow buttons associatedwith the "Current column" control, in order to add a column or to switch to another column. Emptycolumns are "optimized" away upon saving and therefore do not need to be explicitly deleted.

121File Management


Defining EXCEL export templates / Miscellaneous

This index card offers additional options mainly interesting only for special data types.

Switch rows/ columns

The rows of the data matrix are switched with its columns, including the column header, which means thatwhat once was the first row becomes the first column. This option makes most sense in the case ofsegmented waveforms (matrices), for instance. If the option is deactivated, then for a segmentedwaveform, each segment is written to its own column, but if this option is activated, the values belongingto a single segment are written side by side in a row.

Ignore phase in magnitude-phase waveforms

If this option is selected, then only the magnitude component of complex data sets in magnitude/phaserepresentation is saved.

Placeholder for channel name

These options affect how the placeholder for the channel name %NAME% is interpreted in file or columnheaders.

Prefix group name

In data sets belonging to groups, the group name is placed before the channel name (and is separatedfrom it by a colon).

Append segment/ event index

In the case of segmented or event-based waveforms, each column contains one event or segment. If thisoption is active, the index of the current segment/event is appended (in square brackets). The setting isignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column.

Append component identifier

In the case of complex or XY-data sets, one component per column is stored. If this option is active, thestandard component tag in FAMOS is appended, e.g. ".M" for a complex data set's magnitude or ".X" forthe X-component of an data set. The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header orin the header for a common scaling column.

122


File Management

5.4 Default Directories

Determine the default directories for FAMOS in this dialog. Select "Options / Folders".

Dialog: Standard directories

Select the directory you want to change in the list. You may either change the directory in the input boxdirectly or use <Search> to call a dialog to search already existing directories or creating a new one.

Load data files from

When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is used as the source directory for loading data files inany format. It is used as the initial directory for the dialog "Load file". The Load file commands andfunctions (LOAD, WFTLOAD, FASLOAD, FileOpenDSF, etc.) use this directory if no complete path nameis specified. The setup is no longer used if you have loaded a file for the first time from another directoryor if the directory has been converted with the LDIR command or the SetOption()-function.

Save data files to

When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is used as the target directory for saving data files inany format. It is used as the initial directory for the dialog "Save file". The Save file commands andfunctions (SAVE, ASCSAVE, FileOpenDSF) use this directory if no complete path name is specified. Thesetup is no longer used if you have saved a file for the first time in another directory or if the directory hasbeen changed with the SDIR command or the SetOption()-function.

Curve configuration:

Saved curve configurations (*.ccv") are searched for in this directory. Menu item "Extra/ Load CurveConfiguration" and kit-functions for remote-controlling the curve window start searches in this directory.

Sequences / Dialogs

When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is the default directory for loading and storingsequence- and dialogfiles. It is used as initial directory for the dialogs "Load file" / "Save file" in thesequence window. The command for executing the sequence (SEQUENCE), as well as the functionDIALOG, for starting a dialog, uses this directory if no complete path name has been specified. The setupis no longer valid if you have used a sequence for the first time from another directory or if the directoryhas been converted with the MDIR command or the SetOption() function.

Directory for Report Generator

Print layout files for the imc Report Generator are searched for in this directory. The functions in theReport Generator kits use this directory.

Definition Files

Declaration files for external DLL functions are searched for in this directory. In addition, this isthe base directory for format definition files created by the imc File Assistant. It is used by thefunction 'FileOpenFAS' as well as the command 'FASLOAD'. This folder is also used to store user-defined Export Templates (ASCII or XLS).Projects:

123File Management


The folder set here serves as the base folder for new projects to create. It is used, for example, uponstarting the Project Explorer.

Reference

Chapter 'Functions', section 'Standard DLL Interface'

Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', functions: FileOpenDSF, FileOpenFAS, SetOption

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands LAYOUT, SDIR. MDIR, LDIR

Documentation for Report Generator, File Assistant

124


Variables

Variables

6.1 Introduction

FAMOS uses a concept of data which is tailored to the needs of measurement and control technology,allowing various data types to be processed and analyzed. All waveforms, values and texts which can beprocessed in FAMOS are alike designated as variables.

The main window displays a list of all existing variables. In addition to the variable's name, the typesymbol and -where appropriate- the values of variables are also displayed. As each variable is generated,it is entered into the list, which is initially empty in a FAMOS session.

A comprehensive assortment of functions for processing the variables is provided, ranging from basicmathematical operations to complex calculus and including special tools for the manipulation of variables,specifically designed for the needs of measurement and control technology.

FAMOS includes a formula interpreter which allows you to construct complex mathematical expressionsfrom the available standard functions. Using the formula interpreter, new data may be calculated orexisting data can be modified.

The following illustration depicts a list of variables representing all existing types, accompanied by theirrespective symbols. The types are described in detail in the following chapters.

A typical variable in FAMOS would pass through this sequence of stages:

1. Variable assignment, accomplished by

· creation using Waveform Editor

· designation as the result of a formula

· loading from file

· importing from other applications

2. Processing variables, e.g.

· changing data, e.g. as the result of a mathematical operation

· changing characteristic values, e.g. via dialog

· use as parameter for functions and commands

· visualization as a curve or in tables

3. Storage of results by

· documentation with Report Generator

· saving in a file

· transfer to another application

125Variables


4. Deletion of variables

Variables are identified by their names, in which terms they can be entered as parameters into formulas.A variable's name may have up to 255 characters.

Each variable consists of the actual (measurement) data and of its assigned properties (also referred toas characteristic values). For instance, the information about the measurement of a voltage over timeconsists of the actual voltage values (data) as well as name, sampling interval, trigger instant etc.(characteristics).

6.2 Variable Names

Variables are identified by their names, whereby no distinction is drawn between upper- and lower caseletters. A variable's name can be specified either automatically (loading from file) or by the user.

The name, like any variable characteristic, can be changed by the user at will. Use the dialog (menu item"Variable/ Properties") or the command RENAME to rename a variable.

A valid variable name may

· contain a maximum of 255 characters

· not be the same as another variable's name

· not contain an character with an ASCII-code < 32 (e.g. Tab, Line break)

· not contain the characters "<" and ">".

Note that names are not case-sensitive; this means that there is no difference between names writtenwith upper- and lower-case letters.

A variable name should:

· not begin with a digit,

· not contain any mathematical symbols, which refers to the characters:

+ - ( ) * / ^ = { } [ ] |

· not contain spaces, semicolons, quotation marks and commas

· not be the same as a sequence (macro) command

· not be the same as the name of a constant.

The latter constraints are necessary for the FAMOS formula interpreter to be able to distinguish amongvariable names, numbers and operators. But if you absolutely must use names which don't adhere tothese rules, it's possible to place the names in formulas by writing them within curved brackets.

Example

LOAD 123 Measurement.ascMy Result = sin (123 Measurement) ; Wrong!My Result = sin ({123 Measurement}) ; OK!

Variable names can be extended in formulas by an index or by component labels in order to addresscertain elements of a variable. The section "Indexing variables" of this chapter describes the syntax usedin that operation.

Attention

The use of special characters in names, such as question marks, exclamation points etc. is to begenerally avoided.

Question marks, for example, are permitted in variable names, but can have undesired consequences insome cases. The adaptation of a variable name as a file name, which is common practice, faces thecomplication that question marks can not be used in file names. Furthermore, when calling a macros-sequence with parameters, you may want to extend the file name using question marks as wildcards(DOS-usage).

Names of functions as variable names are not prohibited, but for reasons of clarity not to be

126


Variables

recommended.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequences' command RENAME

Section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter

Section 'Indexing Variables' in this chapter

6.3 Data Types

The main characteristic of a variable is its data type. It determines the form of the display in the curvewindow, the admissibility of the variable as a parameter for mathematical functions, as well as the amountand type of characteristics associated with the variable.

FAMOS supports variables with the following data types, i.e., these can be created, processed andstored:

1. Normal waveforms

· measurement series sampled equidistantly

· one-dimensional vectors

2. Single values

3. XY-Waveforms· reduced time waveforms

· two-dimensional vectors

· characteristic curves

4. Complex waveforms

· magnitude/ phase

· real/ imaginary parts-representation

5. Text variables

6. TimeStamp-ASCII data sets7. Data groupsTake as an example the case of a curve measuring voltage over time, sampled equidistantly and readyfor processing. The voltage curve is a normal waveform. If its mean value is determined, the result is asingle value; if its spectrum is determined, the result is a complex waveform. These results may beprocessed further; the mean value, say, subtracted from the voltage or the spectrum divided by another toget a transfer function.

Determining the relative maxima of the voltage curve gives value pairs (time/ voltage) which amount to anxy-waveform. To save this waveform with a function, the file name -as text- is supplied as a parameter. Tomanage all these variables jointly, it is possible to collect them into a data group under a new name.

Not every data type is supported by every mathematical function. For example, the spectrum of an xy-waveform cannot be calculated.

Waveforms may have a length of anything between 0 (empty waveform) and over 250,000,000 data (=1,000,000,000 bytes). In practice, the maximum length is limited by the small size of data carriers.

Texts can contain at most 255 characters. This also applies to textual characteristics of waveforms, suchas name, unit and comments.

6.3.1 Normal Waveforms

A normal waveform is a one-dimensional field (vector) of real numbers with units, names etc. A sequenceof sampled values of a measured quantity represents a normal waveform.

Suppose that the current values 12 A, 14 A, 16 A, and 18 A were measured at the times 6 s, 7 s, 8 s, and

127Variables


9 s. Displayed as a value table, the data take the following form:

Time in s Current in A

6 12

7 14

8 16

9 18

In graphic representation, the current would be entered along the y-direction, and the time in the x-direction; in compliance with FAMOS' efficient storage method, outlined as follows: The numerical values12, 14, 16, and 18 for the current are stored. The unit for the y-coordinate, "A", is stored only once for alldata. It is not necessary, now, to store all numerical values to define the x-coordinate, because mostwaveforms are sampled equidistantly, making the time difference between adjacent samplings constant;in this case, 1s. What is stored, then, is the x-offset, which is the x-value of the first sampling (in this case6s), and the sampling time (delta-x), being the interval between two sampling values; and of course theunit of the x-coordinate. Finally, the waveform has a name, in terms of which it can be addressed andused. This waveform has a length of 4, meaning that it contains four sampling values.

The defining attribute, then, of a normal waveform is the presumed equidistantly spaced x-coordinate.

This is the case with equidistantly sampled measurements and also with data sets, where the x-coordinate is either not present or not of interest.

The actual data in a normal waveform are stored as a one-dimensional vector. The most importantcharacteristic values are the x-value of the waveform's first element of data, and the x-distance betweentwo consecutive values. In a time waveform, this would be the trigger time and sampling rate, which inconjunction with each other determine the corresponding time for each measurement value.

You can generate a normal waveform as per the following pattern:

NormalWave = Ramp (0, 1, 100)

The registration of a normal waveform in the variable list is shown below:A special case of a normal waveform is an empty waveform, meaning a waveform with a length of 0. Itcontains no data but has characteristics. This type of waveform is denoted in the variable list with aspecial symbol.

EmptyWave = All0( Ramp (1,1,2 ))Here you see the variable list's symbol of an empty waveform:

6.3.2 Single Values

A single value is a single real number associated with a name and possibly a unit, such as 'Minimum = 3.2A', or 'Number = 45'.

A single value can be interpreted as a special case of a normal waveform; one having the length 1.

Numerical values can be specified as whole or real numbers. The symbols "E" or "e" are used to expresspowers-of-ten, and are read as "ten to the power of ..". Decimal places smaller than unity are to be placed

128


Variables

after a decimal point not a comma, though the latter is customary in some cultures. The followingexpressions therefore represent the same number:

Number = 187Number = 0.187E+3Number = .187e3Number = 187.00

Integers without sign can be specified in hexadecimal format, for which the prefix 0x is used.

Number = 0x0 ;(=0)Number = 0x1 ;(=1)Number = 0xA ;(=10)Number = 0xFF ;(=255)Number = 0xFFFFFFFF ;(=4 294 967 295)

Here, the registration of a single value in the variable list:

The display of the numerical value can be optionally suppressed via the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variableslist".

Single values are often generated as the result of a function (e.g. in the calculation of a mean value) orsupplied to a function as a parameter (e.g. filter cut-off frequency).

6.3.3 XY-Waveforms

XY-waveforms arise where two values must be stored for each data point, namely, the (amplitude) valueand additionally the time- or x-value. FAMOS manages this information as two sets of values'components; one set containing all y-values and the other containing the x-values; both sets having, ofcourse, the same length.

FAMOS differentiates between:

· XY-waveforms with monotonous x-trace. This is inherent in all measured quantities recordedover time, as when generated with data-reducing procedures.

· XY-waveforms with non monotonous x-trace. This is common in characteristic curves.

Below you see the registration of xy-waveforms in the variable list:

The waveform components can also be indicated. Select the corresponding item in the context menu(click the right mouse button above the variable list) or in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list".

Generate an xy-waveform using the following formula line:

XYData = XYof( Ramp (0,1,100), Ramp (0,1,100))

Refer to the individual components in formulas using the suffixes .x and .y . For example, to double theamplitude of a reduced time-waveform, simply write:

XYData.Y = XYData.Y * 2

6.3.4 Complex Waveforms

Complex waveforms result primarily from Fourier transformations or more generally from the calculationof a waveform's spectrum.

ComplBP = Spec( Ramp ( 0,1,128 ))

129Variables


As with xy-waveforms, the data are managed in two sets of values' components. An additional parameter,over which both components are plotted, is also present and to be noted.

For example, the FFT of a voltage waveform generates a magnitude (unit: V) and a phase (unit: degrees),both over the frequency (unit: hertz).

Complex waveforms can be represented in three styles:

· Magnitude/ Phase (abbreviated MP in the variable list)

Phase may be stated in either degrees or radians. You can address the individual components via thesuffixes .M and .P.

· Decibel/ Phase (DP in the variable list)

This is the same as the representation in terms of magnitude and phase, however the magnitude isexpressed in dB, which amounts to the magnitude's logarithm times twenty. Transfer functions andfrequency responses are usually expressed logarithmically (in dB). Here, the magnitude is recorded indecibels, by convention. The phase can be expressed in degrees or radians. You can address theindividual components via the suffixes .D and .P.

· Real/ Imaginary part (RI in the variable list)

Individual components can be addressed via the suffixes .R and .I

Here, the registration of complex waveforms in the variable list is shown.

In the variable list above, the individual components are also registered. Registration of the components inthe variable list is optional and can be suppressed using either the context menu (click above the variablelist with the right mouse button) or menu item "Extra/ Options/ Variables list".

One can easily convert waveforms between the different representation styles by using mathematicalfunctions.

Magnitude_phase = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128))Magnitude = magnitude_phase.Mdecibel_phase = DB( magnitude_phase )Phase = decibel_phase.Preal_imag = RECT( magnitude_phase)RealPart = real_imag.R

Please make note of the following, when calculating with complex waveforms:

· The particular representational style employed for a complex waveform, whether RI, MP or DB,isn't important for a computation. Thus, one complex waveform given in MP, say, can be dividedby another one given in RI.

· A peculiarity of complex waveforms is the fact that both components always have the same x-axis scaling.

· The y-axis units must relate to each other in a manner appropriate to the particularrepresentational style employed. When using "RI", you need identical units in both y-axes; forstyles involving phase, one of the y-axes must have a phase unit.

130


Variables

· Phase can take the units "°" or "Degrees", by both of which are meant degrees on the scalebetween 0 and 360. However, the phase can also be stated without any unit or with thedesignation "Rad", which indicates an expression in radians, with a range between 0 and 2 * Pi.Since the phase of a complex waveform is of crucial importance, care must be taken not tointerpret it incorrectly when performing a calculation. If the phase has an invalid unit, theinterpretation is indefinite

6.3.5 Text Variables

Text variables are a text consisting of up to 255 characters. An example of their use would be for formingand storing file- and variable names. Certain functions require texts as parameters, for instance functionswhich set waveform units or comments.

Text constants must be enclosed in quotation marks.

TXpath = "c:\imc\dat" Comment = "created on 6/13/93 by J. Blow"TXEmpty = ""

Here, the registration in the variable list:

The display of the text variables' content can be suppressed via the dialog "Options/ Display".

To include special characters in text constants, use the "tilde" character (~) followed by three digitsrepresenting the ASCII-code of the special character desired, e.g.

Tabulator

Carriage return

Line Feed

Quotation mark

Example

TxCommand = "LOAD ~034c:\test.dat~034"

This produces a text which itself contains quotation marks.

TxCRLF = "Filename: ~013~010"

Generates a text constant including both CarriageReturn and LineFeed. This combination is used bymany text editing programs to begin a new line.

6.3.6 TimeStamp-ASCII

This is a rare and very special data format which imc measurement devices (such as µ-MUSYCS) cangenerate. Such data sets contain a list of texts (or generally, blocks of ASCII-code), each of which comeswith its own time stamp. In practice, this data type is generated when protocol or alarm lists are created.

Appearance in variables list:

131Variables


Many typical functions and commands cannot be applied to variables of this type. Such data sets canbasically only be processed by the functions of the so-called TimeStampASCII-Kit, which is included in thestandard FAMOS package, but is not registered by default.

Display of this data in the FAMOS Waveform-Editor is also not possible, but instead, tabularrepresentation can be used in the curve window.

6.3.7 Data Groups

Data groups themselves do not contain data in the usual sense, rather, they amount to a list of waveformsor texts assembled into a group with a collective name.

This is useful for grouping waveforms with related content, e.g., data stemming from different channels inthe same measurement sequence. An entire group can be stored in unison, or it can be directlytransferred in unison to mathematical functions. In the latter case, the function acts on each element ofthe group in succession.

A group can consist of waveforms or texts, but not of other groups.

Here the registration of data groups in the variable list:

You can choose whether to display the component channels in a group. You can switch the display modeby left-clicking the mouse on the [+] or [-]symbol which appears next to the group icon, or via thecontext menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse over the variables list; command "Show channels") orvia the dialog called via "Extra"/ Options"/ "Variable list".

To address a particular channel in a group, place a colon after the group name and then specify thechannel, which is identified either by its name or by its index within the group. The index must be set inbrackets. The index "1" refers to the first element of the group.

MeanK2 = Mean( MeasurementNo123:Channel002)MeanK2 = Mean( MeasurementNo123:[2] )

The channel index refers to the momentary position of a particular channel within the group and isn't achannel's permanent property Thus, it is subject to rearrangements in the group order.

Channel2 = MeasurementNo123:[2]Delete MeasurementNo123:Channel001AlsoChannel2 = MeasurementNo123:[1]

In the above example, deleting the first channel has altered the index order of the remaining channels;"Channel2" and "AlsoChannel2" are thus equivalent variables.

Waveforms and texts can be added to and removed from groups as desired.

Reference

FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions by Group', function group '11 Group Management'

Chapter 'Functions', section 'Data groups as function parameters'

6.4 Structured Waveforms

Normally, a waveform consists of a collection of values which are associated by a particular measurementseries.

Example: the moment a predetermined triggering condition is met, measurements are taken at a certainport for a prearranged period of time, and the measurement values are recorded as a waveformdesignated by a particular name.

FAMOS' data management capabilities, however, support more elaborate structuring of waveforms, in

132


Variables

accommodation to the practical demands of measurement and control technology.

6.4.1 Segments

A waveform may be segmented, with each segment having the same length and the entire waveform'slength being a whole number multiple of the segment length. Data management operations can beperformed on an individual segment as well as on the complete waveform.

Example

A measurement device calculates a 1024-point FFT each time a defined triggering condition is met on achannel, and appends the newly-calculated data to an existing data set. If ten measurements wereexecuted, the data set contains a total of 10240 values, organized in 10 segments with a length of 1024values apiece.

6.4.2 Events

A waveform can also be structured as several events, which, unlike segments, can take different lengths.Thus, an additional list containing the beginning and length of each event must be managed along withthe waveform. Various waveform characteristics, such as trigger time and sampling rate, are alsomanaged in the capacity of characteristics of particular events.

Example

A measurement device executes a measurement series each time a predefined trigger condition is met,and online data reduction is employed. The amount of values actually stored in each measurement seriesvaries. All the measurement series are appended to one waveform. The measuring rate may be changedfrom one measurement series to the next. In order to later evaluate the accumulated data in a sensiblemanner, each measurement series (=event) must be stored along with its trigger time, sampling rate andnumber of values.

Of course it would be possible to create separate waveforms instead of storing several events to onewaveform. However, when handling large numbers of measurement series, there are cases whereorganization of data as several events (belonging to fewer waveforms) provides greater efficiency and ahelpful overview to the management process.

An individual segment or event can be accessed by its index, as explained in the next chapter.

Reference

Function group 'Data types, Data Format' (Function Reference)

Function group 'Event-Waveforms' (Function Reference)


6.5 Indexing Variables

To refer parts of a waveform to a formula, you can use a component-specific suffix (.B, :X etc.), or accessa particular element in the waveform using its index. Indexes are stated in brackets after the variablename. Multiple indexes are separated by commas. The index of a waveform's first element is always "1".

The most common use of this procedure is to access a specific value (a sample) of an unstructuredwaveform. This may occur on either side of an assignment; on the right, in order to, say, define a functionparameter; or on the left for setting a particular value. An index may be stated as a constant or as asingle-value variable.

Data = Ramp ( 1,1,100 )Value at50 = Data[ 50 ]Index = 49Data[ Index ] = Valueat50

As a result of the above manipulations, the values in positions 49 and 50 in the waveform are now thesame.

133Variables


Indexes may also be calculated:

Data[1] = Data[leng?( Data)]

The first and last values of the waveform handled above are now equal.

Texts can also be indexed:

Directory = "c:\imc\dat"OldDrive = Directory[1]Directory[1]= "d"

The text variable 'Directory now contains "d:\imc\dat", the variable 'OldDrive' contains "c".

With two-component data-types, you must first state the index of the desired sample and then thecomponent suffix:

cplx = FFT( Ramp( 0,1,128 ))cplx1 = cplx[2]; cplx1 : compl. waveform with length 1magnitude1 = cplx[2].B ; magnitude1 : single value (magnitude)

Invalid indexes cause an error message to appear:

Value100 = Ramp( 0,1,100 )Incorrect = value100[101]

index = 0i[index] = 3

Indexes may also be used to specify a channel in a data group. The bracket should be preceded by acolon in this case:

NewGroup:Channel1 = Ramp( 0,1,100 )NewGroup:SinOfC1 = sin (NewGroup:[1])SinOf1 = NewGroup:[2]Delete NewGroup:[1]AlsoSinOf1 = NewGroup:[1]

Please note that by deleting a preceding channel, the index for channel NewGroup:SinOfC1 has changed.

Indexes, separated by a comma, can be combined:

ValueNo10 = NewGroup:SinOfC1[10]ValueNo10 = NewGroup:[1,10]

In both cases above, the 10th value of the 1st channel is assigned to "ValueNo10".

With structured waveforms (involving events or segments), each structural level must be indexedindividually.

Example

Assume a segmented waveform with several segments of length 10. Then:

Segment3 = SegmWaveform[3] SingleValue = SegmWaveform[3, 10]Group:Channel1 = SegmWaveformSingleValue = Group:[1,3,10]

In the first line the entire 3rd segment is assigned; thus, "Segment3" has a length of 10. In the second andfourth lines, the last value of the third segment of the waveform, a single value, is assigned.

6.6 Data Formats

Data (numbers) can be stored in various formats.

FAMOS differentiates between real and integer formats. Real numbers are stored in a mantissa/exponent representation. Any number -between a fixed range and subject to a maximum level ofprecision- can be expressed. The range and precision are determined by the digits available for the

134


Variables

representation of the mantissa and exponent.

Real number formats

4 byte real float 7 decimal places are significant

8 byte real double 15 decimal places are significant

An integer format, by contrast, can only express discrete values located within a range whose limits aredictated by the width of the bit string; every possible combination of bits signifies one particular value.

For example, a 1-byte integer format without sign can express 256 discrete values from 0 (no bits set) to255 (all 8 bits set).

To represent a physical quantity using integer format in a sensible manner, it is necessary to provideinformation on how to convert from discrete numbers to physical values; this is done by specifying therange the physical values can take.

Example

A voltage measurement in the range between 5 and 10 V is recorded and stored in 1-byte integer format.A numerical value of 0 corresponds to 5 V and a numerical value of 255 corresponds to 10 V. Larger orsmaller physical values are out of bounds and can't be represented. The maximum resolution for voltagevalues is 5 V/255 = 0.02 V.

Digital data are a special case which can only take values of either 0 or 1, and come without scalinginformation. They are indicated in the variable list by their own symbol.

Representation of digital data in the variable list:

Integer number formats enjoy widespread use in measurement and control technology because they canbe directly generated by ADC's. Thus they can be stored and computationally manipulated in astraightforward manner.

FAMOS doesn't require you to be constantly alert to the particular data format used in a waveform. Themathematical functions provided will work, regardless of the parameter's data format. The intra-systemcalculations are always performed using real numbers and the results of most functions are stored in thatformat, to ensure suitable precision.

Nevertheless, the user can convert a data set between the different data formats at will. Converting from areal-number format to an integer format, for example, may be sensible in some cases (subject to theresolution required) where conservation of space in storage or in the data carrier is aimed for.

Integer data formats

1 byte with / without sign 28-1 quantization levels

2 bytes with / without sign 216-1 quantization levels

4 bytes with / without sign 232-1 quantization levels

digital values 0 and 1

Reference


Chapter 'Functions', 'Options / Functions Dialog'

FAMOS Reference Manual, function 'SetDataFormat'

135Variables


6.7 Showing Variables

This section describes how to display waveforms in a curve window. Please refer to the Curve Windowdocumentation for information about operating a Curve window. If you wish to display waveforms in anumerical format, refer to the chapter "Data Editor" of this manual.

Single values and texts can be displayed in the variable list after the variable name. This requires thepertinent check boxes in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list" to be activated.

File-browser offers a practical option to load and display waveforms in a single step. For details, see thechapter 'File Browser' of this manual.

6.7.1 Showing Variables Individually

Select one or several variables from the list. Then select "Show" in the "Variable" menu or click on thecorresponding button in the tool bar. The button <F4> may also be used as an alternative.

Each variable selected is displayed. If the variable is a single value, the numerical value with unit isdisplayed in a single-value-window; if the variable is a waveform, the curve is displayed in the curvewindow.

If the variable is a text, a small window containing the text is displayed. Each subsequently selected textvariable is displayed in the same window, so that only one text variable can be viewed at any one time.

If a variable already displayed is selected, its window emerges into the foreground.

The behavior of the curve window can be set in the "Extra/ Options/ Curve window" menu:

Never hidden by main window: if this option is selected, the curve windows are always in front of theFAMOS main window. Otherwise, when activating the main window, curve windows in the same region ofthe screen may be partly or entirely obscured.

A list of all curve windows currently open is available in the menu accessed via the menu item "Window"/"Curve window list". By selecting the desired window in this menu, it is possible to move quickly amongthe windows. This is the quickest way to find a certain curve window when several are open.

Reference

All other settings can be accessed directly from the curve window menu bar. Please refer to the CurveWindow documentation for detailed information about operating the curve windows.

Variables themselves possess characteristics, which determine their representation in the curve windows.For example, a set color and scaling can be assigned to the waveform. Refer to the section 'Showing andChanging Characteristics' in this chapter.

Representation of variables in tabular form is described in the chapter 'Data Editor'.

See also Chapter 'Sequences', command SHOW.

6.7.2 Showing Variables Together

Select several variables from the list and then "Show together" from the variable menu. Alternatively, youcan use the key combination SHIFT + <F4>.

The currently selected waveforms are then displayed together in one curve window.

Otherwise there are no differences from the menu item "Show variable" treated above.

6.7.3 Loading Curve Configurations

By selecting "<>/ Save As...", the current settings in a curve window can be saved in a curve windowconfiguration file. This file then contains the name of the waveform first employing certain configurationsettings to be remembered, as well as the particular configuration settings in question.

You can retrieve the stored configuration using the menu item "Extra/ Load curve configuration". Thisgenerates a curve window featuring the previously stored configuration. The configuration file contains the

136


Variables

name of the waveform which was present when the configuration was stored, but not the curve itself orthe appertaining data. If a data file (waveform) with that name still exists, it will automatically be accessedand displayed when the configuration is summoned. If none any longer exists but is due to be generated(e.g. as the result of a computation or by loading a file), it, then, will automatically be displayed in thecurve window.

A curve configuration can also be retrieved directly from an open curve window by selecting menu item"Load".

6.7.4 QuickView-Window

The QuickView-Window is another method of displaying waveforms in a curve window.

Select menu item "Extra/ QuickView-Window".. An additional curve window appears, in which all variablescurrently registered in the variable list are displayed. If you change the selection in the list by keyboard ormouse, the waveforms displayed in the QuickView-Window are immediately updated to reflect the latestselections. If no waveform is selected, the QuickView-Window remains empty.

The QuickView-Window offers a convenient and rapid overview of open waveform files.

Example

A measurement consisting of several waveforms is loaded into FAMOS. You want to do a quick review ofthe curve shapes in order to seek out curves fulfilling specific criteria.

Open the QuickView window via the menu item "Extra/ QuickView Window". Then select the firstwaveform in the variable list. Now use the direction keys to scan through the list of waveforms. Thecurrently selected waveform is always displayed in the window.

Remarks

· FAMOS notes the position and size of the QuickView window when it is closed and it reappearsin the same way at the next call.

· To obtain an overview of large amounts of files stored in different folders, you can also use thefile browser. Loading and displaying waveforms and, if necessary, switching into the next foldercan all be accomplished in one step

6.7.5 Showing Variables in an Existing Curve Window

If you wish to display additional waveforms in a curve window which is already open, then from within thiscurve window you may stipulate new variables for it to display. This procedure is described in detail in theCurve Window documentation.

Another possibility is the method of "Drag&Drop" between the variable list and the curve window, usingthe mouse. Proceed as follows:

1. Select the desired variable in the variable list.

2. Left-click the mouse on the selected entry in the variables list and keep the mouse button presseddown.

3. Click and hold the left mouse button.

4. While still holding the left mouse button, move the mouse across the desired curve window; this isknown as dragging. The mouse pointer is constantly updated, to reflect whether or not the variable maybe dropped onto the present position.

5. Release the mouse button with the pointer over the desired curve window. This is known as dropping.Depending on where exactly the drop is performed, the variables' display is arranged in one of thefollowing ways:

· Above / below a coordinate system: a new coordinate system is generated and the variables aredisplayed in it.

· Inside an existing coordinate system: the variables are displayed with a new axis within thiscoordinate system.

137Variables


· On one axis: the variables are displayed in the coordinate system with reference to this axis.

6.8 Showing and Changing Characteristics

Every variable is associated with supplementary information in addition to the actual data values, forexample, there are the characteristics variable name, data type, number format, commentary, trigger andsample time, etc. The characteristics applicable to a specific variable depend on the variable's type.Characteristics can be queried and changed in FAMOS using a dialog of commands and functions. Thischapter explains how to show and change the characteristics of a variable using a dialog.

6.8.1 Properties Dialog

Select variables from the variable list and then select "Properties.." in the "Variable" menu. Oralternatively, click on the corresponding button in the tool bar in the main window or use the <F5> button.

A dialog appears as a stack of several index cards. The particular make-up of the "characteristics" indexcard depends on the data type of the current variable. The other index cards are only accessible if thevariable in question is of the "waveform" type. Activate a different index card by clicking on its marker tabor by simultaneously pressing the ALT button and the underlined letter in the title of the marker tab.

If you have selected several variables in the list, use the screen-buttons ">>" and "<<" to pass from onevariable to the next, thereby updating the dialog to reflect the properties of the current variable.

The "Cancel" screen-button terminates the dialog, and changes made in the current index card aredisregarded. The screen-button "OK", by contrast, closes the dialog while adopting changes which havebeen made to its settings.

Attention

When switching to another index card by activating another card or clicking the screen-buttons ">>" and"<<", the changes made in the cardfile are accepted. If you wish to discard the changes, click on "Cancel"before switching cards.

138


Variables

6.8.2 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms)

The dialog "Properties" (for a waveform) appears as follows:

Name

The variable's name can be changed here. The name can have 255 characters at most. Refer to thesection "Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names.

Data type

The data type of the current waveform is stated here. This box can not be edited. An explanation of thedata types offered is to be found in the section "data types" of this chapter.

Data format

The number format in which the data are filed is stated here. If the waveform has two components, thedata format for each component is stated individually. This box also can not be edited. If you wish tochange the data format you must click on the marker tab for the index card "Data Format". An overview ofavailable data formats can be found in the section "Data formats" of this chapter.

Comment

Here you may enter a comment, which may contain a maximum of 255 characters.

Group

If the waveform in question is assigned to a group, the data group's name is indicated here, otherwise thebox remains empty. This box can not be edited.

File Name

If the waveform was loaded from a file, the file's name will be indicated here, otherwise this box remainsempty. The box cannot be edited.

Units (X-unit, Y-unit, phase unit..)

Here you may redefine the waveform's units. Refer to the section "Units" of this chapter for information onnaming the units. The inscription which appears with the "units"- box depends on the particular data typethe waveform belongs to.

Total size

139Variables


In this non-editable box the total length of the waveform is stated.

X0

You can set the x-offset (i.e. the x-coordinate of the first vale) to a new value in this box. Or, for two-component waveforms, define the offset of the parameter.

X-Delta

The sampling time or the increment of the waveform's x-axis can be redefined here. The waveform'snumerical values and units do not change. The sampling time is the difference between the x-coordinatesof two adjacent points. The sampling time should take a value which is not smaller than the offset by toomany powers-of-ten, otherwise the x-axis will not have adequate resolution.

Created

Redefine the trigger time for the variable using this function. The time is entered and displayed in theformat set in the Windows-"Control Panel". The entries of the time and the date should be kept separateby at least one space. Enter the year as a two-digit number in order to save space; the valid range isbetween 1980 and 2042, thus between 80..99 and 00..42.

Fractions of seconds must be separated by a comma or a period. The maximal resolution for the triggertime is 10µs.

Example:

11.11.95 00:00:00,5

The trigger time has been set to 500µs past midnight.

Cancel

Click on this button to exit without storing any changes.

OK

Click on this button when exiting to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted if invalid entrieshave been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they are corrected.

>>, <<

If you have selected several variables before opening the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for therespective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes madeto a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method.

Reference

FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '16 Properties'

Chapter 'Sequences', command group "C>" 'Variables, Execution'

140


Variables

6.8.3 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Texts)

The dialog "Properties" (text) has the following appearance:

Name

The variable's name can be changed here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters Refer to the section"Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names.

Comment

Enter a comment about the variable here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters.

Group

If the text is assigned to a group, the name of the data group is indicated. Otherwise, the box, which isnon-editable, remains empty.

File Name


Length

The number of characters in the text is stated in this box. It can not be edited.

Content

The content of text variables can be changed in this box. The text may have a maximum of 255characters.

Cancel


OK

Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted ifinvalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they have been corrected.

>>, <<

141Variables


If you have selected several variables before entering the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for therespective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes madeto a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method.

Reference



6.8.4 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Groups)

The dialog "Properties" (group) has the following appearance:

Name

The variable's name can be changed here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters Refer to the section"Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names.

Comment

Enter a comment about the variable here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters.

File Name


Number of channels

The number of variables assigned to this group is displayed in this box. The box can not be edited.

Channels

All channels assigned to this group are listed. Their names and respective data types are stated. Bydouble-clicking on one of the entries you open the "Properties" dialog for the corresponding channel. Youcan also select several entries and then click on the button <Channel Info>.

Cancel

142


Variables


OK

Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted ifinvalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they have been corrected.

>>, <<

If you have selected several variables before entering the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for therespective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes madeto a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method.

Channel Info

Opens the "Properties" dialog of selections made in the channel list.

Reference


FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '11 Group Management'


6.8.5 Dialog Properties/ Structure

This dialog card is available only for waveforms. Any structuring of the waveform in question, in, say,events or segments, is indicated here. This index card normally does not apply to unstructuredwaveforms, for which most dialog elements' boxes are grey.

Segments

If the waveforms in question are segmented, this is where an indication of the number and length of thesegments will be located. The entries for z0, z-Delta and z-units are used for configuring the z-axis, whichis a feature of certain of the curve window's representation styles (waterfall diagrams, color maps), if thecorresponding option in the curve window ("Options/ 3D") is active.

The entries "z0" and "z-units" can also be used for manipulating the z-axis in the display of unsegmentedwaveforms, where multiple waveforms are displayed together in a single curve window for purposes of

143Variables


comparison.

Events

This group of controls is only accessible in the case of event-structured waveforms (where there aremultiple trigger events within the waveform). The characteristics x-Offset (Pretrigger), x-Delta (samplingtime) and trigger time no longer pertain to the waveform as a whole, but can be specific to each event.The characteristics can be viewed and changed for the event corresponding to the entry in the input box"Info Event #".

Hint: Characteristics which are identical for all events are indicated on the index card "Charact.",otherwise the entry in the pertinent box will be "???". To set a characteristic of all the events to a commonvalue, it is therefore enough to replace the corresponding "???" entry with the desired value.

6.8.6 Dialog Properties/ Display

This dialog card is available only for waveforms. Here you can assign properties which affect therepresentation of the waveform.

Colors in Curve Window

As a default, the colors in which a waveform is represented is determined by the current settings in theCurve Window. The entry "auto" then appears in the combination box. It is possible, however, to assign aset color to a waveform. In that case the waveform is always displayed in that color in every CurveWindow. To accomplish this, open the combination box and select the color from the list.

Scaling in Curve Window

The default setting, indicated by the entry "auto", determines the scaling of the y-axis from the value rangeof the waveform. You can also arbitrarily set the scaling. To do this, set the minimum and maximum of thedesired range using the corresponding text boxes. This setting will only be employed when the option"automatic" is selected for scaling the axis in the Curve Window. In other words, a set scaling of the axisin the curve window overrides the waveform's characteristic.

Reference

Manual 'Curve Window, Chapter 'Curve Window/ options'

144


Variables

Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', functions 'SetDisplayY', 'DisplayY?', 'SetColor', 'Color?'

6.8.7 Dialog Properties/ Data Format

This dialog card is available only for data sets. It shows the data format in which the values of a data setare stored. The following example shows the index card for a complex waveform; in a one-componentwaveform only one group of dialog boxes would appear.

Data Format

In this list box the current data format for the particular component. To change the data format, simplychoose the desired format from the list.

min/ max

If an integer data format is selected, the scaling of data in the physical value range is indicated here. Thecurrent settings are displayed if the waveform is already in the integer format. If you have just choseninteger format from the list box, whereas the data set was previously in real format, then sensible valuesfor the conversion are offered as suggestions. Towards that end, the minimum and maximum of the dataset are determined. In a subsequent conversion to integer format the full range would be retained at themaximum possible resolution. With large data sets, determining the extreme values can be very time-consuming.

Always retain format and scale

If this option is activated, the data format can not be changed by an assignment command. If, forexample, one value of an integer format waveform is set to a real number, the data format of the entirewaveform would usually be reset to real, in order to avoid any loss of data. This behavior can besuppressed switching on this check box.

Cancel


OK

Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted ifinvalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until the have been corrected.

145Variables


Reference

Section 'Data Formats' in this chapter

Manual 'FAMOS: Function Reference', functions 'SetDataFormat', 'DataFormat?'

6.9 Deleting Variables

Select one or several variables in the variable list and then "Delete" in the "Variable" menu. Alternatively,click on the corresponding button in the tool bar. The variables are then removed from the variable list andthus unavailable to FAMOS.

In accordance with the corresponding setting in the dialog "Options" / "Variables list", the "Del"-key canalso be used to accomplish the purpose.

You can also delete all variables in one step by selecting "Restart" in the "File" menu.

If you mark a data group in the variable list for deletion, it will be completely purged including all data setsand texts.

Reference

Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command 'DELETE'

6.10 Group/ Ungroup variables (data groups)

As described in the section "Data types", waveforms and texts can be assembled into groups with acollective name.

To accomplish this with existing variables, first select some in the variable list. Then select menu item"Variables/ Group".

A dialog appears in which to enter the group name:

Group name

You can now enter a new name in the text box. If other groups already exist, they may be selected in thecombination box. The selected variables are then added to the existing group.

In section "Variable names" the rules governing assignment of names are outlined and those apply to thisprocedure. Initial digits and spaces, in particular, are prohibited.

OK

If you have provided a valid name for a group, the current selection of variables is consolidated to a groupwith that name (if groups were selected, they are disregarded).

Cancel

The grouping of variables is not carried out.

To undo the aggregation of variables into a group, select menu item "Variables/ Ungroup". If a group isthen selected in the variable list, all its channels are made autonomous, and the group is canceled. If youselect only a particular channel but not the group as a whole, that channel alone is released from thegroup and the group persists.

Specific channels must be indicated in the variable list in order to be selected. If a desired one is not, click

146


Variables

on the [+] -symbol to the left of the group symbol. The context menu may also be used to switch channelregistration on or off (right-click the mouse above the variable list).

Reference

FAMOS Function Reference, 'Functions By Groups', function group 'Group Management'

Section 'Data Types' in this chapter.

6.11 Permanent variables and temporary variables

A variable's life normally extends until it is intentionally deleted by the user; such variables are known as "permanent". Variables which come about as the results of formulas or by being imported via the "Loadfile" dialog are always of the permanent kind.

By contrast, variables can also be "temporary", and such variables are eventually deleted automatically.To date, temporary variables can only be created when working with the built-in File Browser. Thevariables are automatically deleted when the current folder in the File browser is switched.

Temporary variables are denoted in the variables list by a special symbol.

A variable created as a temporary variable can later be transformed into a permanent one. To do this, usethe command "Make Permanent" in the "Variable"-menu.

6.12 Exporting/ Importing Variables

Data can be exchanged between various imc applications using the menu items "Variables/ Export" and"Variables/ Import".

Export variables by selecting one or several variables in the list. The variable is exported. It remainsunchanged within FAMOS, but is now available for import to other imc applications.

Import variables by selecting "Import" in the "Variable" menu. A variable previously exported from anotherimc application can thus be imported to FAMOS. An error message is generated if no variable wasexported.

Reference

Curve Manager manual, chapter 'Curve Window/ Export'

Chapter 'DDE-Interface'

Chapter 'Sequences', commands 'IMPORT', 'EXPORT'

6.13 Playing Back Variables

The imc Sound Kit is delivered together with FAMOS. If the Sound Kit is registered in FAMOS as "on", theadditional menu item "Variables/ Play" is available.

When using this option, the selected variables are converted internally to 16-bit monowave files andplayed back, provided that an appropriate output device (sound card) is connected.

Reference

Online Help for 'Sound-Kit'.

Chapter 'Functions', section 'imc-Kit-Interface'

147Variables


6.14 Constants and Predefined Variables

Numerical and textual constants can be entered into formulas directly:

Data = Data + 12 Directory = Tadd( "c:\","imc\dat" )Mean = 123.22 'V'ASCIIcode = 0x64

FAMOS has several predefined constants at its disposal. These constants can be used as single values.No new value can be assigned to them, however, and they are not registered in the variable list.

To use predefined constants in formulas without typing them in manually, select the group "A> Constants,predefined variables" in the function list (under the "Standard" index card) and then click on theappropriate function entry. The constant's name is written to the current position in the editor box.Alternatively, you can place the constant's name at the desired position using the Drag&Drop techniquewith the mouse.

Furthermore, there are a number of predefined variables available. The statistics function "Stat(...)"promptly calculates all of them. Afterwards you can insert these variables into formulas. When thestatistics function is executed again, the predefined variables are recalculated and obsolete values areoverwritten with new ones. Care should therefore be taken to use any desired predetermined variablesbefore calling the statistics function once to often.

The predefined variables are not indicated in the variable list. They may not be changed individually in aformula and thus may not appear on the left side of an assigning operator in a formula.

Group "A> constants, predefined variables"

Constants and predefined variables in the function list

Predefined constants and variables

sRMS rms value of waveform (root mean square)

Euler Euler number e

InDegr constant for converting radians to degrees

InRad constant for converting degrees to radians

PI circle constant PI

2*PI 2 * circle constant PI

sMax maximum value of waveform

148


Variables

sMaxPos X-coordinate of the maximum of a waveform

sMin minimum value of waveform

sMinPos X-coordinate of the minimum of a waveform

sMean arithmetic mean of a waveform

Stdev standard deviation of a waveform

Reference

FAMOS Function Reference: function 'Stat'

6.15 Units

Every waveform may have one or more units. Each unit can, if desired, be reset using appropriatefunctions or commands. You can also use the "Properties" dialog to accomplish this. The maximumlength a unit may take is 255 characters. Units are processed, calculated and adapted whenmathematical functions are executed, provided that the units you supply are registered SI-units.

The following are the fundamental SI-units supported by FAMOS:

A Ampere electric current

cd candela light intensity

K Kelvin temperature

kg kilogram mass

m meter length

s seconds time

The following SI-units are also supported:

Unit Name Physical Quantity Conversion

°C Celsius temperature 1 °C = 1 K for temperature differences

C Coulomb electric charge 1 C = 1 As

F Farad electric capacitance 1 F = 1 As/V

H Henry inductivity 1 H = 1 Vs/A

Hz Hertz frequency 1 Hz = 1 1/s

J Joule energy 1 J = 1 Nm = 1 Ws

lm lumen light flux

lx lux illuminance 1 lx = 1 lm/m2

mol moles mass

149Variables


N Newton force 1 N = 1 kgm/s2

Ohm Ohm electric resistance 1 Ohm = 1 V/A

Pa Pascal pressure 1 Pa = 1 N/m2

S Siemens electric conductance 1 S = 1 A/V

T Tesla magnetic flux density 1 T = 1 Vs/m2

V Volt voltage

W Watt electric power 1 W = 1 VA

Wb Weber magnetic flux 1 Wb = 1 Vs

Additional units and pseudo-units, which are recognized but disregarded in calculations:

dB decibels not a unit, indicates logarithmic representation

Degr degrees angle, range: 0 ... 360

empty not a unit

% percent not a unit

Rad radians angle, range: 0 2*Pi

When defining units, you may use the units in any arbitrary combination. Be aware, however, that prefixessuch as m-, k-, or M- for milli-, kilo-, mega- etc. may not be used, as they would be misinterpreted byFAMOS as arbitrary units and thus not be combined or canceled with the units of other quantities in acalculation.

The kilogram is an exception. It must be entered as kg and may not be split up.

To add exponents to a unit, use the exponentiation character "^x" (where x is the exponent) followed bythe exponent. A reciprocal exponent (i.e. root) can be created using "^1/x" (where x is the root).

Example

kgm/s^2 (Newton, unit of force)

m^2 (square meter, unit of area)

m^3 (cubic meter, unit of volume)

m/s (meters per second, unit of velocity)

m/s^2 (meters per seconds squared, unit of acceleration)

ms^-2 = m/ s^2

1/ms (interpreted as 1/(ms))

1/s (1 over seconds, unit of frequency)

VA (Volt Amperes, unit of electrical power)

These units are not supported:

150


Variables

g (grams)

mA (milli-Amperes)

Volt (correct: "V")

Prohibited units can just as easily be assigned to waveforms, as long as no computations are performedon such waveforms. Otherwise, the units will be incorrectly interpreted and consequently misused.

Powers of ten

If the numerical values in a waveform would be more sensibly expressed in units with a powers-of-tenprefix (kilo-, Mega-, etc.), use the basic form of the unit but supply the appropriate power-of-ten as afactor. For example, a waveform consisting of values in the milliampere range can be multiplied by 0.001and expressed in Amperes.

In graphic representation of waveforms, prefixes such as milli and kilo are popular, as they help avoidgraphically representing powers-of-ten.

The following prefixes are in use:

p 10-12 pico

n 10-9 nano

µ 10-6 micro

m 10-3 milli

K 10+3 kilo

M 10+6 mega

G 10+9 giga

Not all units can be combined with all prefixes, as illustrated in the following example:

Remarks

Milli-seconds (ms) exist, but not kilo-seconds; rather "E+3s".

A coordinate axis with a value range of 0.001s to 0.020s is labeled with the numerical values from 1...20and the unit "ms".

Units are aggregated through multiplication and can cancel each other out through division. Thus themultiplication of a waveform with values of a current with a waveform consisting of voltages, including thecorresponding units "A" and "V", yields a product-waveform with units of power, "W".

Squaring a waveform consisting of distances and taking the unit "m" yields a waveform of areas and theunit "m^2".

Division of a waveform of voltages by a single value taking the unit "A" for a current yields a waveformlabeled with the unit "Ohm", representing resistances.

Units of numbers

When entering formulas, write units immediately after the numerical values. Thus, it is not necessary tofirst create a single value and then assign a unit to it by calling a function. Units must be enclosed insingle quotation marks and positioned directly after the entry for the value.

Remarks

x = y * 3.5 'V'Mean = GInt (Wave, 2E-3 's') / 2E-3 's'

Where "Wave" is a normal waveform.

151Variables


User-defined units

To prevent units from being computed with each other, enclose the units in double quotation marks. Theunits will then be interpreted as user-defined and disregarded by the FAMOS-algorithm which calculateswith units.

Power1 = 220'V' * 1.01'A'Power2 = 220'"V"' * 1.01'A';--- or also ---YUNIT U1 VYUNIT U2 "V"Power1 = U1 * 1.01'A'Power2 = U2 * 1.01'A'

Power1 is assigned the unit 'W', but Power2 the unit 'VA'.

Reference

Curve Window documentation, chapter 'Curve Window/ Export'



6.16 Memory management / Data Manager options

FAMOS' memory requirements during run-time mainly consist of the storage space needed foradministering variables (waveforms).

For this purpose, FAMOS first uses the working memory (RAM, virtual working memory) made availableby the system. If this isn't sufficient, the waveforms are transferred to the hard drive as temporary files.

The memory necessary for storing a waveform can be estimated roughly on the basis of the waveform'slength and data format; e.g., 10 channels having 1000000 readings each and 2 Bytes per reading takeabout 20 Megabytes of memory. The size of waveforms which can be processed by FAMOS is limited to 2Gigabytes. The resulting maximum number of readings per waveform depends on the data format used;for instance, waveforms in Double (real, 8Bytes) can have approx. 250 million readings.

Also, storage of a single waveform cannot be distributed onto multiple drives; the whole waveform must fiton one of the ones available.

By default, the "C" drive is used for storage of temporary files. This setting can be changed, and you caneven make a list of drives, as well as exert influence the memory requirements .

The corresponding settings dialog is fund under "Extra" / "Options/ Miscellaneous/ Data Manager".

152


Variables

Options / Data Manager dialog

Note that changes made in this dialog only take effect at the start of a FAMOS session; no variables mayhave been created beforehand.

Drives for temporary files

You can specify up to 5 drives on which FAMOS can keep files for data sets and intermediate results.

FAMOS accesses these temporary files when making graphics displays of and when performingcalculations with waveforms. To guarantee fast running of FAMOS, it makes sense to specify a high-speed drive on which the waveforms are to be kept.

Therefore, enter your fastest drive at the top of the list, and after that the other hard drives and virtualdrives available to your system. Only hard drives should be specified; drives on removable media (e.g.USB sticks, memory cards) are not suitable for temporary files.

If there is not enough space for a data set on a drive, FAMOS tries to save it on the next drive in the list. Ifnone of the specified drives nor the working memory has enough space available, FAMOS returnscorresponding error messages.

The temporary files are always stored in folder "\tmp" of the respective drive. Exception: If it is the samedrive in which the Windows default folder for temporary files is located (set as the environmental variable"TEMP"), then that folder is used.

At least one drive has to be specified.

Entry in the System Registry

Alternatively, a different path can be specified in the System Registry (see regedit.exe). If a valid folder isspecified there, it will be used first (instead of the "tmp" folder of the first drive). Only if no moresufficient space is available there, the remaining drives will be used.

The entry in the Registry must be made before imc software is started.

ACHTUNG

Incorrect use of the Registry Editor may cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall the

153Variables


operating system. Check carefully that you have opened the correct Registry path.

How to do

Start the Registry-Editor. For that click on the Windows "Start"-Button, select "Run" and enter "regedit",confirm with "OK". Now open the Registry.Key:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\imc Measurement and Control\Default\CurveDataManager\Curves

Create a new "String Value" named "TmpDir" (right click on the key entry "Curves"). Change the value tothe desired path, e.g. "j:\mytemp" (doubleclick on "TmpDir"). Make sure that the specified path is present.Here too: you must not use drives on removable media.

Example

Registry entry for temporary files

Automatic

FAMOS always first requests the memory it needs from the operating system. Only if this is no longer ableto provide any free space (RAM or virtual working memory), temporary files are used to hold the data.

Maximum memory to occupy:

FAMOS limits the memory demanded of the operating system to the specified maximum. If more memoryis needed, data are sourced out to temporary files, even if the system has sufficient space available.

This option can, under certain circumstances, improve system performance in cases where equallymemory-intensive applications are running alongside FAMOS. Setting a limit ensures that otherapplications not having their own memory management, and thus dependent on the operating system'sworking memory, get a share of the system memory.

154


Functions

Functions

7.1 Introduction

FAMOS provides the user with multitude of functions for processing and analyzing data. These includesimple mathematical functions such as square roots and trigonometry, as well as complex analysisfunctions such as integration, differentiation or calculation of spectra, and even statistical functions suchas histograms or calculation of standard deviation.

A variety of manipulation functions specially designed for measurement technology are included, such asjoining of waveforms, resampling, creation of curve portions, smoothing, determination of function values,changing length of waveforms and waveform approximation.

The integrated formula interpreter allows the user to construct complex mathematical formulas from thebasic functions available. New waveforms can be calculated or existing waveforms may be changed usingformulas. Formulas can be entered and executed in the Input box in the FAMOS main window.Sequences (macros) can also be created. Sequences consist of a series of formulas, which areautomatically executed in succession.

Several possibilities exist for enhancing FAMOS to meet the demands of your special applications. Inaddition to supplemental library programs and optional software upgrades available from imc, you canintegrate your own user-defined function libraries.

imc Kit Interface

imc offers special function libraries, also known as "Kits", whose functions are also available whenoperating FAMOS, thus allowing the program to be enhanced for special applications. These kits providefunctions such as classification of data or loading and storing special data formats.

Reference

Section 'imc Kit Interface' in this chapter

Plugin-interface

Alongside the Kits, which are generally function libraries not having their own user interface, there are alsoso-called plug-ins for special applications. These come with a dialog-based user interface which fits rightinto the FAMOS main window. The File Browser plug-in is already provided, and further, future plug-insinclude, for example, a video player plug-in synchronized monitoring of video and measurement data, andan ASAM-ODS-Browser.

Standard DLL Interface

Functions from Windows-DLLs (DLL = Dynamic Link Library, standard format for function libraries underWindows) can be used in FAMOS. The user can use all the functions provided by MS-Windows itself as aprogramming interface. The user can also include his own DLLs, which must not have the defined imc-Kitinterface.

Reference

Section 'Standard DLL Interface' in this chapter

Filter Design:

This program offers the user the possibility of using tolerance range information to design recursive andtransversal filters which can be employed in FAMOS as digital filter functions.

7.2 Formulas

Formulas must be defined in order to execute mathematical functions. Formulas are entered in the editorbox or in the sequence window. A typical formula consists of a target variable name, an assignmentoperator and a mathematical expression. For example:

Number = 10 * 2

"Number" is the name of a variable to be created, "=" is the assignment operator, and "10 * 2" is themathematical expression. In this formula, the mathematical expression is first evaluated, resulting in thevalue 20. This value is then assigned to the variable "Number". A new single value variable "Number" has

155Functions


been created.

A comment may follow a formula. Comments start with a semicolon.

Data = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) ;This is a comment!;This too!

The name of a variable already existing may be selected as the target variable. The existing variablename is either partly or totally overwritten.

Create a new text variable:

var = "c:\imc\dat"

The text variable is overwritten:

var = Ramp ( 0,1,100 )

A new data group is created in which the first channel is defined:

NewGroup:Channel1 = var

A new channel is added to an existing data group:

NewGroup:Channel2 = var+2

An existing channel in a data group is overwritten:

NewGroup:Channel1 = 123

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Variable Names'

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data types: data groups'

The editor box may only contain one formula per line. If you have entered a formula, you can have thefunction carried out by activating the line it is on (e.g. by double-clicking on it) and then clicking on the"Execute" button which appears to the left of the currently activated line. Next, you can enter the nextformula on the next line of the editor box (or you can overwrite the current line if you no longer need it).

Any number of parentheses may be used in a mathematical expression. Each parenthesis must have aclosing partner. For example:

Number = 2 * (3 + min (Wave) - 1) + (-(-1))

"Wave" designates a normal waveform whose minimum value is calculated. The minimum value isincreased by 3 and decreased by 1. The result is then multiplied by 2. The expression (-(-1)) simplifies to+1 . If the minimum function yields a value of 1, the variable "Number" is assigned the value 7.

The program does not distinguish between lower and upper case letters in function and variable names.Please note that in physical units, upper and lower case letters can have a decisive effect! The followingformulas are equivalent:

Spectrum = dB (fft (Wave))SPECTRUM = DB (FFT (WAVE))

In this example, "Wave" is a normal waveform whose spectrum is calculated in decibels. A legiblecombination of capital and small letters is recommended. Lines written in capital letters only are oftenmore difficult to read.

Spaces may be used in formulas between all names and characters to improve legibility. The followingformulas are equivalent:

Spectrum = dB (fft (Wave))Spectrum = dB ( fft ( Wave ) )

Numerical values may be specified as integers or real numbers. The characters "E" or "e" are used toexpress powers of ten, read as "ten to the power of". Numerical values may also be specified inhexadecimal, use the prefix "0x". A decimal point is used to introduce places after the decimal, commasare not allowed. The following formulas are equivalent:

Number = Number + 163Number = Number + 0.163E+3Number = Number + .163e3Number = Number + 163.00Number = Number + 0xA3

156


Functions

In each of these cases, the number is increased by 163.

All data types may be combined in formulas, as long as the expression makes sense. For instance,adding complex waveforms is allowed, but the spectrum of a XY-waveform cannot be defined. Note thedeclaration of individual mathematical functions for details about which data types can be used with eachfunction.

Some functions do not yield a function value. They are also labeled as procedures. They change theparameter itself or evaluate predefined variables.

SetUnit( Data, "Second", 0 )Stat (3 * cos (Data))

An assignment operator may not be used in procedures since the function does not return a value whichcan be assigned. Thus, there is no target variable.

When executing a mathematical function, any SI units are automatically converted or canceled againsteach other, as appropriate to the calculation.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Units'

In two-component data types, component labels are used to access the individual components.

FFTerg = FFT( Ramp( 0,1,128)MagnitudeSquare = Sqr( FFTerg.M)

Waveforms and texts can be indexed in order to access individual elements of a variable. Indexes are setin brackets, several indexes (when allowed by the data type) are separated by commas. The index of thefirst element is 1.

Exactly one index may be specified for unstructured waveform and texts. The index allows access to asingle sample or a single character.

Wave = Ramp ( 0,1,100 )Wave[100] = 111;Index = 1Wave[ Index] = Wave[ 100]

The first and last value in the waveform now contain the value 111.

Indexes may also be calculated. The following formulas are equivalent

Wave[Index] = Wave[100]Wave[Index] = Wave[leng?( Wave)]

In text variables, use the index to access an individual character.

Dir = "c:\imc\dat"Drive = Dir[1]Dir[1] = "d"

The variable 'Drive' contains "c", the variable 'Dir' contains "d:\imc\dat".

Two-component variables can also be indexed.

The first value of a complex waveform's magnitude is queried:

FFTerg = FFT( Data )Magnitude1 = FFTerg[1].M

Here the result is a complex waveform with a length of 1, which is exactly the first value pair magnitude /phase in the waveform.

MagnitudePhase1 = FFTerg[1]

Variables can be partly changed by indexing an index which already exists. This also applies to the use ofcomponent labels.

Only the variable's second data value is changed, all other values remain unchanged:

var = Ramp ( 0,1,100)var[2] = 234

The variable is completely overwritten:

157Functions


var = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128))

The magnitude of a complex waveform is doubled, the phase set completely to zero:

FFTerg = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128))FFTerg.B = FFTerg.M * 2FFTerg.P = Ramp ( 0,1,128) * 0

Indexing of new variables is not allowed:

Delete varvar[1] = 1 ; Error !!!Delete FFTergFFTerg.P = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) ; Error !!!

Invalid indexes also result in an error message.

NotThere = Wave[ leng?( Wave) +1 ]AlsoError = Wave[0]

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Indexing Variables'

If a variable's name contains special characters (such as spaces, semicolons, exclamation marks, '+','-', ':' etc.), or begins with a digit, the name must be given inside of curved brackets:

MY RESULT = FFT (123 Measurement) ; Wrong!!!{MY RESULT} = FFT ({123 Measurement}) ; OK

7.3 Data Groups as Function Parameters

Channels in data groups can also be used as function parameters or result variables. The channel nameis separated from the group name by a colon.

NewGroup:Wave = Ramp ( 0,1,100 )NewGroup:SinWave = sin( NewGroup:Channel1 )

Addressing via index is also allowed; a colon should precede the address.

NewGroup:Channel1 = Ramp ( 0,1,100 )C1 = NewGroup:[1]C1 = NewGroup:Channel1

The last two formulas each provide the first channel in the group.

Value23 = NewGroup:[1,23]Value23 = NewGroup:Channel1[23]

The last two formulas each provide the 23rd value of the first channel in the group variable 'NewGroup'.

If a data group is directly transferred as function parameter, this function is executed in succession for allincluded channels. Individual results are sorted into a group. The program attempts to pass the names ofthe channels to the result. If several data groups are calculated together, the program uses the channelnames of the data group found first.

Example

Group1:A = 1Group1:B = 11.2

A group with two channels is created.

Group2 = Group1+ sin( Group1 )

A new group is derived from the first group and the channel names are adopted. The sine is calculated foreach curve in the group and then added to the particular channel.

158


Functions

Delete Group1Group3:X = Group2:BGroup3:Y = Group2:[1]

A further group is created containing the channels from group 2 in the reverse order. The names of thechannels are explicitly specified.

Group4 = Floor( Group3 + Group2 ) Delete Group3Group4 = Group4 - 12

When adding two groups, channels with the same index are added. The Floor function runs over bothchannels. A constant is deducted from each channel.

7.4 Indirect Use of Text Variables

Text variables can be used in formulas is a special way. A text variable in pointed parentheses < TextVar> is replaced by its contents by the formula interpreter before calculation.

Example

Wave = "slope"Spectrum = DB(FFT ( < Wave > ))

The formula interpreter first searches for the text variable 'Wave' in the variable list and replaces the textof the formula in the partial expression "Wave" with the textual content of the variables. Then the formulais calculated, here:

Spectrum = DB(FFT ( slope ))

The use of text variables in this way is useful only in sequences to specify variable or file names indirectly.

Reference

Refer to the chapter 'Sequences', section 'Use of Text Variables' for more information and examplesabout using text variables.

7.5 Error and Warning Messages

Every time a formula is executed, its syntax is first checked. The program checks for:

· invalid variable names

· invalid function names

159Functions


· mathematical signs in the incorrect position

· incorrectly positioned parentheses

· an incorrect number of parameters for a function

· use of invalid characters

· incorrect placement of assignment operator

If there is an error in syntax, an appropriate error message is generated and the location of the error ismarked in the formula. Once the error has been corrected, try again to execute the formula.

Before a formula is executed, the program checks the content for semantic errors. Warnings or errormessages could be generated. If an error message is generated, the formula cannot be executed until theerror is corrected. A formula can be executed if a warning message appears Warnings are intended asvaluable and important tips that something may be wrong and that the formula should be checked. Ofcourse, warnings may also be ignored and even be suppressed using the "Options / Functions" dialog.

Warnings are entered in the output box in the FAMOS main window. Error messages additionally appearin a message box and must be acknowledged.

Error messages include:

· invalid data type as function parameter

· invalid combination of data types in function parameters

· waveform is not complex

· waveform is too short

· invalid parameter value

· waveform too long for FFT

Warnings include:

· waveforms specified for a function are scaled differently

· function parameter has incorrect unit

· the length of a waveform is automatically shortened

· a numerical value cannot be sorted into histogram

· waveforms must be shortened or lengthened, since the length in set in the target or a functionexpects a parameter with a definite length

Semantic errors may also occur during actual calculation, which occur from the intermediate results ofunknown numerical values, scaling, etc.

Calculation is canceled when:

· memory is insufficient for a temporary waveform (e.g. intermediate result in a formula)

· RAM has insufficient space

Calculation can be continued when the following warnings are generated:

· division by zero

· magnitude of numerical values is too great

· value range of a function is exceeded

If the valid value range has been exceeded, the results of calculation are generally set to zero.

The value range is limited to -1035 ... -10-35, 0, 10-35 ... 1035.

160


Functions

7.6 Data Format of Results

FAMOS can manage data in various formats. The result format of mathematical functions depends on theactual function and the data format of the parameter. Some functions provide their results independent ofthe type of parameter. Other functions observe the data format of the parameter, for example the "Mirror"function for mirroring the values of a waveform. Otherwise the setups specified in "Extra/ Options/Functions" are observed. The dialog is explained in the next section.

7.7 Options / Functions Dialog

Use this dialog to set options which are generally valid for all functions. This concerns generation ofwarnings, selection of the data format for results and the setups for executing Fourier transformation.

Select "Options/ Functions" to open the dialog:

Dialog: Options/ Functions

Display

When executing functions, generated warnings are shown in the output box in the FAMOS main window.If the options "No warnings" or "Important warnings" are activated, no warnings or only the importantwarnings appear.

Result Data Type

Almost all functions provide their results in a real data format, either in 4-byte format (float) or in an 8-byteformat (double). If the option "Automatic" is selected, the result type is selected, depending on the datatypes of the parameters, which can record the result without data loss. For example, if two "float"waveforms are added together, the result will be the type "Float". Adding a "float" and a "double"waveform will result in the type "Double".

If the option "Float" or "Double" is selected, the result is always generated in this format, unless thefunction itself stipulates the use of another data format.

The accuracy of the "Float" format, with 7 significant decimal places, is sufficient for most tasks.

Reference

Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data Formats'

161Functions


FFT

These setups affect the mathematical functions "FFT" and "Spec". Specify the window function to be usedin the selection list. The base-2-algorithm used requires that the length of the waveform to be transformedis a power of two. If the option "Fill with zeros" is selected, the waveform is filled with zeros to the nextpower of two before transformation. Otherwise the waveform is truncated to the next smallest power oftwo.

No error boxes for file functions

If an error occurs when executing a FAMOS function, a box containing the error message is usuallydisplayed and the return value / result is not generated. Any running sequence is canceled. When thisoption is selected, a return value is generated when using the file functions (function group "11> Filefunctions"), which displays the error and the value can then be evaluated. The error box does not appearand the functions are "quiet". This option is useful in sequences where the program must reactautomatically to the various reasons for the errors. For example, a missing file must not necessarily beinterpreted as an error, the program could simply change to another directory and search for the file there.

Reference

FAMOS Function Reference

All of this dialog's control settings can be changed in a sequence by using the function 'SetOption(...)'.

7.8 Function Assistant

The Function Assistant offers the user support in creating the necessary formulas and in parameterizingthe accompanying functions. The Function Assistant provides a parameterization dialog, which is speciallyadapted to each function. This dialog contains a short description and an Edit box or list box for eachparameter, in which the current parameter value may be entered or selected. Once all the parametershave been entered, the function can either be executed directly or copied to the editor box.

Such an assistant is available for each internal function and command ("Standard" index card in functionlist) and for most external kit functions.

This option is especially useful for functions with several parameters and for functions whose execution iscontrolled by option parameters. While the option is specified by a number in the formula, the option canbe selected from a text list in the Function Assistant.

To call the dialog for paramterizing the desired function, there are the following possibilities:

· Highlight the desired function in the FAMOS main window's function list and type "SHIFT+F1" orclick on the entry "Assistant" in the context menu.

· If the writing cursor in the input box is over a function name, the Assistant dialog also can becalled by typing the combination of keys "SHIFT+F1" or by clicking on the "Assistant" entry in thecontext menu. If parameters are already entered in the function formula in the input box, theseparameter values will appear in the corresponding boxes in the Assistant dialog as defaults.

· It is also possible to Drag&Drop a variable (from the variables list, from a curve window or fromthe Data Editor) onto a function entry in the function list. This also calls the parameterizing dialog.The variable name appears in the dialog as the first parameter, if possible.

A typical parameterizing dialog looks like the following:

162


Functions

Example Dialog Function-Assistant : Parametrization 'FiltHP'

The name of the current function is displayed in the title bar, under the name a brief comment. Followingthe name, input and list boxes for the return value and the function parameters are displayed. Theprogram suggests a name for the result, and the list contains all current FAMOS variables. These lists arefound in all parameters, where waveforms or general FAMOS variables can be used.

In parameters where a set number of options is possible, select the desired option from the list.Parameters, in which a set number is expected, are assigned a simple input box. The name of a singlevalue variable can also be entered here.

The current formula is displayed in the status bar, as it would be generated from the setups in the dialog.You can see in the example how the parameter code (0) is taken from the option entry "Butterworth" andentered in the formula.

If the dialog was called from an input box using the key combination <Shift>+<F1>, any parameterspossibly specified are used and entered in the dialog. In parameter code 0, the corresponding entry"Butterworth" was selected in the list. In addition to the short help messages for functions, an overviewabout the functions of a formula line (e.g. from an unknown sequence) can be made.

If no parameters can be identified in the formula line when the dialog is called, the dialog starts with theentries last used.

Execute

The formula is calculated immediately.

Copy

The formula is entered at the current cursor position, or instead of currently highlighted readout.

Close

The dialog is closed. You may continue to work in FAMOS when the dialog is open. The next time thedialog is called, the existing dialog is updated corresponding to the desired function.

7.9 imc Kit Interface

7.9.1 Introduction

imc offers several "kits", which provide additional functions for processing waveforms. These kits have astandard interface and can be used by various imc applications. They offer functions for classification ofdata, loading and storing special data formats or replaying waveforms via the Windows-sound output.

These kits are special DLLs (Dynamic Link Libraries), which are accessed while an application is beingused. They are equipped with a defined interface for parameter specification. The functions they provide

163Functions


are referred to as external kit functions, as opposed to the internal functions available in FAMOS itself.

7.9.2 Registering Kits

To be able to use functions from an imc-kit DLL, the kit must be registered in FAMOS. The kit DLLsregistered in FAMOS are linked dynamically during the progress of the program and the functions theyprovide can be used exactly like the functions available in FAMOS.

Kits can come as part of a FAMOS package or in the form of a separate installation program. Therespective installation program copies the necessary files to the FAMOS program folder and takes care ofregistering the kit with FAMOS.

If you install the kits manually, please note that the kit DLLs must be located in the FAMOSprogram directory, which contains the file "FAMOS.EXE".

Proceed as follows to register or de-register installed kits:

Go to the "Extensions- Register Kits" index card in the dialog reached via menu Item "Extra"/ "Options", oruse the corresponding command in the context menu of the "Kit" functions list.

Dialog "Register Kits"

The list indicates all Kits which are available and located in the FAMOS program directory or under"\Program files\imc\Shared". The kits which are shown with a check mark are currently registered inFAMOS. By simply clicking the mouse on the list entry (or SPACE, if using the keyboard), you can selector deselect the individual kits.

Select "Cancel" to discard changes and exit the dialog,.

By selecting "OK", the selected kits are registered in the FAMOS configuration settings, the DLLs arelinked to the program and the dialog is exited. All the functions of the kits registered in FAMOS may beaccessed from the "Kit" index card of the function list.

Remarks

Each kit registered in FAMOS occupies memory space and slows execution of the program. It is best toregister only those kits actually required for your application.

164


Functions

7.9.3 Calling External Kit Functions

After the kits have been registered in "Register imc-Kits...", the functions they include can be selectedfrom the "Kit" index card of the function list.

Menu "Kits"

The "Kit"-list is operated the same way as the "Standard"-list of built-in functions. When one of thefunctions is selected, the corresponding help text appears in the Output window. Double-clicking on afunction's entry copies it into the editor box along with its parameter mask.

Some kits support the Function Assistant, which helps in setting the function's parameters.

Naturally, it is also possible to enter the desired function's name in to the editor box "by hand".

7.9.4 Curve Kit

The Curve Kit is a component of the DLL "IM7CUDAM.DLL", which is always included in the folder"\Program files\imc\Shared" ("\Programs files" being the Windows default program folder). It is a standardfeature of many imc-applications and therefore not a kit in the usual sense, but it also contains externalfunctions.

A normal installation procedure should result in this kit being installed automatically; otherwise, the menuitem "Extra/ Options/ Extensions/ Register Kits" will establish access.

This group contains various functions for the display and production of curve windows. For instance, youcan specify the position and scaling for the window, add curve to a window, load configurations and muchmore.

The remote control functions are significantly more efficient than the commands 'Show' and 'CurveSetup'provided by FAMOS.

Reference

The Curve Kit documentation describes the kit-functions in greater detail.

7.9.5 File Kit

The File Kit is also included in the FAMOS package and is automatically registered upon installation ofFAMOS. The function group "File-Kit" offers a number of file management functions, for example, forlisting all the files in a folder, and for copying, moving or deleting files.

165Functions


7.9.6 Dialog Kit

The Dialog Kit is also included with the standard FAMOS package and is registered by default. Thefunctions group "Dialogs" contains functions which can be used in the event sequences of user-defineddialogs.

Reference

Creation and use of dialogs is described in the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

A detailed description of the included Kit functions is presented in the 'Dialog Kit' documentation.

7.9.7 Report Generator Kit

The Report Generator Kit is located in the DLL "IM7DRKIT.DLL", which will be placed in the folder"\Program files\imc\Shared" by regular installation of the Report Generator. Otherwise, use the "RegisterKits" dialog to establish access. The entry "Report Generator" will then be in the function list under the"Kit" index card.

The function group contains a multitude of functions for the remote control of the Report Generator. Forexample, it might assist you in loading a report form, updating already present curve objects or tables withnew data, or automating the printout of completed reports by means of a (macro) sequence. The remotecontrol functions are significantly more efficient than the commands in the "D> Commands: DDE, etc."group provided by FAMOS..

Reference

Exact descriptions of the kit's functions are to be found in the instructions for the Report Generator Kit.

7.9.8 Sound Kit

The Sound Kit ("IM7-SOUND.DLL") is included in FAMOS and can also be accessed using the kitinterface. The sound kit has functions for converting waveforms into the Windows WAVE format andplaying them back via sound board. If this kit is installed, the "Variable" menu has the additional option"Play variable". The selected variables are converted internally in a 16-bit mono-wave file and are playedback if an appropriate device is present.

Reference

Installation information and a description of all functions in the sound kit are found in the Sound Kitmanual.

7.9.9 Format Kit

The Format Kit is located in the "IM8FORM.DLL" library, which regular installation will place in theFAMOS-Program directory.

You can make this kit accessible by means of the "Register Kits" dialog. Thereafter, the item "Format Kit"will appear under the "Kits" function list. .

Along with special functions for certain data formats, this kit provides you with the functions "Msave" and"Bsave", which let you save files in multi-column ASCII-files or a configurable binary format, respectively.

7.9.10 Other Kits available

Spectrum package:

Spectrum analysis with moving and overlapping windowing, as well as additional FFT-based analysisprocedures, such as amplitude spectra, power density spectrum, Cepstrum, coherence, cross powerdensity, transfer function.

Class-counting package:

Class-counting methods as per DIN 45667 (e.g. Level cross method, range method) and Rainflow-

166


Functions

method.

Order analysis package:

Vibration analysis for rotating machinery.

These kits are not included in the FAMOS package and must be ordered separately.

7.10 Standard DLL Interface

7.10.1 Introduction

An excellent characteristic of MS-Windows is its ability to use program libraries, known as DLLs. DLL isthe abbreviation for "Dynamic Link Library". These libraries provide functions which can be called by otherapplications.

Function libraries for program development are typical under DOS. The library functions are added to theprogram code during linkage and are therefore a basic component in the program. Unlike DOS libraries,the Windows-DLLs are linked during the program runtime when a function is needed. The name of theDLL and the name of the function need not necessarily be known to create the program.

Another positive aspect is the fact that DLLs can be used by different programs at the same time. TheWindows DLL requires space on the hard disk and in the memory only once, unlike DOS-DLLs. Inaddition, only those parts of a DLL actually used by the program are loaded from the hard disk to thememory during a program.

MS-Windows itself consists mainly of DLLs, whose functions are called by the MS-Windows programs.These functions are described in the Microsoft SDK (Software Development Kit).

FAMOS is equipped with a standard DLL interface, which allows the functions to be accessed from anyWindows-DLLs.

7.10.2 Registering DLL's in FAMOS

If functions from DLLs should be called in FAMOS, they must be registered in FAMOS. The followinginformation must be available for each function:

· DLL file name

· function name in the DLL

· function name in FAMOS

· number of parameters

· data type of parameters and return values.

In addition to the DLL and function name, other information about the function is necessary. Thisinformation is needed to give the function parameter the form expected by the function. FAMOS must alsoknow in which form the results will be returned by the function, in order to provide enough memory and tocorrectly interpret the returned value.

Select menu item "Extra/ Options/ Extension: Register DLL functions" to register a DLL function inFAMOS.

167Functions


Dialog: External DLL functions/ Overview

This dialog can also be called via the context menu, if the "DLL" index card is active.

When the dialog is started for the first time, the list of registered functions is empty. As soon as externalDLL functions are registered in FAMOS, they are displayed in the list. All functions shown in the list can beused in FAMOS. Entries in the list have the following form:

DLLName:FctName EType=FamosName(Par1Type,.ParNType)

DLLName: Name of DLL where the function is located

FctName: Name under which the function is exported from the DLL

FamosName: Name under which the function can be used in FAMOS

EType:

Par1Type...

ParNType:

Type abbreviation for event and parameter type in FAMOS.

Meaning:

vd: VOID, no return value, procedure

tx: Character string, text

ne: Waveform or single value

List of Functions

All declarations of external functions are stored in a declaration file. These declarations can be re-read thenext time FAMOS is started. Different declaration files can be generated with various functiondeclarations, which can then be used in FAMOS. This allows you to adapt FAMOS quickly to varioustasks. The following menu appears after selecting the function list button:

Reading Function List from File

168


Functions

Functions currently registered in FAMOS are removed and a new function list is read from a file andentered in the list. Use the Windows-standard dialog for file selection to select the desired file. Thedirectory set under "Definition files" in the "Options / Folders" dialog is used as default directory. Thestandard name extension for declaration files is ".def".

Saving Function List

Functions currently registered in FAMOS are stored in one file. Use the Windows standard dialog "SaveFile" to select the directory and file name. The directory set under "Definition files" in the "Options/Directories" dialog is used as the default directory. Declaration files stored this way can be reregisteredlater in FAMOS using menu option "Read Function List..".

Unregistering (Dismissing) Functions

All functions currently registered are removed using this option. The list is then empty.

The name of the file being used is shown in the box next to the button "Function list". If no functions areregistered or the currently defined list is not yet stored, "No DLL functions" appears.

OK

Selecting this option ends the dialog. If the current list has not yet been stored, a message appears. Inclosing the dialog, all specified DLLs are linked dynamically and the functions are listed in the function listunder the "DLL" index card. The functions may now be used in FAMOS. If a DLL cannot be located, thecorresponding error message appears.

Delete

Functions marked in the list are removed.

New

The definition dialog for a DLL function appears. A new definition can be made.

Edit

The registration dialog is called for functions selected in the list. The existing declaration can be changed.

DLL Name

Enter here the name of the DLL without file name extension.

The DLL must be in one of the following directories:

· current directory· Windows directory

169Functions


· Windows/ System directory· via the environmental variable "PATH" specified directory

The DLL in question must be a 32 bit DLL.

Function name in the DLL

Enter here the name under which the DLL function is available to other applications.

If you wish to write and integrate your own DLL's, note that this name may differ from the original name inthe source text, depending on the programming language used, the way the functions are declared in theDLL, and the compiler and linker used.

C-compilers generally prefix the function name with an underline and sometimes attach an indication ofthe total size of the parameters.

Example:

The function

stdcall int dummy ( BYTE par1 )

is exported under the name " dummy@1 ".

The function

ccecl int dummy ( BYTE par1 )

is exported under the name "dummy".

C++ compilers append even more characters to the name, which contain information on the amount andtypes of parameters, as well as about the type of the return value.

To use such functions in FAMOS, you must either enter the entire name or instruct the compiler/linker togenerate simple (so-called "undecorated") names.

Example:

By stating the original name in the C-linker's module definitions file, it's possible to arrange for the DLL toexport the functions under their original names (in other words, without the preceding underline).

Additionally, you can instruct a C++ compiler to refrain from "decorating" names by inserting the element"C" in the function declaration.

extern "C"{ float _stdcall Fct1( LPSTR lpsz ); float _cdecl Fct2( LPSTR lpsz );}

Function name in FAMOS

The function is called in FAMOS under this name. The user may freely specify the name, usually the DLLfunction name. Note that the name should be unique. It may not be the same as that of internal functions,or begin with numbers. FAMOS does not differentiate between upper and lower-case letters. The namemay have a maximum of 20 characters.

Number of Parameters

Specify here the number of parameters that the function expects. Entries for each parameter are pre-initialized in the parameter list with standard values according to the information specified.

The maximum number of parameters is limited to 15.

Call Convention

Specify here the convention for calling the function. This is determined when defining the function in theDLL, in programming language "C" with code words "_cdecl " or "_stdcall", in the program languagePASCAL with the code words "pascal" or "stdcall".

The various calling conventions differ in, among other things, the order in which the parameters areplaced on the stack, and the manner in which the stack structure is restored after the function has beenexecuted.

170


Functions

For the FAMOS-DLL-interface, only the order in which the parameters are arranged matters.

In general, C calling conventions apply to exporting DLL functions (32 bit DLL's).

By contrast, functions exported from 16 bit DLL's are normally exported according to PASCAL callingconventions.

C

In C, parameters are stacked from right to left. This means when a function CC(P1, P2, P3) is called, firstP3, then P2, then P1, and then the return address are stacked before the function CC is called.

The Microsoft C-compiler is familiar with the code words "_cdecl" and "_stdcall", both of which assumeparameters to be handled according to C calling conventions.

The analogous code word in PASCAL programming language (also: "Delphi") is "stdcall".

NOTE: The code word "PASCAL" or "_pascal" is still supported by many C-compilers, but only forconsiderations of compatibility; internally, they are usually adapted to _stdcall-convention.

PASCAL

Parameters are stacked from left to right in PASCAL. Take the function CC (P1, P2, P3). When called,first P1, then P2, P3, and then the return address are placed on the stack and then the function itself iscalled.

This convention is used by the programming language "Pascal" (also "Delphi", if the function isestablished using the code word "pascal".

Types

Definitions for the return value and parameters are found in this list. To change definitions, select thecorresponding entries and press "Edit" or double-click on the desired entry.

All as 1.

The setups for the entry marked first are copied to all following entries selected.

Edit

The dialog for defining parameters is called for the selected parameters; change individual settings in thisdialog.

Dialog: External DLL functions /data types

A parameter or return value of a DLL function is declared in this dialog. Specify the function name and theedited parameter in the text box in the upper corner of the dialog.

Data type in the DLL:

Specify here which data type the DLL function requires for this parameter. Specification of data typesfollows the type designations used in the programming language "C".

171Functions


short 2 bytes signed integer -32768..32768

ushort 2 bytes unsigned integer 0..65535

int, long 4 bytes unsigned integer -2.14e9..2.14e9

uint, ulong 4 bytes unsigned integer 0...4.29e9

char 1 bytes signed integer -128..127

uchar 1 byte unsigned integer 0..255

float 4 bytes real (floating-point according to IEEE)

double 8 bytes real (floating point according to IEEE)

text A DLL function is transferred to a FAR-pointer at 255 bytes. Because text variables inFAMOS may have a maximum length of 255 bytes, they may be transferred to DLLfunctions. The data type in FAMOS must also be text. Specify 1 for the number ofelements.

dsf Additional information about a waveform is necessary in FAMOS. To exchange simplewaveforms with a DLL, the structure DLL_WAVE was defined, which contains themeasurement values and additional information. If you are already familiar with dynamicdata exchange, this structure will be familiar to you. It is called DDE_WAVE. Thestructure is declared in the file "dlltest.h", found in the directory "DLLIFC32".Always transfer as a pointer or handle.

void Only in result: no return

AccessProvides information about transferring of the parameter or the return value. Parameters and returnvalues can be transferred directly (one value) to the stack or as pointer or handle (one or several values,also >64KByte). Handles are here numbers which identify a memory block. Windows contains functionsfor accessing memory via the handles.

Direct Parameter transferred to stack , 1 value

Pointer Parameter specifies address of data object in the global memory. A pointer is transferred toone or several values of the specified type.

Handle Parameter is the identifier of a global memory object. A handle is transferred to one orseveral values of a specified type. A pointer can be created for the transferred memoryusing the Windows function "Global Lock". The DLL function must then release the memoryblock by using the function "GlobalUnlock".

Number of elementsThe number of elements in direct access is always 1, otherwise the number of elements to be transferredfrom the particular data type. A '*' means that the length of the transferred curve defines the place. Forexample, if the DLL function expects double-values and a waveform with 20 values is transferred, a bufferwith 20 values * 8bytes = 160 bytes is transferred.

Type in FAMOSThis option specifies which data type should be generated or transferred in FAMOS.

Data A waveform or single value is transferred

Text A text is transferred. Data type in the DLL must also be a text

Void Only in result: no return

172


Functions

Read only parameter(Selectable only in pointer or handle access )

The corresponding parameter is not changed by the function.DLL releases handle(Only in handle access )

The DLL releases the global memory object. Otherwise the memory is released after returning thefunction in FAMOS.

Remarks

Each registered DLL function occupies memory and slows execution of the program. Register only thosefunctions actually needed for your application.

When installing FAMOS you can determine whether to include examples for programming your own DLL'sin the installation. If you choose to do so, the examples are located in "DLLIFC32". Installing the examplescan be accomplished at a later occasion, also.

7.10.3 Calling external DLL functions

Once the DLL functions have been registered with "Options/ Extensions: Register DLL-functions", theycan be selected from the function list under the "DLL" index card.

The "DLL"-list is operated the same way as the "Standard"-list of built-in functions. When one of thefunctions is selected, the corresponding help text appears in the Output window. Double-clicking on afunction's entry copies it into the editor box along with its parameter mask.

Example

The Windows system DLL "user32.dll" has a variety of functions available to other applications, which aredescribed in the Microsoft- SDK (Source Development Kit). They make up a part of the Windows-API(Application Programmer's Interface). The functions GetActiveWindow() and GetWindowTextA() are partsof the application, which determine a reference to the active window or its title.

They are declared under Windows 95 as follows:

UINT _stdcall GetActiveWindow()UINT _stdcall GetWindowTextA( UINT WindowHandle, far char* Title,UINT SpaceforTitle)

Proceed as follows to use these functions:

1. Register the function GetActiveWindow()

Call the overview dialog of registered functions (menu option "Extra/ Options/ Extensions: Register DLL-functions") and then select the "New" button. This calls the declaration dialog for a function.

The following information is given in the declaration dialog:

DLL-Name: USER32

Function name: each GetActiveWindow

Number of parameters: 0

Call: C

173Functions


Double-click on "Return.." and the dialog for definition of the return value appears. Select the followingsetups:

Data type in DLL: uint

Transfer: direct

Number: 1

Data type FAMOS: data

Exit the last two dialogs with "OK". You are now in the overview dialog again and the function just definedis added to the list.

2. Register the function GetWindowTextA(..)

Select the button "New" again. In the declaration dialog, the following setups are active:

DLL-Name: USER32

Function name DLL: GetWindowTextA

Name in FAMOS GetWindowText

Parameter: 3

Call: C

Now select all entries in the list and then the "Edit" button. In the parametrization dialog, set up as follows:

Return value: uint, direct, 1, data

1. Parameter: uint, direct, 1, data

2. Parameter: text, Pointer, 1, text

3. Parameter: uint, direct, 1, data

Exit the last two dialogs with "OK". You are now in the overview dialog again.

3. Store declarations

The setups just made should be stored in one file. Select the button "Function list" and the option "Saveas..." in the open menu. Exit the dialog by selecting "End".

4. Call

Both functions are available via menu "External" in the submenu "USER32" and can now be called inFAMOS:

Text=""GetWindowText(GetActiveWindow(),Text,255 )

The title text of that window active during function processing is determined. This is the small window withthe stylized sprinter, displayed during each formula processing. After the formula is executed, the variable"Text" contains "FAMOS is active", which corresponds to the title bar of the FAMOS main window.

Reference

· Microsoft SDK (Software Development Kit) instructions.

· After installing FAMOS, the Declarations-file "winfkt.def" can be found in the subdirectory "DEF",which also contains further declarations of Windows-internal functions.

· When installing FAMOS you can determine whether to include examples for programming yourown DLL's in the installation. If you choose to do so, the examples are located in "DLLIFC".Installing the examples can be accomplished at a later occasion, also. Then you must select theoption "Examples of DLL-interfaces".

174


Functions

7.10.4 Tips for users of previous FAMOS versions

If you are accustomed to working with a 16-bit version of FAMOS (<= Version 3.1) and are familiar withthe general DLL interface, you should make note of the following:

Use of "home-made" DLL's

These must be converted to 32 bit DLL's. Not only will certain adaptations of the source code be requiredbut it will need to be compiled again at least once by a 32 bit compiler/linker.

Note also that the calling convention for the function may change (esp. from PASCAL to C). For example,the keywords "PASCAL" and "_pascal" can still be used with the Microsoft C compiler. However, theseare internally redefined as "_stdcall", to conform to C calling convention. Therefore, the functiondeclaration in FAMOS must be adapted.

Under certain circumstances, even the name under which the function is exported from the DLL canchange; see the topic "Function name in the DLL", in the section "Registering DLL's in FAMOS".

Use of Windows system libraries

The Windows system libraries' names are distinguished from their 16 bit counterparts by a '32' appendedto their names (e.g.: "kernel32.dll", "user32.dll", "gdi32.dll").

The calling convention from "PASCAL" to "C" has also changed.

When an old definitions file is loaded, these conversions are performed automatically and the user isinformed by means of a message box.

Also not that the names of many system functions which require text as parameters have been altered toend with a appended "A". For instance, the function "GetWindowText" is now exported under the name"GetWindowTextA". Therefore, the declaration in FAMOS for such instances must also be changedaccordingly.

175Function Reference


Function ReferenceYou find details about the functions in the separate manual:

Function Reference.

176


Sequences

Sequences

9.1 Introduction

A sequence, also called a macro, contains a series of formulas or commands which are executed in adefinite order. Commands for sequencing control are available, e.g. loops and conditional branching canbe realized in a sequence.

FAMOS has a series of commands especially for use in sequences. They control execution of theprogram, reproduce the function of menu options or influence predefined setups, which are usually set upusing dialogs.

Sequences are created and processed line-by-line. The editor box in the FAMOS main window providesthe necessary development environment to create, test, execute and save your sequences. It unites thefunctionality of a text editor with the ability to execute sequences either completely or step-by-step.

Sequences can be parameterized, meaning that the sequence text can be composed containingplaceholders which are replaced with updated parameter values upon being called. Special functions alsoallow the user to query numbers and texts while the sequence is being processed.

Sequences can also be nested, meaning that one sequence can appear as a subroutine within anothersequence.

Sequences can be assigned to the "Favorites" list. This allows quick access to the sequences and canalso store a help text for the function and the necessary parameters.

Sequences and dialogs can be saved in a password-protected file format. This lets you prevent otherpersons from editing, reading or copying the sequences.

Example

FAMOSLOAD SlopeSHOW SlopeRoot = Sqrt (slope)SAVE Root

This sequence consists of 5 lines. The following tasks are performed during execution of this sequence:

· The FAMOS file format is set up.

· The file "SLOPE.DAT" is loaded and the variable "Slope" created.

· The variable created is displayed as a curve.

· A formula is calculated and generates the new waveform "Root".

· The new variable "Root" is saved.

177Sequences


9.2 Sequences and the editor box

The editor box is the workspace in which sequences can be created, tested, executed and administered.

The figure shows a sequence named "Corcoef" [1], whose contents are currently being displayed.Another sequence [2], "Adtest", is also open and could be displayed by clicking on its index rider. To theleft of the actual sequence text, some special symbols or buttons are visible, namely the "Execute"-button[3] and the identifiers for a bookmark [4] and a breakpoint [5].

In the text input box, you can enter commands in the usual manner, and the usual editing functions likecopy, paste and cut are all provided. Note that each command must be on its own line, empty lines arealso permitted.

The commands for editing and running sequences can be called via

· the FAMOS main menu, submenu "Sequences",

· context Menu #1 (accessed by right-clicking the mouse on the title bar of the editor box, alsoreferred to as the "title bar context menu"), which mainly contains commands for administering(Load, Save) and for running sequences,

· context Menu #2 (accessed by right-clicking the mouse on the text input area, also referred to asthe "text box context menu"), which mainly contains commands for editing sequence text,

· the toolbar below the editor box title bar.

Reference

Basic operation of the editor box is already explained in the chapter 'User-Interface / Editor box'.

Also refer to that chapter to learn of important editing options going beyond the usual text editorfunctionality; these mainly include:

· using the "Execute"-button to display the active line and to execute it (double-click or ALT+ENTER to set the active line, click on "Execute" or CTRL+ ENTER to run a line),

· switching of the sequence displayed using the mouse (click on rider) or keyboard ( [SHIFT] +CTRL +TAB),

· transferring of the names of variables and functions from the Variables and Functions list (bydouble-clicking in the list or using Drag&Drop),

· context-sensitive calling of help (CTRL+F1) and Assistant for functions (SHIFT+F1), parameter-tips,

· automatic indent formatting which reflects the sequence hierarchy structure,

178


Sequences

· bookmarks for quick location of sequence lines,

· insertion of predefined boilerplate text for algorithm structures

· finding and replacing of text.

Various presettings concerning sequence display, editing and execution can be made in the dialogs "Extra/ Options / Editor" and "Extra / Options / colors".

Sequences can also be integral components of user-defined dialogs (so-called 'event-sequences'). Whenediting and testing event sequences, certain peculiarities must be observed, which are described in thesection 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

9.3 Administering Sequences

The commands described below for creating, loading, and saving sequences can be found in the editorbox title bar context menu, in the main menu "Sequence" and partly in the editor box toolbar.

9.3.1 Creating a new sequence

A new sequence, as yet empty can be made using the menu command "New" in the title bar contextmenu or by using the corresponding button in the toolbar.

the sequence is given the default name ("Unnamed" + running number) and is displayed in the editor box.

179Sequences


9.3.2 Loading a sequence

To load an existing sequence, use the command "Load" in the context menu or the corresponding buttonin the toolbar.

A dialog appears from which the desired sequence file can be selected.

Dialog: Load sequence file

This dialog for selecting a file has a few special features. The dialog starts up displaying the sequencedirectory used. When FAMOS is started this is initialized according to the setting in the dialog "Extra /Options / Folders". The toolbar at the upper right has an additional button:

Clicking here with the mouse causes a small menu offering the last sequence directories used to appear.Selecting a menu entry is a quick way of switching directories.

The comment box in the lower portion of the dialog shows whatever commentary exists for the currentlyhighlighted sequence. Such commentary can be entered upon saving a sequence.

When the dialog is closed by pressing <OK>, the selected sequence is loaded and displayed in the editorbox.

If you click in the toolbar on the arrow next to the Load-icon, a small menu offering the sequence files lastused appears.

Here you can select a file for loading directly. The same menu can also be accessed in the main menu"Sequence / Last sequences >".

Reference

Instead of a sequence-file, you can also open a dialog file (extension: *.dlg). Then in the editor box, theevent sequences belonging to the dialog are indicated. At the same time, the file is opened in the Dialog-Editor so that it's possible to edit the dialog's graphical presentation. For details, see the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

180


Sequences

9.3.3 Saving sequences

To save the active sequence in the editor box to a file, use the menu item "Save" or the correspondingicon in the toolbar.

If you wish to change the name or location of the sequence or comment, use the menu item "Save as...".

Dialog: Save sequence file

The dialog starts up with the current sequence folder. After FAMOS starts, this is initialized according tothe setting in the dialog "Extra / Options / Folders".

Just like the file dialog or loading sequences, this dialog also comes with an extra icon in the toolbar and acomment box.

Clicking on this icon opens a menu offering the last sequence folders used. Selecting a menu entry isa quick way of switching directories.

In the comment box, any comment on the sequence desired can be entered. Typical comments wouldbe a short description of the sequence along with the parameters needed to call it.

In the dialog "Extra / Options / Editor", you will find the presetting "Save breakpoints and bookmarks ".If this option is activated, the positions of any breakpoints and bookmarks is saved along with the file andrestored upon the next load command.

Remarks

The file comment and the settings for the breakpoints and bookmarks are saved in the file in a permanentfile header in the form of comment lines. FAMOS versions older than Version 4.0 display this fileheader. Since it is actually commented out, the execution of the sequence is not affected, but the fact thatthese hidden lines are displayed may be confusing. So if the sequences you create are also to work witholder FAMOS-versions, you should leave the comment box empty and also switch off the option "Savebreakpoints and bookmarks".

181Sequences


Write- / Read - Protection

You can also save sequences with read-/ write-protection. To do this, select in the dialog the file type.

FAMOS-sequence (Protected) (*.seq)

For details, see the segment "Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs".

Note

Instead of a sequence-file, you can also save a dialog file (extension: *.dlg). The complete dialog isalways saved, including the event sequences belonging to it, and its appearance as defined in the Dialog-Editor.

9.3.3.1 Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs

When transferring sequences or dialogs to other FAMOS users, it is often desirable to protect themagainst unintentional editing, or even to prevent the display of the sequence codes generally. For thatpurpose sequences and dialogs can be saved in a password-protected file format. Such files provide onlylimited access unless a password is entered. Nevertheless, the code can be run without any restrictions(using a SEQUENCE-command or respectively, a Dialog()-function), so that the files can either beintegrated into the user's own analysis routines, or run at the push of a button as a defined favorite. Asalways, such sequences and dialogs can also be opened via the FAMOS input box and then started via"Sequence"/"Run".

Protection types

There is a distinction between two protection types:

Write-protection:

Both data types can be opened and displayed using the FAMOS input box, but are protected againstediting. All debug options in the input box such as running of single steps and breakpoints are alsoallowed.

Typically used for distributing sequences within a company, while preventing the sequences fromaccidently being altered by the user.

Read-protection:

Both file types can be opened and run in the FAMOS input box, but the source code of the sequence(s) isnot displayed. The FAMOS input box only posts a message prompting the user to enter a password forenabling the display.

Typically used for passing sequences to external users without revealing the exact code and algorithmsused.

Introductory Comment

Special feature: If a sequence begins with a comment (each line is headed by a semicolon), then thisintroduction is always displayed, independent of the Write-/Read-Protection. The sequence's author thushas a possibility to inform the user about the purpose and use of the sequence and about any parametersrequired.

182


Sequences

Default password:

In the dialog "Extra"/Options" - "Editor", a default password can be specified. If a file is to be saved withpassword protection, the user must enter a password to obtain access, and the password specidied hereis the default password.

When a password-protected file is opened, the file password is automatically compared with the defaultpassword recorded here. If the two passwords match, the file is automatically enabled.

Saving protected files:

To save a sequence or dialog with password protection, click to select the option "FAMOS-sequence[protected]" or "FAMOS dialog file [protected]" in the respective file selection dialog under File type. Afterclicking on the button "Save", the following dialog appears:

Write-protection / Read-protection:

Determines the type of access protection.

Password:

Sets the password. The default password recorded in "Extra"/"Options"- "Editor" is initially suggested. Byclicking on the "Change" button, it is possible to enter a different password.

Be sure to remember the password entered here - without it, you will no longer have access to your ownfiles!

OK

The file is saved in accordance with the settings selected.

Cancel

Returns to the file selection dialog

183Sequences


Notes on passing protected files to others

When passing protected files to others, be aware that the recipient must be using the FAMOS version 5.0Revision 7 or higher. Older FAMOS versions are not able to read this file format.

Also, note that when passing on sequences with read-protection, any introductory comment is still visible.As the author of the sequence, it can be used to inform the user about the sequence's purpose and useand about any parameters required.

Opening protected files

FAMOS input box

When a password-protected file is opened with the FAMOS input box, the file password is automaticallycompared with the default password recorded here. If the two passwords match, the file is automaticallyenabled.

Otherwise, the file is initially opened with limited access rights. In the input box's toolbar, an new additionalsymbol ("Padlock") appears.

To unlock the file, click on this button. You are next prompted to enter the password. Once it has beenentered correctly, the write-protection is canceled/ the sequence contents are displayed.

FAMOS Dialog Editor

When a protected dialog file is opened with the FAMOS Dialog Editor, the password entered is at firstcompared with the default password which was set under "Extra"/"Options"- "Editor". If the two passwordsmatch, the file is automatically enabled and the user obtains complete access rights.

Otherwise, opening of the file is only continued once the correct password has been entered.

9.3.4 Closing sequences

You can close any sequence no longer needed by accessing the menu item "Close" in the main menu"Sequence" or in the title bar context menu.

If the current state of the sequence is not yet saved, you must first respond to a confirmation promptbefore you can exit.

Note

When a dialog's event sequence is concerned, the complete dialog is closed. If the dialog is also beingedited in the Dialog-Editor, it is close there, as well.

9.4 Testing and Running Sequences

The following sections describe how to test and run sequences in the editor box. Certain particularfeatures apply to event sequences in dialogs; see the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs' for details.

Sequences saved with read-protection are not displayed after loading and therefore cannot be testedstep-by-step.

Note

As a practical way to use sequences, they are generally not loaded explicitly into the editor box, but calleddirectly using the SEQUENCE-command. This call can, for instance, be entered in the editor's defaultinput box and then executed. It is more convenient (and especially sensible in connection with parameter-less sequences) to place such a sequence call among the "Favorites" in the Functions list. Then yousimply start your sequence with a double-click.

184


Sequences

The same goes for user-defined dialogs, as far as applicable. These are called by means of the functionDialog.

The following commands and aids for testing and running sequences in the editor box are available.

9.4.1 Run

The current sequence is run completely, starting with the first line; any breakpoints set are ignored.

If any errors occur during the processing of the sequence, the run is interrupted and the position pointerindicates the text line with the error.

If an event sequence is concerned, the associated dialog is started over from the beginning.

9.4.2 Run line

The active line is run. Instead of selecting the menu item, you can simply click on the "Execute"-buttonnext to the active line.

9.4.3 Start (Debug)

The current sequence is run completely, beginning with the first line. Breakpoints are observed, whichmeans that running of sequence comes to a stop when a line having a breakpoint. If no breakpoint is set,the same thing happens as in the case of "Run".

If an event sequence is concerned, the associated dialog is started over from the beginning.

9.4.4 Continue

Processing of the current sequence continues from the active line. This command is used to resumeexecution of a sequence after a breakpoint was observed or the correction of a defective command linewas performed. Running of the sequence halts again at the next breakpoint or error located, otherwiseprocessing of the sequence continues till the end.

9.4.5 Single step

The active line of the current sequence is run and then the next line is made active. This lets you test asequence step-by-step and evaluate the results of each individual line. However, if the active line containsa call to a subsequence or dialog, the entire subsequence or dialog is processed.

9.4.6 Single step in subsequence

This is basically the same as for "Single step", except when it comes to calling a subsequence(SEQUENCE-command) or a dialog (function: Dialog) in the active line. In the former case, thesubsequence is automatically loaded, displayed and the first line is activated. In the latter case, the dialogis opened and execution stops at the event sequence's first line.

Then you can continue to work through the subsequence step-by-step.

185Sequences


9.4.7 Response to errors

If an error is encountered during processing of a sequence, processing is halted. If the error occurs withina subsequence, it is automatically loaded and displayed in the editor box. The line with the error isactivated and an error message is displayed which prompts the user to acknowledge it beforedisappearing. In addition, a detailed description of the error appears in the FAMOS output window.

If possible, the line with the error can be corrected immediately and processing of the sequence can beresumed by using the command "Continue" (or even "single step"). After correction has been performed,the altered sequence or dialog should be saved.

Reference

Notes on possible error messages can be found in the chapter 'Functions', section 'Error and WarningMessages'.

9.4.8 Canceling / interrupting sequence runs

While a sequence or dialog is being processed, FAMOS cannot be operated; the sequence or dialog mustfirst be completed or aborted.

A running sequence or an active dialog can be distinguished by the change in the appearance of theFAMOS title bar.

FAMOS title bar during running sequence

The Windows taskbar's notification area contains an additional icon. Right-clicking the mouse calls acontext menu which offers a command for interrupting the current run.

· "Cancel" completely ends the sequence or dialog running.

· "Interrupt (upon next command)" interrupts the run before the next sequence line is processed.Under some circumstances, the sequence involved is loaded to the Editor box. In this way, theresults of the previous sequence processing can be viewed, for example, and the processing canbe resumed by means of the command "Continue" or "Single step".

To interrupt processing of a sequence, just click on the title bar or use the combination of keys"CTRL"+"PAUSE".

Please note that the sequence can only be interrupted between two command lines, not within a functionin progress. If a time-consuming operation is currently running, for example a long FFT, it must first becompleted before the sequence can be stopped.

Sequences can also interrupt themselves by means of "breakpoints", which are described in the nextsection.

9.4.9 Breakpoints

Breakpoints are a useful aid in testing long sequences.

If a sequence run is initiated by the commands "Start (Debug)" or "Continue", processing is interrupted inany command line containing a breakpoint. The user thus gets the chance to look at the results of

186


Sequences

sequence processing up until then and can resume processing using "Continue" or "Single step", asappropriate.

The position of a breakpoint is denoted by a red stop-symbol at the left of the corresponding row:

To place or remove a breakpoint, position the cursor in the desired command line and select the menuitem "Toggle breakpoint on/off" in the text box context menu, or use the combination of keys "CTRL"+"B".

To remove all breakpoints in the current sequence, use the menu item "Advanced / Delete allbreakpoints" in text box context menu.

Note

When saving a sequence, the breakpoint positions can optionally be saved, too. See the dialog under"Extra / Options / Editor"; the option "Save breakpoints and bookmarks".

9.4.10 Sequence-Status

If the sequence is interrupted during execution, for instance, due to an error or breakpoint or because thesequence is being run in single step mode anyway, a dialog can be called via the menu item "Sequence-Status" in the title bar context menu, which provides various information on the status of sequenceexecution.

This dialog is mainly useful if processing of a sequence was stopped within a subsequence. In that case,you obtain information here about which sequence or dialog called the subsequence and whichparameters were passed. This is especially good to know if the sequence was called using wildcardparameters, which implies that the sequence was called repeatedly. In this case you obtain, for instance,the number of the current sequence run and the parameter value transferred in this run.

187Sequences


Dialog: Sequence-status

Call stack:

Shows the name of the current sequence and the order in which this sequence was called by higher-levelsequences.

Number of parameters passed

Number of parameters to be passed upon calling.

Contents / Passed as

Display of parameters actually passed. In the case of parameters with wildcards, the original, unexpandedparameter is additionally displayed.

Current run

Display of the current run and the total number of runs which are to be processed by means of expandinga wildcard parameter.

Reference

See the section 'Process Directories' in this chapter for more info on using wildcards

9.5 Sequence commands

FAMOS has several sequence-commands available especially designed for use in sequences. Thesecommands control the program run, reproduce functions from menu options or influence preferences,usually set in the dialogs. The commands are divided into the following function groups in the "Standard"-functions list:

1. Commands: Load, Save2. Commands: Variables, Execute3. Commands: DDE, Import, Export...,

As with functions, Short-help is also available for commands. Commands can also be parametrized usingthe Function Assistant.

Example

A short sequence is shown, in which a single value named "s_val" is loaded, its factorial calculated,displayed and saved under the name "facto".

188


Sequences

Editor box with sample sequence

The elements written in uppercase letters are sequence-commands. Sequence-commands have slightlydifferent syntax than other functions. The parameters are usually separated from the command by aspace rather than by a comma, and are not enclosed in parentheses. Commands can't be used inassignments, since they don't have return values.

Sequence commands are mainly used for process control, for example, to define loops or conditions.Sequence commands for other purposes (e.g. File Management) are often only provided for the sake ofcompatibility with older FAMOS-versions, since they have been replaced by more powerful and user-friendly functions in the meantime.

All commands can be abbreviated, but the first four letters are necessary for correct identification. Lowercase and upper case letters are treated the same, so commands may be written in either or both. Thefollowing commands have the same meaning:

SHOW VARSHOW vARshow varShow Var

Available commands are listed alphabetically and by group in the next chapter.

9.6 Sequences with Parameters

9.6.1 Concept

Sequences can be written with set variable names:

Load SlopeShow Slope

This sequence is suitable only for loading and displaying the variable Slope. If another variable should beused in the sequence, the variable name must be changed accordingly:

Load ArcShow Arc

It is more suitable to use general variable names in the sequence, which are then replaced by the currentname each time the sequence is called. These names are specified as parameters when calling thesequence. There are nine general names available:

PA1, PA2,..., PA9

These parameters are designated as formal sequence parameters.

The observed sequence is rewritten using a formal parameter to

Load PA1Show PA1

189Sequences


9.6.2 Call

Sequences with formal parameters cannot be called with menu option "Start" in the Sequence Editor"Run" menu.

Use the command "SEQUENCE" to call such a sequence. The sequence must be stored, for exampleunder the name SHOW. The sequence name is specified first, then the current parameters, which replacethe formal parameters in execution of the sequence.

After storing the sequence, enter the line

SEQUENCE Show Slope

in the editor box and then execute this line. The program then searches for the sequence file in thecurrent sequence directory. A complete path name can also be specified:

Sequence c:\imc\seq\SHOW.SEQ Slope

The sequence SHOW is executed, and the format parameter PA1 is replaced by Slope at eachoccurrence. Slope is the first current parameter transferred to the sequence. It appears as if the sequence

Load SlopeShow Slope

is executed. The following call is also possible:

Sequence Show Arc

9.6.3 Multiple Parameters

An example of a sequence with several parameters is a sequence which multiplies two variables. Thissequence should be stored under the name MULTI:

PA3 = PA1 * PA2

For example, consider the following function call:

Sequence MULTI Slope Slope Square

When the sequence is called, PA1 is replaced by the first parameter specified, here Slope; in the samemanner, PA2 is replaced by the second parameter specified. Finally, PA3 is replaced by Square, so thatthe following operation is executed:

Square = Slope * Slope

When sequences are called with the command "SEQUENCE", the number of parameters transferred isnot checked. If the sequence MULTI is called with only two parameters, the third is not replaced by acurrent parameter and remains in execution as PA3. In calling

Sequence MULTI Slope Slope

the operation

PA3 = Slope * Slope

is executed. The variable PA3 is created and entered in the variable list under this name.

9.6.4 Comments

In creating sequences with parameters, the parameters should always be sufficiently documented.

Use the command "COMMENT" (abbreviated COMM) or a semicolon to introduce a comment:

Comm Sequence MULTIComm Multiplication of 2 factors;*** PA1 : 1. Factor;*** PA2 : 2. Factor;*** PA3 : ProductPA3 = PA1 * PA2 ; Multiplication

Remarks

Sequences may also contain blank lines to improve their structure. Comments may be inserted in the

190


Sequences

same line to the right next to the assignment, in which case the comment must begin with a semicolon.

Information about necessary parameters can also be stored as sequence commentary, which can becomposed upon saving the sequence.

9.6.5 Process Directories

Often the user would like to use one sequence for a series of files. The operators "*" and "?" are availablefor this purpose. They are used to designate names which may contain (to a certain extent) any letters orcharacters.

For example, the following files are present in the directory set for loading files

SLOPE.DATSINTEST1.DAT...SINTEST5.DAT

In the following sequence EVALUATE, a file should be loaded. The maximum of the waveform should bedetermined and added to a list of the existing maxima:

Load PA1List = Join( List, Max( PA1 ))

The following sequences may be called one after the other:

Sequence EVALUATE SINTEST1Sequence EVALUATE SINTEST2...

This procedure is possible, but rather complicated.

The following is more suitable:

Sequence EVALUATE *( or: Sequence EVALUATE *.dat )

The operator "*" is used to call the sequence EVALUATE for each waveform stored in the set directory.The sequence is called six times. The operator "*" may also be used at the end of a series of letters. Thisallows the sequence to be used for all files which begin with a specified series of letters.

Sequence EVALUATE SIN*( or: Sequence EVALUATE SIN*.DAT)

calls the sequence for all files beginning with SIN. The operator "*" is used as in DOS and is defined andinterpreted just as in DOS.

It is useful to use the operator "*" only in parameters loaded from a file at the beginning of a sequenceusing the command "Load".

Reference

Please refer to the sections 'Use of Text Variables' and 'Dialogs During Execution of Sequence'.

The operators '*' and '?' can be used with the LOAD command to load a series of files using onecommand.

The functions contained in the group '13> File functions' (FAMOS Function Reference) are also availablefor loading files and are more efficient than the LOAD command.

For processing directory structures, it is often better to use the File-Kit functions, since these offer bettercontrol of the sequence process.

9.6.6 Incrementing Numbers

If a sequence should be called several times to process files, it is recommended to store calculatedresults from the waveform of the current file with consecutive numbering. The following sequence, namedHISTOGR, which determines and stores the histogram of a waveform:

Load PA1PA2 = Histo( PA1, 0, 0)SAVE PA2Delete PA2

191Sequences


The histograms of all waveforms SINTEST1, SINTEST2,... should be filed as HIST1, HIST2,... Theoperator "#" is added to the name HIST. The desired result is achieved using the following call:

Sequence HISTOGR S* HIST#

The sequence is now called for each file contained in the set directory with a name corresponding to thespecified S*. The first time the sequence is called, the file first in alphabetical order, here SINTEST1, istransferred as the first parameter; HIST1 is transferred as second parameter.

The following call is created:

Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST1 HIST1Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST2 HIST2...

If the sequence is called more than nine times, the operator "#" can be used several times:

Sequence HISTOGR S* HIST###

The following calls are created:

Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST1 HIST001Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST2 HIST002...

Reference

Please refer to the sections 'Use of Text Variables' and 'Dialogs during execution of sequence'

Remarks

Sequences can be nested up to 10 times. Sequences called may also contain parameters.

The operators "*" or "?" should only be used in no more than one parameter. If the operator is used indifferent forms in different parameters at the same time, the sequence is called as often as the minimumnumber of appropriate file names.

When loading files in FAMOS format, the name extension ".DAT" is used; in other data formats, the nameextension must always be explicitly specified. However, a different extension can be specified in FAMOS-format.

Reference

Refer to the chapter 'Application Examples' for examples on using sequences.

9.7 Use of Text Variables

Text variables can be used in sequences to specify command parameters indirectly. They are often usedas an alternative to the operators "*", "?" and "#", and can increase the clarity and flexibility of sequences.

Possible uses would be:

· consecutive numbering of created variables in loops.

· use of names of formal parameters (variable or file name) for naming variable and file names created inthe sequence.

· analysis of transferred parameters (e.g. file names) and the resulting conditional execution ofcommands.

· increased clarity and maintainability of sequences.

Text variables may contain a maximum of 255 characters. Text constants are written in quotation marksand may be assigned:

Path = "c:\imc\dat"

Several functions are available for processing text variables. These functions are found in the group "10>Text functions"

NOTE: Use the operator <...> to access the content of text variables.

The content of a text variable in brackets < text variable > is replaced in the command line by the formulainterpreter and then the created command line is processed. Using this operator, it is possible to specify

192


Sequences

command and function parameters indirectly.

DatName= "c:\imc\dat\slope"LOAD <DatName>

The formula interpreter checks whether a text variable with the name DatName exists. If the text variable isfound, the construct <DatName> is replaced by the content of the variable; if it is not found, an errormessage is generated. In the example above, the following command is executed:

LOAD c:\imc\dat\slope

NOTE: If a formal parameter is written in quotation marks, the current parameter is interpreted as a textconstant during execution of the sequence.

If a sequence containing the lines

z = "PA1" y = "PA2"

is called with the first parameter as slope and the second parameter the numerical value 3, the lines arethen read as

z = "slope"y = "3"

after replacing PA1 and PA2. Two text variables, z and y, are created which contain the texts "slope" and"3".

Example

The following sequence integrates the waveform, transferred as parameter, and stores the result under anew name. The name of the waveform created is formed from the first four letters of the name of thetransferred waveform, followed by the label "_int".

; Name of sequence : Integr; Parameter PA1 : File name LOAD PA1 Name = TAdd(TPart( "PA1",1,4), "_int")<Name> = Int( PA1 ) SAVE <Name>

When the sequence is called, the file slope.dat is loaded. In line four, first the parameter PA1 isreplaced and interpreted as a text constant, due to the quotation marks. The line is then read as

Name = Tadd (Tpart("slope",1,4),"_int")

Without the quotation marks, PA1 would generate an error message, because the function TPart(,,)requires a text variable as the first parameter and the variable slope is a 'normal waveform'.

The text variable Name now has the content "slop_int". In the next line, <Name> is replaced by thecontent of the text variable Name. The line now reads:

slop_int = Int( slope )

The variable slop_int is created and then saved in the next line. Calling the sequence with theparameter tst1 creates the variable tst1_int, which represents the integral of the waveform tst1.

Text variables can also be used to increase the clarity and maintainability of sequences.

For example, if you change directories several times in one sequence, it is possible to assign thedirectories at the beginning of the sequence. The same is true for recurring options. If the options or pathnames change, the sequence must only be changed in one place.

Example

LadPfad1 = "c:\work\run1"LadPfad2 = "d:\usr\reference\data"BinForm1 = "2 2 0 0 0 Bits 0 -1 1"BinForm2 = "4 20 0 100 Data"...LDIR <LadPfad1>BINARY <BinForm1>LOAD vers01.dat...

193Sequences


LDIR <LadPath2>BINARY <BinForm2>LOAD reference.dat...LDIR <LadPath1>BINARY <BinForm1>LOAD vers01.dat...

Using this method, text variables can be assigned complete commands in order to save typing:

ChDir1 = "LDIR c:\work\test1"...<ChDir1>

Attention

Please note that the command interpreter must find and replace the text variable before the line isexecuted, which increases the execution time of the sequence.

Example

The histograms of all waveforms SINTEST... should be stored as HIST001, HIST002,... . This task wassolved in the section 'Repeated execution of a sequence' using the operators "*" and "#". If the names ofthe waveforms have the form SINTESTx (x is a number), use the following sequence:

index = 1 WHILE index <=5 ;*** Create file name SINTESTx TxNumber = TForm( index, "f10" ) FileName = TAdd ( "SINTEST", TxNumber) ;***Load file in variable temp LOAD <FileName> temp temp = HISTO( temp, 0, 0) ;***Create file name HIST00x TxNumber = TForm( index+1000, "f10" ) TxNumber = TPart( TxNumber, 2, 3 ) FileName = TAdd("HIST",TxNumber ) ;*** Store SAVE temp <FileName> index = index +1END

If you try to load a nonexistent file, the sequence is canceled.

Example

A directory contains only files in the form *xxx.dat ( xxx : three-digit number ), which were created by a 4-channel measurement device and stored with incrementing numbers (experiment 1 created files *001..*004, experiment 2 *005..*008 etc. ). The x-offset of all files belonging to the fourth channel should bechanged:

; Name of sequence : OffsetC4; Parameter PA1 : File mask; Parameter PA2 : New x-offsetLOAD PA1 TxNumber = TPart( "PA1",TLeng(PA1)-2, 3)isChan4 = 1- mod(TtoSv(TXNumber,"f"),4)IF isChan4 XOffset PA1 PA2ENDSAVE PA1

The command

SEQUENCE OffsetC4 test*.dat 0.1

changes the x-offset of the waveforms test004.dat, test008.dat ... to 0.1.

194


Sequences

9.8 Dialogs During Execution of Sequence

The following functions and commands are available to the user during execution:

PAUSE Displays messages and gives the possibility to cancel the sequence

BoxMessage Output of interactive messages

BoxOutput Output of messages

BoxText? Retrieves box text

BoxValue? Retrieves box value

DlgFileName Select a file name

FsDlgSelectFiles

FsDlgSelectDirectory

Selects filenames or directories. Both functions are included in the File-Kit.

Reference

The functions are described in detail in the manual 'FAMOS Function Reference'. The description of thecommand 'PAUSE' is to be found in the section 'Sequence Commands' of this manual

Example

The following sequence asks for a file name and then loads the specified file. The loaded waveform isinterpolated and the result displayed. The user queries the interpolation factor and the name of the resultvariable. The length of the resulting waveform is displayed. The user can either cancel or load the nextfile.

while 1 TxFile=DlgFileName("c:\imc\dat", "dat", "", 0 ) if TLeng( TxFile ) > 0 Load <TxFile> var factor= BoxValue?("Interpolation factor ?",2, 0) TxName= BoxText?( "Result name ?","Interpol", 0) <TxName>= IPol( var, factor ) Show <TxName> TxMessage = TAdd( TAdd("Length of ",TxName),":") BoxOutput( TxMessage, leng?(<TxName>), "", 0 ) end Pause Load next file? End

Reference

The input and output boxes generated by the functions named have a fixed appearance which the usercannot influence. For this reason, they are best used for simple, standard applications. However, FAMOSoffers the user the extra option of personally designing input and output boxes. Refer to the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs' for details.

195Sequence Commands (Reference)



10.1 Introduction

This chapter provides an overview and a detailed reference of all sequence commands available inFAMOS.

Many of the sequence commands have become obsolete in the wake of new functions added to eachsuccessive version of FAMOS. Such new functions are generally more efficient, flexible and user-friendlyand should be implemented in preference to analogous, older commands. The descriptions of commandsin this chapter will refer to such functions where appropriate.

The functions' explicit descriptions are located in the manual 'FAMOS Function Reference'.

The manual 'Curve Window / Report Generator' contains descriptions of function libraries for the remotecontrol of curve windows and of the Report Generator ('Curve Kit', 'Report Generator Kit)'.

The main uses of sequence commands are in directing the order of steps within a sequence (loops,conditions, subsequences or subroutines), in replicating the operation of FAMOS menu items and inspecifying presettings.

By positioning the cursor in the editor box, you can use <Ctrl> + <F1> to call a tooltip (just as withfunctions); or <Shift> + <F1> to call the Function Assistant for help in parameterizing the command.

10.2 Overview of Commands by Group

B> Commands: Load, Save

Commands for file management: Load, Save, Set directories and format options.

ASCII Set ASCII format for loading

ASCOption Specify ASCII format for storing

ASCSave Save data in ASCII format

Binary Set binary format for loading

CurveSetup Display in a curve window configuration

DSPLoad Load a DIGISKOP(c)-file ((c) remes GmbH)

196



FAMOS Set FAMOS format

FASLOAD Load a file created with imc-File Assistant format or by meansof an importing expansion library

FFTOption Set FFT settings

LDIR Set directory for loading files

Load Load file

MDIR Set directory for loading and saving sequences

Save Store variable

SDIR Set directory for saving files

WFTLoad Load a Nicolet WF file ((c) Nicolet Instrument Corp.)

C> Commands: Variables, ExecutionCommands for controlling execution and setting variable characteristics.

Delete Delete variable

Else Conditional execution

End End command

If Conditional execution

Pause Pause sequence for user inquiry

Rename Rename a variable

Sequence Execute sequence

Show Show variable



TimeCopy Copy trigger time

TimeSet Set trigger time

While Conditional loop

XDelta Set sampling rate

XOffset Set x-offset

XUnit Set x-unit

YUnit Set y-unit

D> Commands : DDE, Import, Export, etc.Commands for data exchange with other applications and for remote control of print layout.

Application Start application or DOS program

Clipboard Send curve image to clipboard

Control Send commands by DDE

ExitSequence End sequence processing

Export Export variable

Import Import variable

Layout Remote control of Report Generator, loading/ printout ofreport, variable transfer

Request Receive data by DDE

10.3 Alphabetical Overview of Commands

Application Start application or DOS program

ASCII Set ASCII formats for loading

ASCOption Set ASCII format for storing

ASCSave Store data in ASCII format

198



Binary Set binary formats

Clipboard Send curve image to clipboard

Comment Introduce comment

Control Send command via DDE

CurveSetup Display a curve window configuration

Delete Delete variable

DSPLoad Load a DIGISKOP(c)-file ((c) Copyright remes GmbH)

ELSE Conditional execution in connection with 'IF'

End End command

ExitSequence End sequence processing

Export Export variable

FAMOS Set FAMOS format

FASLoad Load a file created with imc-File Assistant format

FFTOption Set FFT settings

IF Conditional execution

Import Import variable

LAYOUT Remote control of Report Generator, loading/ printout oflayout, variable transfer

LDIR Set directory for loading files

Load Load file

MDIR Set directory for loading and storing sequences

Pause Pause sequence for user inquiry

Rename Rename a variable

Request Receive data via DDE

Save Save variable

SDIR Set directory for storing files

Sequence Execute sequence

Show Show variable

TimeCopy Copy trigger time

TimeSet Set trigger time



WFTLoad Load a Nicolet WFT file ((c) 1988 Nicolet InstrumentCorporation)

WHILE Conditional loop

xDelta Set sampling time

xOffset Set x-offset

xUnit Set x-unit

yUnit Set y-unit

10.4 Application

Function

Start an application or DOS-program.

Instead of the APPLICATION command, the function Execute (FAMOS Function Reference) should beused in newly created sequences.

Declaration

APPLICATION Mode Name Parameter

Parameter Definition

Mode Windows mode, in which to start application

Name Name of the application to start

Parameter command-line parameter of the application to start

Description

This command starts an application or a DOS program. You can supply a command-line parameter andspecify the mode, in which to start the application in Windows.

Modes

NORMAL Application started in normal size

MAXIMIZED Application started and maximized

MINIMIZED Application started and minimized to an icon

Remarks

Always start the DOS program via the .PIF-files.

The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.".

Example

Application Normal Notepad.exeApplication Maximized c:\windows\Notepad.exe

Two methods of stating the Windows application "Notepad".

Application Normal c:\windows\pif\dosprog.pif

A DOS program "dosprog" is started by calling its .pif-file.

200



10.5 ASCII

Function

Sets ASCII-formats for loading files

Declaration

ASCII

or

ASCII SkipRange Type Divider Number Comma String


SkipRange Single valueLength of the range to be skipped; entered in values or bytes according to theparameter Type.

Type Single valueIndicates how SkipRange should be interpreted. A value of one means that theskip range represent a number of values; a value of zero means that the skiprange is to be interpreted as bytes.

Divider Single value

Indicates which nth values are to be read from the values in the file.

Number Single valueIndicates the number of values to be read. Zero means that all values are read untilthe end of the file.

Comma Single valueIndicates whether a decimal comma should be used. A value of one means that adecimal comma is to be used, a value or zero means a decimal point.

String A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numeric values areread. The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is specified, the file willread the skip range from the beginning of the file.

Description

The file format for loading files is set to ASCII format.

If no parameters are specified for the "ASCII" command, the currently defined ASCII format is selected.

A completely new ASCII format is defined when parameters are specified.

Remarks

1. You must either specify all parameters or none. It is not possible to just specify one or afew of them. Each parameter, with the exception of the string, may be a fixed numerical valueor a single value (Sv) variable. The use of variables as parameters allows variable file formats tobe read.

2. The "ASCII" command represents an automation of the dialog box "Options / File - Load/Import /ASCII". This dialog box is accessed by selecting the "Options" button in "Load file" when theASCII format is selected. A detailed description and further examples are found in the Chapter 'File Management'.

3. For ASCII-Import, an alternative to this command is to use the imc File Assistant to create animport filter and to use the filter by means of the command FASLADEN or the functionFileOpenFAS.

The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save".

Example



Load DATA.ASC

The last ASCII format specified is set again; files were loaded in a different format, e.g. FAMOS format,since it was last used. Then the ASCII-file DATA.ASC is loaded.

ASCII 0 0 2 0 0 Costs Load DATA.ASC

One column is read from a file containing a table of ASCII values. The header of this table is "Costs". Thefirst of the two columns is read.

Vleng = 10Data = 100ASCII Vleng 1 1 Data 1 Load DATA.ASC

100 values are read from a ASCII file. A skip range with a length of 10 bytes is skipped at the beginning ofthe file. The numbers are read with a decimal comma.

Reference

Commands Binary, Load

Chapter File Management, Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineRead

10.6 ASCOption

Function

Specifies the file format for storing files in ASCII format.

Declaration

ASCOption NumberFormat DecimalSign Exact Width withHeader withXValues


Numberformat

01

2

All values are saved in exponential displayAll values are saved in fixed-point display

The shortest notation is selected for each value

Decimal sign 01

Decimal pointDecimal comma

Exact In number formats 0 and 1, the number of places after thedecimal; in number format 2, the total number of significantplacesValue range 0..7

Width Minimum output width; if the width of the value is smallerthan this parameter, the value is filled with zeros from theleftValue range 0..99

WithHeader 01

No headerA standardized header, containing significantcharacteristics for the variable, entered at thebeginning of the file

WithXValues 01

Y-values are written in a vertical columnEach line in the file contains the x-value, then a taband then the corresponding y-value

Description

The ASCII format for saving files (ASCSave, menu option 'File/Save' ) is specified here.

202



Remarks

1. The command ASCOption effectively automates the dialog box 'Options / File -Save/Export /ASCII '. You can do this, for example, by selecting the 'Options' button in the 'Save file' dialogwhen the ASCII format is selected. Please refer to Chapter 'File Management'. for furtherinformation and further examples. The header is also described here. The parameters can befixed numbers or single value variables.

2. Instead of the commands ASCOPTION and ASCSAVE, you can also use the functionFileOpenASCII2. This offers much more flexible file export capability and can also be use tosave multiple waveforms in multi-column ASCII files.


Reference

Chapter File Management, Command ASCSave

Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

10.7 ASCSave

Function

Saves data in ASCII format.

Declaration

ASCSave VarNameASCSave VarName FileName


VarName Name of the variable to be saved

FileName File name ( or complete directory ), under which the variableshould be saved ( optional )

Description

The variable specified as a parameter is saved as an ASCII file; the variable can be a single value or anormal waveform. If no file name is specified, the variable is saved under its own name in the directorycurrently selected for storing variables. The standard file name extension is ".ASC".

When the file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. If a complete directory isspecified, this is used for storing the variable.

The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, thepath contains spaces.

Remarks

This command cannot be used to store complete data groups. Use this command to save individualchannels.

Storing texts is also not possible with this command; use the command FileLineWrite for saving texts.

Instead of the commands ASCOPTION and ASCSAVE, you can also use the function FileOpenASCII2.This offers much more flexible file export capability and can also be use to save multiple waveforms inmulti-column ASCII files.


Example

Data = Int(Data)ASCSave Data

The variable Data is integrated and stored in the file "DATA.ASC".

Hist = Histo( Data1, 10, 6 )



ASCSave Hist c:\data\histogr\hist001 Hist = Histo( Data2, 10, 6 )ASCSave Hist c:\data\histogr\hist002

A histogram is calculated for each of the waveforms Data1 and Data2 and are stored in the specifieddirectory under the names 'HIST001.ASC" and 'HIST002.ASC' in ASCII format.

ASCSave Hist "c:\data\histogr\My Hystogram"

The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks.

Reference

Command ASCOption

Chapter File Management

Function FileOpenASCII

10.8 Binary

Function

Sets binary formats.

Declaration

BINARY

or for real numbers

BINARY Type Bytes SkipRange Space Number String

or for integers

BINARY Type Bytes SkipRange Space Number Bits Sign Minimum Maximum String

Binary formats with real numbers (floating-point display)

Type Single valueType = 1 real numbers in Intel format (80 x 86)

Type = 3 real numbers in Motorola format (etc.)

Bytes Single valueNumber of bytes in a real number

Select between 4-bytes-, 6-bytes or 8-bytes-display.

SkipRange Single valueLength of skip range is bytes.

Space Single valueIndicates how many bytes should be skipped between the individual numbers to beread.

Number Single valueIndicates how many numbers are to be read. Zero means that all values to the endof the file should be read.

String A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numbers are read.The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is transferred as parameter, theskip range is read from the beginning of the file.

204



Binary formats with integers

Type Single valueType = 2 integers in Intel format (80 x 86)

Type = 4 integers in Motorola format (etc.)

Bytes Single valueNumber of bytes in an integer

Select 1-, 2- or 4-bytes display.

SkipRange Single valueLength of skip range in bytes

Space Single valueIndicates how many bytes should be skipped between the individual numbers to beread.

Number Single valueIndicates the number of numbers to be read. Zero means that all values up to theend of the file should be read.

Bits Single valueNumber of valid bits in an integer.

Used in combination with minimum and maximum for scaling of integers.

Sign Single valueIndicates whether integers are to be interpreted as signed (two's complementdisplay) or unsigned. A value of 1 means "signed", zero means "unsigned".

Minimum Single valueReal value of the smallest number displayable in the specified format, is a realnumber; also interpreted as the lower limit of the measurement range.

Maximum Single valueReal value of the largest displayable number in the specified format, is a realnumber; also interpreted as the upper limit of the measurement range.

String A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numbers are read.The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is transferred as parameter, theskip range is read from the beginning of the file.

Description

The file format for loading files is set to binary format.

The Binary command effectively automates the dialog box 'Options / File - Load/Import / Binary '. You cando this, for example, by selecting the 'options' button in the 'Load file' dialog when the binary format is set.Please refer to Chapter 'File Management'. for a detailed description and further examples.

Remarks

The currently set binary format is used when no parameters are added to the Binary command.

If parameters are specified, a binary format is completely redefined. The parameter to be specifieddepends on the type of binary format to be read.

If one parameter is specified, all parameters must be specified.

Each parameter, with the exception of a string, may be a fixed numerical value or a single value variable.Using variables as parameters allows variable file formats to be read.




Example

BinaryLoad DATA.BIN

The binary format used is set again; files were loaded in a different format, e.g. FAMOS format, since itwas last used. The file DATA.BIN is loaded.

Binary 1 4 20 8 100 DataLoad DATA.BIN

The format for reading the following binary format is defined: the beginning of the file contains informationabout an experiment; the actual binary data are introduced by the string "Data:". Then real numbers in 4-bytes display are read. The first 5 numbers (= 20 bytes) are skipped, and then only every third number (i.e.: 2 * 4 = 8 bytes space between the numbers) is read. 100 numbers are read; the waveform generatedin FAMOS has a length of 100.

Mini = -10.0Maxi = 10.0Bits = 12Binary 2 2 0 0 0 Bits 0 Mini MaxiLoad DATA.BIN

All numbers are to be read from a file. The beginning of the file contains no information to be skipped,only numbers in as 12-bit values in 2-byte display are contained. These unprocessed data originate in anAD-converter, and have no sign. The measurement range of the converter is -10V to 10V.

Reference

Chapter File Management

10.9 Clipboard

Function

Copies curve window contents to Windows Clipboard.

Declaration

Clipboard NameofVariable

Description

This command lets you copy a curve-graph into the Clipboard. From there it can be loaded into otherWindows applications (word processing software, graphics programs, etc.).

Remarks

The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.".

Example

Clipboard slope

The curve-graph of the variable "slope" is copied to the Clipboard. If the waveform wasn't yet displayed,then it will first be displayed in accordance with the valid presettings, then copied and the curve windowsubsequently deleted.

Reference

Documentation for the Curve Window / 'Clipboard'

10.10 Comment

Function

Introduces a comment.

Declaration

COMMENT Comment text; Comment text

206



Command; Comment text


Comment text Any text as comment

Description

This command introduces a comment. All characters after this command are interpreted as a comment.This command is suitable to write comments for sequences.

To increase legibility, a semicolon should be used to introduce a comment line. Comments introduced bya semicolon can remain in the same line even after a command or formula has been executed.

COMMENT -- This is a short sequence,COMMENT -- which loads and displays a file.; -- A parameter should be transferred.LOAD PA1 ; Load parameter SHOW PA1 ; Display parameter

A waveform is loaded and displayed. The first three lines are comments.

10.11 Control

Function

Send a command to another application via DDE.

Instead of the command 'Control', the function DDESend should be used when creating new sequences.

Declaration

Control Application Topic Command {Variable}


Application Name of the DDE-application addressed

Topic Designation of the DDE-topic

Command DDE- command in accordance with the format-specifications of the Application

Variable optional single value; FAMOS variable for reception of return value

Description

FAMOS operates as a DDE-client, the application addressed as a DDE-server. The entries "Application"and "topic" cause FAMOS to select another DDE-capable application and request a conversation. If therequest is complied with, FAMOS then supplies the name of the item desired. FAMOS waits until theserver either transfers the data, whereupon the conversation is concluded, or denies the request. Thevariable specified in "Variable" now contains the data received. If the transfer wasn't possible, it containsthe return value from the DDE-application addressed.

Remarks

The individual parameters for the Control-command may not contain space characters.

FAMOS does not check the syntax of the "Command"-entry. Please perform a check of this entry yourselfto ensure that it corresponds to the DDE-specifications of the application addressed.

The parameter "{Variable}" is optional.

FAMOS sends an error message, if DDE-application (server) addressed doesn't answer or the datarequest was denied.

If the application (server) addressed is busy, FAMOS waits until it is free.



FAMOS-commands are case-insensitive (upper or lower-case letters are equally valid). However, someDDE applications do distinguish between upper and lower case. Have regard, therefore, for correctspelling

The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import , Export etc.".

Example

Control Trans Timebase [dt=1.5e-3]

"Trans" is the name of the receiving DDE application, "Timebase" the name of the topic. The DDE-command is "dt=1.5e-3" in this case. No return value is requested.

Control Trans Timebase [trigger][arm] RetVal

'Trans' is the name of the receiving DDE application, 'Timebase' the name of the topic. Two commandsare being issued by Control simultaneously, and are written together. The return value of the DDEconversation is contained in the variable 'RetVal'. In this way, the value is made available for checking.

Control Trans1 Timebase [hello]Control Trans2 Gain [100]

Varying DDE servers can be addressed.

Reference

Command Request

Functions DDEInq, DDESet, DDESend

10.12 CurveSetup

Function

Displays a waveform in a curve window configuration.

This command has been only been kept to maintain compatibility with previous versions of FAMOS. Westrongly recommend using the more efficient Curve Kit commands when creating new sequences.

Declaration

CURVESETUP Variable FileName


Variables Name of variable to be displayed

FileName Name of the curve file; complete DOS name possible

A waveform is displayed as a curve window in a predefined curve window configuration.

The file with the curve configuration (*.ccv) must have been created in a curve window using the menuoption 'Save' (Curve Window documentation).

Remarks

A complete DOS directory name can be specified when the file is not contained in the standard directory.

Set the standard directory for curve configurations in the dialog "Options"/ "Directories".


The Report Generator remote control kit offers more effective functions. Refer to the chapter 'Functions'/'imc-Kits' for more information on registering and using this kit; information on this topic is also available inthe Curve Window / Report Generator manual.

Example

CurveSetup Slope Config1CurveSetup Slope Config1.ccvCurveSetup Slope c:\imc\ccv\Config1.ccv

208



(three options to load a curve window configuration and display in the configuration "Slope".)

Reference

Curve Manager manual, chapter 'Curve Window Presettings', remote controlling the curve window isdescribed in the 'Curve Kit' documentation.

10.13 Delete

Function

Deletes a variable.

Declaration

DELETE VarName


VarName Name of variable to be deleted

Description

The variable specified as a parameter is deleted from the variable list.

The wildcards character may be specified to delete a series of variables.

The wildcard character '?' represents an exact character, '*' represents an undefined number ofcharacters.

Delete *

All variable are deleted.

Delete ??

All variables, whose name has exactly 2 characters are deleted.

Delete *1a*

All variables, in which the string '1a' is present (also at the beginning or end) are deleted.

Delete a*:channel?

All channels with the name 'Channel', followed by any character, are deleted from those data groupswhose names begin with an 'a'.

Remarks

The corresponding function group is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run".

Example

Var = 2Save VarDelete Var

A variable is created, saved and then deleted.

Delete Group:Channel

One channel in a data group is deleted.

Reference

Menu option: 'Variable / Delete'



10.14 DSPLoad

Function

Loads a DIGISKOP(c) file (Copyright remes GmbH)

Declaration

DSPLOAD Board Channel FileName VarName


Board Single value - Indicates the board to be loaded (1...5)

Channel Single value - Indicates the channel to be loaded (1...160)

FileName Name of the file to be loaded

VarName Variable to be entered in the file section

Description

A DIGISKOP(c) file group, defined by the remes company, is loaded in FAMOS. This DIGISKOP(c) filegroup consists of a *.DSP, *.PTR and *.DRD file, differentiated only by their file name extension. Thesefiles contain information and measurement values from 1 to 5 data acquisition boards and 1 to 160channels per board. The desired file section is read using the parameters "Board" and "Channel". Theparameter "Board" can accept values between 1 and 5, the parameter "Channel" values between 1 and160.

Remarks

The file name can be a complete path name, including directory and file name extension, but may also bespecified without. The file is then searched for in the directory from which FAMOS loads data. The filename extensions are selected automatically.

The filename can also be specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, thepath contains spaces.


Example

DSPLoad 4 1 DSCPDSPLoad 4 1 c:\dig\DSCP.DSP board4_1

In both cases, the first channel of the fourth board in read from the file group "DSCP.*" and entered inFAMOS under the name "board4_1".

board = 4Chan = 1DSPLoad board chan DSCP data

Two single values define the desired range of the file group "DSCP". The range is entered under thename "data".

DSPLoad 4 1 "c:\My Data\DSCP.DSP" board4_1

The pathname contains spaces and must therefore be written inside of quotation marks.

Reference

Chapter 'File management' / 'DSP Format'

210



10.15 ELSE

Function

Conditional execution, when IF condition is not true.

Declaration

ELSE

Description

Operations can be executed conditionally using the command ELSE in connection with 'IF'. Theoperations between the commands ELSE and END are executed when the specified condition for IF isnot fulfilled.

Remarks

The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run".

Example

LOAD WaveIF Max( Wave) > 5 Show Wave ELSE Delete WaveEND

A waveform is loaded. If the maximum of the waveform is greater than 5, it is displayed; if not, it isdeleted.

Reference

Commands IF, END

10.16 END

Function

Ends a command.

Declaration

END

Description

Ends a series of commands belonging to a condition or loop introduced by the commands IF, ELSE orWHILE.

Remarks


Example

Number = GrChanNum?( DataGroup )index = 1TooLow = 0Meanvalues = Mean( DataGroup) WHILE index <= Number IF meanvalues:[index] > 2 Show DataGroup:[index] ELSE TooLow= TooLow + 1 ENDindex = index+1

ENDThe mean value for each channel in a data group is calculated. If the mean value is greater than 2, the



channel will be displayed; otherwise a variable is incremented which records the number of channels witha smaller mean value.

Reference

Commands IF, WHILE, ELSE, ExitSequence

10.17 ExitSequence

Function

Ends sequence processing

Declaration

EXITSEQUENCE [Option]


Option 0 or no specification: Sequence processing finished completely.1: Skip to end of current sequence. In the case of a subsequence, processing isresumed in the calling sequence.

2: Skip to end of current sequence. In the case of a cyclical subsequence (calledwith parameters with wildcards), the system skips to the next cycle, otherwiseprocessing is resumed in the calling sequence.

Description

Processing of the sequence is ended. Depending on the given option, only the running subsequence iscompleted (system skips back to calling sequence) or the entire sequence processing is terminated.

Remarks

The command is to be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.".

Example

A sequence is interrupted by user input:

Stop = BoxMessage( "Evaluation", "Cancel evaluation?", "?4")IF Stop EXITSEQUENCEEND

Calling the following sequence with

SEQUENCE Evaluation *.dat

Results in the evaluation of all "*.dat"-files in the current folder which were successfully loaded in FAMOS-format.

; Sequence "Evaluation.seq"fh = FileOpenDSF("PA1", 0)IF fh < 1 EXITSEQUENCE 2END ...; Extensive analysis follows ...

However, if the parameter for EXITSEQUENCE is changed to a 1, processing is stopped as soon as theopening of a file fails (e.g. because the file does not exist in FAMOS-format).

Reference

Command PAUSE

212



10.18 Export

Function

Exports a variable

Declaration

EXPORT VarName


VarName Name of the variable to be exported

Description

The variable transferred as a parameter is exported. The variable itself remains unchanged. Once theexport is successfully complete, the variable is available for import to other imc applications. Data can beexchanged between different imc applications using the commands Import and Export.

Remarks

The command is found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export, etc.".

Example

Load DATADATA = Cut (DATA, 0 's', 10 's')Export DATA

The waveform DATA is loaded, a section selected and then exported.

Reference

Menu option: 'Variable / Export'

Curve Window Manual / 'Export'

10.19 FAMOS

Function

Sets the FAMOS format.

Declaration

FAMOS

Description

The file format for loading files is set to the FAMOS format. The format setting remains even after theprogram is ended.

Remarks


To load files in FAMOS format you can also use the functions in group "13>File Functions". These aremuch more powerful, especially for loading files containing multiple waveforms.

Example

FAMOSLoad DATA

The file format for loading files is set to FAMOS format. The file DATA.DAT is loaded and entered in thevariable list under the name DATA.

Reference

Chapter 'File management' / 'Loading Files'



Function FileOpenDSF

10.20 FASLoad

Function

Loads a file whose format was defined by the user (by means of either the imc File Assistant or theimport/ export expansion libraries).

Declaration

FASLOAD TxFileName, TxFormatName,TxVarName


TxFileName Name of the file to be loaded(transfer as text constant in "" or as text variable)

TxFormat Format specifications

TxVarName (optional)This name is used only when the file contains exactly one data object.Otherwise, the name specified in the format definition is used

(transfer as text constant in "" or as text variable)

Description

There are two ways of specifying the format in the parameter <TxFormat>:

Import filter (File Assistant)

The format is determined by an importation description file (an import filter) created by means of the imcFile Assistant. Such an import filter file usually takes the extension ".fas".

This file's name is then supplied as the parameter. Unless a complete pathname is provided, the systemsearches in the default definitions' folder ("Extra"/ "Options"/ "Folders").

Import/export expansion library

The necessary functionality is provided by an import/export expansion library. Such libraries (DynamicLink Library, DLL) are offered by imc or our distribution partners and can be seamlessly integrated into theFAMOS user's interface and function library. This means that FAMOS can be flexibly adapted to supportadditional file formats. One example is the DLL for importing and exporting the MATLAB file format whichis included in the standard FAMOS package.

The syntax of the parameter <TxFormat> is then as follows:

"#DLLName|FormatName|Parameter>"

DLLName states the expansion library's filename; the extension ".dll" can be omitted.

FormatName states the name of the desired format (an expansion library can certainly support multipleformats). This can be omitted if the DLL provides only one format and thus needs no additionalparameters.

Examples

FASLOAD "1.txt","#MyFormat.DLL"FASLOAD "1.txt","#MyFormat.DLL|Txt"FASLOAD "1.asc","#MyFormat.DLL|Asc|Header=yes"

All specifications needed here are provided by the expansion library's maker.

Remarks

· If the file name does not contain a complete directory path, the directory currently set for loadingis used. Once FAMOS has been started, this path is found in the dialog 'Options/ Directories' andcan be reset using the command LDIR.

214



· A Wildcard can be entered in a file name in order to load a series of files. The Wildcard '?'stands for certain character, '*' stands for an undefined number of characters.

· The variable name is optional. It is used only when the file to be read contains exactly one dataobject. Otherwise, the variable names specified with the File Assistant are used.

· The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save".

· To load user-defined files, use the functions in the function group "13> File Functions".

Example

FASLOAD "Wave.dat", "Osci2311.fas", "Channel1"

The file WAVE.DAT is read using the specified format description format and saved in FAMOS as avariable with the name "channel".

FASLOAD "Data.mat", "MatLab_Imp.DLL"

The file DATA.MAT in the MatLab® -format is loaded.

TxFormatFile = "myformat.fas"FASLOAD "c:\imc\*.*", TxFormatFile

All files are loaded in the directory c:\imc .

FASLOAD "a??.*", TxFormatFile

All files whose names begin with an 'a' and consist of three characters are loaded in the current directory.Any file name extension can be used.

FASLOAD "*a1*.dat", TxFormatFile

All files with the extension 'dat', whose names contain the string '1a' (at the beginning or end) are loaded.

Reference

Menu option: 'File'/ 'Load...'

Command LDIR

Function FileOpenFAS

10.21 FFTOption

Function

Makes FFT settings.

Instead of the command FFTOPTION, the function SetOption should be used for newly createdsequences.

Declaration

FFTOPTION Window Mode


Window Single value - window function (0...4)

Mode Single value - determines length of waveform

Description

This function allows the user to change the presettings for the FFT in a sequence. Use 'Window' tospecify the window function. The 'Mode' parameter determines the way the waveform length is treated.



Window

0 Rectangular

1 Hamming

2 Hanning

3 Blackman

4 Blackman/Harris

5 Flat-Top

Mode

0 Reduce waveform length to next power of two

1 Increase waveform length to next power of two and fillwith zeros

Remarks


Example

FFTOption 4 1FFTRes = FFT( Wave )

A Blackman/Harris window function was selected. The waveform is extended to the next power of two andfilled with zeros.

Reference

Menu option: 'Options / Functions'

10.22 IF

Function

Conditional execution

Declaration

IF SvVariableIF Expression


SvVariable Single value

Expression Formula, comparison, etc.

Description

Operations can be executed conditionally using the command 'IF'.

The series of commands is executed only if the single value specified as a parameter is greater than zeroor the specified expression returns a value greater than zero. Otherwise, execution of the sequence iscontinued after the accompanying commands ELSE or END.

A complex expression is allowed as the parameter, for example functions, indexed variables or complete

216



formulas. However, this expression must return a single value. Often, an arithmetical comparison operatoror logical operation is applied here.

WHILE( i+ 23 ) >= StDev( Waveform )...ENDWHILE (i>1) AND (i< 100)...END

Remarks

The 'IF' command can be used in two forms. In the first, the 'IF' command is closed by "End". Alloperations between the introductory command 'IF' and the closing command "End" are executed only ifthe condition is fulfilled.

In the second form, 'IF' is ended by the command ELSE, which is then ended by the command 'End'. Alloperations between the introductory command 'IF' and ELSE are executed only when the condition isfulfilled.

Otherwise, all operations between ELSE and END are executed. One of the two series of operations isexecuted, depending on fulfillment of the condition.

The condition is checked only once in each case.

No loops are created.

Conditions can be nested up to ten levels.

Indent the operations slightly to optically separate the content of a condition from the remaining sequenceand to separate the various levels of nested conditions or loops from each other.


Example

If Max(Wave) > 5 Show Wave Else Delete WaveEnd

A waveform is loaded. If the maximum of the waveform is greater than 5, it is displayed; if not, it isdeleted.

If Wave[1] < 0 Wave[1] = 0End

When the first value in a waveform is less than zero, it is set back to zero.

m = Mean ( Wave )If m > 0.8 BoxOutput( "Mean value:", m, "", 0 )End

The mean value of a waveform is calculated. If the mean value is greater than 0.8V, an output boxcontaining the mean value is generated.

m = Mean ( Data )IF (m < 0.1) OR (m > 0.9) BoxOutput( "Warning", "Mean value!", "!1" )End

The mean value of a waveform is calculated. If the mean value is outside of a given range, a warning isdisplayed.

Reference

Commands WHILE, ELSE, END



10.23 Import

Function

Imports a variable

Declaration

IMPORT VarName


VarName Name which contains the variable to be imported.

Description

A variable is imported and entered in the variable list under a new name. It must have been exported byanother imc application. The name of the exported variable is ignored.

Remarks

This command has no effect if no variable is exported.

The commands Import and Export allow data to be exchanged between various imc applications. Notethat, unlike the menu option Import, a variable name must be specified under which the imported variableis made available. Thus, the name of the exported variable is not used.

The command is found in the group "D> Commands DDE, Import, Export, etc.".

Example

Import WAVEMaximum = Max (WAVE)Delete WAVEShow Maximum

A waveform is imported under the name WAVE, its maximum is calculated and displayed. The importedwaveform is no longer needed and is deleted.

Reference

Menu option: 'Variable'/Import'

Curve Manager Manual, 'Export'

10.24 Layout

Function

Remote control of the Report Generator.

This command has been only been kept to maintain compatibility with previous versions of FAMOS. Westrongly recommend using the more efficient Report Generator Kit commands when creating newsequences.

Declaration

LAYOUT PRINTLAYOUT Load FileNameLAYOUT Object OTitle Variable


FileName Name of the configuration file to load

Otitle Title (Name) of the Report generator object to be written to

218



Variable Variable to be transferred

Description

LAYOUT Print

This function prints the current Print Layout.

LAYOUT Load

A configuration file is loaded to the Report Generator. If you set placeholders in the Report Generator, usethis command to restore all placeholders.

The Report Generator is started as an icon.

The specification for the filename may also be a complete path name, if the desired configuration file isnot in the default folder.

The default folder for Report Generator files can be set either in the Report Generator itself or in thedialog "Options / Folders".

LAYOUT Object

A variable is passed to a Report Generator object. The desired object in the layout is selected by name.

Variables can be passed to text or curve objects. Before transfer of a curve object, the waveform must bedisplayed in a curve window.

Remarks

The Report Generator Kit for remote control of the Report Generator has more efficient functionsavailable. Information about registering and using the Report Generator Kit is found in the chapter'Functions' / 'imc-Kits', as well as in the "Curve Window / Report Generator" manual.

The command is found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export, etc.".

Example

LOAD Wave.datSHOW WaveTxt = "Created by S.Smith"LAYOUT LOAD c:\imc\drb\Drb1.drbLAYOUT OBJECT Curve Wave LAYOUT OBJECT Name Txt LAYOUT PRINTA Report Generator mask is loaded. A curve and text object is transferred to the Report Generator andthen the report is printed.

Reference

Chapter 'Application Examples'

Chapter 'Functions' / 'imc Kit Interface'

Report Generator Kit Manual'

10.25 LDIR

Function

Sets directory for loading files.

Instead of the LDIR command, the function SetOption should be used in newly created sequences.

Declaration

LDIR Directory




Directory Complete specification of a directory

Description

The directory for loading files is reset. After this command is executed, the new directory specified will beused to load files.

The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, forinstance, the path contains spaces.

These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: without specifying the folder). In thatcase, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default.

Remarks

This directory remains valid until:

· either the LDIR command or the function SetOption is called again

· a file is called from another directory using the dialog box Load in the "File" menu

· or a new directory for loading files is defined using the dialog "Options / Folders".

The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save"

Example

FAMOSLoad WAVE1LDIR C:\ExperimentLoad WAVE2

First the file WAVE1 and then the file C:\EXPERIMENT\ WAVE2.DAT is loaded from the current directoryin FAMOS format.

LDIR "c:\My Trials on 12-1-98"

The directory name contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks.

Reference

Command Load, function SetOption

10.26 Load

Function

Loads a file.

Declaration

LOAD DatNameLOAD DatName VarName


DatName Name of file to be loaded

VarName Name under which the variable is to be entered in thevariable list ( optional )

Description

The specified file is loaded in the currently set file format (FAMOS, BINARY or ASCII) and its data objectsentered in the variable list. A complete file name, including the path, can be specified. If the secondparameter is missing, the file name without directory and extension is used as the variable name.

220



In FAMOS files created with the version 3.0, the variable names are stored in the file; the variables arethen created under the same name after being loaded in FAMOS. When the second parameter isspecified, exactly one data object is read from the file and stored under the specified name.

Wildcards can also be specified in file names to load a series of files.

The wildcard '?' stands for an exact character, '*' stands for an undefined number of any characters.

Load c:\imc\*.*

All files are loaded in the directory c:\imc.

Load a??.*

All files whose names begin with 'a' and consist of three characters are loaded in the current directory.Any file name extension can be used.

Load *a1*.dat

All files with the extension 'dat', whose names contain the string '1a' (at the beginning or end), are loaded.

Remarks

If the FAMOS data format is set, a file name extension must not be specified. The extension ".DAT" isautomatically used.

End a file name with a period if an extension is not desired. If no path is specified, the path set for loadingfiles is used. Once FAMOS is started, this path is found in the standard directory in the dialog 'Options'/'Directories'. It can be changed using the command LDIR.



Use the commands DSPLoad or WFTLoad to load files in Digiskop- or Nicolet format.

To load files defined with the imc File Assistant, use the command FASLoad.

The functions in the group "13> File Functions" can also be used to load FAMOS files. These are muchmore powerful than the command LOAD, especially for loading files containing multiple waveforms.

Example

FAMOSLOAD c:\imc\dat\Wave var1

The file WAVE.DAT is loaded in FAMOS format and the resulting variable is entered in the variable listunder the name "var1".

ASCIILOAD DBAS.ASC

The specified ASCII file is loaded and entered in the variable list under the name DBAS.

BINARYLDIR c:\BINDATALOAD *.BIN

All files with the extension 'BIN' are loaded in binary format in the specified directory.

LOAD "c:\imc\My Data\Data"


Reference

Menu option: 'File'/'Load...'

Commands LDIR, Binary, ASCII, FASLoad




10.27 MDIR

Function

Sets directory for loading and saving sequences.

Instead of the command MDIR, the function SetOption should be used for newly created sequences.

Declaration

MDIR Directory



Description

The directory for loading and saving sequences is reset.

After this command is executed, this directory is used to load and store sequences. This concerns thecommand Sequence as well as the dialog for loading and storing sequences in the Sequence Editor.

The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance,the path contains spaces.These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: withoutspecifying the folder). In that case, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default.

Remarks


· either the MDIR command or the function SetOption is called again

· a sequence file is loaded from or stored in another folder

· or a new folder is defined using the dialog under "Options / Folders".


Example

FAMOSSEQUENCE SEQ1MDIR C:\MACROSEQUENCE SEQ2

First the sequence SEQ1 and then C:\MACRO\SEQ2.SEQ is called from the current directory.

MDIR "c:\My Trials on 12-1-98"


Reference

Command Sequence

10.28 Pause

Function

Pause sequence for user request.

Declaration

PAUSE Outputtext


Outputtext Any text to be displayed

222



Description

The sequence pauses and a dialog box containing the buttons "OK" and "Cancel", as well as the specifiedtext. This allows the user to view intermediate results in the sequence or stop the sequence. Select the"OK" button to continue executing the sequence; select the "Cancel" button to interrupt the sequence .

Remarks


The BoxOutput function can be used alternatively to display user information. The functions BoxValue?and BoxText?' are available to enter texts or values by the user. Use the function BoxMessage for simpledecision trees ('Yes/No').

To interrupt execution of the sequence for a specified delay time, you can use the function Sleep.

Example

Show xPause First Step x = x + 1Pause Continue calculation?x = x + 2

The original waveform x and the first intermediate result can be viewed.

Reference

Functions BoxMessage, BoxOutput, BoxValue?, BoxText?, DlgFileName, Sleep

Command ExitSequence

10.29 Rename

Function

Renames a variable.

Declaration

RENAME VarName1 VarName2


VarName1 Old variable name

VarName2 New variable name

Description

A variable is renamed. The old name is transferred as the first parameter, the new name as the second.

Remarks

If a variable with the desired new name already exists, this variable is deleted and the old variable isoverwritten by the new name.


Example

Load DataRename Data CalcuShow Calcu

A waveform is loaded, renamed and displayed.

Group:Channel1 = DataRename Group:channel1 MyDataShow Group:MyData



A channel is a data group is renamed and displayed.

Reference

Menu 'Variables' / 'Properties'

10.30 Request

Function

Receive data via DDE.

Instead of the command 'Request', the function DDEInq should be used when creating new sequences.

Declaration

REQUEST Application Topic Item Variable


Application Name of the DDE application addressed

Topic Designation of the DDE topic

Item Name of the variable requested

Variable Single value of normal waveform, name of the receiving FAMOS variable

Description

FAMOS operates as a DDE client, the application addressed as a DDE server. The entries "Application"and "topic" cause FAMOS to select another DDE-capable application and request a conversation. If therequest is complied with, FAMOS then supplies the name of the item desired. FAMOS waits until theserver either transfers the data, whereupon the conversation is concluded, or denies the request. Thevariable specified in "Variable" now contains the data received. If the transfer wasn't possible, it containsthe return value from the DDE application addressed. The data can be single values, as well as data setsin ASCII or FAMOS DDE format.

Remarks

· The individual parameters for the Control-command may not contain space characters.

· FAMOS sends an error message, if DDE application (server) addressed doesn't answer or thedata request was denied.

· If the application (server) addressed is busy, FAMOS waits until it is free.

· FAMOS commands are case-insensitive (upper or lower-case letters are equally valid). However,some DDE applications do distinguish between upper and lower case. Have regard, therefore,for correct spelling.

· The commands can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.".

Example

Request Trans Timebase TB x

"Trans" is the name of an imaginary, DDE-capable application, "Timebase" the name of the DDE-topic.The return value is written to variable "x".

Request Trans1 Status Trigger SVtrigRequest Trans2 Status Armoured SVarm

Data can be requested from varying DDE-applications. After execution of this command the two singlevalue variables contain information about the status of the "trans"-devices. For example, the variableSVTrig could be =1.0, if the "Trans1" trigger was tripped.

224



Reference

Command Control

Functions DDEInq, DDESet, DDESend

10.31 Save

Function

Saves variables in FAMOS file format

Declaration

SAVE VarNameSAVE VarName FileName


VarName Variable to be stored

FileName File name (or complete path) under which the variable should be saved (optional)

Description

The variable specified as parameter is saved. If a file name is not specified, the variable is stored underits name in the directory currently selected for saving variables.

If a file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. When a complete path is specified, thispath is used; otherwise the path currently set for saving files is used.


Remarks

The variable specified as parameter is saved. If a file name is not specified, the variable is stored underits name in the directory currently selected for saving variables.

If a file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. When a complete path is specified, thispath is used; otherwise the path currently set for saving files is used.

The functions in the groups "13> File Functions" can also be used to save files in FAMOS format. Theseare much more powerful than the command SAVE, especially for saving files containing multiplewaveforms.

Example

Wave = Int(Wave)Save Wave

The variable Wave is integrated and saved in a file.

Hist = Histo( Wave1, 10, 6 ) Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist001 Hist = Histo( Wave2, 10, 6 )Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist002

A histogram is calculated for each of the waveforms Wave1 and Wave2 and saved in the specifieddirectory under the names 'hist001.dat' and 'hist002.dat'.

Hist:N001 = Histo( Wave1, 10, 6 )Hist:N002 = Histo( Wave2, 10, 6 )Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist002

A data group consisting of 2 channels is created and stored under the specified file name.

Save Data1 "c:\imc\My Data\Evalu.dat"




Reference

Menu option: 'File'/ 'Save individually...'

Commands ASCSave, SDIR


10.32 SDIR

Function

Sets directory for saving files.

Instead of the command SDIR, the function SetOption should be used for newly created sequences.

Declaration

SDIR Directory



Description

The directory for storing files is reset.

After this command is executed, this directory is used to save files. This directory is used by thecommands Save and ASCSave if a complete path name is not specified for the file.

The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance,the path contains spaces.

These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: without specifying the folder). In thatcase, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default.

Remarks


· either the SDIR command or the function SetOption is called again

· a file is saved in another directory using the dialog box Save in the "File" menu

· or a new directory for saving files is defined using the dialog under "Options / Folders".


Example

FAMOSLOAD wavewave = 2 * wave + 3SAVE waveSDIR c:\experimentSAVE wave

The waveform WAVE is loaded and changed and then saved in FAMOS format in the current directory.Then it is saved again under the name C:\EXPERIMENT\WAVE.DAT.

SDIR "c:\My Tials on 12-1-98"


Reference

Commands Save, ASCSave

226



10.33 Sequence

Function

Executes a sequence

Declaration

SEQUENCE FileName [Param1 ...ParamN]


FileName File name of sequence

Param1 First parameter of sequence

ParamN Last parameter of sequence

Description

A sequence is executed. The name of the sequence is a file name and is transferred as the firstparameter. If the sequence to be executed expects parameters, these must be transferred as furtherparameters.


Unless a complete path is provided along with the filename, the system searches for the sequence file inthis order of locations:

1. The current working folder: This is the folder from which the calling sequence was opened.

2. Project folder: If a project is open, the system looks for it in the current project folder.

3. Default folder for sequences and dialogs: Once FAMOS is started, this directory is found in thestandard directory set in the dialog 'Options/ Directories'. This directory can be changed usingthe command MDIR or the function SetOption.

Please refer to the chapter 'Sequences' for more information about working with sequences, especiallythose with parameters.

Remarks

1. The maximum number of parameters is 9.

2. When a sequence is active, the Windows taskbar's notification area contains an additional icon.Right-clicking the mouse calls a context menu which offers a command for interrupting thecurrent run.

1. To interrupt, it's also possible to use the combination of keys "CTRL" + "Break".

2. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run".

Sequence Series

The sequence named Series is executed; it does not expect any parameters.

Sequence Sum Wave1 Wave2

A sequence named Sum is executed. It calculates the sum of two waveforms. The waveforms to be



added are transferred as parameters.

Sequence c:\imc\seq\Loadall.seq d*.dat

A sequence used to load a file is executed for all files which begin with a "D" and have the extension ".DAT" .

Sequence "c:\imc\My Sequences\Evalu.dat" Data1


Reference

Chapter 'Sequences'

10.34 Show

Function

Shows a variable.

Declaration

SHOW Var


Var Variable to be displayed

Description

The variable specified as a parameter is displayed. If the variable is a waveform or data group, a curvewindow is opened (generated).

If the variable is a text variable, it is displayed in a special text window.

Wildcards can also be specified in order to display a series of variables.

The wildcard '?' stands for an exact character; the wildcard '*' stands for an undefined number of anycharacter.

SHOW *

All variables are displayed.

SHOW ??

All variables are displayed whose names have exactly 2 characters.

SHOW *1a*

All variables containing the string '1a' (at the beginning or end) are displayed.

SHOW a*:channel?

All channels with the name 'channel', followed by any character are displayed from all data groups whosename begins with an 'a'.

Remarks

If a window already exists for this variable, it is brought into the foreground.

The Curve-Kit for remote control of the curve window has more efficient functions available for displayingand configuration of the curve window Information about registering and using the Curve-Kit is found inthe chapter 'Functions'/ 'imc-Kits', as well as in the Curve Window /Report Generator manual.


Example

Wave = IPol(Wave, 3)Show Wavex = Max(Wave)Show x

228



A waveform is enlarged with spline interpolation and displayed. The maximum of this waveform iscalculated and displayed.

Reference

Menu option: 'Variable'/ 'Show individually'

Chapter 'Variables'/ 'Showing Variables'

Curve Kit documentation

10.35 TimeCopy

Function

Copies the trigger time.

Declaration

TIMECOPY SourceVar TargetVar


SourceVar Source variable

TargetVar Target variable

Description

The trigger time of the target variable is set to equal that of the source variable. The trigger time is storedin files in FAMOS format and is used for scaling the date and time of the x-axis in curve windows.

Remarks


Further functions for assigning, requesting and calculating with the date and time are found in the functiongroup "18> Date, Time".

Example

TIMECOPY sDat tDat

The variable "tDat" contains the trigger time of the variable "sDat".

Reference

Command TimeSet, Functions Time?, SetTime

10.36 TimeSet

Function

Sets the trigger time.

Declaration

TIMESET TargetVar Day Month Year Hour Minute Second


TargetVar Variable

Day Single value; date: day

Month Single value; date: month



Year Single value; date: year (4-places)

Hour Single value; time: hour

Minute Single value; time: minute

Second Single value; time: second

Description

The trigger time of the variable "TargetVar" is set according to the new time.

Remarks

The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". The trigger time is stored in files inFAMOS format and is used for scaling the date and time of the x-axis in curve windows.

Further functions for assigning, requesting and calculating with the date and time are found in the functiongroup "15> Date, Time".

Example

TIMESET TargetVar 1 3 1992 12 0 1

The trigger time of the variable "TargetVar" is set to '01.03.1992 12:00:01'

Reference

Command TimeCopy, Functions Time?, SetTime, TimeJoin

10.37 WFTLoad

Function

Loads a Nicolet WFT file (Copyright 1988 Nicolet Instrument Corporation).

Declaration

WFTLOAD Segment TBase FileName VarName


Segment Single value - Indicates the segment to be loaded (1...1024)

TBase Single value - Indicates the time base to be loaded (1...3)

FileName Name of file to be loaded

VarName Variable in which the file section is to be entered

Description

A WFT file from the Nicolet Instrument Corporation is loaded in FAMOS. A WFT file can contain from 1 to1024 segments and 1 to 3 time bases. The parameters "Segment" and "TBase" can be used to read adefined segment and time base. The parameter "Segment" can assume values between 1 and 1024, theparameter "TBase" between 1 and 3.

The selected file section is loaded under the specification set in "VarName".


Remarks

The file name can be a complete file name including directory and file name extension; it can also bespecified without either of the two. The program then searches for the file in the directory currently usedby FAMOS for loading files. The extension ".WFT" is selected automatically.

230




Example

WFTLoad 4 1 WAVE0001 seg4WFTLoad 4 1 c:\nic\WAVE0001 seg4

In both cases, the first time base of the fourth segment is read from the file "WAVE0001.WFT" andentered in FAMOS with the specification "seg4".

seg = 4bas = 1WFTLoad seg bas WAVE01 wave

Two single values define the desired range of the file "WAVE01". The range is entered as "Wave".

WFTLoad 4 1 "c:\My Data\WAVE0001" seg420


Reference

Chapter 'File management / WFT Format'

10.38 WHILE

Function

Conditional loop.

Declaration

WHILE SvVariableWHILE Expression


SvVariable Single value variable

Expression Formula, comparison, etc.

Description

This command introduces a conditional loop. This loop is executed as long as the single value specifiedas a parameter is greater than zero or if the specified expression returns a value greater than 0.Otherwise, the loop is not repeated and the sequence is executed according to the command "END".

A complex expression is allowed as the parameter, for example functions, indexed variables or completeformulas. However, this expression must return a single value. Often, an arithmetical comparison operatoror logical operation is applied here.

WHILE( i+ 23 ) >= StDev( Waveform )...ENDWHILE (i>1) AND (i< 100)...END

Remarks

A loop is a command to initiate a sequence of operations; this sequence of operations is repeated whilethe defined condition is fulfilled. When the condition is not fulfilled, the loop is not executed. Theoperations in the sequence are then processed further.

The loop must be ended using the command END. All operations between the accompanying commandWHILE and the closing command END form the sequence of operations executed each time the loop isexecuted.

The loop is executed only when the condition is fulfilled at the start, i.e. when the sequence meets thecommand WHILE the first time. When the condition is fulfilled, all operations are executed until the



corresponding 'End' command is found. At this point, the sequence goes back to the position with thecommand WHILE, and the condition is rechecked.

When the condition is not fulfilled, the sequence goes back beyond the command "End" and resumesexecution from this position.

Loops can be nested up to ten levels. Indent the operations somewhat in the sequence to opticallyseparate the content of a loop from the remaining sequence and to separate the various levels of nestedloops or conditions from each other.

The comparison for equality ( = ) should be used with caution in calculated expressions. FAMOScalculates internally in a real numbers format. The last places could become inaccurate if calculation isexecuted, so that a comparison of two apparently equal numbers will be interpreted incorrectly.


Example

i = 5Factor = 1While i Factor = Factor * i i = i - 1EndShow FactorDelete i

This loop is run through five times, for the values i = 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. A factorial of 5 is calculated anddisplayed. The loop index is then no longer needed and is deleted.

WHILE StDev(Wave) > 0.2 Wave = Smo5(Wave)ENDSHOW Wave

A waveform is smoothed until the standard deviation is no longer greater than 0.2.

Reference

Commands IF, END

10.39 Xdelta

Function

Sets the sampling rate.

Declaration

XDELTA Variable DeltaX


Variable Variable whose x-axis is to be redefined

DeltaX Single valueDistance between two adjacent points in x-units

Description

The divisions of the x-axis (sampling rate) are redefined.

Remarks

The unit of the x-axis remains unchanged.


Example

232



xUnit Volt sxDelta Volt 60

The variable "Volt" first receives the x-unit "s", then the distance between two points is defined to "60", sothat the new sampling rate is 60 s .

Reference

Command xUnit

Functions xDel, xDel?

Menu 'Variables'/ 'Properties'

10.40 Xunit

Function

Sets the x-unit.

Declaration

xUNIT VarName xUnit


VarName Name of variable to be assigned a new unit

xUnit New x-unit

Description

The unit of the x-axis of a waveform is redefined, i.e. the waveform is assigned a new x-unit.

The waveform is the first parameter, the unit is the second.

The unit is specified without quotation marks. If there is no second parameter, the unit of the x-axis isdeleted.

Remarks

In complex waveforms, only the unit of the first component is changed. In xy-waveforms, the unit of the x-components is set.

The function SetUnit can also be used to assign units.


Example

ASCIILoad Waveh=Histo (Wave)xUnit h V

The unit of the x-axis in a histogram is set to "V". This information was not available in the ASCII file.

xUnit Wave

After this command is executed, the variable has no unit on the x-axis.

Reference

Commands yUnit, xDelta

Functions SetUnit,Unit?




10.41 Xoffset

Function

Sets the x-offset.

Declaration

XOFFSET Variable Offs


Variable Variable whose x-offset is to be redefined

Offs Single valueDistance of the first data point from zero in x-units

Description

The x-offset of "Variable" is set to a new value.

Remarks


Example

xUnit Temp sxOffset Temp 10

First the x-unit "s" is assigned to the variable "Temp". The command following has the effect that the firstdata point of the variable "Temp" lies at "10 s".

Reference

Commands xUnit, xDelta

Chapter 'Variables'/ 'Properties'

Functions xOff, xOff?

10.42 Yunit

Function

Sets the y-unit.

Declaration

yUNIT VarName yUnit


VarName Variable containing the y-unit

yUnit New y-unit

Description

The unit of the y-axis in a waveform is redefined, i.e. the waveform is assigned a new y-unit. Thewaveform is the first parameter, the unit is the second.

The unit is not specified in quotation marks. If there is no second parameter, the unit of the y-axis isdeleted.

Remarks

The unit of a single value is interpreted as the y-unit. In complex waveforms, only the unit of the firstcomponent is changed; in xy-waveforms, the unit of the y-component is set.

234




Example

yUnit Wave A

The unit of the y-axis in the waveform "Wave" is set to "A".

yUnit Wave

Now the variable "Wave" no longer has a unit on the y-axis.

Reference

Command xUnit

Functions SetUnit,Unit?


235Data Editor


Data Editor

11.1 Introduction

The integrated Waveform Editor allows you to display, compare and change waveforms in a table. Inaddition to the standard edit functions such as copy, cut and paste, there are several special functionsavailable for processing data.

Waveforms can be displayed with reference to trigger instant and sampling rate. This makes it easier tofind and evaluate events occurring at the same time.

The integrated search function allows you to find values which lie within or outside of predefined interval.

The curve window and table display can be linked so that they both display the same position in thewaveform. This allows you to "roll through" a waveform and observe the current section in the curvewindow as well as in the table window.

Use the Waveform Editor to edit existing waveforms by adding, appending or deleting values. Completelynew waveforms may be generated, which can then be used as reference curves or as parameter sets formathematical functions.

11.2 Start

Start the Waveform Editor using menu item "Extra / Waveform Editor", the button in the tool bar or the<F10> function key. If variables are selected in the list when the Editor is started, these are displayed inthe first table window.

11.3 Interface Elements

The main window's editor has a menu- and toolbar [1]. Along with various buttons which provide quickaccess to selected menu commands, the toolbar also has an input box [9]) for entering or editing values.At the bottom edge is a status bar [7] which displays either status info or brief descriptions of the menuitem currently selected.

The main window's workspace displays table windows [2]. Starting the editor generates a table windowof maximum size. If desired, additional tables can be created and positioned wherever the user wishes.

A table window's workspace consists of the table header [3] showing the names of the variables currently

236


Data Editor

being displayed, a scaling column [6], and the data columns [4] containing the values.

11.4 Context Menus

Many menu items are more readily accessible via the context menu.

By right-clicking the mouse on the table header, the corresponding column is activated and the contextmenu depicted below appears.

The same items can be found under the heading "Column" of the main menu.

By right-clicking the mouse in the core of the table, a different context menu is called, which offers itemsfor use in editing the current selection

These items are also available in the menu "Edit.

11.5 Opening and Closing Table

A table window is created and displayed immediately when the Waveform Editor is started. Open newtables using menu item "Table / New", or the corresponding button in the tool bar.

Icon:

To close an active table window, use menu item "Table / Close", the key combination <Ctrl> + <F4>, orthe system menu in the table window.

11.6 Activating Tables and Columns

When several tables are open, activate the desired table by clicking with the mouse on the table or byclicking above the "Window" menu in the main window. Use the key combination <CTRL> + <F6> or<CTRL> + <SHIFT> + <F6> to go through the list of open windows either forwards or backwards.

Each table has an active column (column head displayed in negative) which contains the active input cell.Select the active column by clicking on the head or by horizontal movement of the input cell.

237Data Editor


11.7 Showing a Variable

If variables where selected in the variable list when the Waveform Editor is started, they are displayedimmediately in the first table. To display further variables, double-click on the head of the desired columnor use the menu item "Column / Insert Waveform". A list appears in which one or several variables can beselected from those presently available. The selected variables are then displayed in the table startingfrom the active column.

Waveform Editor, Dialog: Show Variable

The same presettings are valid for displaying channels in groups and components in this list as for thevariable list in the FAMOS main window (menu item Extra / Options / Variable list" ).

If a variable is already displayed in a column which should be assigned a new variable, it is deleted fromthe table and the new variable is displayed in the column.

Drag & drop can also be used to "drop" variables from the variable list in the main window or from thecurve window above the column head, which are then displayed starting from this column.

"To release a column, i.e. to end the display of the variable in this column, activate the column and usemenu item "Column / Clear column. You may also close the table and continue working in a new, emptytable.

XY-Waveforms

For the display of XY-waveforms you can specify whether to display both components of the data set bydefault or whether to display only the y-values. The setting is performed in the dialog "Display / Options",on the index card "Various".

238


Data Editor

Waveform Editor, dialog: Display / Options / Various

Both components

The x-component is displayed in the active column, the y-component in the adjacent column to the right.

Only y-component

The y-component is displayed in the active column.

The option is the sensible one in cases where several waveforms, all having the same (non-equidistant)time stamp, are being displayed alongside each other; the x-component (= time stamp) is the same in anycase and it can be displayed in the scaling column at left.

Segmented Waveforms

Whenever a segmented waveform is selected for display in the Waveform Editor, the dialog depictedbelow, which allows you to specify details of the display, automatically appears.

Waveform Editor,: dialog Configure Display, segments

239Data Editor


All Segments

All segments of the Waveform are displayed.

If the option "Tile" is activated, the individual segments are listed in separate columns one beside theother. Otherwise, the values of the entire waveform is displayed in one continuous column, each eventafter the last.

Segment Number

This input box becomes accessible when the option "All Segments" is deactivated. The ("serial") numberor "index" of the particular segment desired (a number between "1" and the total amount of segments inthe waveform) is entered here.

Multi-Event Waveforms

Whenever a multi-event waveform is selected for display in the Waveform Editor, the dialog depictedbelow, which allows .you to specify details of the display, automatically appears.

Waveform Editor,: dialog Configure Display, events

All Events

All events of the Waveform are displayed.

If the option "Tie" is activated, the individual events are listed in separate columns one beside the other.Otherwise, the values of the entire waveform is displayed in one continuous column, each event after thelast.

Event Number

This input box becomes accessible when the option "All Events" is deactivated. The ("serial") number or"index" of the particular event desired (a number between "1" and the total amount of events in thewaveform) is entered here.

11.8 Inserting and Deleting Columns

Menu item "Column / Delete Column" erases an entire column from the display. The columns located tothe right of the deleted column are shifted to the left in order not to leave an empty column in the deletedcolumn's stead (this contrasts with the effect of "Column / Clear Column").

The menu item "Column / Insert New Column" inserts a new, empty column to the left of the activecolumn; the columns following are shifted to the right.

240


Data Editor

11.9 Positioning the Input Cell, Scrolling and Marking

In order to enter or change a value, the active input cell must be positioned on the specified value. Clickwith the mouse on the cell or use the direction keys to change the position of the input cell. The activeinput cell is highlighted in the color of the buttons, usually gray.

The section of the table currently visible can be changed by moving the input cell with the direction keys orby using the scroll bars in the table. The section is changed so that the input cell is always visible.

The vertical scroll bar always refers to the position of the active column. The inner arrow key causesscrolling around a cell, the middle direction key around 1/100th of the total length of the displayedwaveform; the outer direction keys are positioned at the beginning or the end of the waveform in theactive column.

The direction keys have the following meanings:

One cell in the specified direction

HOME 1st value in the active column

END Last value in the active column

PAGE 1st page up

PAGE 1st page down

CONTROL+ HOME 1st column

CONTROL + END Last column

CONTROL + PAGE 1st page left

CONTROL + PAGE 1st page right

Use menu item "Edit / Go to" to go directly to a value or "Edit / Search" to search for values in a specifiedrange.

To mark a section of the table, drag the mouse across the desired range (hold down the left mousebutton) or use the arrow keys and press <SHIFT> at the same time.

Several columns can be selected only when the table is in the basic display mode (menu item "Display/No time comparison").

To completely mark an active column, use menu item "Column/ Highlight Column".

11.10 Entering and Changing Individual Values

In order to enter or change a specified value, the active input cell must first be positioned on this value.Click with the mouse on the desired cell or move the input cell with the arrow keys.

To enter a new value or overwrite an existing value, simply enter the new value using the keyboard. Thetable changes from the "Ready" mode to the "Input" mode (see status bar). Confirm the entry with<Return> or a direction key, if the next value is to be entered in the adjacent cell. <Esc> cancels the entryand the "old" value is restored in the cell.

The "Change" mode must be active in order to change an existing value. Click on the input box in the toolbar or use the key combination <Ctrl> + <F2>. The value in the input box may then be changed in theusual way. Confirm changes by selecting <Return>, reject changes with <Esc> . The buttons found to theleft of the input box may be used as an alternative to the keys. The table then returns to the "Ready"mode.

The differences between the three input modes are emphasized in the following:

241Data Editor


Ready: The direction keys move the input cell. Change to INPUT mode by pressing anumber or letter key.

Input: Overwrite the content of a cell. The direction keys end the input mode andreposition the input cell.

Change: Change the content of a cell in an input box in the tool bar. The direction keys movethe cursor in the input box.

11.11 Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete

All of these options are accessed by selecting menu item "Edit". Apart from "Delete", the buttons in thetool bar can be used.

Cut

The current marking is cut out of the displayed waveforms and inserted in the clipboard. This markingcontains at least the current input cell and can be extended (<SHIFT>+ direction key, drag the mouse).

Copy

Select this option to copy the current marking to the clipboard.

Paste

Values cut or copied to the clipboard using "Cut" or "Copy" are inserted in front of the active input cell. Thelength of the waveform increases.

Remarks

The commands Cut, Copy and Paste use a basic text format when exchanging values in the Clipboard,which stores numbers by line and separates columns by a space. This format can be created or importedby many other Windows applications. To transfer data to other applications using the Clipboard, usemenu item "Edit / -> Clipboard". The actual format (e.g. separators between columns) can be predefinedusing menu item "Display / Options" .

If you wish to transfer number series to the Report Generator, please refer to the section 'Transfer toReport Generator'.

Delete

Select this option to delete the marked cells from the displayed waveforms, which shortens the length ofthe waveforms.

11.12 Insert Values

Enter a defined number of pre-initialized values in front of the active input cell using "Edit/ Insert Values".

Waveform Editor,: Dialog: Insert Values

242


Data Editor

Enter in the dialog the number of values you wish to insert. Specify the values in the input boxes"Initialize.." and "Add..". If a zero (0) is entered in "Add..", a series of constant values is inserted; a valuenot equal to zero (0) results in a ramp with the specified slope.

If the waveform in which values are to be inserted has two components, specifications must be made forboth components, since the length of the components must always be the same.

11.13 Creating a New Variable

Move the input cell over an empty column to the first position. The first value in the waveform can now beentered or use "Paste" or "Insert Values" to insert a series of values. The new waveform is given a defaultname (de_+ current number ) and also appears in the variable list in the main window. The name, as wellas all other characteristics of the waveform can be changed in the dialog "Properties" (menu item"Column / Properties / Charact.").

11.14 Go To...

Go to a value with a predefined index (position in waveform) in the active column. The input cell is thenpositioned on the desired value.

Waveform Editor: Go To... dialog

11.15 Value Search

Search in the active column for values fulfilling specified conditions using menu item "Edit/ Search",beginning at the current input cell.

Waveform Editor: Search dialog

Specify search conditions and direction in this dialog.

The following may be selected from the list as condition:

Value smaller than: Sought value < default

Value greater than: Sought value > default

243Data Editor


Value equal to: Sought value = default

Value in interval: Default1 < value < default2

Value not in interval: Value < default1 OR Value > default2

Start the search by selecting the button "Search". If a value fulfilling the conditions is found, the input cellis positioned at this value; otherwise a message box appears.

11.16 Copying a Selection to Clipboard

Select "Edit/ ->Clipboard" to transfer data to other applications via the Clipboard. The current format canbe specified using "Display/ Options".

If you wish to transfer number series to the Report Generator, please refer to the section 'Transfer toReport Generator'.

Waveform Editor: Display Options/ Clipboard

Column Separator

Choose between a tab, a space or a freely definable character string. For example, EXCEL requires a tabas separator.

Scaling Column

The scaling column is stored in the clipboard when this option is selected.

Header

Specify here whether the header (name of the variable) should be stored.

Decimal Comma

FAMOS uses a decimal point when displaying numbers. Specify here if a decimal comma should be used.

Otherwise, numbers and the scaling column are filed in a manner analogous to the representationcurrently set in the table window.

Example

The marking below is to be copied to the clipboard using menu item "Edit"/ "Clipboard" .

244


Data Editor

Options: separators " ; ", no header, no scaling

362.7 ; 0.00122074362.8 ; 0.00122074362.9 ; 0.00122074363 ; 0.00122074363.1; 0.00122074

Options: separator tab, header, scaling and decimal comma

E0_6_113.X E0_6_113.Y10.06.93 19:24:22 362,7 0,0012207410.06.93 19:24:22 362,8 0,0012207410.06.93 19:24:22 362,9 0,0012207410.06.93 19:24:23 363 0,0012207410.06.93 19:24:23 363,1 0,00122074

11.17 Show Curve

Use menu item "Column/ Show Curve" to open a curve window in which the variables in the active columnare displayed.

Icon:

Drag & drop can also be used to display a table column in an existing curve window.

Move the mouse in the beginning of the desired column, click to the left, hold down the mouse button andmove the mouse over the desired curve window. Release the mouse button there. The variable isdisplayed in the following form, depending on the position of the mouse when it is released:

· above/below a coordinate system: a new coordinate system is created and the variables aredisplayed in the new system.

· within a coordinate system: the variables are displayed with a new axis in this coordinate system.

· on one y-axis: the variables are displayed in this coordinate system with reference to the y-axis.

11.18 Characteristic Values

Select menu item "Column / Properties" to call a dialog in which the characteristics of the variable in theactive column can be viewed and changed. The dialog can be also be called in the main window using"Variable/ Properties".

Icon:

Reference

The dialog is described in detail in the chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics

245Data Editor


'.

11.19 Height and Width of Cells, Font

Set the desired font for the table window using menu item "Display/ Font". Select the desired font fromthe list which appears in the dialog and specify the font size.

The cell height complies with the set font. It is automatically set somewhat larger than the selected fontsize.

The cell width can be defined separately for the scaling and data columns. Set the width in the dialog"Display/ Options" (info about column width in the cardfiles "Data" and "Scale") or change the columnwidth using the mouse. Move the mouse in the heading line on the separating line between 2 columns;the mouse cursor changes its shape. Shift the position of the separating line while holding down themouse button. To set the scaling column, move the mouse on the separating line to the first data column.

11.20 Configure Scale Column

The following three menu items affect the display of the scaling column: "Index", "x-value" and "Time" inthe menu "Display", one of which is always active (labeled with a checkmark).

Index

Indices (positions in waveform) for the values shown in the active column are displayed in the scalecolumn. Single values are numbered consecutively, beginning with one.

X-value

The x-value for the values shown in the active column are displayed in the scale column. In normalwaveforms, the x-value is calculated from the x-offset of the first value in the waveform and the x-distanceof two consecutive values. In xy-waveforms, this is the accompanying value in the x-component of thewaveform.

Time

The time is displayed for the values shown in the active column. In displaying time, the trigger time of thewaveform is used and assumes that the x-axis of the waveform is scaled in seconds. Time is displayedaccording to the set date and time format in Window Control Panel.

The display in the scaling column is also affected by the dialog "Display/ Options", index card "Scale".

246


Data Editor

Waveform-Editor: Display Options/ Scale

Column Width

Specify the width of scaling columns here, based on the middle width of a character in the set font. Thecolumn width may also be changed in the table window directly by clicking with the mouse in the tablehead on the separating line between the scale column and first data column and holding the mousebutton down. The separating line can now be shifted.

Format

Specify here whether numerical values should always be displayed in exponential notation, decimalnotation or automatically. In this case, automatic means that the shortest display is automatically selected,depending on the value.

Precision

The numbers in the text box specify the number of significant positions to be generated in the 'automatic'display mode. Otherwise, they correspond to the number of positions to be specified after the decimalpoint.

Alignment

Specify here the alignment of numbers within the scale column.

Time Format

This setup is important only if time display is selected in the scale column.

Show Date

When this option is selected, both date and time are displayed; otherwise only time is displayed.

Seconds

Specify here how precisely the time should be resolved. Fractions of seconds are readjusted after thetime, separated by a comma.

247Data Editor


11.21 Configure Data Column

The display of numerical values in the data columns is affected by the dialog "Display/ Options", file card"Data".

Waveform-Editor: Display Options/ Data

Column Width

Specify the width of scaling columns here, based on the middle width of a character in the set font. Thecolumn width may also be changed in the table window directly by clicking with the mouse at the head ifthe table on the separating line between two data columns while holding down the mouse button. Theseparating line can now be shifted.

Format

Specify here whether numerical values should always be displayed in exponential notation, decimalnotation or automatically. In this case, automatic means that the shortest display is automatically selected,depending on the value.

Precision

The numbers in the text box specify the number of significant positions to be generated in the 'automatic'display mode. Otherwise, they correspond to the number of positions to be specified after the decimalpoint.

Alignment

Specify here the alignment of numbers within the data columns.

11.22 Display Modes

The display mode is set using menu items "No time comparison", "Relative time-correct" or "Absolutetime-correct" in the "Display" menu. One of these options is always active (labeled by a checkmark). Thecorresponding buttons in the toolbar can also be used.

No Time Comparison

Icon:

This is the standard setup in the Editor. Waveforms are listed ignoring the x-scaling. Individual cells all

248


Data Editor

have the same height.

Relative Time Comparison

Icon:

Waveforms are displayed so that adjacently shown samples have the same x-value.

Individual waveforms are shifted in the columns according to their x-offset. Differing sampling times (or x-delta) cause the cell height to vary in the columns. The normal cell height (corresponding to the set font)are used as a reference for the smallest x-distance occurring in the waveforms currently displayed in thetable. This prevents numbers from overlapping in the output.

This mode is useful only when the sampling times and offsets of all displayed waveforms are inthe same order of magnitude.

Select this mode only if several waveforms should be compared with reference to their x-axes (ignoringtrigger time).

The Editor is clearly much slower in this mode than in the basic display mode. Selecting several columnsat the same time is not possible; not every waveform or combination of waveforms can be displayed inthis mode.

For example, xy-waveforms can be displayed only if their x-axis is monotonous, because otherwise,values would have to be plotted one over the another. The ratio of offset and sampling time may notexceed a specified value, because individual positions of numerical values in the table could no longer beresolved against one another. In such cases, an error message is generated and the table returns to thebasic display mode.

Absolute Time-Comparison

Icon:

Unlike display mode "Relative Time Comparison", the trigger time of the waveform is taken into account.

Waveforms are displayed so that adjacently shown samples have the same time base. Individualwaveforms are shifted in the columns according to the sum of trigger time and their x-offset. Differingsampling times (or x-delta) cause varying cell height in the columns. The normal cell height(corresponding to the set font) is used as reference for the smallest x-distance occurring in the waveformscurrently displayed in the table. This prevents numbers from overlapping in the output.

This mode is useful only when the sampling times and trigger times of all displayed waveformsare in the same order of magnitude.

Select this mode only when several waveforms should be compared in terms of their relative positions intime. The Editor is clearly much slower in this mode than in the basic display mode. Selecting severalcolumns at the same time is not possible; not every waveform or combination of waveforms can bedisplayed in this mode.

For example, xy-waveforms can be displayed only if their x-axis is monotonous, because otherwise,values would have to be plotted one over the another. The ratio of offset and sampling time may notexceed a specified value, because individual positions of numerical values in the table could no longer beresolved against one another. In such cases, an error message is generated and the table returns to thebasic display mode

Example

Three waveforms are displayed in the table which have the following characteristic values:

Channel1 Channel2 Channel3

X-offset (pretrigger) in seconds 0 0 0.5

X-delta (sampling time) in seconds 0.1 0.25 0.3

Trigger time 2:09:00 2:09:01 2:09:00

249Data Editor


When menu item "Display / No time comparison" is active (selected), the table looks like this:

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "No Time Comparison"

Display follows without reference to time, the scaling column (here in absolute time) complies with theactive column in the example "Channel 1".

When menu item "Display / Relative time comparison" is active, the table looks like this:

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "Relative Time Comparison"

The differing sampling times and the offset of the third channel are regarded. The scaling column (displayx-value) is not dependent on the active column. The proportion of cell height corresponds to the rate ofthe sampling times.

When "Display / Absolute time comparison" is active, the table looks like this:

250


Data Editor

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "Absolute time comparison"

Explicit consideration is given to the differing trigger time of channel2. The scaling column (if displayed inabsolute time) is not dependent on the active column.

11.23 Scroll-Linking of Tables and Curve Window

Tables and curve windows can be linked so that scrolling in one also scrolls in the other. This is donerelative to the x-coordinate. The following example illustrates how to create a scroll-link:

· Load one of the example waveforms, e.g. slope.dat and display it in the new table window.

· Display the waveform in a curve window. Zoom in to a portion of near the y-axis (i.e. x = 0) sothat the beginning of the curve is visible.

· Click in the toolbar on the button and hold the mouse button down. Drag the mouse acrossthe curve window and then release the mouse button.

The actual link position is shown in the Waveform Editor by a horizontal line in the table, in the curvewindow by a vertical line. It is at exactly this position that the table and curve window have the same x-value. If you scroll down in the table, the curve window moves with the table. Likewise, scrolling in thecurve window also scrolls the table.

251Data Editor


Waveform Editor, linked table and curve window

Now open another table window and display a waveform in this window. Insert this waveform using thesame procedure as before in the linked window. It is irrelevant which window is scrolled, the linkedwindow is constantly updated according to the current position. This allows any number of tables andcurve windows to be linked with one another.

Linking can also be executed from the curve window using the corresponding button in the communicatortoolbar (call using the context menu: click with the right mouse button in the window, optionCommunicator).

A table or curve window is removed from the linked windows by clicking again on the appropriate button inthe table or curve window.

In a table with several waveforms, the scaling of the active column is used as a reference. All linkedwindows should use the same display mode (relative scaling or scaling over an absolute time).

11.24 Printout

The printing function in the Waveform Editor operates by way of the imc Report Generator. A selectedsection is first transferred to a standard form and then printed out.

The advantage of this manner of proceeding is that the appearance of the printout can, by simplychanging the form settings, be adapted and customized to fulfill to your particular wishes andrequirements. The printout function, then, is a convenient tool for representing lists of numbers as avisually appealing table on paper.

For more intricate reports, which incorporate tables, texts and graphs, the preferable course would be to

252


Data Editor

manually layout a report form first and subsequently supply it with the applicable data (number series,texts, curve graphs etc.) by means of remote control functions or drag & drop.

Accessing menu item "Table / Print.." calls the dialog depicted below, which lets you select the printoutregion and specify the appearance of the printout.

Waveform Editor, dialog: Print

Selection

Specifies the region to print out.

All

The entire table content is printed out. The longest data set included determines the overall length of theprintout. The rightmost occupied column determines the width, in other words, the number of columns inthe printout.

With Scale Column

The scale column is included in the printout.

Template

Enter the name of the form here which is to be used as a template for the printout. Normal installation ofFAMOS provides the "DEFORM.DRB"-file as the default form.

To adapt this form to your requirements, load it into the Report Generator, change it and save the newform under a different name. The name of the new form can be entered into this input box. Unless yousupply the complete directory path, the program will search the preset default directory for report files(specified via "Options / Directories").

Please observe the following when defining your own template form:

· The actual table data are transferred to a table object which must be designated as "TABLE1".The number of rows and columns in this table is indicative of the number of pages required forthe printout.

· The title specified is transferred to a text object which must be designated as "HEAD1". Thespecified footer must be called "FOOT1".

It is also possible to assign place holders for the title and footer texts, which are furnished with particular

253Data Editor


data on the occasion of the printout. The following place holders are predefined:

&p current page number

&t current system time

&d current system date

Transfer and PrintoutIf this option is activated, the table is transferred in the background to the Report Generator and printedout. If the Report Generator wasn't already open, it will be closed again upon completion of the printout.

If more that 5 pages will be needed to accomplish the printout, a message will appear, prompting you toconfirm the procedure.

Transfer and show Report

If this option is selected, the Report Generator will display a preview of the finished document followingtransfer

This allows you to verify that the printout reflects your wishes and, if necessary, to edit it before ultimatelyapproving printout. The printing procedure can be executed page by page or on the whole document atonce; it can also be interrupted as desired.

11.25 Transfer to Report Generator

For manually transferring lists of numbers from the Waveform Editor to the Report Generator there aretwo principal possibilities: data transfer via the Windows Clipboard and the use of drag & drop.

254


Data Editor

11.25.1 Drag & Drop

This transfers only the actual numerical values, in other words not the title in the header, or the footer.

Transferring a Column

To transfer the content of a whole column, left-click the mouse on the column header, move the mouse -while holding its button down- to over the Report Generator and release the button where you wish thecolumn to be.

Transferring a Highlight

To transfer the current, highlighted selection (also multiple columns) to the Report Generator, press<Ctrl> and at the same time the left mouse button with the mouse pointer over the highlighted area. Thenproceed as described above.

How the data are handled upon being inserted depends upon the mouse's particular position at therelease of the button:

1. Over a Text Object:

The place holder for real numbers (#f, #e) are replaced with the current numerical values.

2. Over a Table Object:

Starting at the current mouse position and proceeding downward and -with multiple columns highlighted inthe Waveform Editor- to the right, the cells of the table are furnished with numerical values. The numericalnotation reflects the notation set for the table object and can be changed retroactively via the Properties-dialog for the table object.

3. Other:

A new table object is created. The number of rows and columns is determined automatically by thedimensions of the highlighted region in the Waveform Editor and from the maximum amount feasiblydisplayable. The height of the cells is determined by the default font for table objects. All other properties'(numerical format, font) initial settings are taken from the valid default settings for table objects, as well,and can be changed subsequently.

11.25.2 Copying and Pasting

You must highlight the region of interest and access either menu item "Edit/ Copy" or "Edit/ -> Clipboard"to copy it to the Clipboard.

"Copy"

The command "Copy" places only the highlighted region into the Clipboard.

"->Clipboard"

"->Clipboard" makes the inserted data reflect the valid settings in the dialog "Display / Options", filecard"Clipboard". This means that you can, for example, transfer the column header and the scale columnalong with the data. Please note that a "Tab" serves to indicate the separation between columns, theoption "decimal comma" may not be activated.

You now can either create a new table object in the Report Generator or furnish an existing table with newvalues

Creating a new table object

To crate a new table object, use the Report Generator menu item "Edit / Paste As.." or the command"Paste Here As.." from the context menu. In the dialog which then appears, select "Table".

The number of rows and columns is then determined automatically from the content of the Clipboard andthe maximum number feasibly displayable.

The height of the cells is determined by the default font for table objects. All other properties' (numericalformat, font, frame, background) initial settings, as well, are taken from the valid default settings for tableobjects in the Report Generator, and can be changed subsequently. The numerical notation set for thetable is ignored, as the data has been transferred in text format. The numbers are displayed just as in theWaveform Editor.

255Data Editor


Updating an existing table object

First select a table object, in order to update it. If you wish only to change a part of the table, highlight thecells concerned. Then access menu item "Edit / Contents / Paste" from either the menu bar or the contextmenu.

The numerical notation set for the table is ignored, as the data has been transferred in text format. Thenumbers are displayed just as in the Waveform Editor.

Reference

See manuals for 'Curve Window' and 'Report Generator'.

256


DDE Interface

DDE Interface

12.1 Overview

DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) is a fixed protocol used to communicate both data and instructionsbetween Windows applications. The type of data and instructions exchanged is therefore application-oriented. DDE can be integrated easily into macro-languages, making it possible to automate processesinvolving the use of several programs.

Communication begins when the first program, the client, informs another program that it would like tocommence with a transaction. This second program, the server, then decides whether or not it is able tocarry out this transaction. When this is possible, the transaction is executed.

When transferring instructions, the target application, the topic and the instruction itself must all bespecified in the declaration.

When transferring data, the target application, the topic, the item to be set or requested and the dataformat must all be specified in the declaration. The actual data is then sent in a global memory object.

The available topics as well as the topic and data element syntax are to be taken from the documentationassociated with the target application.

When data is to be transferred, a suitable format understood and supported by both sides should bechosen. Although the supported formats may vary according to the application, nearly every DDE capableWindows application supports a simple text format, enabling at least an interaction on this basis.

FAMOS supports DDE-Poke (sending of data), DDE-Request (requesting of data) and DDE-Execute(sending of instructions) both as a client and a server. One can therefore send data and instructions toFAMOS as well as requesting FAMOS to send it to another application.

Supported data formats include, in addition to the text format, a special imc format allowing simultaneoustransfer of waveform data with characteristic waveform values.

12.2 FAMOS as DDE Client

When using FAMOS to transact with other applications, FAMOS acts as a client and the otherapplications as server.

A transaction can be started directly using appropriate functions and control commands as well as from adialog box. Use the dialog box to first test DDE-calls in dialog before building DDE-functions with thetested parameters directly into a sequence.

A description of the dialog procedure and its commands is described below.

257DDE Interface


12.2.1 DDE Client Dialog Box

The dialog box is called from the menu "Extra / DDE...".

Transaction

The drop-down menu is used to determine the mode of communication. The other input field entrieschange depending on this selection.

Application

In the input field, type the name used to access the other application over DDE. This is often the name ofthe application itself but with some programs this can be freely specified by the user.

Topic

DDE transactions are always assigned a topic name. The topic "SYSTEM" should be supported by allDDE-capable applications. Other topic names depend on the application. MS Word for Windows, forexample, starts a new topic with every newly opened document.

Control command

This input field is only active when "Send command" is selected from the transaction drop-down menu.The command syntax must correspond to the required syntax of the target application. One can also oftenuse macro instructions from the target application directly as commands.

Element

This input field is only active when data is to be transferred. Supply the name of the target application dataelement which is to be either requested or set.

FAMOS variable

This input field is only active when data is to be transferred. Supply the name of the FAMOS variable usedto either poke or request data.

Execute

This begins a DDE transaction using the parameters as set in the dialog. An error message appears if atransaction is not possible. The most common error message "Conversation could not be established"indicates either that the DDE partner could not be found (server name incorrect or application not started)or that the chosen topic/element combination is not supported by the partner application.

Quit

The dialog is closed. Please note, however, that it is also possible to continue working in FAMOS with anopened dialog box.

Options

This calls up a dialog with various DDE settings for FAMOS. Section 3 in this chapter describes thesesettings in detail.

258


DDE Interface

12.2.2 Send Control Commands

This instructs other applications to execute certain control commands. The following settings causeEXCEL to open a new table:

Transaction: Send commandApplication: EXCELTopic: SYSTEMControl command: [NEW]

The "Descend" function or the "CONTROL" command can also be used.

12.2.3 Send Data (FAMOS)

This sends a waveform to another application using the special imc-DDE-format. This is supported byother imc-applications.

Transaction: Send data (FAMOS)Application: FRAMETopic: VARSElement: FamosWaveVariable: FamosVar

The global variable "FamosWave" in the imc program generator "Frame" is updated with the currentcontent of the FAMOS variable "FamosVar".

The "DDESet" function can also be used.

12.2.4 Send Data (Text)

A FAMOS waveform is converted to the DDE text format and then sent to the partner application. The textformat is supported by most DDE-capable Windows programs. The parameters determining the mannerin which numerical values get converted to text can be set in the "Options"/ "DDE" ("Options" button)dialog.

It is particularly important to choose the correct separator character for separating adjacent numericalvalues. For example, sending numerical values to EXCEL using tab separators causes the values to beentered row-wise. However, using the combination of "Carriage Return / Line Feed" (ASCII 0x0d/0x0a)causes the numerical values to be entered to the table column-wise.

Transaction: Send data (Text)Application: EXCELTopic: TAB1Element: R1C1:R1C100Variable: FamosVar

In EXCEL, the first 100 values of the waveform "FamosVar" are sent to the first row. A tab separator mustbe inserted between values and a comma is used as the decimal point.


12.2.5 Send Text

This sends the contents of a FAMOS text variable to another application:

Transaction: Send textApplication: EXCELTopic: TAB1Item: R1C1Variable: TxHello

The contents of the "TxHello" text variable is sent to the upper left cell of the EXCEL table "TAB1".


259DDE Interface


12.2.6 Request Data

FAMOS makes a request for the contents of a data element in another application. In its first attempt,FAMOS makes the request for data in the imc format. When not supported by the partner application,however, the request is remade using the text format.

Transaction: Request dataApplication: EXCELTopic: TAB1Element: R1C1:R100C1Variable: FamosVar

In EXCEL, the first 100 values from the first column in table "TAB1" are requested and copied to thevariable "FamosVar". The length of the variable depends on the number of successfully read values.

The "DDEInq" function or the "REQUEST" control command can also be used.

12.2.7 Request Text

The content of a data element from another application is requested and, when successful, copied into aFAMOS text variable. Note that a FAMOS text variable may have a maximum length of 255 characters.

Transaction: Request textApplication: EXCELTopic: TAB1Element: R1C1:R1C1Variable: FamosVar

The contents of the upper left cell in an EXCEL table "Tab1" are requested and a FAMOS text variable"FamosVar" is created.

The "DDEInq" function can also be used.

12.3 ''DDE Settings'' Dialog

This dialog is can be accessed from the menu option "Extra / Options / Miscellaneous-DDE" or from the"Options" button in the DDE client dialog described above.

One can set various preferences here controlling the behavior of FAMOS during DDE transactions.

260


DDE Interface

Numerical format

When numerical data is to be transferred using the text format, this group is used to govern theconversion of numbers to text.

Numerical notation

One can choose between having results always displayed in exponential or decimal notation or havingthem displayed automatically. The latter toggles between decimal and exponential display, always usingthe shortest possible form.

Precision

This setting determines the number of significant digits in the "automatic" setting or the number digitsfollowing the decimal when using the text format.

Decimal comma

When marked, a comma is used as the decimal character. Otherwise a decimal point is used as iscustomary in FAMOS. EXCEL, for example requires the use of a decimal comma meaning that the text"1.23" will not be recognized as a number.

Separator

This determines the type of separator used in separating adjacent numerical values from one another.One can choose between using a tab, an empty space or a freely defined character combination.

For example, sending numerical values to EXCEL using tab separators causes the values to be enteredrow-wise. However, using the combination of "Carriage Return / Line Feed" (ASCII 0x0d/0x0a) causes thenumerical values to be entered to the table column-wise.

The following non-printable character symbols can be used in the input field:

\n Line feed, hexadecimal 0x0A

\r Carriage Return, hexadecimal 0x0D

261DDE Interface


\t TabLatency time

This value determines the maximum time that FAMOS waits before ending an unsuccessful transaction.When the error message "Latency time" appears while transferring large amounts of data, this value is tobe increased.

Server name

This supplies the name other applications use in addressing FAMOS for DDE transactions. This namehas been preset to FAMOS in the initial settings and should only in exceptions be changed.

12.4 FAMOS as DDE Server

When FAMOS is addressed from an another application in a DDE communication, FAMOS becomes theDDE server and the partner application becomes the DDE client.

In order to have access to FAMOS by DDE, the correct FAMOS server name must be used. This is presetto FAMOS in the initial settings and can only be changed by the Options dialog described above.

12.4.1 Sending Instructions

When sending a command (DDE-Execute), the topic name SYSTEM is to be used. One can transfer anyinstructions which can also be executed in the FAMOS editor box. This can include, for example,mathematical formulas or sequence calls (SEQUENCE command).

To quit FAMOS, send the command "[Exit]".

Reference

An alternative to sending FAMOS-files by DDE is to call FAMOS using command line parameters. Thisworks even if FAMOS has already been started before the moment the call is made; in that case, thecommand is forwarded to the already open instance of the program.

Example for Microsoft Visual Basic:

Private Sub Command1_Click() Shell "c:\imc\Bin\FAMOS.exe /S crash.seq /X"End Sub

FAMOS isinstructed to run the sequence "crash.seq". After it is run, FAMOS is closed.

An overview of available command line parameters is presented in the section "Introduction: Starting withparameters".

12.4.2 DDE Info Request

The following items can be requested in the SYSTEM topic (DDE Request). These requests always returna text string. Every DDE-capable application should support these predefined items in order to enableother applications an insight into the DDE capabilities of the program.

SYSTEMS

Returns a list of all available items in SYSTEM-TOPIC. These are.

"SYSTEMS TOPICS FORMATS STATUS"

TOPICS

Returns a list of all DDE topics supported by FAMOS:

"SYSTEM VARS TXVARS"

FORMATS

Returns a list of all data formats recognized by FAMOS:

"TEXT FamosWave"

262


DDE Interface

"FamosWave" is the name given to special imc-format used to exchange data.

STATUS

Returns either "BUSY" (FAMOS cannot execute DDE transaction at the given moment) or "READY" (DDEis now possible).

12.4.3 Sending and Requesting Data Variables

Data variables can be passed to FAMOS (DDE poke) or requested from FAMOS (DDE request) fromanother application. Use VARS as the topic name.

When performing a DDE poke, supply a new variable name for the transferred waveform data and whenperforming a DDE request, supply a variable which already exists.

The predefined item TOPICITEMLIST contains a list of all presently existing waveforms.

Channels in the data groups are specified in the usual way: GroupName:ChannelName

Either the imc-DDE-format ("FamosWave") or the text format can be used.

Two-component data (complex, X-Y data) cannot be transferred in parallel.

The numerical format parameters used in text data request are set in the dialog "Options DDE".

The format used when sending data in text format is open. Both periods and commas are allowed as adecimal point. All non-numbers (except 'e' for exponent, + , - ) are ignored.

12.4.4 Sending and Requesting Text Variables

Text variables can be passed to FAMOS (DDE poke) or requested from FAMOS (DDE request) fromanother application. Use TXVARS as the topic name.

When performing a DDE request, use the names of the text variables for the item names and, whenperforming a DDE poke, supply an appropriate variable name.

The predefined item TOPICITEMLIST contains a list of all presently existing text variables.

Channels in the data groups are specified in the usual way: GroupName:ChannelName

The data format is the TEXT format.

263File Browser


File Browser

13.1 Overview

The File Browser is designed to provide quick and easy access to needed measurement files. In principle,it is a shortcut for the "File / Load" procedure.

The File Browser is particularly useful in situations where multiple measurement value files, all having thesame name, are located in different, consecutive directories. Many modern measurement systemsgenerate such a directory structure, especially for consecutive measurements adhering to a fixedconfiguration (multi-shot-operation).

Reference

Practical examples for the use of the File Browser are to be found in the chapter 'Tutorial'.

The File Browser is a permanent element in the FAMOS Plug-in window, and cannot be uninstalled, incontrast to other FAMOS Plug-ins. In the default configuration, the Plug-in window and with it the Filebrowser is minimized, i.e., only the title bar with the label "Files / Plug-ins" is visible at the upper right ofthe FAMOS main window.

If you wish to work with the File browser, you can quickly maximize the Plug-in window by pressing thecorresponding button on the Plug-in window's title bar. The File browser is often used to get a quickoverview of a whole series of measurement files without having to perform calculations at the same time.In such a case, the function list, and the editor and output boxes aren't needed at all. The quickest way toachieve such a setup is to select the menu item "Window / Load configuration / Variables list | FileBrowser".

Alternatively, you can click on the arrow button next to the "Customize FAMOS workbench" icon, and inthe pop-down menu which appears, select the split window view shown below:

The main components of the File Browser are a directory tree and a file list which indicates the fileslocated in the currently selected directory. The border between the two lists can be shifted, using themouse.

264


File Browser

At the top there is a toolbar offering commands affecting the current selection in the folder or file list, aswell as a combo box which indicates the current folder or can be used to change it.

The right edge of the Plug-in window's title bar additionally indicates the currently selected file format anddisplay filter.

13.2 The Folder List

At the File Browser's first call, it displays only that path in the directory tree which leads to the set defaultfolder for loading files (adjustable via menu item "Extra / Options / Folders").

Double-clicking on a directory's entry toggles between "On" and "Off" for a listing of that folder'ssubdirectories.

Instead of double-clicking, you can select (mark) the desired directory and then press <Enter>.

Right-clicking the mouse on the directory tree calls a context menu, which offers the followingoperations:

Update List:

Re-reads the directory structure. This is generally not necessary, since FAMOS normally recognizeschanges to the directory structure independently, and updates the list accordingly.

Only Working Directory Path:

Causes the path to the set default directory for loading files to be shown. This is what occurs, in any case,when FAMOS is first started.

Show All Subdirectories:

The entire branching structure stemming from the currently active directory is presented.

The current selection in the folder list highlights the current folder and thus also determines what isdisplayed in the adjacent file list. If the option "Show current directory in toolbar" is activated in the dialogunder "Extra / Options / File browser / Display" (also accessed via context menu in the file list), a combobox indicating the current path appears in the toolbar. To change to another folder, you can enter adifferent path in this box and confirm using ENTER, or you can select from the list one of the entries forthe last folders used. Making a selection in the directory list can also be accomplished with the help of thearrow buttons:

in the toolbar. These provide a convenient method of switching between directories on the same level.The buttons on the left side allow you to change to the next or to the last directory in the indicateddirection and on the same level.

The two buttons on the right commence automatic directory-scrolling. The dialog on the "Extras" filecardof the "Options / File Browser / Additional options" dialog (accessible via context menu, item: "DisplayOptions") lets you specify how long to pause between automatic directory changes. The dialog also letsyou identify a directory at which to stop scrolling.

The automatic mode is discontinued when either the last directory on the given level has been reached, orthe button in the toolbar is pressed again.

The use of these arrow buttons for comparing data stored in various directories is described in greaterdetail in the section 'Response to Change of Directory".

Using the appropriate setting, the current directory can be deleted. See 'Deleting Files with the FileBrowser'.

265File Browser


13.3 The File List

The file list indicates the files belonging to the current directory. The current directory, in turn, is thedirectory currently shown selected (highlighted, marked) in the directory list adjacent at left.

Loading files

When you double-click on a file's entry in the list, the program starts trying to load the file according to thecurrently set format. If multiple file entries are selected, then <ENTER>, or, the analogous button in thetoolbar, or the appropriate item from the context menu will all commence loading of the selected files (ifthese haven't already been loaded). Further information on this topic can be found in 'Loading Files withthe File Browser'.

Additional settings concerning the display of lists can be performed using the context menu (called byright-clicking the mouse in the file list).

Update list

Re-reads the directory structure. This is generally not necessary, since FAMOS normally recognizeschanges to the directory structure independently, and updates the list accordingly.

Delete files

With the appropriate presettings, the currently selected files can also be deleted; see the section "Deletingfiles with the File Browser" for details.

Options...

Opens the corresponding dialog for making presettings. It can also be called via the main menu "Extra /Options / File Browser".

File format and -filter

For selecting the file format and display filter; see the next section.

Options ... Format

If applicable, calls the respective configuration dialog for the file format set.

266


File Browser

13.4 Display options

The dialog under "Options / File browser | Display" offers a variety of options for determining the display inthe File list. The dialog is called via the File list context menu command "Display options" or via the item inthe main menu, "Extra / Options, File browser | Display".

Dialog: Options / File Browser / Display

Show current directory in toolbar

If this option is active, a combo box appears in the File Browser toolbar, in which the current folder isindicated and can be changed.

Automatic update

If this option is active (default setting), the file and folder lists are automatically updated if the directorystructure changes (e.g. due to the creation, renaming or deletion of files or folders). This process canrequire lots of time and impede working with FAMOS, in particular if network drives are involved. In thiscase it is recommended to switch this option off and update the lists manually, if necessary (command"Update list" in the corresponding context menu).

Show in file list

The information indicated can, by placing a check-mark in the pertinent box, be made to appear with thelisting of the file or directory.

Subdirectories

If this option is selected, the subdirectories are indicated in the file list along with the files. Regardless ofthe sorting mode used, the subdirectories are displayed above the files.

Sort in file List

The sorting of the entries in the file list proceeds in the manner indicated by the option chosen here.Sorting by size places the largest files at the head of the list. Sorting by time or date places the newest

267File Browser


files a the head of the list. Alternatively, you can change the sorting order by clicking on the correspondingcolumn header in the file list.

Use this ... symbol for files

You can assign a special symbol to accompany a file's entry in the file list, for ease and speed of finding.

FAMOS-files

If this option is activated, all files in the FAMOS file format are denoted by this symbol. This does notcause entire files to be checked but only the first bytes of a file. All imc applications which savemeasurement data to files (e.g.. MUSYCS, µ-MUSYCS) use this format.

If you are not particularly concerned with files in this format it is advisable to deactivate this option, as itslows down the processing of the File Window.

Filter

This option causes the entries of all files which correspond to the specified name template to beaccompanied by a special symbol. The template may incorporate the characters "*" and "?" as wildcards,to be employed in the usual manner ("*" = any number of any characters"?"). Multiple filters may bespecified; they must then be separated by semicolons.

Examples

Additionally, a display filter can be specified, which determines what kind of files can be displayed.

For this purpose, select the command "File format and filter" from the File list context menu.

Along with the file format, it's also possible to specify a display filter. Thus, for example, you can have onlysuch files which interest you displayed in the list while other files (e.g. configuration files etc.) are ignored.In the filters, it's possible to use the wildcards '*' and '?' in the usual way. Multiple filters can be specifiedwith a semicolon separating them.

Examples

The selected file format and display filter are also indicated in the Browser's title bar.

13.5 Loading Files

13.5.1 Overview

The main purpose of the File Browser is to simplify the sequence of tasks:

Select files -> Load files ->Display waveforms

Of course one could accomplish this using the dialog called via menu item "File / Load". But that methodisn't very convenient whenever you have multiple files stored in various directories, which you wish to

268


File Browser

display in succession and compare.

The File Browser can be used to best effect if a group of measurement value files, destined for the abovementioned processing, are saved under the same name and in different, consecutively placed directories.Many modern measurement systems generate just such a directory structure, especially involvingconsecutive measurements adhering to a fixed configuration.

Reference

Practical examples for the use of the File Browser are to be found in the chapter 'Tutorial'.

13.5.2 Specifying and Configuring a File Format

Just as for loading with the "File / Load" dialog, it is necessary to have a specified format for the files. Thedialog for making these settings is called via the context menu command "File format and filter". Theformat selection list in this dialog contains listings of all known file formats. Along with the standard,included internal file formats, any formats previously defined by the user with the help of the File Assistantare also indicated in the list.

If the format selected is configurable, the corresponding dialog can be called via the context menu (right-click the mouse in the file list, select item "Options FAMOS Format..).

The format and its settings can also be specified in the format list in the dialog called via "Load File" andthe options dialog which can be accessed from there by pressing <Options>.

Further information about the file formats available, as well as about the settings' dialogs involved, is to befound in the Chapter 'File Management'.

13.5.3 Options for Loading with the File Browser

After having specified the format for measurement value files, you can make settings which govern howFAMOS proceeds once the files have been loaded. Such settings will only come into effect if you use theFile browser to load files; not through the use of the "File/ Load" dialog.

Among other things, you can determine whether the display of the waveform should occur immediatelyand also how the naming of the loaded waveforms should be done.

Make the important settings in the "Load" dialog (opened by selecting "Extra / Options/ File Browser /Load" or using the file list context menu command: "Load Options...").

Dialog: Options / File browser / Load

The waveform-loading process is controlled by the settings in this dialog as follows:

Channel naming:

The loaded waveforms are designated by default by their original names in the files (FAMOS-format), or,if no name is given in the file (ASCII, BINARY-format), by the name of the files themselves. Optionalsettings are available to prefix or append the current filename or the current directory name.

269File Browser


This option is sensible for cases where you intend to compare multiple channels all bearing the same filename. Since FAMOS requires channels' names to be unambiguous, The last channel loaded wouldotherwise write over the previously present channel with the same name.

Show automatically in previous curve window

With this option active, after loading is completed all curve windows are checked for a waveform bearingthe same original name as the waveform just loaded. If a curve window displaying such a waveform ispresent, the newly loaded waveform is displayed together with the old occupant waveform in that curvewindow. This option is only sensible if the active option for "Channel naming" is either "Append directoryname to end" or "Precede with directory name".

Example

Suppose that in the beginning a waveform "Channel1", belonging to directory "D1", is loaded. Its name isnow "D1_Channel1". Next, a waveform from directory "D2", also called "Channel1", is loaded; its name isnow "D2_Channel1". With the above option set, a search begins for a channel named "*_Channel1" (* =any name). "D1_Channel1" is promptly found and so "D2_Channel1" is drawn in the curve window with it,for ease of comparison.

Show after loading

If this option is active, and the loaded waveform isn't already being displayed, a new curve window isopened and displays the waveform.Regardless of the particular option activated, the display in a curvewindow is always updated to depict a waveform with given name and in the current directory. This canlead to a waveform being replaced in its curve window by another waveform, if the directory is changedand the new directory also contains a waveform with the expected name. It can also occur that a curvewindow is open but "empty", if the current directory contains no waveform bearing the name that the curvewindow was created for. The same can happen as a result of loading a curve configuration. An emptycurve window signifies that the curve window is ordered to display a waveform not currently present inFAMOS. As soon as a waveform by the pertinent name is loaded to FAMOS, it will immediately bedisplayed.

Loading Waveforms Temporarily / Permanently

Temporary refers to files which are automatically deleted (from FAMOS) when the current directory in thedirectory list is changed. They also are deleted as soon as their file entry is no longer the current entry inthe file list.

This allows you to gain a quick overview of measurement data files stored in various directories withoutthe files accumulating in the FAMOS variables' list, which might necessitate deleting them manually lateron. A special symbol distinguishes temporary files in the variables list.

Permanent waveforms, by contrast, remain accessible in a FAMOS session until they are removed fromthe variables list via menu item "Delete". This is the appropriate setting in cases where you wish tocompare waveforms belonging to different directories.

Temporarily loaded waveforms can be subsequently declared permanent (menu item "Variable/Permanent").

13.5.4 Selecting / Deselecting Files for Loading

Select the files of interest using the mouse.

The <Enter> key, the corresponding button in the toolbar, or the appropriate item in the context menu allcause the current selection to be loaded. If only a single file is involved, it is sufficient to double-click on itsentry in the list.

Button in the toolbar:

FAMOS will attempt to load the files in accordance with the currently set format. If an error occurs and the

270


File Browser

file cannot be loaded, an error message will appear in the status bar in the main window. Otherwise, thewaveforms contained in the files become accessible in FAMOS, and are indicated in the variables list. Aloaded file is distinguishable in the file list by a symbol (oscilloscope icon) with a yellow background.

Names of files which feature the "loaded" symbol are recorded internally. On the occasion of a change ofdirectory, the names of files in the new directory are compared with the recorded names. If the newdirectory contains files with names identical to those of already loaded waveforms, the waveforms areautomatically reloaded to reflect the data in the corresponding files of the current directory. In other words,the waveform in a loaded file can be expelled and replaced by a different waveform having the samefilename when the directory is changed.

The files containing waveforms thus deleted from FAMOS correspondingly appear without the yellowbackground in their symbol in the file list:

Waveforms characterized by the "temporary" property are deleted in any case, as soon as their files are"deselected".

13.5.5 Response to Change of Directory

If the current directory in the directory list is changed, then waveforms having the temporary property areremoved from the variable list.

In addition, a new loading operation is attempted for all files recorded as "loaded". The list of "loaded" filesis thus compared with the list of files belonging to the current directory, and any coincidence of filenamesleads to replacement of data in "loaded" files.

If, for example, you wish to view a collection of waveforms stored under the filename "Channel1.DAT" inseveral directories, it is sufficient to load just one of the files and then change the directory. If a newdirectory contains a file of the same name, the loaded file is updated to reflect the waveform in the currentdirectory.

For such applications the arrow files in the toolbar come in very handy.

These provide a convenient method of switching between directories on the same level. The buttons onthe left side allow you to change to the next or to the last directory in the indicated direction and on thesame level.

The two buttons on the right commence automatic directory-scrolling. The dialog on the "Extras" filecardof the "Options File Browser / Additional options" dialog (accessible via context menu, item: "DisplayOptions") lets you specify how long to pause between automatic directory changes. The dialog also letsyou identify a directory at which to stop scrolling.

The automatic mode is discontinued when either the last directory on the given level has been reached, orthe button in the toolbar is pressed again.

Reference

Section 'Additional options' in this chapter.

13.6 Deleting Files

It is possible to delete files from within the File browser. This function removes selected file from thepertinent data carrier. Be certain when doing this that you no longer require the affected data!

Please give consideration to the fact that deleting a directory automatically entails deletion of all itssubdirectories and their content.

To delete selected files you can use the pertinent button in the toolbar or the corresponding item in thecontext menu (accessed by right-clicking in the file list).

271File Browser


Icon:

These only respond if the deletion operation is permitted at all by the program. To secure this option, it isnecessary to activate the appropriate setting in the dialog "Options / File browser", filecard "Delete". Theoption concerned is "Off" by default. Other settings affecting deletion can also be performed in this dialog.For instance, an optional deletion-password can be established, or prompts for confirmation of thedeletion command can be ordered.

Reference

Section 'Additional options' in this chapter.

13.7 Additional options

The menu item "Extra / Options / File browser | More options" opens a dialog for making presettingsconcerning automatic scrolling and deletion of files.

Directory Scrolling

These options affect the behavior of the File Window when you use the arrow buttons to "explore" in thedirectory tree.

Delay

Determines the time (in seconds) between changes of the directory during automatic scrolling.

Stop at

The arrow buttons allow you to jump to the next directory on the same level in the direction indicated. Thissetting specifies when the last directory in the relevant direction is to be considered as already reached.

Current level -1

The end of the scrolling process is reached when the next directory in the direction indicated is at leastone place higher in the hierarchy than the current directory.

In the example below, only the subdirectories "Shot1" and "Shot2" would be accessible via the arrowbuttons if this were the valid setting.

Current level -2

The end of the scrolling process is reached when the next directory in the direction indicated is at least

272


File Browser

two places higher in the hierarchy than the current directory.

In the example below, the subdirectories "Shot1" to "Shot6" would all be accessible via the arrow buttonsif this were the valid setting.

|----Labtests

| |--------Exp1| | |-----Shot1 <<< current directory| | |-----Shot2| |--------Exp2| | |----Shot3| | |----Shot4| |--------Exp3| |----Shot5| |----Shot6|----TmpDeleteThe following options configure direct deleting using the File Browser.

Allow deleting

Deletion is only possible if this option is activated. Otherwise, the corresponding menu item and button inthe toolbar are not operable.

In this way, data are protected from accidental loss due to incorrect operation in the surface environment.

Delete Password

For additional security against deletion of files by accident or by unauthorized operators, a password canbe established which is inquired before deletion of files is executed. If this option is set to "active", anadditional dialog appears in which to declare the (consisting of at least 4, and at most 8 characters).Deactivation of this option can also only be performed after correct response to the password inquiry.

Change

Here you can replace a previously established password.

Confirm

This option causes a confirmation inquiry to appear, which must be replied to in the affirmative, beforedeletion is actually executed.

273Project Management


Project Management

14.1 Concept

Small analysis and presentation tasks can often be accomplished with the help of a single FAMOSsequence.

However, for more complex tasks, that usually is not enough. The necessary algorithms are oftendistributed among a number of sequences and dialogs which may, for instance, be called consecutivelyfrom a "main sequence". Additionally there may be predefined curve configurations providing curvewindows with a particular appearance, as well as templates for the Report Generator, which are later filledin with updated measurement results and curve plots. Thus, accomplishing a task may require an entirecollection of files which must be jointly administered, edited and transferred.

The collection of files and settings necessary for solving a particular assignment is referred to as aFAMOS project. All files and settings belonging to a project are saved to a joint folder, the so-calledproject folder. This makes it very easy to administer (for instance, create a backup copy of) and transferthe project (for instance, to run it on a different PC) - it's sufficient to create a copy of the folder.

A project can also be "executable". For this purpose, the folder must contain a sequence with the name "Autostart.seq" or a dialog named "Autostart.dlg". Then the project can be run by starting this sequenceor dialog, respectively.

A special case of a general FAMOS project is the "current session". This enables you to save theproject's current state (for instance, the contents of the variables list, the curve windows and sequencesopen) before exiting FAMOS, so that the next session can follow as seamlessly as possible on the last.

14.2 The Project Explorer

The Project Explorer is the control center for administering FAMOS projects. From here, you can create,open, run and delete projects.

To call the Project Explorer, use the menu item "Project: Project-Explorer".

The tree diagram on the dialog's left side is a representation of your system's directory structure.Navigation within the tree diagram is analogous to the operation of the Windows Explorer. When theProject Explorer is started, the FAMOS default folder for projects is the active selection. This default canbe edited under menu Extra: Options: Folders.

The right side of the dialog (project list) presents the project subfolders contained in the folder selected.

FAMOS project folders are denoted by a special symbol: .

274


Project Management

14.3 Creating a new project

To create a new project, first start the Project Explorer (menu item "Project: Project-Explorer").

Begin by selecting in the tree diagram the folder in which you wish the project subfolder to be created.

If creating a new project is permitted in the currently selected folder, a new entry "<New Project>"appears in the project list.

Note: If this entry is missing, it means that no new project can be created in that folder. This can be thecase, for example, if the parent folder is itself a project folder (projects cannot be nested).

Double-clicking on the entry <New project...> or pressing the button with that caption calls an additionaldialog, by which you can set the project's name..

Under Name, enter the desired name for the project. This name is identical to the name of the projectfolder to be created. The same rules apply for the name's syntax as for a folder name, so that characterslike "< ? > : \ /" aren't permitted. Also, no other folder of the same name may already exist.

Under Location, you can edit the location in which the project is saved. Once a valid name and locationare entered, the resulting complete directory path is indicated at the bottom of the dialog.

The new project is then created once you click on the OK button.

This means in particular that:

1. The project folder is created.

2. The file "Default.FamosPrj" is created in the project folder. This so-called project file containsthe settings valid for this project.

3. The files "Desktop.ini" and "FamosProject.ico" are created. These ensure that the WindowsExplorer display the FAMOS project icon for the folder.

4. The file "Autostart.seq" is created. This "start sequence" for the project is called when theproject is run. The sequence is originally initialized to output a default message and must beadapted according to your needs.

Once the folder and files have been successfully created, the new project is loaded.

14.4 Loading and running a project

To open an already existing project, select the desired project in the Project Explorer's project list andclick on the button <Open project>.

When a project is opened, the following actions are carried out.

· The opened project's name appears in pointed brackets in the FAMOS main window's title bar.

· The settings saved for the project are applied. These can include:

· Variables

· Curve windows



· Input box contents

· Sequences/ dialogs which are open in the Editor box

· Project favorites. These are displayed with the title as an additional sub-group in the "Favorites"-window.

· The default folders for sequences/ dialogs, curve configurations (*.ccv) and reports (*.drb) arereset as the project folder.

If you click the button <Run project> in the Project Explorer, the project is opened as previously described.Next, a check is made of whether the project folder contains a sequence with the name "autostart.seq" ora dialog "autostart.dlg". If yes, the sequence or dialog, respectively, is run.

To open or run a project recently active, you can also use the menu item "Project: Last projects"."Executed" projects are denoted by a special symbol (exclamation mark) in the menu.

To run a project already loaded, the following options also exist:

· Menu item "Project: Execute": Runs the currently open project.

· Project favorites: Under the project favorites, you will find the automatically generated entry"Project <...> start". Note that in order to load the project favorites, it has to be activated with theproject properties.

To open and run a project in a single step, these possibilities are also provided:

· FAMOS command line parameter "/P project path"

Example: The command line

FAMOS.exe /P "c:\imc\prj\MyProject"

Starts FAMOS and runs the project specified. Additionally, the switch "/X" can be combined with "/P". Bythis means, FAMOS is closed again after the project is run. This enables you, for instance, to createshortcuts for commonly needed projects.

· Favorites: You can also create entries in the Favorites list, in order to start projects directly. Todo this, the option "Project" must be activated in the Favorites' properties, and the completeproject path must be specified.

14.5 Special Characteristics of an Active Project

The project's name is displayed in the FAMOS title bar in pointed brackets. A project folder's mainsignificance is as a repository of all files (meaning sequences, dialogs, reports, curve windowconfigurations) which affect the project. This is supported by special features and the operation techniqueof FAMOS, as described below.

14.5.1 Opening files relevant to a project by command

For an active project, the response of the following commands or functions for opening project-relevantfiles is different:

· SEQUENCE

· Dialog()

· RgDocOpen()

· CvConfig()

· CvGlobaleEinstellungLaden()

Unless the complete path for the file to be opened (1st parameter) is supplied, the system searches forthe file in the following folders in order:

276


Project Management

· In the current working folder (determined by the sequence or dialog under which work takesplace)

· In the current project folder

· In the pre-defined default folder for the respective file type (set via "Extra: Options: Folders" andfunctions or commands such as SDIR, SetOption, RgSetDir).

When working within a project, it's best not to supply the functions mentioned above with the completefilenames; otherwise, your projects may not be ready to run if they are copied to a different location.

If a sequence requires the current project path, use the function GetOption():

MyProjectPath = GetOption("Dir.CurrentProject")

14.5.2 Saving project-relevant files by command

For an active project, the response of the following commands or functions for saving project-relevant filesis different:

· RgDocSave()

· RgDocExport()

· KvSicher()

Unless a complete path is specified for the file to be saved (1st parameter), the project folder is used.

14.5.3 Manual opening of project-relevant files

If you manually open a sequence, dialog, curve configuration or report which doesn't belong o the currentproject folder, you are prompted to confirm whether to add the file to the current project (i.e. import it tothe project).

· If you click No, the selected file is open unchanged.

· On the other hand, if you select Yes, the selected file is copied to the project folder and the newlycreated copy is loaded. You can thus easily import already existing files to a project.



14.5.4 Manual saving of project-relevant files

If when manually saving a sequence, dialog, curve configuration or report, the path you specify doesn'tmatch the project folder, you are prompted to determine whether it should be saved in the project folderinstead.

· If you choose "No", the file is saved under the path originally selected.

· Conversely, if you choose "Yes", the file is saved to the project folder instead.

14.6 Project properties

You have the option to set additional properties for the current project. The menu item "Project:Properties" calls the following dialog:

Variables: Saves the complete contents of the variables list. All variables are saved together in a file inthe project folder. When you open the project, this file is automatically reopened.

Open curve windows: The configurations of all open curve windows are saved. When you open theproject, the curve windows are displayed once again in the same position.

Open sequences: The path names of the sequences currently open in the Editor window are saved.When the project is opened, the system attempts to re-load the sequences and to display them.

Project favorites: The project has its own group of favorites with the name "Project favorites: <Projectname>". Favorites created within this group by the user are automatically saved along with it and adoptedin the list of Favorites when the project is opened.

278


Project Management

Window layout: The position and configuration of the FAMOS main window, and, if they're open, of theData Editor, Dialog Editor and the Report Generator, are saved.

Input window contents: The editor input window's complete content is saved.

Data-Browser

With this option the state of the Data-Browser is saved (window positions and opened panels). Only thepath to the panel files is stored not the actual panel files.

Option "Reset FAMOS before loading project"

With this option, the same command as in "File -> Restart" will be performed before loading the project.

The variable list is emptied, i.e. all variables are deleted.. All open sequences are closed. Directories forloading and storing files are reset to the Default set-up.

14.7 Save, Close, Delete

To save the current project, use the menu item "Project: Save". The files and settings belonging to theproject are saved in the project folder according to the project components set in the project properties.

To close the active project, use the menu item "Project: Close". If appropriate, a confirmation prompt mayappear to ask you whether to save relevant changes to the project.

To get rid of a project no longer needed, you can use the button <Delete project> in the Project Explorer.The entire project folder along with all subfolders is deleted. Alternatively, you can simply delete the folderby way of the Windows Explorer or any other file manager.

14.8 Current/ Last session

A special case of a general FAMOS project is the "current session". Using the menu item "Project: Savecurrent session", you can save the project's current state. This would encompass, for instance, thecontents of the variables list, the curve windows and sequences open, the arrangement of the variousFAMOS workspace windows and the input window contents.

The menu item " Open last session " then lets you restore the session, so that the next session can followas seamlessly as possible on the last.

279User-Defined Dialogs



15.1 Introduction and Terminology

During a sequence's run-time, communication with the user is often necessary; for instance, the usercould be prompted to make an entry to be used in the subsequent processing of the sequence, or couldbe presented with preliminary results to view.

For this purpose, such functions as BoxValue? (for entering a value), BoxText? (for entering a text) orBoxOutput/BoxMessage (for displaying text) can be used in FAMOS.

The input or readout windows generated by such functions have a fixed appearance which the usercannot influence. Therefore, they are only suitable for simple, routine applications.

FAMOS offers the user the additional option of freely defining input/ output windows. Such a window,serving the purpose of interacting with the user, will be referred to below as a "dialog".

To create a dialog, it is necessary both to determine its appearance (for instance its size, color and buttoncaption) and to define its function (what is to happen when the user presses the button).

15.1.1 Design

The dialog's design determines its visual appearance. This includes the dialog window's size and position,as well as the types and locations of any embedded controls and display elements.

Examples of such dialog elements include buttons, text input boxes, lists, images, curve displays andtables.

The illustration shows a typical dialog with a menu and a toolbar [1], various dialog elements [2] (buttons,input box and curve window) and a status bar [3].

For designing the dialog, the FAMOS Dialog Editor is provided. Using this, all aspects of the dialog'sgraphic appearance can be set. This mainly encompasses the number, positions and types of dialogelements included, and their properties. Here you can supply the dialog with a button (softkey), forexample, and then set that button's caption, size and color.

Operation of the Dialog-Editor is described in detail in the section 'The Dialog-Editor'.

280



15.1.2 Programming

If, for instance, the user presses a button in the dialog, FAMOS' reaction to this push of the button mustbe defined. Toward this end, a sequence must be written in normal FAMOS syntax.

While a dialog is running, a variety of events can occur, for example the previously mentioned push of abutton, or selection of a menu item, or changing of the selection in a list, and much more.

To each event, it's possible to assign a sequence (event-sequence) to be carried out. Creation andtesting of such sequences, as well as of any other sequences, are accomplished through the use of theSequence Editor in the FAMOS main window.

The figure above shows a dialog in the FAMOS Sequence Editor. On the left side, the events belonging tothe dialog are listed, on the right side, the sequence code for the currently selected event is displayed.

The information on the dialog's appearance is saved along with the associated event-sequences in adialog file, which has the file extension ".DLG".

For the purposes of editing and testing dialog files, they can be opened by either the Dialog Editor or theSequence Editor.

To call an already prepared dialog from within a sequence, use the FAMOS function Dialog. This functionbelongs to the function group '10) Options, Dialogs..'.

The expansion-kit "Dialogs" is of particular value for creating user-defined dialogs in FAMOS. This kit isincluded in a proper installation of the software ("Kits" tab in the FAMOS function list).

The "Dialog-Kit" contains functions for controlling the dialog during runtime. These include functions forquerying and setting the current contents of control elements. A description of the Dialog-Kit functions isprovided in the FAMOS online help under "Kits"/"Dialogs".

15.2 The Dialog-Editor

The Dialog-Editor is used to set a dialog's appearance, structure (in other words, the dialog elements itcontains), as well as its main properties.

15.2.1 Calling the Dialog-Editor

There are a variety of ways to start the Dialog Editor:

· Selecting the menu item "Extra: Dialog - Editor" or the corresponding button in the FAMOStoolbar.

· Opening a dialog file in the FAMOS Editor window (menu item "Sequence : Load"), or selectingthe corresponding button in the Editor window's toolbar).

· When the cursor in the Editor window is positioned over the function name Dialog, the Editor'scontext menu (opened by right-clicking the mouse) contains the additional item 'Dialog-Editor'.This starts the Dialog Editor and opens the dialog which is specified by the function's first



parameter.

After starting the editor, the working window appears at the same position as at the end of the lastsession.

15.2.2 Main window

The picture below shows the Dialog Editor's main elements:

Below the menu- and toolbar [1], you see the dialog window [2]. Each dialog [3] currently underconstruction is displayed in its own separate dialog window. This is the actual workspace where you setthe dialog's size and place the elements which it contains. By right-clicking the mouse over the dialog, youcall a context menu [4]. The context menu's contents depend on where the mouse pointer is positionedwhen you call it.

The toolbox [5] lets you select new dialog elements to add. The available elements are organized ingroups which each become active when you click on their respective buttons. A description of theavailable dialog elements is provided in the chapter "Dialog element". The panel "Menu" is a specialfeature used to define the dialog's menu- or toolbar; see the section "Menu- and " for details.

The Properties-Explorer [6] lists the properties of the object currently selected (for instance a dialogelement). To change a property, simply click on the readout of its current value on the right side of thetable. Then, depending on the type of property, an input box, selection list or a dialog will appear, whichyou can use to change the property as desired. In the lower portion of the Properties-Explorer, a briefexplanation of the currently selected entry's meaning is displayed.

The toolbox and the Properties-Explorer can be moved around by first gripping their title bars with a clickof the mouse and then using the Drag&Drop technique; they can be "docked" at another point orpositioned to float alone freely. Double-clicking on the title bar of a free-floating window causes it to be re-docked.

282



15.2.3 Creating, opening and saving a dialog

To create a new dialog, use the menu item "File: New. The dialog initially bears a default name ("Dialog" +running number) which can be edited as desired upon saving.

An existing dialog can be opened using the menu item "File: Open". The Editor note which dialog you lastworked on. An easy way to re-open such a document is to click on its name where it appears in the lowerportion of the "File" menu.

Once this has been accomplished, a new working window opens and the dialog is displayed.

When a dialog is displayed, the associated sequence code is automatically loaded into the FAMOSSequence Editor. Conversely, opening a dialog file in the Sequence Editor also causes the dialog to bedisplayed in the Dialog Editor.

To save a dialog, use one of the appropriate menu items in the "File" menu of either the Dialog- orSequence Editor. The complete record of how the dialog is defined - in other words its graphicappearance and its sequence code - is saved.

15.2.4 Changing a dialog’s size

At a dialog's right and lower edges there are black squares, so-called "Grips". These can be "grabbed" bythe mouse, and dragged by moving the mouse while holding down its button, in order to alter the dialog'ssize.

15.2.5 Adding dialog elements

First select the desired dialog element from the toolbox. Then click the mouse with its pointer at theposition within the dialog window where you wish the new element's left upper corner to be, hold down themouse button and drag the mouse to demarcate the element's desired dimensions. Once the mousebutton is released, the new element is created in the area outlined.

Depending on what type of element is involved, another dialog may appear, in which you must specifyfundamental properties for initializing the element.

Another way of creating dialog elements is by adding them from the Clipboard. By using Copy/Paste, it ispossible to create copies of one or more elements.

15.2.6 Selecting dialog elements

In order to edit (for example, move, change properties of, or copy) one or more dialog elements, theymust first be selected.

A selected element is distinguished by black squares at its corners and edges. These squares are knownas "Handles". Besides indicating the object's selection status, these grips serve to change the size orshape of dialog elements.



When multiple elements are selected, one of them is defined as the so-called reference object,distinguished by solid black grips, while the other selected objects' grips only consist of a black frame. Thereference object is relevant to the commands in the "Format" menu. In the picture above, 3 elements areselected, and the button "Load File" is the reference object.

Single selection

There are a variety of possibilities for selecting a single object:

· If it's not yet active, select the selection tool from the main window's toolbar. Then clickthe left mouse button on the desired element.

· By clicking the right mouse button over an element, it is selected and the associatedcontext menu is called.

Group selection

There are different ways to select a group of elements. Such a group can then be jointly moved, copied ordeleted.

· You can demarcate an area using the mouse, within which all elements are then selected. Todo this, first select the selection tool from the toolbar, if it's not yet active. Then left-click themouse over one corner of the selection area desired and drag the mouse while holding down itsbutton to where you intend the selection area's opposite corner to be. During this operation, thecurrently valid area will be denoted by a dashed line. All elements are then selected whichoverlap (even partially) the area demarcated. The selection can be cancelled using the rightmouse button or [ESCAPE].

· To add an element to an existing selection, click on it while holding down the [CTRL]-key andwhile the selection tool is active.

· To remove an element from an existing selection group, click on it while holding down the[CTRL]-key and while the selection tool is active.

· To change the reference object, click the left mouse button again on an already selectedelement while holding down the [ALT]-key.

If you're unable to click the mouse over a certain element because it's covered by another object, firstplace the other object in the background using the menu command "Format: Arrange: To Back".

15.2.7 Dialog element properties

Besides its position and size, each dialog element is distinguished by a number of other properties whichdetermine its appearance and behavior.

First, select the desired element in the dialog. The Properties Explorer then shows the available propertiesfor the particular element.

284



To change a property, simply click on the readout of its current value on the right side of the table.Depending on the property's type, an input box, selection list or dialog then appears, which you can use tochange the property.

Most properties' designations are self-explanatory. Any peculiarities are listed in the section "Dialogelements" of the respective property's description. In addition, there are a number of default propertieswhich most elements feature:

Name

Every dialog element has a name which must be unique within its respective dialog. The name (incontrast to the "caption") isn't visible to the user. It serves to identify an element for the Dialog-Kitfunctions, to which it is supplied as the first parameter.

When an element is created, a default name is at first formed based on the element's type and a serialnumber; this name can be subsequently changed at any time. However, when changing a name, note thatit may already be used in event sequences and thus may need to be changed there as well.

A name may only consist of letters, digits and underlines; spaces, for example, are not permitted.

Caption and text formatting

Many dialog elements come with a text to display, which is specified using the standard property "Caption". Additionally, its font can be determined by means of the property in the group "Text-formatting"regarding its type, size, style and color.

A special feature in this matter is the setting "auto". This means that the value of the corresponding dialogsetting is applied. For example, in order to increase the font size for all of a dialog's elements, you don'tneed to adapt the font for every single element. It's enough to change the dialog's property "font size" -then all dialog elements with the font size = <auto> automatically "inherit" the setting.

Image

An important property of many dialog elements is the image displayed. Examples include buttons or menuitems, which show a picture in addition to the text in order to clarify the element's function.

If you click over the entry for "Image" in the Properties Explorer, the following dialog for selecting thedesired image appears.



FAMOS already provides a variety of images in the usual standard sizes 16x16 pixels (e.g. for menuelements/toolbar or list entries) as well as 32x32 and 48x48 (e.g. for buttons), which are organized invarious groups for the sake of greater clarity. First select the desired size in the tree diagram and then theappropriate subgroup. In the image preview on the right side, you will find all the associated images. Thedesired image can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse or by using the arrow keys.

Naturally, it's also possible to import image files from outside sources. One typical application, forexample, is the display of a company logo. Toward this end, click on the entry "Files" to expand in the treediagram at left, and select the desired file from among the entries which then appear. The followingformats are supported: Bitmap (*.bmp), Enhanced Metafile (*.emf), Windows Metafile (*.wmf), JPEG,PNG, GIF and TIFF.

Subfolders which don't contain any image files in any supported format aren't displayed.

Please note that some applications require a certain image size. For menu elements, a size of 16x16pixels is required.

If the checkbox "Transparent" is marked, the image appears transparent. All pixels in the image'sbackground color are replaced by the color of the background behind the image (i.e. the background colorof the dialog or menu, for example). The image's background color is defined as the color of the top leftpixel.

Data-linking and Input Validation

Some dialog elements can be linked directly to a FAMOS variable (property: "Data-linking: VariableName").

This means on the one hand that the element always displays the variable's current state. Changes of thelinked variable are recognized automatically, and the display updated accordingly.

Remark

Important: A variable to be linked with a dialog element must either already exist before the dialog iscalled or be created and initialized in the event-sequence "Dialog Init". For variables created later, thelinkage isn't in effect.

Conversely, changes made by the user to the dialog element are adopted by the variable. At whatmoment the changed value is written to the variable is determined by the property "Data-linking: Apply".In general, the available selections are "auto" (i.e. adoption immediately upon entry by the user) or "Oncommand". The latter means that adoption of changes is controlled either by the function DlgApplyDataor upon pressing a button with the special function "Apply".

Additionally, a data type can be assigned to some dialog elements ("Data-linkage: Data type"). The datatype determines on the one hand the formatting of the current value's display, and on the other hand can

286



be used to verify the appropriateness of the user's input.

The group "Input Validation" also serves the purpose of validating the entries made by the user. If thedialog element is for entering numeric values, you can use this group to define the permitted value range.If the user enters a number outside of the permitted range or if the entry cannot be converted into anumber, a message box provides notification of this.

15.2.8 Moving dialog elements

In order to be able to move objects with the mouse, the selection tool must be activated (denoted by thestatus of the corresponding toolbar button).

Moving an object

Left-click the mouse over the object and while holding down the button, drag the object to the positiondesired.

Moving groups of objects

First select the desired group of objects (see the section "Selecting dialog element"). Then left click themouse on the reference object (or, with the [SHIFT]-key pressed, on any selected object) and keep themouse button pressed down. While the button is pressed down, it's possible to move the group of objectsto the desired position.

Instead of the mouse, you can also use the arrow keys, in order to move the current selection in thedesired direction.

Remark

When the grid with snap function (menu item "View: Options") is active, the edges of the objects areforced to align with the grid points. The objects don't move smoothly with the motion of the mouse, but"hop", rather.

15.2.9 Aligning elements with each other

In order to achieve neat arrangements of multiple elements (e.g. all with left justification, all same width),it's convenient to begin work with the grid activated (menu item "View: Options").

There's also the possibility to arrange a number of objects in relation to a reference object.

Begin by selecting the desired elements and specify the reference element in relation to which the otherelements are to be located. One way to do this is to click on all the elements in sequence while holdingdown the [SHIFT]-key.

The reference element is denoted by making a final click on it (after it had already been clicked) while stillholding down the [SHIFT]-key. See the section "Selecting dialog element" to learn additional ways toselect object groups and to set the reference object.

In the menu "Format", the following commands are available:

Alignment: Left, Top, Bottom, Right, ... to Center



All selected elements are aligned to the respective edge or center line of the reference object. Their sizedoesn't change.

Alignment: To grid

All edges of the selected elements are forced to move to the closest grid point.

Same size

All selected elements are adjusted to the same height or width as the reference element. The position ofthe element's left upper corner remains unchanged.

Same Distance

After alignment, all elements are equally far from each other in the specified direction.

Centered

After alignment, all elements are centered with respect to the specified direction, meaning that they are allequally far from the dialog's outer edge.

15.2.10 Elements overlapping each other

The individual dialog elements are drawn in a fixed order. Elements drawn later can overlap ones alreadypresent either partially or completely.

To control the order in which elements are drawn, and thus in what way they overlap each other, thecommands in the menu "Format: Arrange" are provided. The same commands are also in the element'scontext menu. The element to change must be selected previously.

To front

The selected dialog element is moved to the foreground. It is on top of all other elements and can't becovered by any other element.

To back

The selected dialog element is moved to the background. It is beneath all other elements and can't coverany other element.

15.2.11 Changing the size of elements

To change the size of an element, it must be selected as the only one. Also make sure that the selectiontool is activated.

When an element is in the selected state, its edges have black squares, so-called "grips". If you move themouse over such a grip, the mouse cursor changes to a standard WINDOWS cursor for changing thesize of or moving a window. Then you can left-click the mouse ("grab the grip") and while keeping themouse button down, drag the element's edge or corner to the position desired.

When the grid with snap function is active, the elements' edges are forced to adhere to the grid points.Therefore, the size doesn't change smoothly as the mouse move, instead, the edge or corner "hops" tothe next grid point.

15.2.12 Deleting elements

To delete one or more elements, they must first be selected. To do this, select the command "Delete"from the "Edit" menu or from the element's context menu.

Alternatively, you can use the command "Edit: Cut" or the corresponding toolbar button.

In contrast to deleting, in this case the selected elements are removed to the Clipboard.

288



15.2.13 Clipboard

The "Copy and Paste" method, using the Clipboard is a convenient way to make duplicates of existingelements in the same dialog, or even to exchange elements between dialogs.

Once you have selected the desired elements, select either of the commands "Cut" or "Copy"from the menu "Edit" or from the element's context menu, or the corresponding toolbarbuttons.

With "Cut", the previously selected elements disappear.

To insert the copied or cut element, use the menu item "Edit: Paste".

Since the dialog element names must be unique, the pasted elements are assigned default names. Allother properties remain unchanged.

15.2.14 Grid

For convenience in positioning the dialog elements, you can have a grid displayed. To configure the grid,select the menu item "View: Options". In the Properties explorer, the available settings are indicated.

Show grid

Sets whether to display the grid.

Snap functions

When this is activated, the elements' edges are forced to adhere to the grid points. The snap function alsoapplies if the grid isn't visible.

Horizontal/ Vertical distance

Determines the distance between grid points in the respective direction.

15.3 Programming

15.3.1 Principles

Along with the design of a dialog, which determines the dialog's appearance, the sequence codeassociated with the dialog (and thus the dialog's behavior while being run) must also be defined.

When a dialog is run, events occur in consequence of which an associated sequence is also run.Examples of events include starting the dialog (in the associated sequence, necessary variables can begenerated and dialog elements initialized), or pushing a button (in the associated sequence, a calculationcould be performed, for example).

To run a dialog, use the function Dialog from the function group '10> Options, Dialogs, DDE...'.

The dialog is closed when the command DlgCloseDialog from the Dialog-Kit is called within an eventsequence (this could happen, for example, as a reaction to pressing a button with the caption 'OK'). Onlyafter the end of the dialog does the function Dialog return.

Let's consider the following simple example:

A dialog consists of only 2 buttons, one for carrying out a certain calculation, and the other for closing thedialog.



The dialog additionally has a title bar with a system menu, so that it can also be ordered to close bymeans of the key combination [ALT+F4] or by a click on the "Exit"-button in the title bar (which initiates "Dialog Close").

The function Dialog loads the specified dialog file and forms the dialog, without displaying it.Subsequently, the event 'Dialog Init' is triggered. Here, variables can be generated or dialog elementsinitialized.

After processing the initialization sequence, the dialog is displayed, and the system waits for furtherevents. In the example, only three possible events could occur:

· The user presses the button "DoIt". In the associated event sequence, a calculation could becarried out, for instance. After the sequence is run, the system waits for further events.

· The user presses the [OK] button. In order for the dialog to be subsequently closed, theassociated event sequence must contain the command DlgCloseDialog.

· The user presses the Exit button in the title bar or the combination of keys [ALT+F4]. Theassociated event-sequence "Dialog Close" must also contain the command DlgCloseDialog.This command is entered automatically when the dialog is created.

A call of the command DlgCloseDialog leads to the dialog being closed. For this purpose the dialog is firsthidden and then later the event 'Dialog End'. Here, for example, no longer necessary variables can bedeleted. After the sequence is run through, the dialog is permanently deleted and the function Dialogreturns. The return value in this case corresponds to the parameter passed to the function DlgCloseDialog.

15.3.2 Editing event-sequences

The event-sequences have the same syntax as "normal" FAMOS-sequences and are also created andtested using the sequence editor in the FAMOS main window. For information on the principles ofoperating the Sequence Editor, refer to the chapter "Sequences".

When a dialog is opened for editing (no matter whether by the Dialog-Editor or the Sequence-Editor), the

290



working window is divided into a tree diagram list of events on the left side, and the actual editing box onthe right side. In the editing box, the sequence assigned to the currently selected event is the one shown.

For a better overview, the event list is organized into various groups:

· General: Events triggered by the dialog itself.

· Buttons: Buttons have only one event ("pressed"), which is triggered by pressing the button.For a simple assignment, the button's caption is displayed, followed by the button's name insquare brackets.

· Menu/ Toolbar: Menu items or toolbar buttons also have just one event ("Selected"). The menuitem's caption is displayed, followed by the name in square brackets.

· Additional dialog elements: For each other dialog element (which is neither button nor menu),a separate group with the element's name is displayed, and the events supported by this elementare listed. The picture above shows the list box "List" with the two assigned events "Selected"and "Double-clicked".

Events to which no sequence code was yet assigned are displayed in a gray typeface.

The output box in the FAMOS main window shows a short help text about the currently selected event.

A double-click of the mouse on a dialog element in the Dialog-Editor brings the FAMOS main window intothe foreground and selects the first event sequence belonging to this element.

15.3.3 Testing and running dialogs

In comparison to "simple" sequences, there are certain differences and particularities:

The menu items "Run" and "Start (Debug)" don't refer to the currently displayed event sequence, but tothe entire dialog.

If the running of the dialog is interrupted (e.g. due to a syntax error in an event-sequence or due to abreakpoints), many operations in FAMOS are disabled- for example, in this state, no other sequence canbe started. The run running of the dialog must previously be explicitly quit by menus of the "Stop"-button inthe toolbar.

To cancel the run of a dialog, use the sequence context menu in the notification area of the Windowstaskbar.

· "Cancel" completely cancels the running of the dialog.

· "Interrupt (upon next command)" interrupts the running of the dialog before executing the next



line in the sequence. This is especially helpful for testing dialogs while the dialog is "idling", inother words, waiting for the next event to occur. After selecting this menu item, the dialogremains at first in the waiting state, but upon the occurrence of the next event (e.g. push of abutton), it interrupts the associated event-sequence before executing the first line.

To call an existing dialog within a sequence, use the FAMOS function Dialog. This function can be foundin the function group '10) Options, Dialogs..'.

15.4 Dialog Elements

The dialog elements available are briefly described below. Most of them are standard Windows controlswhose functioning we assume to be familiar.

15.4.1 Button

Virtual switch which causes a certain action when clicked.

Notes on designing

Along with a caption which is as descriptive as possible, an image is often displayed on the button as well,which gives the user a clue as to its function.

Function keys

As an alternative to clicking with the mouse, it's possible to set a combination of keys in order to achievecontrol from the keyboard.

Special function "Apply"

If this special function is activated, then when the button is pressed, the data are adopted by all affecteddialog elements. This means all dialog elements which either are linked to a variable or for which inputvalidation was set. The associated event-sequence is only called once the input validation was successfulfor every element.

A typical case is for an [OK]-button in a dialog with several input boxes for each of which a permittedvalue range has been set. When the [OK]-button is pressed by the user, a check is first made of whetherthe current entries are all valid. Only in that case, the button's event sequence is called, after which thedialog is typically closed.

This special function thus saves the trouble of explicitly validating/ adopting the data in the eventsequence by means of the function DlgApplyData.

Notes on programming

Events:

· "Button pressed": Triggered when the user clicks the mouse over the button, or presses thecorresponding combination of keys.

Important functions:

· DlgSetText - Changes the text displayed

· DlgEnable - Disables operation

292



15.4.2 Text box

Element for outputting text

Notes on designing

The decisive property is, of course, the text to be displayed. Text boxes can be linked with FAMOSvariables; see the section "Data-linking" for details.


Events:

· None.


· DlgSetText - changes the text displayed

Data-linking

A text box can be linked to a FAMOS variable in order to display its current value. If the variable is a dataset, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

If in addition to this a permanent text (property: "Caption") was included with the design, the numericalvalue is combined with the text. If the text includes the placeholder %1, the number value is inserted atthe placeholder's position. Otherwise, the value is appended to the text.

Example: Let a linked variable have the value 3.14.

Caption Display

"" (empty) 3.14

"The mean value is " "The mean value is 3.14"

"The mean value is %1 Volt: " "The mean value is 3.14 Volt"

The formatting of the number value for the display is independent of what data type is specified ("Data-linking: Data type").

Integer The value is rounded to the next integer. Readout always without exponent.

Real number The value is displayed in the numerical format "real" with up to 6 decimal places.Depending on the numerical value's magnitude, either fixed- or floating pointnumerical format is selected.

Bool If the value is equal to 0, a 0 is returned, otherwise always 1

Date Readout as a date

Date+Time Readout as a date and time

Time Readout as a time

Remark: The last 3 formats only make sense if the value is expressed in imc time format. Use the



functions of the function group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them.

Example

The following dialog contains on the right side 6 text boxes with various data types which are all linked tothe same variable. The variable contains the current system time (found by means of the functionTimeSystem?).

The variable linkage is "read only", meaning that any change of the text box's contents, for example bymeans of the Kit function DlgSetValue, isn't adopted by the linked variable.

15.4.3 Single-line edit box

Element for entering and displaying short texts or numbers.

Notes on designing

Single-line input boxes can be linked with variables. Additionally, a permitted value range can bespecified, against which entries by the user will be checked. For details, see the section "Data-linking".

A unique feature of this element is the property "Operation". This controls how the element responds toentries made to it.

· "Default": "Normal" input box behavior.

· "With input confirmation": Inputs must be explicitly verified by the user by means of the[ENTER]-key, or rejected using the [ESCAPE] button. To call the user's attention to this specialbehavior, the input box appears slightly shifted over, as soon as it gets the input focus (e.g. afterclicking the mouse on it):

To the user, it appears as if a separate input box was opened. It is only closed once the input hasbeen confirmed with [ENTER], and its contents are adopted. Conversely, clicking the mouse outsideof the input box, or clicking on [ESCAPE] closes the window and rejects any entries made.

If the input box is linked to a variable or if an input validation is defined, and if the property "Apply"is set to "automatic", this is the mode to be recommended, since in this case the moment in time at

294



which the entries are adopted is exactly defined.

· "Auto": If the input box is linked to a slider control, the mode "With input confirmation" isimplemented. Otherwise, it's always "Default".


Events:

· None.


· DlgSetText, DlgGetText, DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue - Set and get the input box contents.

Data-linking

An input box can be linked to a FAMOS-variable in order to display or edit its current value. If the variableis a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.




If the user changes the input box's contents, then the system checks before adopting the new contentwhether it can be converted to the data type specified.

In the group "Input Validation", it's additionally possible to define a permitted value range. If the userenters a number outside of the permitted range, or if the input can't be converted to a number, the user isnotified by a message box.

The property "Data-linking: Apply" determines when the content of a user input is to be validated andadopted by a linked variable.

· "Auto": Validation and adoption happens automatically upon user entry. When an entry is finallycompleted is recognized as follows, depending on the prevailing value of the property "Operation":

"Operation" = "Default": Entry only applied at the moment that a dialog button is pressed or amenu item is selected.

"Operation" = "With input confirmation": The input is adopted as soon as the user explicitlyverifies the entries using the [ENTER]-key. This is the recommended mode, since the moment atwhich the data are adopted is evident to the user.



· "On command": Validation and adoption only happen upon calling the function DlgApplyData orupon the special function button "Apply" being pressed.

15.4.4 Multi-line edit box

Element for entering and displaying multi-line texts.

Notes on designing

An input box can be linked to a text variable in order to display/ edit its current value. In this case, beaware that the length of text variables is limited to 255 characters.


Events:

· None.


· DlgSetText, DlgGetText: Set and get the input box contents

Notes on operation

Input boxes each have a context menu (called by right-clicking the mouse over the box). This menucontains, among other things, commands for copying and pasting text via the Clipboard.

15.4.5 Check boxes

This element serves the purpose of activating or deactivating a setting or option. A click on it toggles itsstate from "On" (the box has a checkmark or X inside) to "Off" (empty box) or vice versa.


Events:

· "Element changed": Generated each time the element is clicked.


· DlgGetValue, DlgSetValue: Sets and gets the element's state

Data-linking

A checkbox can be linked to a FAMOS variable, in order to display/ edit its current value. If the variable isa data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

When the variable is changed, the checkbox is activated, if the variable's (rounded) value is 1. If the(rounded) value is 0, the checkbox is deactivated. For all other values, the element's state remains

296



unchanged.

If the checkbox's state is switched (by clicking on it, or by the action of a Kit function), the new state(number 0 or 1) is written to the variable. The moment at which the writing takes place depends on theproperty "Apply":

· "Auto": The variable is updated immediately whenever the element is changed.

· "On demand": The variable is only updated when the function DlgApplyData is called or whenthe special function button "Apply" is pressed.

Notes on operation

If the checkbox currently holds the input focus (distinguishable by a dashed-line frame around thecaption), the [SPACE]-key can be used to switch its state.

15.4.6 Groupbox

This element consists of a labeled frame. It's used to organize multiple logically related dialog elementsunder a joint heading.

15.4.7 Image

This element serves to display a (small) picture. It can be used, for instance, to display a company logo orsomething similar. The image is set permanently when the dialog is designed and cannot be changedduring runtime.

15.4.8 Slider control

A virtual slider control is often used when the user is to be offered to ability to select a value out of adefined value range. Toward this end, a knob can be slid along a linear scale. The actual value setdepends on the knob's position and the definitions for the scale's end values.

Notes on designing

A slider control can be oriented either horizontally (the scale is horizontal with the minimum at left) or



vertically (the scale is vertical, with the minimum on the bottom). The orientation is determinedautomatically by the control's shape: if its width is greater than its height, the orientation is horizontal.

The properties "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum" set the corresponding numerical values for thelower and upper ends of the slider, respectively.

The property "Small steps" applies whenever the user operates the control using the arrow buttons. Atypical value would be 1% of the value range.

The property "Large steps" applies whenever the user operates the control by means of the keys [PGUP]or [PGDN]. A typical value would be 10% of the value range.

An additional special property of this control is "Synchronized with dialog element". Here, you can enterthe name of a text box or single-line input box to be linked to the slider control. Such an element thenalways displays the value currently set by the slider. If it's an input box, the linkage works in bothdirections - if the user changes the value in the input box, the slider is adjusted to the correspondingposition.


Events:

· "Element changed": generated once the user has changed the current value.


· DlgSetBarRange: Sets the value range

· DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Sets and gets the current value

Data-linking:

A slider control can be linked to a FAMOS variable, in order to display/ edit its current value. If the variableis a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

If the value lies outside of the slider control's value range, the closest scale end value is indicated.

Conversely, when changes made on the slider are written to the variable depends on the property "Apply".

· "Auto": The variable is updated after every change (already when "dragging" the slider knob).

· "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or uponclicking the special function button "Apply".

Notes on operation

When the slider control holds the input focus (distinguishable by a dashed-line frame around the caption),the keyboard can be used as follows:

POS1 Positions the knob at the left/lower end of the slider

END Positions the knob at the right/upper end of the slider

ARROWKEYS

Moves the slider control in the corresponding direction by the value set in the property "Small steps".

PGUPPGDN

Moves the slider control in the corresponding direction by the value set in the property "Large steps".

298



15.4.9 Datepicker

The calendar element serves to display and set the date.

Notes on designing

The property "Format" affects the display format.

· "Date (short)": Short format, e.g. "12.07.2005".

· "Date (long)": Long format with weekday, e.g. "Thursday, July 28, 2005"

Under "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum", you can set what the permitted value limits are. Userentries lying outside of the range defined here aren't accepted.

Data-linking

A calendar-element can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value.If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

A linkage only makes sense if the variable concerned is expressed in the imc time format. Use thefunctions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them.

The moment at which a date entered by the user is written to the variable depends on the value of theproperty "Apply":

· "Auto": The variable is updated immediately when the change is made.



Events:



· DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Set and get the current value. The number value is transferred in theimc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating andprocessing them.

Notes on operation

Along with direct entry of the date through the digit keys, the following additional possibilities are available:

Clicking on the arrow button at the right of the input box (keyboard operation: [ALT]+ "ARROW DOWN")opens a dedicated calendar window for easily selecting the date.

In the element's basic, "shut" state, it's also possible to click on individual components of the date (e.g.the year) and use the arrow keys to make adjustments.



15.4.10 Timepicker

The time element serves the purposes of displaying and entering the time.

Notes on designing

Under "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum", you can set what the permitted value limits are. Userentries lying outside of the range defined here aren't accepted.

Data-linking

A time-element can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value. Ifthe variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

A linkage only makes sense if the variable concerned is expressed in the imc time format. Use thefunctions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them.

The moment at which a time entered by the user is written to the variable depends on the value of theproperty "Apply":




Events:



· DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Set and get the current value. The number value is transferred in theimc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating andprocessing them.

Notes on operation

Along with direct entry of the time using the digit keys, it's also possible to select individual components ofthe time (e.g. hours) and to use the arrow keys or the arrow buttons at the right edge of the control to"scroll" through the available values.

15.4.11 Listbox (single selection)

Listboxes with single selection are used to give the user the option of selecting exactly one entry from alist of available entries.

Notes on designing:

The property "List-Entries" defines the contents which the list shows when the dialog is started. Byclicking in the Properties-Explorer, you access an edit box in which you can enter the initial contentdesired.

300



To add a new line, use the [ENTER]-key. To apply the changes which were made, use the combination ofkeys [CTRL]+ [ENTER], and to cancel, the [ESCAPE] key or the corresponding button at the bottom of theedit box.


Events:

· "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an entry.

· "Entry selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user(click of the mouse, arrow keys).


· DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem Inserting and deleting entries

· DlgGetText: Gets selected entry

· DlgGetSelectedItem, DlgSelectItem: Gets or edits index of the current selection

· If the list only contains numbers, the function DlgGetValue can also be used to get the currentlyselected number.

Data-linking:

A listbox can be linked to a FAMOS variable. The FAMOS-variable's value is the index of the currentlyselected entry. A value of 1, for instance, means that the first list entry is selected. If the variable is a dataset, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

The moment when a changed selection is adopted by the linked variable depends on the value of theproperty "Apply":



15.4.12 Listbox (multiple selection)

Listboxes with multiple selection capability are used to give the user the option of selecting one or moreentries from a list of available entries.

Notes on designing

Creating list entries is accomplished analogously to the case of 'Listbox (single selection)', describedabove.




Events:

· "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an entry.



· DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: For inserting and deleting entries

· DlgGetItemText: Gets an entry's text

· DlgGetSelectedItemCount, DlgIsItemSelected, DlgSetItemSelection: Gets and sets the selection

Notes on operation

To add an entry to the current selection or to remove one from the current selection, click on the entrywhile holding down the [CTRL]-key.

To select a series of entries, first click on the first entry in the series and then on the last entry in theseries while holding down the [SHIFT]-key. Alternatively, you can use the [ARROW]-keys while holdingdown the [SHIFT]-key.

15.4.13 Droplist

Similarly to listboxes, droplists are used to give the user the option of selecting exactly one entry from alist of available entries.

Since the actual selection list only pops down on demand, these elements are mostly used when trying toconserve space in the dialog, or when there are a large number of entry alternatives.

Notes on designing



Events:



· DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: Inserting and deleting entries

· DlgGetText: Gets selected entry

· DlgGetSelectedItem, DlgSelectItem: Gets or edits index of the current selection

· If the list only contains numbers, the function DlgGetValue can also be used to get the currentlyselected number

Data-linking:

A droplist can be linked to a FAMOS variable. The FAMOS-variable's value is the index of the currentlyselected entry. A value of 1, for instance, means that the first list entry is selected. If the variable is a dataset, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

302



The moment when a changed selection is adopted by the linked variable depends on the value of theproperty "Apply":



15.4.14 Combobox

A combobox is a combination of the single-line editbox and a droplist. It is used whenever the user issupposed to have a large selection of already available alternatives, but also the option of making a freelyspecified entry.

Notes on designing


Notes on programming:

Events:

· None.


· DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: For inserting and deleting entries

· DlgSetText, DlgGetText, DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue - Setting and getting the content of theeditbox.

Data-linking:

A combobox can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value. If thevariable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.




If the user changes the input box's contents, then the system checks before adopting the new contentwhether it can be converted to the data type specified.

In the group "Input Validation", it's additionally possible to define a permitted value range. If the userenters a number outside of the permitted range, or if the input can't be converted to a number, the user isnotified by a message box.

The property "Apply" sets when the entries made by the user are validated and adopted in a linkedvariable.

· "Auto": Validation and adoption of the entry occurs immediately when another entry is selectedfrom the list. If entries in the input box are edited, they are only applied once a dialog button ispressed or a menu item is selected.



· "On command": Validation and adoption happen only when the function DlgApplyData is called,or upon clicking on the special function button "Apply".

15.4.15 Treeview

This element is used to display data in a hierarchical branching diagram. A filing system diagram would bean example of this.

Notes on designing:

To initialize the tree diagram with items, proceed as follows:

· Select the tree diagram

· To add an item to the end, double-click on the gray entry "New item"

· To add an item after an existing item, select it first and then in the context menu (accessed byright-clicking the mouse) select the menu item "New item" or "New Child Item"

· To delete an entry or to change its indent (distance to the left edge), there are alsocorresponding items available in the context menu.

· Using the Drag&Drop technique with the mouse, you can re-position an item vertically in thehierarchy.

To change a line's properties, first select the desired line. In the Properties Explorer, you can thenchange the caption and image. For changing the caption it's also possible to double-click thecorresponding line.

Each line can be assigned its own image. Please note that all the images must be of the same size!


Events:

· "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an item'scaption (to the right of the image). In keyboard operation, the [ENTER]-key is also interpreted asa double-click.

· "Item selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user(mouse click, arrow keys).


· DlgInsertTreeItem - Inserts items

· DlgSelectItem / DlgGetSelectedItem - Sets/ gets the selection

304



· DlgGetItemText - Gets an item's caption

Notes on operation

The buttons [+] and [-] expand or collapse braches, respectively. The [ENTER]-key has the same effectas double-clicking on the caption of the selected entry and also triggers the event "Double-clicked".

15.4.16 Tableview

The Tableview offers tabular display of data. Optionally, the user can have the opportunity to directly editthe contents of individual cells at runtime.

One example of an application would be a list of data sets; the first column contains the data set's nameand the following columns contain additional information such as the size, sampling interval and data type.

The amount of columns is set permanently during the designing phase and cannot be changed duringruntime.

A table's maximum size is 128 columns x 1024 rows.

Note: This element is quite unsuitable for displaying large amounts of measured data in tabular form.Instead, use a curve window in tabular mode.

Notes on designing

For all of the following actions, the corresponding table element must be selected.

Setting the column-/ row header text

Move the mouse to the upper edge of the column header / to the left edge of the row header.

The cursor's shape changes to:

Click the mouse and enter the desired text, then hit [ENTER] to confirm entries or [ESCAPE] to rejectthem.

Setting the column width

There are 3 different modes available for determining the column width:

Optimumwidth:

The column widths are automatically adjusted so that all cell contents are completelyvisible, without being truncated. If the sum of all the column widths is greater than thetable's width, a horizontal scroll bar is automatically added.

Full visibility: The available table width is divided equally among the columns. This can cause thecell contents to appear truncated during runtime.

Fixed: The column width set during the design phase is retained. In order to change thecolumn width during runtime, move the mouse over the dividing line between two

column headers. The cursor changes its shape to:

By means of the Drag&Drop technique, the column borders can now be shifted.

The width of the column with the row headers is always set automatically, so that all the texts it containsare completely visible.

Column-specific properties

Some properties can be set for each column individually. These include the colors, for instance, or the



data format and whether the user has permission to edit cells.

To change these properties, first move the mouse to the desired table column's upper border.

The cursor's shape changes:

Then, click on the mouse. The selected column appears in hatching and the corresponding properties aredisplayed in the Properties Explorer.


Events:

· "Item selected": Generated when the user changes the row selected in the table.

· "Element changed": Generated when the user changes the content of a table cell. The tablecolumn must possess the property "Cells editable".


· DlgInsertItem: Adds table rows

· DlgSetCellText, DlgSetCellValue, DlgGetCellText, DlgGetCellValue: Sets and gets cell contents

Data-linking

Each column can be set to have its own data format. This is only used for formatting the output if anumerical value is assigned to the cell by means of the function DlgSetCellValue or by user input duringruntime. The formatting is accomplished in a manner analogous to that for Text box.

Notes on operation

If the property "Cells editable" was assigned to a column of the table, the user can edit the cells contentswhile the dialog is up. After double-clicking on the desired cell, an edit box appears in which the desiredchanges can be made. The key [ENTER] causes entries to be adopted, [ESCAPE] cancels them.

If the table column is assigned a special data format, the new entry is only accepted if the formatmatches.

15.4.17 Curve Window

Curve windows which are used to display measured data in FAMOS and other imc applications can alsobe adopted as dialog elements.

Notes on designing

306



To set up a curve window, select the group "Curve Window" from the toolbox and then select the desireddisplay mode. The display mode can be changed at any later time.

The waveforms to be displayed can be configured either during the designing phase or can be specifiedusing Kit functions during runtime. For details, see the section "Selecting waveforms to display" below.

To configure the curve window, use the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse).

Double-clicking on an axis calls the dialog for setting the respective axis.

When the dialog is saved, the complete curve configuration (which can include the display mode, axisscaling, names of the waveforms displayed, etc.) is saved along with it.

If you wish to use the mouse to change the curve window's position, click the mouse over the symbol (in the upper right or lower left corner), and use the Drag&Drop technique to move it to the positiondesired. Clicking the mouse once on the symbol additionally calls the standard context menu for dialogelements ("Cut", "Copy" etc.).

To learn about the configuration and operation of the curve window, see the online help for the CurveWindow or refer to the FAMOS manual (Volume 3: "Shared Components").


Events:

· None.


· To govern the curve window, use the functions belonging to the "Curve"-Kit. This is includedwhen the program is properly installed ("Kits" page in the FAMOS functions list). The curveelement's name must be supplied as the first parameter of all these functions.

Beispiel

Adding the waveform "Data" to the curve element "Curve1" (with its own y-axis, scaled from 0 to 100):



Selecting waveforms to display

Case 1:

The names of the waveforms to be displayed are fixed; for example, while the dialog is up, the variables"Data" and "Result" should always be displayed.

Procedure: Create waveforms in FAMOS with the desired names, never mind the contents. Configure thecurve window in the Dialog-Editor as desired (context menu: "Configuration": "More waveforms.."). Whenthe dialog is saved, the curve configuration thus made is also saved.

When the dialog is loaded at runtime, the system checks whether waveforms whose names match thenames in the curve configuration exist . These are then automatically displayed.

Case 2:

The names of the waveforms to be displayed are variable, while the basic curve window structure (displaymode, amount of waveforms displayed) is fixed.

Procedure: While designing, created the necessary amount of waveforms with self-explanatory names,such as "Placeholder1", "Placeholder2"... and then proceed as in Case 1.

Then you use the function CvReplaceChannel (from Curve Kit) to fill the placeholders during runtime withthe actual waveforms to be displayed.

CvReplaceChannel("Curve1", Data, "Placeholder1")

Case 3:

The composition and structure of the curve window aren't yet known during the design phase.

Procedure: Use the functions from the Curve-Kit like CxYAxis, CvXAxis, CvAttrib etc., in order to build upthe curve window "from scratch" during runtime.

Notes on operation

Like in the design mode, here, too, all configuration and operating capabilities (context menu, double-clicking on axes) are available.

Operation of the imc curve window is extensively described in the online help for the Curve Window, aswell as in the FAMOS manual (Volume 3: "Shared Components...").

15.4.18 Menu- and Toolbar

Dialogs can have a menu bar, which always appears at the dialog's upper edge directly below the title bar.Especially for more complex applications, a well-structured menu provides a convenient overview andtotal access to the available actions. To each menu item, its own event sequence is assigned, which isrun when the respective menu item is selected.

308



Dialogs with a menu bar can also have a toolbar directly under the menu. Here, the items can be calleddirectly via a corresponding icon button. Typically, menu commands which are used often are placed inthe toolbar as well in order to provide quick access.

Notes on designing

Creating a menu

To create a menu or to add or remove items, use the "Menu" page in the toolbox. A representation of thecurrent menu appears in tree diagram form.

Here, the top-level menu positions appear as the root items in the tree diagram, which, when expanded,show their respective submenus.

All menu positions at which an additional entry would be possible have a placeholder in gray typefacecalled "New item". To add a new item, simply double-click on such a placeholder and enter the desiredmenu text in the edit box which appears.

To delete an item, open the context menu (right mouse click) and select the command "Delete".

By means of Drag&Drop you can change an item's position. To do this, click on the entry to be movedand drag it to the desired position while holding the mouse button down.

Changing properties ("Appearance: Image")

To display the properties for a menu item, click either on the menu item (or the toolbar button assigned toit) or on the corresponding item in the menu editor.

In order to also place a menu item on the toolbar, set the value of the property "Toolbar" to "Yes".

You can also use the property "Shortcut key" to set a combination of keys, which then initiates the samemenu command.

Images assigned to the menu items must have the fixed size 16x16 pixels.


Events:

· "Menu item selected": Generated when a menu item is selected or if the corresponding toolbarbutton is pressed.


· DlgEnable: Disables menu items



15.4.19 Status bar

The status bar is always shown on the dialog's bottom edge and generally serves the purpose ofdisplaying the application's current status or the status of an operation. A typical use is to display a shorthelp text for the menu item which has been selected.

Notes on designing

If your dialog has a menu, it's a good idea to supply a short help text for the menu items under theirproperty "Infotext", which explains the menu item's function. If the user then selects a menu item atruntime, this text is automatically displayed in the status bar.


Events:

· None.


· DlgSetText: Changes the status bar's text. The function's first parameter must be set to the fixedname "#Status".

Beispiel

DlgSetText("#Status", "Please wait..."); ...performing long calculation...DlgSetText("#Status", "Finished.")

310


Data-Browser

Data-BrowserWhen capturing data, it is common for the same measurement quantities to be repeatedly measured insuccessive trials:

· at a test station, measurements of different test objects are made in succession under identicalconditions

· on type tests, the same test object is subjected to multiple measurements each under different testconditions

In any case, large amounts of data can soon accumulate, which must later be viewed, compared,presented and possible also documented and printed out.

The Data-Browser is a tool for quick and easy viewing of measured data.

The Data-Browser supplements the curve window functions with flexible assignment of measurementchannels.

The Data-Browser's panels combine the properties of dialogs (active elements, variable binding - seeUser-Defined Dialog (Dialog-Editor) and reports (optimized for printout - see Report-Generator).

To get a quick introduction to the Data-Browser, see the chapter Quick-Start.

To start the Data-Browser, use the menu item Extra -> Data-Browser, the combination of the keys"CTRL+F11", or the corresponding toolbar button in the main window:

16.1 Basic concepts and terms

The Data-Browser's user interface consists of these fundamental components.

Presentation with Panels

For display and documentation of measured data, so-called panels are used. A panel contains one ormore pages. You can arrange a variety of display elements on a page. Typical elements include curvewindows, tables and text boxes. It is also possible to position interactive elements such as buttons andinput boxes for text in the forms. Such interactive elements can either start sequences or be linked directlywith FAMOS variables (data binding).

Panels thus combine the properties of dialogs (active elements, variable linkage - see user-defineddialogs) and reports (optimized for printout - see Report-Generator).

Design Mode / Run Mode

To create or edit panels, you switch the Data-Browser to Design Mode.

311Data-Browser


In this mode, there are additional tools available:

· Toolbar for selecting the panel elements

· Editors with which to determine the panel element properties

In Design Mode, the elements of the Toolbox can be moved to the current page by means of Drag&Drop.Alternatively, you can also use the "Edit" menu item "Insert Element".

Panels designed in this way (file extension: *.iform) can later be loaded during the run and eitherautomatically or manually "filled" with the current measured data. You can use the input boxes andbuttons, and print out the presentation of data, as well as save them in a variety of formats such as AdobeAcrobat PDF, PNG, BMP .

Data selection

The files of measured data must first be opened. To do this, use the Files list, with which you can loadeither individual measurement files or even whole folders at the push of a button. After loading the files,you will see the Measurements and Channels lists.

Next, select the channels to be edited from among the many opened data; refer to Data selection.

16.1.1 Data selection

The Data-Browser solves two commonly occurring situations.

· Multiple channels often have the same name. Using the FAMOS curve window alone, the only way tosimultaneously edit or view multiple files with the same name is to first rename them or to take similarsteps (e.g. explicit merging to data groups).

· Display elements such as curve windows are normally designed in such a way that the data to bedisplayed can be specified using their (channel-) names. In the presentation, either the channelscurrently desired must be renamed, or replaced in the curve window.

The Data-Browser's flexible data exchange method easily solves these tasks.

Data selection is governed by two principles:

· Assigning the channels to measurements

· Selection/Numbering

16.1.2 Assigning the channels to measurements

When opening files of measured data, the associated channels are automatically assigned to a"Measurement". The measurement's name can be derived from, for example, the name of the file ofmeasured values (for multi-channel files), from the name of the folder to which the files belong; see FileList options. The term "Measurement" is not necessarily the actual result of a physical measurement, butgroups related measured data (channels) together .

The measurement's name is a component of the resulting variable name in FAMOS, so that evenidentically named channels belonging to different measurements are uniquely designated. Such acombined variable name in FAMOS has the following syntax:

ChannelName @ MeasurementName

e.g.

Temperatur_01 @ Experiment0001


312


Data-Browser

SensorX @ MiddleCenter

SensorX @ BottomCenter

An example for assigning the channels can be found in chapter Quickstart, Dragging a channel onto thepage.

16.1.3 Selection/Numbering

The names of measurements and channels recorded in FAMOS are displayed in separate list boxes andcan be selected by the user. To each measurement and each channel one contains, it is possible toassign a unique number.

Curve windows and other display elements for measured data can now be configured in such a way thatreferences to the current selection can be entered in these lists instead of concrete channel names.

For example, the curve window can display instead of the concrete variable name


a general reference in the form

Channel #1 @ Measurement #2

(read: 1st channel selected of the 2nd measurement selected)

or instead:

"Temperatur_01" @ Measurement #2

(read: channel named "Temperatur_01" from the 2nd measurement selected).

Which particular channel is displayed in the curve window is determined by the current data selectionstate, i.e. by the selection in the pertinent lists. This means you can design panels with which it is possibleto switch quickly between different data, without having to change the panels or the display elements theycontain.

Details on numbering are found in chapter Numbering and Locking.

313Data-Browser


16.2 Elements of the main window

The image below shows a default Data-Browser screen. Most objects can be freely placed, which meansthat the screen can also look totally different. To obtain this default screen, use the menu command "View"-> "Layout" -> "Layout reset".

Elements of the main window (default layout)

Panel

At the upper edge you see the tabs for the panels. The main window may have one or more panels.

Each panel can contain one or more pages. See also Menu: Panel

Page

In the middle you see the page.

Each page can take the form of a Report or a Dialog.

Reports are preferable for the purpose of printouts. They use the curve window's color settings for theprintout.

Dialogs use the color settings for the on-screen display.

See also Menu: Page

Files list

With the Files list, you can select and open measurement files.

See also Files list

Measurements list, Channels list

With the Measurements List, you can select one or more measurements. In the example shown, themeasurement names are derived from the folder names. See also Measurements and Channels lists.

314


Data-Browser

The measurements and channels are numbered.

The Toolbox and the Properties window are positioned on the right hand side by default.

16.2.1 Toolbox

The File List, Measurement List, Channel List, Toolbar and Properties are together known as the ToolWindow. All tool windows can be freely positioned (by means of Drag&Drop in the overview).

The menu command View -> Layout -> Layout reset can be used to return the window arrangement toits original state.

Example

315Data-Browser


The tool windows can be positioned as desired

316


Data-Browser

16.2.2 Files list

File List

Using the Files list, you can select the measured data. The next sections discuss how to load a single file, load multiple files or how to load all of a folder's measurement files.

317Data-Browser


16.2.2.1 Load a single file

Using the File List simply open the folder where the file is located and double-click on the filename.

Opening a file:Double-click on the file

A single file can also be loaded using this symbol in the measurement list:

This opens an ordinary Windows dialog for opening files.

318


Data-Browser

16.2.2.2 Load multiple files

Opening multiple selected files:Selecting the button in the toolbar

To load multiple files at once, proceed as follows:

· Select the files that you want to load. You must use the keyboard as described in table "Keycombinations for making selections".

· Then select the symbol from the toolbar as seen in the picture above.

319Data-Browser


16.2.2.3 Load a whole folder

Opening all files in a folder:Click on the arrow icon to the left of the folder name

Making this selection opens all measurement value files which are in the folder and which conform to thefile format set.

16.2.2.4 File list options

The File List toolbar has buttons for the Options:

Click on the button and the following dialog appears:

320


Data-Browser

File format options

File format

This is where you set the file format for the opening procedure (with the associated name extension(s).The File List then only displays such files which have the extensions selected here. The particular list offile formats depends on what import/export filters are installed.

Expand groups

The waveforms or texts contained in the data groups are expanded upon loading.

Options for measurement name

Measurement name

Here you select how the measurements' names are generated from the data selection.

321Data-Browser


16.2.3 Measurements and Channels lists

Although the Measurements and Channels lists are independent tool windows and thus can be positionedseparately, they are normally used in conjunction for selecting the data (creating references).

The Measurements list contains the names of all measurements available. When loading files, a nameis automatically generated for the measurement, to which the associated channels are assigned. Themeasurement's name may be formed, for example, from the file name or the name of the folder to whichit belongs; see File list options.

The names of the channels opened are adopted in the Channels list.

Channels list

The Channels list contains the names of all files currently loaded. The user can make the selection forthe data selector here. The method for choosing and numbering the channels is the same as for theMeasurements list. If multiple channels have the same name, the amount of duplicates is indicated afterthe name (in square brackets).

16.2.3.1 Numbering and Locking

Numbering for the data selection

The main task of both lists is to set the numbering (reference) of the measurements and channels. If thename of a channel or measurement is selected, the associated number in the Measurements list orChannel list is displayed in the numbering column at left (gray background).

Normally the numbering follows the current state of highlighting in the respected list, which the user canchange by means of the mouse or arrow buttons.

322


Data-Browser

The picture shows that the numbering in the list follows whichever entry's name is selected in the list.

Select multiple entries

If you wish to select and number multiple entries, you must use the keyboard. See the table "Keycombinations for making selections".

Example

Click on the entry "Sensor_X",which is thus assignedthe number 1.

Keep the "Ctrl" key pressed and click on the names "SensorX" and"SensorY" in succession. This assigns the numbers 1 and 2 to thesechannels, respectively.

Locking the numbering

The numbering can be locked. This preserves the current numbering order, even if the highlighting in thelist is subsequently changed. Locked entries are distinguished by an extra padlock symbol next to thenumber.

Locking a single entry by clicking in thenumbering column

Locking of ALL selected entries with the padlocksymbol

Unlocking numbering

To activate/deactivate the lock on an entry, left-click the mouse on the numbering column. Alternatively,use the corresponding toolbar button, which will take effect on all currently highlighted entries:

Unlocking all selected entries

323Data-Browser


16.2.3.2 Example of numbering/locking

Example

Scenario:A curve window was configured to display the 1st and 2nd channels of the 1st selected measurement:



The current measurement "MiddleCenter" contains the channels "Sensor_X", "Sensor_Y" and "Sensor_Z". In the curve window, the procedure is for the first channel (the reference channel) to besuccessively compared with each of a number of other channels.

1) Click on the entry "Sensor_X", which is thus assigned the number 1. The curve window then shows thischannel.

2) Click in the same line in the numbering column at left. The padlock symbol appears, indicating that theentry is locked.

Locking the numbering of the entry #1

3) Click on the first channel to be compared ("Sensor_Y"). Since the number 1 has already been assignedand locked, it is assigned the next free number (2), and is displayed in the curve window along with thereference channel.

324


Data-Browser

4) Highlight (by mouse click or using arrow keys) the other channels to be compared in succession. Thedisplay in the curve window changes accordingly, while the reference channel stays the same.

16.2.3.3 Sorting

In order to keep an overview of multiple entries, the lists can be sorted (either by number or name) as wellas filtered.

Measurement list sorted by number Measurement list sorted by name

16.2.3.4 Filtering

With an activated filter, there is an extra input box at the bottom edge of the list, in which you can set thefilter conditions for the names to be displayed. Then the only measurements/channels displayed are thoseadhering to the corresponding name pattern.

Measurement list unfiltered Measurement list filtered(Measurement names beginning with "Mid")

You can use the Joker characters '*' (to stand for an unknown amount of characters) and '?' (standing forexactly one character). No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase spelling.

Example

The (unfiltered) channel list contains the entries "v_01", "v_02", "v_01", "v_100", "u_02"

Filter Display

* all

325Data-Browser


V* v_01, v_02, v_100

V_?? v_01, v_02

*02 v_02, u_02

16.2.3.5 Remove measurement

To remove measurements from the list, use the corresponding toolbar buttons ("Remove selectedmeasurements" or "Remove all measurements"). Channels belonging to the respective measurementswill also be removed.

Remove highlighted measurements(here: "TopRight" and "TopLeft")

Remove all measurements(all nine measurements

16.2.3.6 Rename measurement

Right-click the mouse over a measurement's name. A context menu including the item "Renamemeasurement" appears.

Now you can directly edit the name in the Measurements list.

16.2.3.7 Key combinations for making selections

Action Effect

Clicking a node while holdingthe CTRL key pressed

Toggles the node's selected state while preserving the previousselection.

Clicking a node holding theSHIFT key pressed

Selects all nodes between the clicked node and the previouslyfocused node/nodes. The previous selection is cleared.

Pressing the SHIFT+UP/SHIFT+DOWN key combinationsrepeatedly

Enables end users to select a continuous range of nodes. Whenstarting such operations, the previous selection is cleared.

Clicking a node while holdingthe CTRL and SHIFT keyspressed

Selects the range of nodes between the one clicked and thosepreviously focused. The previous selection is preserved.

Pressing the CTRL+SHIFT+UP/CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN keycombinations

Enables end users to select a continuous range of nodes. Theprevious selection is preserved.

326


Data-Browser

16.2.3.8 Drag&Drop from the Measurements/Channels lists

The easiest way to select channels and measurements for display on the panel is to use the Drag&Droptechnique. Click the left mouse button over the object which you wish to drag and hold the mouse buttondown. Next, move the mouse to the position in the page where you wish to deposit it, and release themouse button. An example of Drag&Drop is also presented in the section Dragging a channel onto thepage.

An important advantage offered by the Data Browser is the flexible assignment of messages andchannels to the data displayed in the curve window or in other panel elements.

The Drag&Drop method simplifies two common cases in operating the program:

· fixed channel name, changing measurement name ("test series").

· the channel name and the measurement name change.

The first case is accomplished by applying Drag&Drop from positions 1, 2 or position 5.

The second case is accomplished by applying Drag&Drop from position 4 (assignment by numbers only)

Positions

There are five positions from which it is possible to apply the Drag&Drop action to objects, as shown inthe image below:

Die fünf Positionen für den Startder Drag&Drop Aktion

1: The measurement list's numbering column

2: The measurement list's name column

3: The channel name in in the measurement list

4: The numbering column in the channel list

5: The channel name in the channel list

Which channels and measurements are used depends on the selection and numbering in the lists. Howthe measurements and channels are formed depends on the position from which the Drag&Drop action is

327Data-Browser


begun.

Step by step instructions

Before applying the Drag&Drop procedure, select or respectively number the desired channels andmeasurements.

Next, select the appropriate position at which to drag the selection onto the page. The selection for theposition determines which data are displayed in the curve window or other panel elements.

Position 1 or Position 2

Each measurement selected (denoted by a colored background) in the measurement list is combinedwith the channels in the channel list which are numbered (if the measurement includes any). Theassociated name is formed from the name in the channel list (e.g. "SensorX") and the measurement'snumber (e.g. "Measurement #1").

If you start at position 1 (or position 2) in the image above, the resulting names will be as follows:

SensorZ @ Measurement #1

SensorZ @ Measurement #2

SensorX @ Measurement #1


Note that the selection of the names from the channel list only depends on the numbering and not on thecurrent selection.

Position 2 with SHIFT + Drag&Drop

At this position, additionally pressing the <SHIFT>-key causes the objects to be named differently.Specifically, the names are formed from fixed measurement names (e.g. "MiddleCenter") and fixedchannel names (e.g. "SensorX").

In the image above, if you use <SHIFT> + Drag&Drop from position 2 to the page, the following nameswill be formed:

SensorX @ MiddleCenter

SensorZ @ MiddleCenter

SensorX @ MiddleRight

SensorZ @ MiddleRight

Position 3

The channel name and the measurement name are adopted unchanged. Neither the selection ornumbering in the channel list play any role. If you click in the image above on "SensorY" in themeasurement list (position "3"), then this entry is selected. Then if you drag it to the panel, the followingname will be formed:

SensorY @ MiddleCenter

By means of key combinations, it is also possible to select and drag multiple channels. It is also possibleto combine channels from multiple measurements (select by means of <Ctrl>+click).

Position 4

Here, all channels selected in the channel list are combined with whichever measurements from theMeasurements list are numbered. The name is formed exclusively from the measurements numbers andchannel numbers. If you start at position 4 in the image above, the following names will result:



If you previously also select "SensorZ" in the Channels list using Ctrl+click, and then start at position 4 orat SensorZ's numbering, the following names will result:




328


Data-Browser


Position 5

Here, all channels selected in the channel list are combined with whichever measurements from theMeasurements list are numbered. The name is formed from the fixed channel name (e.g. "SensorX") andthe measurement number. If you start at position 5 in the image above, the following names will result:



16.2.4 Data Bindings (References)

Note

You can only use this tool window in Run Mode and not in Design Mode. If this tool window is notindicated, use the command: "Reset Layout" from the Menu: View.

Description

Panel elements such as curve window, tables and text boxes can be linked with data in Design Mode.These panel elements are displayed during execution (Run Mode).

The "Available Data" are displayed on the left side of this tool window (Data Bindings).

On the right side ("Bindings") you can see the data referenced in the active panel.

It can happen that referenced data in the panel do not exist, because they currently have a different nameor do not exist in the loaded measurements.

With this tool window you can replace the missing links with currently existing data, without the need tochange the links in Design Mode. If referenced data do not exist, a red "X" will appear in the "Status"column, as seen here:

Example

On the left side select the data to be displayed. On the right side select the desired target (for displaying inthe panel):

The picture above shows the status before updating. On the left "SensorY" "MiddleCenter" is selectedand on the right "Channell#1 @ Measurement #1". "SensorX @ MiddleCenter" is displayed.

Now click on the button in the center (magnifier symbol) or doubleclick the dataset to be displayed("SensorY" "Middle Center").

Thus the binding is updated accordingly.

329Data-Browser


The picture above shows the status after updating. In the list of Bindings (second row, second column)you see, that "SensorY @ MiddleCenter" is displayed.

Filter

Additionally you can filter the data display (filtersymbol on top of the left window). If you click this symbol,input fields will appear at the lower border for filtering of channel- and measurement names . The samewildcards are possible as described in chapter Filtering.

->

Display link of one page or of all pages

You can choose to show the bindings of the current page only, or the bindings of all pages. To do so, clickon the page symbol at the top right corner, as seen here:

16.3 Toolbox

The toolbox is only displayed when in Design mode and contains the various tools for displaying data, aswell as tools for labeling and for interactions with FAMOS sequences(variables).

Adding elements

The easiest way to add an element is by moving one from the toolbox to the page using the Drag&Droptechnique. When you release the left mouse button, the element is created in its default size and isselected. You can adjust its size and position later.

You can also add elements by selecting one of the items from the menu "Edit" -> "Insert Element".

Copy elements

Elements placed on the page can be copied by an easy method:

Click on the element you wish to copy. The element is thus selected. Then hold down the Ctrl-button. Nowyou can use the Drag&Drop technique to place a copy of the element on the page

Element properties

Depending on its type, an element may have a large number of properties. Use the the Properties windowlocated at the lower right of the standard view.

The following table indicates which properties categories are associated with which elements:

General LayoutAppearan

ceDatabindi

ngText Structure

Label X X X X X

Image X X X

Table X X X X X

330


Data-Browser

Line X X X

Pushbutton X X

Editbox (single line) X X X X

Editbox (multiline) X X X

Entering values in Run Mode

Applies to Label, Editbox (single line), Editbox (mult line), Button, Tablecell:

Elements with data bindings can be assigned values in Run Mode.

The text for these elements can not only be entered in the Property window, but also by doubleclicking onthe particular element. After doubleclicking an overlapping input field will open, where you can enter therequired text. Close the input field with the key combination <Alt>+<ENTER> or by clicking outside theinput field.

Expert Mode

In the menu "View"-> "Options", you can select the "Expert mode". This provides a display of alladjustable element properties. Otherwise, only the most important properties are displayed, in the interestof greater clarity.

Pointer

The pointer is not actually a tool, strictly speaking. The pointer allows you to select one or more elementsby clicking on them. To select multiple elements, you must additionally use the keyboard, as described inthe table "Key combinations for making selections". You can also select elements by dragging the mousepointer to capture a rectangular region inside of which all elements are then selected.

16.3.1 Curve Window

Curve window toolbox

This toolbox contains the various curve window display styles. Details on the use of these options arepresented in the documentation on the Curve Window.

331Data-Browser


16.3.2 Standard

Toolbox of standard elements

Using these options, you can fill reports with texts, pictures, and interactive elements (buttons, inputboxes).

16.3.2.1 Label

As described under Quickstart, not only permanent text can be displayed, but also the content of avariable from the FAMOS sequence associated with this panel (Databinding).

Label (example)

If you assign a permanent text to the label (in this example "Temp. (°C)"), then this text is also displayed ifyou set up a data binding with a FAMOS variable. With this procedure, the assigned text and the textresulting from the variable are linked. For the example above, if the variable takes the value "450", the

332


Data-Browser

label displays:

Temp. (°C): 450

The string set as the property "Text" when designing the label is always prefixed to the variable's value(here: "450"). If you don't wish to prefix any string, you must delete the string under (the property) "Text"(in this example "Temp. (°C)").

333Data-Browser


16.3.2.2 Image

Image (example)

You can use this element to display a picture. To do this, select the file containing the picture in theProperties window under "Appearance"/ "Image" (highlighted in the picture above). Files of a variety ofgraphics formats can be displayed. The picture can also be magnified/reduced in various ways.

334


Data-Browser

16.3.2.3 Table

Table (example)

Table objects can be used to display sequences of numbers, as well as for structuring texts easily.Therefore, a table can be considered a higher order of object, of which text is a particular subtype.

Each cell of a table possesses the same properties as a text object. Attributes such as content, font,orientation, frame and background can be defined separately for every cell.

Aside from the content of the various individual cells the distinguishing feature of a table is its dimension,i.e. the number of its columns and cells. The width of columns and the height of rows can be setarbitrarily.

The number of columns and rows determines the amount of cells. Element cells can be combined orconglomerated to larger cells.

Due to the great variety of special editing operations which can be performed on tables, they have adistinct context menu.which is accessed by right-clicking the mouse over a table object.

Bei double-clicling on a table cell, the text (Property "Text") can be entered in-place.

If you select a single cell, then the "Properties" window offers to define databinding. About databinding:see example in QuickStart and chapter Label.

335Data-Browser


16.3.2.4 Line

Line (example)

The line can have any of a variety of symbols (arrows) at each end. The line thickness is entered as anumerical value in mm (e.g. "0.25" "0.5", "1" etc.).

336


Data-Browser

16.3.2.5 Pushbutton

Pushbutton (example)

If you create a button, then the associated event is available in the main FAMOS window. You cantherefore design the sequence to react to a click on the button.

337Data-Browser


For details and examples, look in the main FAMOS window's help window, as shown in this picture:

338


Data-Browser

16.3.2.6 Editbox (single line)

Editbox (single line) with data binding

You can link the single-lined edit box with a FAMOS variable by means of the databinding. The variablealways reflects the editbox's current contents. There is no event reflecting a change of the content.

339Data-Browser


16.3.2.7 Editbox (multi line)

Editbox (multi-line)

Element for displaying and entering of multiline text.

340


Data-Browser

16.4 Databinding

The elements Label and Editbox (single line) from the Standard toolbox can each be linked to a variable.

Label can be used to display (read) a variable's actual contents.

Using the Edit box (single line), you can interactively set (write) a variable's value.

In the Properties window, you enter the variable's name as the property Variable name (group"Databinding"), as the following example illustrates for the label:

The text after the "Result" is linked with the variable "myVar"

Analogously, the enter a variable's name in the input box, whose value you wish to enter (edit) whilerunning the panel. This enables you to influence how the FAMOS sequence runs.

See Creating a sequence/ opening a panel for an example sequence which assigns a value to thevariable.

Extended Variable-Names

Instead of a fixed variable name you can also refer to the current selection of the Mmeasurements andChannels list. For that purpose there is a dropdown selection list next to the input field, which you can useto compose the extended variable name.

Choosing a fixed channel namefrom the first selected measurement

341Data-Browser


Choosing the first selected channel from measurement no. 1

Entering values in Run Mode

"Editbox (single line)" elements with data bindings can be assigned values in Run Mode.

To do so click on the element and entered the required values using the keyboard. After clicking anoverlapping input field will open, where you can enter the required text.

The value will be taken over to the bound variable after pressing the <ENTER> key.

To cancel the input press the <ESCAPE>-key. After that the element will be displayed in the normalfashion.

16.4.1 Placeholder

Supported by:

· Labels

· Tables

Placeholder identifiers are bracketed in the characters <..>

Hierarchical name structure:

<ROOTOBJECT.PROPERTY>

Purpose: easy expandability + clarity

Previously defined root IDs:

PAGE page-specific infos, e.g. page number

PANEL panel-specific infos, e.g. page number, filename...

VAR properties of the linked variables, e.g. value, units...

SYSTEM System-Infos, e.g. current time

Short Names

Placeholders which are used very frequently receive an extra (short) alias name.

These names are not case-sensitive.

Table of placeholder names

342


Data-Browser

Definition Full name Alias Updating

Page number PAGE.NUMBER PAGE upon switching to Run Mode (*)

Page number PANEL.PAGECOUNT

- upon switching to Run Mode (*)

Value of the linkedvariable

VAR.VALUE VALUE upon switching to Run Mode

Current date SYSTEM.DATE load panel, print, export, switching toRun Mode

Current time SYSTEM.TIME like SYSTEM.DATE

(*) = practically never, since not alterable in runtime mode

16.5 QuickStart

The following is a simple example for the purpose of gaining basic familiarity with the Data-Browserquickly.

16.5.1 Starting the Data-Browser

Start the Data-Browser from the main FAMOS window via the menu item Extra -> Data-Browser, or thecombination of keys "CTRL+F11" or the corresponding button in the main window's toolbar.

After starting you can decide which panel to open and wether to create a new report.

343Data-Browser


After starting the Data-Browser

For this example, please select the entry "New (Report, Portrait)".

16.5.2 Loading data

Files list

Now search in the Files list for the folder in which FAMOS was installed (typically "C:\imc"). There, openthe subfolder "Dat\Vibration" and then click on the blue arrow next to the folder "MiddleCenter".

344


Data-Browser

This opens all the channels in the folder "MiddleCenter". The measurement is automatically assigned thenumber 1 and the first channel also receives number 1, as seen in the picture below:

Files list, Measurements list, Channels listafter loading "MiddleCenter"

345Data-Browser


16.5.3 Dragging a channel onto the page

Drag&Drop from the Channels list

Now drag & drop the numbered box (the number 1 with the blue background) from the Channels list to thepage. In the picture you see that a channel name of the form "Channel #1 @ Measurement #1" is beinggenerated. You get a different result of you drag and drop the box "SensorX" with the blue background.

When you release the mouse after having dragged it, a context menu for selecting the curve windowdisplay style appears. Select "Standard":

346


Data-Browser

After dropping, a context menu appears containing entriesfor the curve window elements

347Data-Browser


16.5.4 Curve window

As you see, instead of "Channel #1 @ Measurement #1" , the assigned channel "SensorX @MiddleCenter" is displayed.

348


Data-Browser

16.5.5 Selecting other channels

Now click on the channel "SensorY" and you will see in the curve window "SensorY @ MiddleCenter"(click on the name as seen in the picture and not on the numbering column).

Click on SensorY

-> The curve window shows SensorY

Now click on the channel "SensorZ" and the curve window shows "SensorZ @ MiddleCenter".

Click on SensorZ

-> The curve window shows SensorZ

349Data-Browser


16.5.6 Adding a label/ binding to a variable

Now add a label under the curve window. To do this, drag the label from the Standard toolbox to beneaththe curve window (steps 1,2 and 3, Drag&Drop as shown by the dashed line).

Step 4: next delete the preset text "Label1" (highlight with the mouse and press Delete).

Step 5: next click in the Properties window on the box Variable name and enter "myVar" (without quotationmarks).

This binds the label to a variable named "myVar" (Databinding)

350


Data-Browser

16.5.7 Creating a sequence/ opening a panel

Next go to the main FAMOS window.

Depending on the previous setting, you may need to use the menu item "Window" -> "Load Configuration"-> "Default", in order to be able to see the window for "Files/ Plugins". There you will see for "Form1" (theform's name in the Data-Browser) the available events:

Main FAMOS windowSequence for the form "Init"

Enter the sample code shown above, for the event "Init", into the sequence. The example assigns a stringindicating the current date and time to the variable.

Now go back to the Data-Browser and close the Design mode (click on the button). You will be promptedto choose whether to save the altered panel "Panel1". Choose "Yes".

Now use the Data-Browser menu item "Panel"-> "Re-Open".

You then see the curve selected and below it the label with the date and time at which the panel wasopened:

351Data-Browser


Form with curve window and Date/Time from the FAMOS sequence

Click on the Channels list's numbering column in order to see other channels in the curve window("SensorY", "SensorZ").

This concludes our quick tour of the Data-Browser.

16.6 Menues

The following provides an overview of the menus in the FAMOS Data Browser.

The main menu contains the following entries:

Panel

Edit

Page

View

Some functions can also be called with the Toolbar.

352


Data-Browser

16.6.1 Menu: Panel

This menu contains functions for loading and saving/closing panels, as well as for printing.

New

Creates a new panel.

Open

Opens an existing panel. Select the panel from the list of files.

Re-Open

Only available in the panel's run mode.

Save

Only available in Design Mode.

Save as

Only available in Design Mode.

Save as PDF

Saves the panel currently opens fun as PDF file.

Close

Closes the panel currently open. If the panel has been edited, a dialog appears for saving or rejectingchanges.

Close All

Closes all open panels. If one or more panels was altered, a separate dialog appears for saving orrejecting the changes.

Page Setup

This function lets you set the default page layout for all newly created panels. For individual open pages,you can set the page layout separately using "Menu: Page -> Page setup" .

Print Preview

Closes the Data Browser. Dialogs for saving/rejecting changes, like for the command "Close All", appear.In conclusion, the Data Browser window is closed.

Print

353Data-Browser


Prints the currently selected panel.

Exit


Print Preview

Print Preview opens a separate window, in which various viewing options can be used (one or morepages in an overview, various zooming levels). For selecting a page, there is an input box at right andabove.

Print

Druckt das aktuell ausgewählte Panel.

Exit


16.6.2 Menu: Edit

354


Data-Browser

This menu contains functions for editing elements.

Most of the functions are only available in Design Mode.

16.6.3 Menu: Page

Note:

These functions can also be accessed via the context menu: to do this, right-click the mouse over the tabwith the page's name.

Insert Page

Adds a new page after the last page.

Import Page / Export Page

Pages can also be saved individually as a file (= exporting) or loaded from a file (= importing).

Page Setup

Report

If you have created a panel as a report (for the printout), then you will see a dialog for setting up theprintout layout (paper size, margins etc.).

Panel

If you have set up a page as a dialog (for on-screen observation), then a dialog for setting the on-screen size and the background color is shown.

More commands

The menu "Page" contains more commands:

· Export as a PDF

· Export as a graphic

· Copying to the Clipboard (only possible in the run mode)

Not in the menu

Renaming pages

Double-click on the tab with the page's name (e.g. "Page 1"). Now you can directly change the name atthis point.

Changing the page order

The arrangement (order) of pages can be rearranged by dragging and dropping the tabs.

355Data-Browser


16.6.4 Menu: View

Here you will find functions for selecting the various main window elements (File Browser, measurementslist, channel selection list, data references, Properties box).

Layout

An existing layout can be saved (Save Layout) or be loaded from a file (Load Layout).

With Reset Layout, the layout's original configuration is restored.

Options -> Display

This opens a dialog for the options.

Clicking on the button "Display" calls the dialog below:

Display options

"Automatic toolbar for curve widgets"

If this option is set, and you click on an element in the curve window, the toolbar automatically appears,and can be freely positioned in the curve window, as shown below:

356


Data-Browser

Automatic toolbar for curve widgets

16.6.5 Menu: '?'

This menu opens Online Help for Data Browser.

16.7 Toolbar

This is an overview of the toolbar buttons:

357Data-Browser


358



Application ExamplesThe following chapters contain some application examples of FAMOS.

· Low-Pass Filter, First OrderThis example shows how complex transfer functions can be analyzed in FAMOS without measureddata.

· Analysis Using the "Smo" FunctionRealize a digital smoothing filter using the "Smo" function.

· Transfer Function CalculationThe input and output data of a dynamic system are measured to determine the transfer function.

· Error Correction with a Fitted LineThe relative error for a voltage calibrator with an output voltage range of -30 V to +30 V, is determinedover the entire range.

· Correlation CoefficientThe correlation coefficient is a significant indicator for assessing the degree of linear dependencebetween signals.

· AC Power CalculationDetermines apparent power S and the reactive power Q, along with the power factor Lambda for a loadwith inductive component.

· Tolerance TestA number of transducers are sinusoidally excited and the resulting voltage is measured.

· Histogram Test for ADCThe histogram test is used to judge the quality of the AD converters implemented in the DSOs, transientrecorders and similar data-acquisition systems.

· Convolution, Digital FilterDigital filtering of a signal can be interpreted as convolution.

· Analysis Using the "Chrct" FunctionThe FAMOS function "Chrct" is available to compensate a sensor output signal using its characteristic.

· Digital FilterFiltering of waveforms with digital filters freely defined by the user with the function "DFilt".

· Report GeneratorThis example explains the design and integration of layouts using a small application

359Application Examples


17.1 Low-Pass Filter, First Order

This example shows how complex transfer functions can be analyzed in FAMOS without measured data.

A low-pass filter, first order should be calculated, where R = 300 kOhm and C = 0.33 mF.

The complex transfer function G(jw) is calculated as:

With wg = 1/RC, the following equation results:

Using a conjugated complex extension, G(jw) can also be expressed as a real and imaginary part.

The result:

Another way to express this complex function is with the magnitude and phase of the function G(jw):

The angular frequency OMEGA (=w) is to increase from 0 to 100 Hz in steps of 1 Hz. The cut-offfrequency OMEGA_G (= wg) is 10 Hz.

Step 1

Create a waveform, which increases from 0 to 100 in steps of 1.

OMEGA = Ramp(0, 1, 100)

creates a waveform of 100 values with a sample rate of 1; i.e. both the x- and the y-values range from 0 to100.

Select F4 (or click on menu option "Show" in the "Variable" menu) to display the curve.

360



Step 2

Assign the unit "1/s"

Select OMEGA in the variable list, and then menu option "Variable/Properties...". Enter the unit '1/s' in the"Y-Unit" input box.

OMEGA now appears with the desired dimensions. The x-axis does not require units, because in thisexample it merely indicates that 100 discrete values are contained in the waveform.

Step 3

Define OMEGA_G as a single value.

FAMOS can also process single values as variables. A single value variable OMEGA_G with the unit "1/s"is created using the assignment

OMEGA_G = 10 '1/s'

Step 4

Calculate the magnitude as a function of frequency according to the equation (4) :

Magn = 1 / SQRT(1 + SQR( OMEGA / OMEGA_G ))

Add the x-unit "1/s". Since magnitude represents a ratio in this example, the y-unit is not necessary.



Step 5

Calculate the phase

PHASE = - atan( OMEGA / OMEGA_G )

The phase is represented in radians. Convert to representation in degrees using the predefined constant"InDegr", located in the group "A> Constants, predefined Variables".

PHASE = PHASE * InDegr

Once the x-unit has been added, the following representation appears:

Step 6

Display phase and magnitude

Phase and magnitude can be displayed in a window. Select menu option "More waveforms" from thecontext menu in the curve window MAGN. Select the waveform PHASE in the dialog which appears.

Double-click on the x-axis in the window to set logarithmic scaling by selecting menu option "Logarithmic"under the option "Scale" in the axis-settings dialog. Set the scale to "dB". Then close the axis dialog andselect the menu option "Grid" in the "Configuration" menu. The following window appears.

362



Step 7

Create a polar plot

To create a polar plot, magnitude and phase must be transformed to a complex function, represented inmagnitude and phase or real and imaginary parts (equations (3) and (4)).

The function G(jw) is created with:

G = Compl( MAGN, PHASE )

Display the curve and select the menu option "More waveforms" from the "Configuration" menu. Select"G.m" in the left-hand list and then the option "Waveform" in the "Component" selection box.

A grid may be added to improve display.

Remarks

The number of grid lines can be set using menu option "Display" in the "Configuration" menu.

To change the colors, use the menu item "Options: Colors".

Alternative methods of calculation

The complex transfer function G(jw) can also be calculated directly According to the equation (1) thefollowing is valid:



G = 1 / Compl( 1, OMEGA / OMEGA_G)

The function "Compl" combines both transferred parameters to form one complex waveform in the form"Real- and Imaginary part", as long as both parameters have the same unit. In this case, neitherparameter has a unit. The single value 1 is expanded automatically to a complete real part.

When G is display using the F4 key, the real part of G appears.

You can also use the menu option "More waveforms" in the curve window's context menu to display theimaginary part G.I as well, resulting in the graph above.

364



17.2 Analysis Using the "Smo" Function

The function "Smo" (FAMOS Function Reference) realizes a digital smoothing filter. The filtercharacteristic is investigated in depth in this analysis.

Quantities of interest are for cut-off frequency, transfer function, filter order, step-function response andunit impulse response.

Step 1

A test waveform with the highest possible constant amplitude spectrum is created for use as a stimulusfor the filter.

White noise fulfills this condition, as does a simple, short impulse. The waveform should have a constantvalue of zero, but should contain an impulse with height 1 at the middle. The waveform length is set to1024, so that an FFT can be performed later.

Execute the following operations in succession:

Impulse = Set( Ramp( 0, 1e-3, 1024)*0 , 0.512, 1)xUnit Impulse s

A sampling time of 1 ms is selected.

Select F4 to show the waveform Impulse.

Step 2

Filter the created test waveform.

The waveform duration is greater than 1s, so a filter time of 200 ms can be selected.

Filt = Smo( Impulse, 0.2's')

Select F4 to show this waveform.

Step 3



The impulse response of a filter is the reaction of a filter to a unit impulse at t = 0 . Because the impulse inthe test waveform occurs later, the impulse response must be shifted in the x-direction by this timedifference.

The following formula yields the impulse response:

ImpResp = Xoff( Filt, -0.512 's')

The impulse response is symmetrical around the axis t = 0.

Step 4

The step response of a filter is the reaction of a filter to the unit step at t = 0 . It can be calculated as theintegral of the impulse response. The unit should be corrected.

StepResp = Int( ImpResp ) / 1 's'

The step response is formed from parabolic parts of second order.

Step 5

The transfer function of the filter is determined by dividing the spectra of the filtered and the original testwaveform.

First open the dialog under "Extra / Options / Functions".

Here, set the FFT window function to "Rectangular". In the ideal case here, - the signal length is a powerof two - no other window functions need to be selected. By selecting another window function, the resultwould be distorted slightly.

Transfer = FFT(Filt) / FFT(Impulse)

Display the transfer function by pressing function key F4. The result appears to be almost zero, sinceinitially only the magnitude of the transfer function is represented.

Select a double logarithmic representation for the transfer function.

· First select the menu item "Configuration: Axes..." and then select the item "Transfer.M" in the axes list.Set the "Scale" option to "dB".

366



· Then select the x-axis in the axes list, and then under "Scale" the "Logarithmic" representation. Closethe dialog box.

· Then select menu item "Configuration: Grid" to overlay the curve with a grid.

Step 6

Enlarge the window displaying the magnitude of the transfer function. Select "Measure" from the menu"Edit" in the curve window. A measurement value window with a crosshair appears.

Drag the crosshairs in the asymptotically decreasing range of the transfer function (in the right-hand curvesection), using the left mouse button. Position the crosshairs on two maxima located somewhat apart, andthen select "Slope per decade" from the lower list box. The measurement value window now indicates aslope of approximately -40dB/decade. Because the transfer function with filter order decreases at 20dB/decade, the filter order must be 2.



Step 7

To determine the cut-off frequency of the filter, drag one crosshair to the left until the measurementwindow displays 3dB. The corresponding frequency (x-value) can be read in the measurement window.

Execute the following operations to automatically determine the cut-off frequency:

CuttoffFr = Pos( Transfer.M, idB(-3) )

Display this single value by pressing F4; the cut-off frequency lies at 3.2 Hz. The function "idB" convertsdecibel to linear values, since the magnitude of the spectrum 'Transfer.M' is in linear form. The "Pos"function determines the first occurrence of a value in a waveform.

Step 8

To view the phase of the transfer function alone in a window,

· display the entries "Transfer.M" and "Transfer.P" in the variable list by selecting "Show components".

· Select "Transfer.P" (phase) and press F4.

Note that the phase has only values of 0 or 360 degrees. Both values have the same meaning. Use thefollowing operation to set the phases at 360 degrees to phases of zero:

Transfer.P = mod ( Transfer.P, 359.98 )

A phase of zero can be expected only if there were no inaccuracies in calculation.

368



Remarks

The transfer function can also be calculated directly as spectrum of the impulse response.

This series of operations is available as the sequence TESTSMO.



17.3 Transfer Function Calculation

The input and output data Ue(t) and Ua(t) of a dynamic system are measured to determine the transferfunction. The input and output data are measured currents and are called "U_IN" and "U_OUT"respectively. Both "u_out.dat" and "u_in.dat" are found in FAMOS sample data files.

The transfer function G(jw) of this system can be expressed in the frequency domain by

G(jw) = Uout(jw)/Uin(jw)

The spectra Uout(jw) and Uin(jw) can be calculated from the time signals uout(t) and uin(t) using Fouriertransformation.

ua_spec = FFT(u_out)ue_spec = FFT(u_in)

Magnitude and phase of the transfer function then result from:

g_spec = ua_spec / ue_spec

The result g_spec is a complex function and represents G(jw).

Use the formula:

g_spec = Pol( Rect(g_spec))

to obtain the phase between -180° and +180°.

If g_spec is represented in dB and the frequency axis is displayed logarithmically, the following graphresults:

370



Using inverse FFT, the weighting function g(t) can be represented in the time range:

g = iFFT (g_spec)

The dialog under "Extra / Options / Functions" contains a selection of other window functions. Windowfunctions can be used to process waveforms to eliminate Steps at the beginning and end of a waveform,which arise from periodic concatenation.

In the following example, the rectangular window was selected. The range 0..0.3 ms is displayed in thecurve window.



17.4 Error Correction with a Fitted Line

The relative error for a voltage calibrator with an output voltage range of -30 V to +30 V, is determinedover the entire range. The error is expressed in percent.

This systematic measurement error can be corrected using a correction table or a mathematicaldescription of the measurement curve. A straight line is fitted between the data points so that the meansquare distance of the measurement curve to the regression lines is minimal. The waveform "calib.dat" isfound in the example files. The required linear fit can be determined using the following formula:

line = LFit(calib)

In addition to the graphic display of the linear fit, illustrated in the graph with the measurement curve,FAMOS also supplies the determined linear fit equation.

In this case, the equation is:

f(x) = - 8.028E-5[1/V].x - 0.00139[%]

This equation can be entered to the calibrator directly after measurement for correction of measurementresults.

For an ideal comparison of the two curves in the same window, the second curve (right or second y-axis)is scaled "Like previous axis".

372



17.5 Correlation Coefficient

The correlation coefficient is a significant indicator for assessing the degree of linear dependencebetween signals. It provides a quantitative description of the similarity of two signals.

The correlation coefficient is a normalized quantity:

· A value of +1 means complete dependence between the signals, i.e. they are proportional toeach other and their signs are always the same.

· A value of -1 indicates a completely inverse dependency, i.e. the signals are proportional, buttheir signs differ.

The correlation coefficient is defined as follows:

c = (Suivi) / (Suiui Svivi)0.5Here the ui values represent numeric values of one waveform, the vi values represent the values of

the other waveform. To calculate the correlation coefficient c, several sums of the products of all elementsof the waveforms u and v are calculated. It is important that neither u nor v have a DC offset! If they do,subtract this value before computing the correlation coefficient!

The SO2-concentration of the air was measured over a long period of time. These measurement valuesmake up one waveform. During the same period of time, the SO2-concentration was predicted usingmathematical models. These values make up the second waveform.

The reliability of the prediction methods are to be evaluated. A value of 0 means that both signals arestatistically independent of each other on average.

In the present example, a large correlation coefficient (e.g. > 0.6) would indicate a successful prediction. Avery small value (e.g. < -0.6) means that the prediction was the opposite of the measurement.

Step 1

The two waveforms are called "SO2" and "Predict".

To compute the correlation coefficient, a number of summations must be made of all values in awaveform. The integral function "Int" can be used to add values if the sampling time of the waveforms is1.

In the first step, two temporary waveforms are created with a sampling time of 1 and the mean value



subtracted

Execute both of the following operations in succession:

u = Xdel(SO2 - Mean(SO2) ,1 )v = Xdel(Predict - Mean(Predict),1 )

Step 2

According to the equation for the correlation coefficient, the values of waveforms u and v are multipliedand then added together with the function "Int". The end value of the integrals is the sum.

Coef = Value( Int ( u * v), 1E20) ) / Sqrt( Value( Int(u * u), 1E20) * Value( Int ( v * v), 1E20) )

The end value is always returned by the function "Value" if its second parameter is set to a sufficientlylarge value (e.g. 1020 ).

Note that the required sums can also be determined by multiplying mean values by the waveform lengths.

Step 3

The temporary waveforms "u" and "v" can now be deleted from the variable list. Display the correlationcoefficient.

Execute the following three operations in succession:

Delete uDelete vShow Coef

As an alternative to these operations, select the corresponding options in the "Variable" menu.

Automatic calculation

The calculation of the correlation coefficient is saved in the sequence "CorrCoef", which transfers threeparameters when the sequence is started:

Sequence CorrCoef Coef SO2 Predict

The sequence is:

x1_ = Xdel( PA2 - Mean( PA2 ), 1) x2_ = Xdel( PA3 - Mean( PA3 ), 1) PA1 = Value( Int(x1_* x2_), 1E20) / Sqrt(Value(Int(x1_* x1_), 1E20) * Value (Int (x2_* x2_), 1E20)) Delete x1_ Delete x2_ Show PA1

Sequence execution is equivalent to the three steps above.

Remarks

The correlation coefficient can also be determined with the "CCF" function. Note that for CCF,

· the waveforms must have no DC offset

· the waveform lengths must be equal to a power of two or they will automatically be truncated bythe CCF function.

The first value of the cross-correlation function is the correlation coefficient.

However, calculation using CCF is not recommended, since it takes significantly more time and extremelylong waveforms cannot be processed with the CCF function.

374



17.6 AC Power Calculation

CURRENT and VOLTAGE are true power P, apparent power S and the reactive power Q, along with thepower factor Lambda.

These quantities are related to each as follows:

The instantaneous power is the product of voltage and current at any instant of time

p(t) = u(t) . i(t)The average mean value of the instantaneous power is the true power P:

The true power is the power which is converted to heat in an ohmic resistor.

The product of the true RMS of the voltage and the true RMS of the current is called apparent power S

S = U . I

The reactive power is defined as:

Q = Root ( S2 - P2 )

The power factor Lambda is defined as the ratio of true power to apparent power:

Lambda = P / S

Next, load the FAMOS example waveforms current and voltage and display them in curve windows:

These waveforms were measured on 50 Hz mains. Both of these are periodic quantities which appear tobe roughly sinusoidal. The power can only be computed over an integer multiple of periods. In thisexample, the power is to be computed over four periods. Use the "Cut" function to extract the signalsections over four periods (4 x 20 ms = 80 ms = 0.080 s):

CURRENT = Cut( CURRENT , 0's', 0.08's')VOLTAGE = Cut( VOLTAGE, 0's', 0.08's')

The cut sections are as follows:



It is also possible to cut a section out of a curve usng the measurement cursors. Select the beginning andend of the curve using the cursors and then choose "Export curve section". Note that this method is not asprecise as using the "Cut" function.

The actual power P is computed as the mean value of the product over an integer multiple of the period.Since we have used 4 periods, the true power can be computed as follows:

P = Mean(CURRENT * VOLTAGE)

The other quantities can be computed from:

S = RMS(CURRENT) * RMS(VOLTAGE)yUnit S VAQ = Sqrt(S * S - P * P)yUnit Q VALambda = P / S

The units for true power are Watts (W). The units for reactive and apparent power are VAR (Volt-Ampere-Reactive) and VA (Volt-Ampere), respectively.

376



17.7 Tolerance Test

A number of transducers are sinusoidally excited and the resulting voltage is measured. This voltage is tobe used to evaluate the transducers.

The following procedure should be used:

· The voltage generated by the transducers follows a curve with positive and negative deviationsfrom the ideal. Tolerance bands are positioned around the ideal curve.

· As long as the measured voltages stay within these tolerance limits, a transducer is judgedacceptable. However, when the voltages leave the tolerance band, the transducer fails thequality control test.

The ideal voltage curve is created as a waveform with a sampling rate of 20ms - identical to themeasurement:

SINE = 3 'V' * sin( Ramp(0, 20E-6, 403) * 2340)xUnit SINE s

The waveforms to be analyzed are called:

SINTEST1.DATSINTEST2.DATSINTEST3.DATSINTEST4.DATSINTEST5.DAT

The upper and lower limits of the tolerance bands result from a predefined tolerance:

Tol = 0.8 'V'LowLim = SINE - TolUpLim = SINE + Tol

To determine whether the signal leaves the tolerance band, the temporary variables are calculatedTooLarge and TooSmall.

Load SINTEST1TooLarge = Max (SINTEST1 - UpLim)TooSmall = Max (LowLim - SINTEST1)

When the variables TooLarge and TooSmall are greater than zero, the tolerance band was left. This canbe formulated as a condition in a sequence:

If TooLarge OR TooSmall Show SINTEST1End

The condition TooLarge > 0 is checked in the first line. If the condition is true, the operations between the"If" command and the "End" command are executed. In this sequence, the waveform is only displayed



when the condition is true.

The sequence for the condition TooSmall > 0 is analogous. Note: The SINTEST1 in the sample files lieswithin the tolerance band and thus will not be displayed.

A general sequence is to be created which can be used to check for compliance with tolerance bands.

A sequence with parameters is used so that the names of the files to be tested and the tolerance banditself can be specified for each sequence call. This sequence can then be used to test for varioustolerance band widths for various waveforms.

The parameters of this sequence are:

PA1 waveform to be testedPA2 tolerancePA3 reference waveform

First the waveform to be tested, PA1, is loaded, and the variables TooSmall and TooLarge are calculatedusing the tolerance, P2 and the ideal reference waveform:

Load PA1TooLarge = Max( PA1 - ( PA3 + PA2 ))TooSmall = Max(( PA3 - PA2 ) - PA1 )

The following lines calculate a variable equal to 1 when the waveform leaves the tolerance band, andotherwise has a value of 0:

Beyond = 0If TooLarge OR TooSmall Beyond = 1End

The sequence will check whether the variable "Beyond" is set; if so, the waveform PA1 saves the data ofthe failed test in the directory currently selected for storing. The directory for storing files should thereforenot be the same as the directory for loading files. Use the "Directories..." index card in the "Options"menu. Then the waveform with the unsatisfactory data is assigned to the variable 'Bad' and displayed:

If Beyond ; -- Error, so save and display Save PA1 Bad = PA1 Show BadEnd

Finally the temporary variables created only for use in this sequence are deleted from the variable list:

Delete P1Delete TooLargeDelete TooSmallDelete Beyond

The entire sequence text (under the name "Toltest.seq") is available in the sample sequence folder:

; -- Sequence TOLTEST; -- Determines, whether a waveform lies; -- within a tolerance band; --; -- Is called from the TOLERANCE sequence; -- with three parameters; -- Saves all unsatisfactory waveforms; --; -- PA1 : waveform to be tested; -- PA2 : tolerance; -- PA3 : reference waveform; --Load PA1TooLarge = Max( PA1 - ( PA3 + PA2 ))TooSmall = Max(( PA3 - PA2 ) - PA1 )Beyond = 0If TooLarge OR ToSmall Beyond = 1

378



End ; -- Error, so save and display Save PA1 Bad = PA1 Show BadEndDelete PA1Delete TooLargeDelete TooSmallDelete Beyond

Now the sequence can be called. Execute the following operations, which in turn are also saved assequence:

...; -- Creates a reference waveform and checks; -- a series of waveforms for compliance to a; -- tolerance band.; --SINE = 3 'V' * sin ( Ramp (0, 2e-5, 403) * 2340)xUnit SINE sTol = 0.8 'V'Sequence toltest sintest* Tol SINE...

The sequence is available under the name TOLERANCE.

The sequence TOLTEST can be called with the "Sequence" command, followed by the name of thesequence to be executed. Then the parameters for the function call are specified.

The formal parameters of the sequence ( PA1 , PA2 and PA3 ) are replaced by SINTEST*, TOL andSINE when the function is called.

Use the input editor box to enter the commands. The '*' character is used to process all files whosenames begin with SINTEST, one after the other. The sequence will be called automatically for every filewhich fulfills the condition.

To solve the sample problem, perform the following:

Set the directory for saving files to a directory other than the one for loading files.

Enter the command 'Sequence TOLERANCE'.

The first five test files are checked automatically. Two of them do not meet the tolerance conditions andare stored in the specified directory.

17.8 Histogram Test for ADC

The histogram test is used to judge the quality of the AD converters implemented in the DSOs, transientrecorders and similar data-acquisition systems. This test determines the existence of preferred codes andmissing codes.

For a known function (e.g. sine function), the probability density function is specified. This indicates whichcodes will occur and how often.

For a sinusoidal input quantity, the probability density p(u) at a maximum value û is equal to:

p(u) = 1 / ( p . ( û2 - u2 ) 0.5 )Discrete measurement values, as occurring in a transitional recorder, can be characterized by histograms.



Histogram of an ideal 8 bit AD-converter

This illustration shows the relative frequency of occurrence for each of the 256 code bins of an 8 bitdevice.

"Missing Codes" are indicated by an empty code bin in the histogram.

One of the most important features in the histogram test is the determination of differential non-linearity.

This is determined by the ratio of the events occurring within a code bin to the expected number ofoccurrences in an ideal system:

DN..differential non-linearity.

Pideal can be measured for each code; Pideal is derived theoretically from the integral of the probabilitydensity:

The number of code bins for a system with n bits is 2n, and the class width can be selected as 2û/2n .The voltage uc is expressed by:

uc = c . class width - û

Thus Pideal (c) becomes:

The number of samples to be recorded depends on the resolution of the converter used and on thestatistical accuracy required. The sequence ADCDISTR.SEQ can be used to calculate these formulas.The sequence looks like this:

c = Ramp (0, 1, PA1 )Distrib = 1/pi*(asin((k+-( PA1 /2-1 ) )/( PA1 /2)) -asin((k-( PA1 /2))/( PA1 /2)))xUnit Distrib "Codes"Delete kShow Distrib

This sequence has a parameter which designated the number of codes which occur, e.g. 256 codes for

380



an 8 bit AD-converter. The sequence is called as follows:

Sequ ADCDistr 256

Once this command is entered in the editor box and executed, the variable 'Distrib' is calculated.

This variable represents the ideal distribution Pideal(c) . It shows the values in the various code bins asrelative values. This means that the sum of the values in all classes would be one. The sum can becalculated according to

Sum = Mean(Distrib) * Leng?(Distrib)Example: n = 3; k = 0, 1, ..., 7

For the edges c = 0 and 7:

Execute the sequence ADCDISTR.SEQ , for this example by entering the following line in the editor box:

sequ ADCDISTR 8

If 10000 samples of a sine function were recorded, 2301 samples should occur in each of the classes 0and 7 for an ideal ADU with negligible differential non-linearity.

Multiply the waveform DISTRIB by 10000:

Distrib = 10000 * Distrib

Double-click on the y-axis and select the option "Bar" under the "Sample" menu.

Distribution of a system under test

To determine the differential non-linearity of the measurement system, data recorded with the systemunder test are required. A high-quality sine generator must be available.

Use a low-pass filter between the generator and the measurement system if necessary. Set the generatorso that the AD converter can operate over its full range.

Record as many finely-sampled periods of the sine wave as possible with the system to be tested. Recordsubstantially more values than the AD converter has codes, e.g. at least 10000 values for an 8 bit ADconverter with 256 code bins.

Save the recorded test data and load them into FAMOS. Cut an integer number of periods from thewaveform, (see also the 'AC power calculation' section in this chapter). If no waveform is recorded, usethe predefined test waveform ADSINE. In the case of the waveform ADSINE, over 10000 values weresampled over several periods:



To calculate the differential non-linearity, the distribution function is executed first:

OK = Histo(ADSINE*(256/20)+128,1,0)/Leng?(ADSINE)xUnit OK "Codes"

Here OK is the normalized distribution of the converter to be tested.

The waveform ADSINE, ranging from -10 V .. 10 V, is transformed to the range of the code bins bymultiplying by 256 (number of bins), dividing by 20 (span) and then adding 128 (to eliminate negativevalues). Another option is to use the "Scale" function to generate an appropriate value range. The middleparameter of the histogram function is the width of a code bin set to a value of one. The number of codebins is to be determined automatically, so the third parameter of the histogram function is set to zero.Alternatively, a fixed number of 256 code bins could be specified.

Finally, the histogram is normalized to the length of the sinusoidal test waveform to allow directcomparison of the histogram with the theoretical distribution.

The x-unit is then adapted and the following operations are used to calculate the differential non-linearity:

OK = Cut( OK, 0, 255 )Sequ ADCDistr 256DiffNLin= OK / Distrib - 1

To divide both histograms meaningfully, they must be defined fir the same x-range. Use the "Cut" functionto select only that part of the test histogram which corresponds to the ideal distribution waveform.

Only the best converters have a differential non-linearity significantly less than 1 LSB.

382



17.9 Convolution, Digital Filter

Digital filtering of a signal can be interpreted as convolution. Convolution in the time domain indicates amultiplication in the frequency range. The "FFT" (FAMOS Function Reference) function can be used totransform a waveform to the frequency domain; use the "iFFT" (FAMOS Function Reference) inversefunction to transform the waveform back to the time domain.

This example uses the waveform SQUARE. The waveform has a length of 1024 and contains severalperiods of a rectangular signal. If the length of the waveform is not a power of two, use the function"Red2" to change it to a power of two.

The waveform should be filtered with a first order low-pass filter. The weighting function of this filtershould be defined with the following equations:

WEIGHT = exp( -Ramp(0, 1.8e-5, 1024) *2000)WEIGHT = WEIGHT / Mean (WEIGHT)xUnit WEIGHT s

Convolution of the waveforms SQUARE aand WEIGHT yields the filtered waveform FILTERED after thefollowing equation:

FILTERED = IFFT(FFT (SQUARE) * FFT(WEIGHT) ) .

Note that the rectangular window must be set for FFT (see the dialog "Options/ Functions..").



By changing the weighting function, the filter effect can be altered. A low-pass with a higher cut-offfrequency (producing less filtering) results when the reference value in the e-function is set smaller, forexample

WEIGHT = exp( -Ramp(0, 1.8e-5, 1024) * 5000)WEIGHT = WEIGHT / Mean(WEIGHT)xUnit WEIGHT s

Note that the weighting function is normalized to produce a mean value of one. This prevents changes inthe mean value of the signal during filtering.

384



17.10 Analysis Using the "Chrct" Function

Physical measurement quantities cannot usually be directly measured. Such quantities (e.g. acceleration,displacement, etc.) they are converted to an electrical quantity (e.g. voltage, charge, etc.) using a sensorof some type. These very often have non-linear measurement "characteristics", i.e. the electrical outputsignal is not transformed one-to-one from the input signal. The FAMOS function "Chrct" (FAMOSFunction Reference) is available to compensate a sensor output signal using its characteristic. To correcta waveform, first the sensor characteristic has to be known. This can be defined either mathematically orentered directly into FAMOS. It is assumed that the function can be described by a relatively simple curve.For example, a characteristic could be defined as follows:

Half = Ramp( 0, 0.01, 1001) * 1'A'xUnit Half AHalf = Cut( Half, -10, 20)

In this example, we are simulating the characteristic of a typical diode to illustrate usage of the "Chrct"function.

We now want to apply this characteristic to the FAMOS example waveform adsine. This waveformshould first be loaded and scaled:

Load adsinexUnit adsine syUnit adsine AShow adsine

Now the waveform can be processed using the characteristic.

Correct = Chrct( ADSINE, Half)

The negative half-waves were rectified to simulate a typical diode charcteristic (rectifier).



Values which lie between individual points of the characteristic waveform always occur during correction.In this case, the "Chrct" function automatically linear-interpolates between the relevant characteristicpoints. For extremely non-linear characteristic curves, the error can be reduced significantly by having asmany points in the characteristic file as possible. The maximum length of a characteristic file is 16384points.

386



17.11 Digital Filter

The FAMOS filter function "DFilt" (FAMOS Functionreference) allows filtering of waveforms with digitalfilters freely defined by the user.

The "DFilt" function expects a waveform to be filtered and a coefficient vector. The coefficient vector mustconsist of a equal number of numerator and denominator coefficients. Any unnecessary coefficients mustbe set to zero. Note that first the denominator and then the numerator coefficients are expected. In thefollowing, a few simple filters are demonstrated along with their results. First a step function is to becreated:

Step = Ramp( 0, 1, 51) * 0Step2 = Step + 1Step = Join( Step, Step2)Step = Join( Step, Step2)Delete Step2Show Step

The step function will now be processed by various filters. Three coefficient vectors are created for thispurpose. Enter the vectors using the Waveform Editor or use the following formulas:

a)ParamT = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0ParamT[1] = 1ParamT[2] = -0.9ParamT[3] = 0ParamT[4] = 0.1b)ParamI = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0ParamI[1] = 1ParamI[2] = -1ParamI[3] = 0ParamI[4] = 1c)ParamM = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0ParamM[1] = 2ParamM[2] = 0ParamM[3] = 1ParamM[4] = 1

These parameters define a low-pass digital filter, an integrator and a simple averaging section, accordingto the definition of the "DFilt" function.

These filters can be applied to the variable Step. The results are displayed in a curve window.

Lowpass = DFilt( Step, ParamT)Integrat = DFilt( Step, ParamI)Mean_ = DFilt( Step, ParamM)



All filters are first-order filters. It is apparent that averaging occurs over just two values, and that thefiltered waveform follows the variable Step very quickly.

The filter coefficients of a low-pass filter can also be displayed as follows (from a) ):

This is a causal filter without inverse amplification, where the input values u are only slightly weighted. Usea z-transformation to obtain information about the damping behavior. The maximum damping isdetermined from the following equation:

If the value z = -1 (unit circle), the maximum damping is set to:

For the averaging filter section used here (coefficient waveform c), only the evaluation of the input valuesis of interest. This is a sliding averaging over two values:

388



The integration waveform (coefficient b) consists of the following:

Reference

Further evaluation options, for example frequency analysis, are found in this chapter in the sectionAnalysis Using the 'Smo' Function.

In many cases, filter coefficients are taken from tables according to the requirements for the filter. Hereare a few examples based on

The FAMOS example waveform slope can used as test waveform. The following command is used toreduce the sampling frequency to 10 kHz.

Slope = xDel( Slope, 0.0001)

For a Chebychev low-pass filter of second order, with 3 dB ripple and a cut-off frequency fc= 100 Hz, thecoefficients of the following equation result:

Transformation into the form (5) required by the "DFilt" function yields:

The coefficient waveform has been determined.

ParamT = Ramp( 0, 1e-4, 6) * 0ParamT[1] = 1ParamT[2] = -1.937ParamT[3] = 0.94ParamT[4] = 6.923e-4ParamT[5] = 2*6.923e-4ParamT[6] = 6.923e-4

Now the waveform "SLOPE" has been filtered and can be displayed together with "FiltSlope".

FiltSlope = DFilt( Slope, ParamT )



It is more relevant to observe the spectra of these waveforms in double logarithmic representation. Setthe window function 'Blackman-Harris' under "Extra/ Options/ Functions", deactivate the option "Expandwith zeros" and execute the following operations:

SSlope = Spec( Slope )SFiltSlope = Spec( FiltSlope)

The low-pass character of the filter is quite apparent.

To determine the transfer function of the filter, it is excited with the unit pulse:

EImpuls = Ramp( 0, 1e-4, 1024) * 0Eimpuls[1] = 1G = 1024 * FFT( Dfilt( EImpuls, ParamT )

Select window function "Rectangle".

Measure the 3 dB frequency by selecting menu option "Edit/ Measure", placing the left crosshair on theleft range of the transfer function and then moving the right crosshair until "yr-yl" -3dB. Read the frequency

390



listed at "xr". It is approximately 100Hz.

Now select "Slope per decade" instead of "yr-yl" and shift both crosshairs to the decreasing part of thetransfer function. The result is approximately 40 dB per decade, due to the filter order (20 dB / order).

The damping of approximately 0.927 in the pass range depends on the selected filter coefficient and canbe confirmed by calculation.

By setting the selected coefficients (5) and setting z = 1 (unit circle), the same portion becomes:

The slight deviation between the measured and calculated values is due to the limiting of the pulseresponse.

Finally, a further example with specified coefficients should be displayed.

A band-pass filter with a resonant frequency fr = 1 kHz is to be generated. A quality of 100 is required.The coefficient waveforms consists of the following values:

Calculation into the form (5) required by the "DFilt" function yields:

The coefficient waveform is initialized as follows.

ParamB = Ramp ( 0, 1, 6) * 0ParamB[1] = 1ParamB[2] = -1.572ParamB[3] = 0.9429ParamB[4] = 2.855e-2ParamB[5] = 0ParamB[6] = -2.855e-2

The Waveform Editor can also be used to create coefficient waveforms.

Filter the waveform "SLOPE" and calculate the spectrum of the filtered waveform by using the followingoperations:

FiltSlope = DFilt( Slope, ParamB )SFiltSlope = Spec( FiltSlope )

The following curve is the result in double logarithmic display (y-axis in dB):



The transfer function shows the filter behavior more clearly.

G = FFT( FiltSlope) / FFT( Slope)

392



17.12 Report Generator

The following section explains the design and integration of layouts using a small application.

Step 1: Create Layout

The menu option "Report Generator" in the "Extra" menu is available for creating and processing printlayouts. Use this option to start the imc-Report Generator.

FAMOS: Report Generator

Reference

Manual 'Report Generator'

The document should contain a date, a value table and a curve display. Select "Text" in the "Object"menu. Press and hold down the left mouse button to change the shape of the range in which the dateshould be entered in the layout. After the mouse button has been released, a dialog appears for definingthe text object.

Enter the text "Date" and the place holder "#d", which will be replaced by the current date when thedocument is generated.



Select "Title" in the "Options" menu and enter "Date" in the input box which appears. In subsequentremote-controlled operations the object will be identified by this name. Define the text font in the "Options/Font" filecard; the size should be approximately 24.

Close the dialog with "OK".

Now the value table will be created. Select "Object/ Table" and place the table in the upper right part ofthe working area.

A dialog for designing the table object promptly appears. Enter "2" as the number of columns and "6" forthe number of rows in our example.

Now access the filecard "Font" and enter a size of approx. 24. On the filecard "Number", enter "Floatingpoint" for the numerical notation and "1" for the decimal places. These settings govern the display ofnumerical values which have been transferred.

394



Now enter an arbitrary name for the table, by which it can later be identified, on the "Title" filecard. For thepurposes of this exercise we choose "Table". On the filecard text enter an arbitrary text, say, "0.0". Thissimply serves as an aid in estimating the row height needed. Close the dialog with <OK>.

Now correct the row-height to provide sufficient room for the text to appear in full in the cells. To do this,first make the table object the current selection by clicking on it (black squares then appear at the cornersand midpoints of its frame), then left-click the mouse on the bottom edge and pull it downward, until thetext is readily visible.

Now the text needs to be centered within the cells; also, a heading for the table is lacking.

Double-click on the table object to call the familiar properties dialog and access the filecard "Alignment".Activate the option "Centered" under "Horizontal" and close the dialog with <OK>.

To create a heading for the table object first click on it to make it the current selection, then double-clickon the upper left cell to "mark" it. The cell appears in color-negative (highlighted) and the properties dialogreappears. Now, however, settings made in this dialog will not affect the table as a whole, but pertainrather to the selected cell.

Access filecard "Text" and enter "Real Part". Now press the screen button which features a right-pointingarrow. This causes the upper right cell to be marked. Enter "Imaginary Part" as the text here and close thedialog with <OK>.



Finally, we wish to give the table headers a gray background. To do this, mark the two top cells and againaccess the dialog "Edit / Properties". On the filecard "Frame" a color list is available under "Pattern", forselecting the filling color.

A curve window with a frame should be inserted below the table by selecting menu options "Object /Curve" and "Frame".

Assign the title "Curve1" to the curve window using the dialog called by menu item "Edit / Properties". Onthe filecard "Position" activate the option "Relative to curve object frame".

The following layout is thus created:

Now save the document under the name "Porsche1" by selecting menu option "File / Save as...". Closethe Report Generator.

Step 2: Update layout with current values and print

A report is to be printed out based on the waveform "Porsche.dat" and using the layout template createdabove. The display of the curve will proceed according to the tutorial curve configuration "Porsche.ccv"which is included with FAMOS.

You now have two principal choices for how to furnish the report template with the curve graph and

396



numerical values belonging to the "Porsche" waveform.

You can either perform the updating of the report manual, using Drag&Drop, or use the remote controlfunctions for the curve window and the Report Generator. The latter method is more sensible wheneveryou have a recurring documentation procedure which can be automated by writing a sequence.

Updating with Remote Control Functions

In order to remotely control the curve window and the Report Generator, the Curve Kit and the ReportGenerator Kit must both be installed in FAMOS. Their presence is indicated by the accessibility of thesubmenus "Curve" and "Report Generator" in the "Kit" menu in FAMOS. If these aren't present, see thechapter 'Functions', section 'imc Kits' for more information about registering the necessary supplementallibraries.

First load the waveform:

LOAD porsche.dat

The waveform is then displayed, employing the desired configuration.

CvConfig ( Porsche, "Porsche.ccv" )

Now the Report Generator is started and the previously created and saved layout is loaded.

RgDocOpen("Porsche1", 0)

Place holders used in creating the layout are now replaced by values. First the date should be inserted.The place holder #d for date in the text object "Date" is updated the first time data are transferred to theobject..

RgTextSetData( "Date", 0, 0)

Values are added to the table using the following operations:

RgTableSetColumn( "Table",1,2,porsche.r,0)RgTableSetColumn( "Table",2,2,porsche.i,0)

In each column, starting from the second row and continuing to the end of the table, the values of thespecified data set are transferred, in this case, the first five.

Finally, the curve displayed in the curve window "porsche" is entered in the layout.

RgCurveSet( "Curve1",porsche,0)

To view the layout, double-click on the Report Generator icon placed automatically at the bottom of thescreen.



You can now use:

RgDocPrint(0 )

to print out the report for the "Porsche" waveform.

It would make sense to assemble the above series of commands to a sequence. By using formalparameters, this sequence can be employed on any waveform.

The call:

SEQUENCE DSHEET.SEQ AUTO2.DAT

would, for example, load the data set "auto2.dat", display it, transfer it into the report template whosedesigning was demonstrated above, and finally print it out.

Remarks

The series of commands used here is similar to the sequence "Dsheet.seq" included in FAMOS.

Manual Update via Drag & Drop

Load the waveform "Porsche.dat" into FAMOS using menu item "File/ Load".

Next, display the waveform using "Variable/ Show". Use the menu command "<> / Load" at the curvewindow and select the configuration "Porsche.ccv".

Start the Report Generator, and load the report document designed above using the command "File/

398



Open".

Double-click on the curve object in the document and then on the curve window. This transfers the curvegraph.

If the FAMOS variables list doesn't contain the individual components of Porsche (Porsche.R. Porsche.I),select "Show Components" from the context menu (accessed by right-clicking in the variables list).

Then select (highlight) both components. Left-click the mouse over the leftmost third of the entry in thevariables list (mouse pointer changes into a hand-cursor), and move the mouse while keeping its button

pressed to the 2nd cell in the 1st column of the table object, then release the mouse button.

By the same method the "date" place holder can be updated; any arbitrary variable can be dragged anddropped onto this object.

Finally, use menu item "File / Print" in the Report Generator.

399Appendix


Appendix

18.1 Concepts and Abbreviations

' (single quote) The single quotation mark is entered in Windows by pressing the ' key and thenthe SPACEBAR or SHIFT and #.

^ (power) The exponent sign is entered in Windows by pressing the ^ key and then theSPACEBAR.

ALT Keyboard key used to change the function of another key; usually held down whileanother key is pressed.

Application A program which runs under Windows

BACKSPACE Keyboard key used to delete the last character entered; labeled with an arrowpointing left or with BS, generally located above the ENTER or RETURN key.

Browser Program for navigating through filing / directory organization structures.

Check-mark Small mark displayed next to certain menu options to indicate that thecorresponding option is activated.

Click Short press of the left mouse button, i.e. short selection and immediate release; insome cases it is required to hold down the button after clicking. The right and leftmouse buttons can be switched in the control panel.

COM Abbreviation for "Component Object Model". Microsoft software standard designedto simplify communication between processes and programs. COM defines itsown object-oriented interface for this purpose.

Context menu Special menu adapted to particular object and offering commands which affect thesame object. Usually called by right-clicking on the object, but sometimes viaSHIFT+F10 or some other special key.

CTRL Keyboard key used to enter control characters; usually held down while anotherkey is pressed.

DELETE This is the keyboard delete key: the character located at the marked position or tothe right of the cursor is deleted; usually labeled with Del.

Direction keys The four keyboard keys labeled with arrows in all four directions; used to moveobjects or the cursor on the screen; also called cursor keys.

Directory Windows file container which may hold files and/or other directories; used to addstructure to hard disks and diskettes. Also known as "Folder".

Double-click Clicking the mouse button twice in quick succession; the speed can be specified inWindows (Control Panel/ Mouse).

DOWN Direction key with arrow pointing downward

Drag&Drop A method of moving objects with the mouse. Click on an object and move themouse while keeping its button down to move the object; release the mousebutton over the desired new location for the object.

Editor Program or program component for entering or editing data (often text).

END Keyboard key used to move the cursor to the right edge of the screen.

ENTER Keyboard input key, sometimes labeled as Return, Enter, CR or an arrow pointingdown and then left.

ESCAPE Keyboard key, sometimes labeled with Esc; used to cancel commands or interruptoperations.

Function key Function keys are available as a block at the top or the left of the keyboard, usuallylabeled with F1, F2,...; used to execute commands.

HOME Keyboard key used to move the cursor to the left edge of the screen.

400


Appendix

Kit In FAMOS, the name of special extension libraries providing additional functionswhich can be called in formulas or sequences.

LEFT Direction key with arrow pointing left.

Mouse cursor Mouse cursor; in Windows usually an arrow, moved across the screen with themouse.

OLE Abbreviation of "Object Linking and Embedding". A method of shared use ofinformation where data from a source document are linked to or embedded in adestination document. If the embedded data are selected in the destinationdocument , the source document is reopened so that the data can be processedusing the appropriate functions in the original environment. A specialimplementation of the interface standard COM (which see).

Parameter Characteristic assigned to a function; called an argument in mathematics.

Path Directory

PgDn Keyboard key which moves the image displayed one page downward; labeled withPgDn and an arrow pointing downward.

PgUp Keyboard key which moves the image displayed one page upward; labeled withPgUp and an arrow pointing upward.

Plug-in General term for an auxiliary program extending an application's functionality.In FAMOS, it means an expansion module having its own user interface, whichcan be seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS main window.

Rezoom Command to undo the zoom, shows entire page.

RIGHT Direction key with arrow pointing right.

SHIFT Keyboard key used to switch between upper and lower case characters, locatedtwice on every keyboard for the right and left hands; is usually held down whileother keys are pressed.

SPACEBAR Keyboard key which inserts a space; the longest key.

TAB Keyboard key used to indent in word-processing programs, used in Windows tomove to the next control in a dialog; tabulator function.

UP Direction key with arrow pointing upward.

Waveform A series of numerical values which belong together and have a combinedmeaning, e.g. a series of temperatures measured in succession.

Zoom Enlarges a section of a window; opposite function is Unzoom.

18.2 Constants and Predefined Variables

sRms Root-mean-square of a data set or waveform

e Euler's constant e

InDegr Constant for converting radians to degrees

InRad Constant for converting degrees to radians

sMax Maximum of a waveform

sMaxPos X-coordinate of the maximum of a waveform

sMin Minimum of a waveform

401Appendix


sMinPos X-coordinate of the minimum of a waveform

PI Circle constant pi (P)

PI2 2 x circle constant pi (P)

StDev Standard deviation of a waveform

18.3 Units

Supported SI Units

A Ampere Electric current

cd Candela Light intensity

K Kelvin Temperature

kg Kilogram Mass

m Meter Length

s Second Time

Additionally Supported SI Units

Unit Name Definition Conversion

°C Celsius Temperature 1 °C = 1 K fortemperaturedifferences

C Coulomb Electric charge 1 C = 1 As

F Farad Electric capacity 1 F = 1 As/V

H Henry Inductivity 1 H = 1 Vs/A

Hz Hertz Frequency 1 Hz = 1 1/s

J Joule Energy 1 J = 1 Nm = 1 Ws

lm Lumen Light flux

lx Lux Illumination 1 lx = 1 lm/m2

mol Mol Amount of substance

N Newton Force 1 N = 1 kgm/s2

Ohm Ohm Electric resistance 1 Ohm = 1 V/A

Pa Pascal Pressure 1 Pa = 1 N/m2

S Siemens Conductivity 1 S = 1 A/V

402


Appendix

T Tesla Magnetic field strength 1 T = 1 Vs/m2

V Volt Voltage

W Watt Power 1 W = 1 VA

Wb Weber Magnetic flux 1 Wb = 1 Vs

Additional units and pseudo-units recognized by FAMOS

dB Decibel Not a unit, logarithmic representation

Degr Degrees Angle, range 0 ... 360

Empty Not a unit

% Percent Not a unit

Rad Radian Angle, range 0 ... 2*Pi

18.4 Maximum Values

Maximum number of drives for temporary files 5

Max. waveform length (in Bytes) 2.1 *109

Maximum formula length 255 characters

Maximum number of variables 32000

Maximum length of a variable name 255 characters

Maximum text length (text variables, units, comments) 255 characters

Maximum nesting depth in a formula 10

Maximum nesting depth in a sequence (macro) 20

Largest possible number (magnitude) 1035

Smallest possible number (magnitude) 10-35

Index 403


Index

- # -

# (operator in sequences) 190

- * -

* (sequence parameter) 190

*:wildcard in file name 213, 219

*:wildcard in variable names 227

- . -

.I (component abbreviation) 128

.P (component abbreviation) 128

.Y (component abbreviation) 128

- / -

/C (establishing a registry key) 20

/C (start parameter) 20

/D (start parameter) 21

/E (start parameter) 22

/F (start parameter) 21

/L (start parameter) 21

/P (command line parameter) 274

/S (start parameter) 22

/S (Startparameter) 22

- ; -

; (beginning of comment) 154, 205

; (semicolon) 189

- ? -

? (sequence parameter)( 190

?:Help menu 51

?:wildcard in file name 213, 219

?:wildcard in variable names 227

- ~ -

~:special characters (in text constants) 130

- < -

<...> (text variables) 158

- A -

Absolute Time Comparison:Waveform Editor 247

actual power 374

add grid 359

aligning (dialog elements) 286

Application:sequence command 199

applications 359

arithmetic mean:waveform 68

arrow buttons in toolbar 264

ASCII format 88

ASCII:save options 200, 201

ASCII:sequence command 200

ASCII-export templates:administration 100

ASCII-export templates:defining 101

ASCII-format (export template) 99

ASCII-format 3.2 compatible) 110

ASCOption:sequence command 201

ASCSave:sequence command 202

- B -

band-pass 386

Baumansicht (dialog element) 303

BINARY file 91

binary format 91

binary format:signed integers 91

binary format:unsigned integers 91

Binary:sequence command 203

bookmarks (Editor box) 35, 44

breakpoints 44, 185

- C -

calculations:example 68

change size (dialog element 287

Charact. dialog:scrolling 138

characteristic file 384

check boxes (dialog element) 295

Client (DDE) 256

clipboard (dialog-editor) 288

Clipboard:sequence command 205

404 Index


Column menu (Waveform Editor):charact. values 244

Column menu (Waveform Editor):Clear column 237

Column menu (Waveform Editor):Delete Column 239

Column menu (Waveform Editor):Insert New Column 239

Column menu (Waveform Editor):place variable 237

Column menu (Waveform Editor):Show Curve 244

command line parameters 19

commands 187

commands:DDE Export 195

commands:Load Save 195

commands:overview ordered alphabetically 197

commands:overview ordered by group 195

commands:sequence 189

commands:Variables Execution 195

comment 99, 189

comment:on sequence file 179, 180

Comment:sequence command 205

compatibility dialog (DSF-format) 82

complex transfer function 359

complex waveforms:curve window 71

conditional execution 215

Conditional loop 230

Configure display:Waveform Editor 237

constants 147

constants:predefined constants 147

context menu:(File Window) 264

context menu:Editor box (input space) 31

context menu:Editor box (title bar) 31

context menu:Functions list 29

context menu:Variables list 25

context menu:Waveform Editor 236

Control:sequence command 206

convolution 382

copying to Clipboard:curve window 205

correlation coefficient 372

cross-correlation function 372

cubic splines:curve window 64

Current session 49

cursor icons:File Browser 270

curve configuration:default directories 122

Curve Kit 164, 227

Curve Setup:sequence command 207

curve window:adding more waveforms 64

Curve window:Close curve windows! 50

curve window:copying to Clipboard 205

curve window:loading a configuration 50

Curve Window:Measure 60

curve window:More Curves in Window 64

curve window:Optimize 50

curve window:phase spectrum 71

curve window:scaling 71

curve window:zoom 59

customizing:user interface 54

cut-off frequency 364

- D -

data formats:conversion 144

data formats:digital 133

data groups 126

data groups:channel index 131

data groups:colon 131

data groups:variables 145

Data Manager options 151

data types 126

data types: complex waveforms 128

data types:data groups 131, 157

data types:digital 133

data types:normal waveforms 126

data types:text variables 130, 154

data types:TimeStamp-ASCII 130

datepicker (dialog element) 298

DDE 199

DDE Options:dialog 259

DDE:Call Client dialog 48

DDE:commands 223

DDE:DDE client 257

DDE:FAMOS as a client 256

DDE:Poke 256

DDE:Request 256

DDE:Request data 259

DDE:Request text 259

DDE:requesting data from FAMOS 262

DDE:requesting text variables 262

DDE:Send control commands 258

DDE:Send data 258

DDE:Send text 258

DDE:sending data to FAMOS 262

DDE:sending instructions to FAMOS 261

Index 405


DDE:sending text data to FAMOS 262

DDE:Server name 259

DDE:text format 259

DDE:text separator 259

DDE:Timeout 259

DDE:topic SYSTEM 261

DDE:topic TXVARS 262

DDE:Transaction 257

DDE-client:dialog 257

DDE-interface 256

decimal comma 110

decimal notation 110

decimal point 110

default directories 122

default directories:curve configurations 122

default directories:definition files 122

default directories:load data files 122

default directories:Report Generator 122

default directories:save data files 122

default directories:sequences 122

definition files:default directories 122

DELETE 145, 208

delete (dialog elements) 287

Delete:sequence command 208

Delete:Variable menu 42

deleting files 270

dialog element:Baumansicht 303

dialog element:check boxes 295

dialog element:date picker 298

dialog element:group box 296

dialog element:image 296

dialog element:Klappliste 301

dialog element:Kombinationsfeld 302

dialog element:Kurvenfenster 305

dialog element:Listenfeld (Einzelselektion) 299

dialog element:Listenfeld (Mehrfachselektion) 300

dialog element:menu 307

dialog element:multi-line edit box 295

dialog element:slider control 296

dialog element:status bar 309

dialog element:Tabelle 304

dialog element:text box 292

dialog element:time 299

dialog element:toolbar 307

dialog: Options File Browser:file format and displayfilter 266

dialog: Save template 100

dialog:(EXCEL) export templates 113

dialog:Arrange windows 54

dialog:cancel running 290

dialog:DDE Options 259

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Data 101

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):File header 101

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):General 101

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Miscellaneous 101

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Preview 101

dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Scaling 101

dialog:Define export template (XLS):Data 114

dialog:Define export template (XLS):File header 114

dialog:Define export template (XLS):General 114

dialog:Define export template (XLS):Miscellaneous 114

dialog:Define export template (XLS):Scaling 114

dialog:Define favorites 52, 74

dialog:Defining export templates (XLS) 114

dialog:design 279

dialog:Editor box options 36

dialog:elements 279

dialog:Enter title for configuration 55

dialog:event-sequence 280, 288

dialog:event-sequence edit 289

dialog:export templates (ASCII):administering 100

dialog:export templates (ASCII):defining 101

dialog:Formula-Assistant 161

dialog:Open (sequence) 179

dialog:Options / loading FAMOS files 82

dialog:Options:Data Manager 151

dialog:Options:File Browser:Display 266

dialog:Options:XLS Import 95

dialog:Page setup (Editor box) 38

dialog:Print 39

dialog:programming 280

dialog:Save as (sequence) 180

dialog:setting colors 37

dialog:test and run 290

Dialoge:Ausführung abbrechen 185, 226

dialog-editor 280

dialog-editor:calling 280

dialog-editor:change element size 287

dialog-editor:clipboard 288

dialog-editor:delete elements 287

dialog-editor:dialog:add elements 282

dialog-editor:dialog:change size 282

dialog-editor:dialog:create 282

406 Index


dialog-editor:dialog:opening 282

dialog-editor:dialog:save 282

dialog-editor:element-properties 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:caption 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:data-linking 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:imgage 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:input validation 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:name 283

dialog-editor:element-properties:text-formatting 283

dialog-editor:elements aligning 286

dialog-editor:front back 287

dialog-editor:grid 288

dialog-editor:move elements 286

dialog-editor:select elements 282

dialogs:during execution of sequence 194

differential non-linearity 378

Digiskop format:DSPLoad function 209

digital filter 386

DIN-EN-ISO-9001 13

Directories dialog:defaults 122

directories:defining defaults 122

directories:edit 190

directories:entry in sequence 194

directories:save 225

directories:sequences 221

directory (File Browser):change 270

Display menu (Waveform Editor):cell size 245

Display menu (Waveform Editor):font 245

Display menu (Waveform Editor):Options 243, 245,247

Display options:Clipboard (Waveform Editor) 243

display options:complex waveforms 71

Display options:Data (Waveform Editor) 247

Display Options:Scale (Waveform Editor) 245

Display Options:Various (Waveform Editor) 237

display:single value 67

display:spline 64

distribution 378

DLL-functions:register 166

DLL-interface 166

DLL's:use in FAMOS 172

dongle 19

dongle:troubleshooting 17

double 133

DP 128

Drag&Drop:Functions list 29

Drag&Drop:Variables list 25

Drag&Drop:Waveform Ed. -> Rep. Gen. 253

Drag&Drop:Waveform Editor 237, 244, 254

drives for temporary files 151

DSP (DIGISKOP) format 85

DSPLoad:sequence command 209

- E -

edit directories 190

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Clipboard 243

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Copy 241

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Cut 241

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Delete 241

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Go To... 242

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Insert Values 241

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Paste 241

Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Search 242

Editor box 24, 56

Editor box:active line 34

Editor box:bookmarks 35, 44

Editor box:Breakpoints 44, 185

Editor box:calling online help 34

Editor box:calling the Function Assistant 34

Editor box:context menu (input space) 31

Editor box:context menu (title bar) 31

Editor box:Continue (sequence) 184

Editor box:creating new sequences 178

Editor box:editing text 32, 44

Editor box:execute-button 34

Editor box:Find 44

Editor box:Find next 44

Editor box:Insert-/Overwrite-mode 33

Editor box:loading sequences 179

Editor box:options 36

Editor box:overview 31

Editor box:Page preview 44

Editor box:Page setup 38, 44

Editor box:parameter-tip 34, 36

Editor box:Print 39, 44

Editor box:Print preview 39

Editor box:Run active line 184

Editor box:Run line 44

Editor box:saving sequences 180

Editor box:setting colors 37

Editor box:Single step (sequence) 184

Editor box:Single step in subsequence 184

Index 407


Editor box:Start sequence (Debug) 184

Else:sequence command 210

End:FAMOS main window 41

END:sequence command 210

error messages 158

events:Waveform Editor 237

event-sequence (dialog) 288

event-sequence (dialogs) 280

examples for applications 359

Excel file format 95, 112

execute-button 34, 62

Execute-button (Sequences) 62

ExitSequence:sequence command 211

export templates (ASCII):definition 101

export templates (ASCII):options:Data 101

export templates (ASCII):options:General 101

export templates (ASCII):options:Miscellaneous 101

export templates (EXCEL):administering 113

export templates (XLS):administering 113

export templates (XLS):definition 114

export templates (XLS):options:General 114

export templates (XLS):options:Miscellaneous 114

export templates:administering (ASCII) 100

export templates:ASCII 99

export templates:options:Data (XLS) 114

export templates:options:File header (ASCII) 101

export templates:options:File header (XLS) 114

export templates:options:Preview (ASCII) 101

export templates:options:Scaling (ASCII) 101

export templates:options:Scaling (XLS) 114

export templates:placeholders 101, 114

Export!:Variable menu 42

Export:sequence command 212

exporting variables 146

external DLL functions:use of 172

External kit functions:call 164

Extra menu 48

Extra menu:DDE 48, 257

Extra Menu:Dialog-Editor 48

Extra menu:File Assistant 48

Extra menu:Filter Design 48

Extra menu:QuickView Window 48

Extra menu:Waveform Editor 69, 235

- F -

Fae40111_Display_options.htm 266

Fae40111_Overview2.htm 263

Fae50102_Extra_Menu.htm 48

Fae50102_Introduction.htm 24

Fae50103_Specifying_Directories.htm 57

Fae50103_Starting_FAMOS.htm 56

Fae50105_Text_Variables.htm 130

Fae50106_The_Format__Kit.htm 165

FAMOS:file format 212

FAMOS:installation 18

FAMOS:introduction 17

FAMOS:sequence command 212

FAMOS:starting 19

FAMOS-format 82, 99

FASLoad:sequence command 213

Favorites 28, 29, 74

Favorites:organizing 53

Favorites:overview 51

Favorites:Properties 52

FFT 364, 369

FFT:inverse 369

FFT:options 160, 214

FFTOption:sequence command 214

File Assistant:FASLoad 213

File Assistant:starting 48

File Browser 41, 56, 263

File Browser:arrow buttons in toolbar 264

File Browser:channel naming 268

File Browser:cursor icons 270

File Browser:deleting files 270

File Browser:directory change 270

File Browser:file list 265

File Browser:load files 267

File Browser:Options/ Delete 270

File Browser:permanently/temporarily loadedchannels 268

File Browser:select files for loading 269

File Browser:show after loading 268

File Browser:sort file list 266

file management 79

File menu (File Browser):delete 270

File menu (main window) 41

File menu (main window):End 41

File menu (main window):Load 41, 58, 80

File menu (main window):Restart 41

File menu (main window):Save 69

File menu (main window):Save individually 41, 98

File menu (main window):Save together 41, 98

file saving:ASCII 99

408 Index


file saving:ASCII (3.2 compatible) 110

file saving:ASCII options 110

File Window:context menu 264

File Window:load files (example) 75

file:comment 99

File-Kit 164

filter 386

Filter Design:starting 48

filter effect 382

filter order 364

float 133

Folders 57

Format Kit 165

format:ASCII 88

format:ASCII (3.2 compatible) 110

format:ASCII (export template) 99

format:BINARY 91

format:DSP (DIGISKOP) 85

format:FAMOS 82, 99

format:WFT (Nicolet) 86

format:XLS 95, 112

Formula Assistant:entering parameters 161

Formula Assistant:introduction 161

Formula Assistant:starting 29

formulas 154

Fourier transformation 369

frequency 378

frequency domain 369

function box 24

function groups:10> DDE I/O 175

function groups:7> Scaling Sorting... 175

function groups:B> Load Save 195

function groups:C> Variables Execution 195

function groups:D> DDE Export 195

Function Settings 160

function:CCF (example) 372

function:Comment 205

function:Compl (example) 359

function:Cut (example) 378

function:DFilt (analysis of function) 386

function:external (DLL) 166

function:FFT (example) 382

function:idB (example) 364

function:iFFT (example) 382

function:Int (example) 372

function:IPol (example) 62

function:Join (example) 386

function:Max (example) 67

function:Mean (example) 68

function:overview of groups 175

function:Pos (example) 72

function:Ramp (example) 386

function:Red2 (example) 382

function:Show 227

function:Smo (analysis of function) 364

function:Spec (example) 70

function:xDel (example) 386

Function-Assistant:calling 34

Functions list 56

Functions list:calling online help 29

Functions list:conditions 29

Functions list:context menu 29

Functions list:DLL group 28

Functions list:Favorites group 28, 29

Functions list:Kit group 28

Functions list:overview 28

Functions list:Standard group 28

Functions list:symbols 28

- G -

Go To... :Waveform Editor 242

grid (dialog-editor) 288

group box (dialog element) 296

Group:Variable menu 42

groups 126

Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity 13

- H -

hardlock 19

hardlock:help 17

hardlock:troubleshooting 17

harmonic 70

Help menu:? 51

Help menu:Info 51

histogram 378

- I -

IF:sequence command 215

Index 409


image (dialog element) 296

imc customer support - hotline 12

imc Kits 154

Import:sequence command 217

Import:Variable menu 42

Important Notes 13

importing variables 146

Insert Values:Waveform Editor 241

Insert-mode (Editor box) 33

installing FAMOS 18

interpolation:example 62

IPol (function):example 62

- K -

kilo:unit prefix 148

Kit interface 154

Kits 162

Kits menu:Format Kit 165

Kits:call 164

Kits:class-counting package 165

Kits:Curves 164, 227

kits:File-Kit 164

kits:Format Kit 165

Kits:order tracking 165

Kits:registration 163

Kits:Report Generator 165, 207, 217

Kits:Sound Kit 165

Kits:spectrum package 165

Klappliste (dialog element) 301

Kombinationsfeld (dialog element) 302

Kurvenfenster (dialog element) 305

- L -

Layout Print:sequence command 217

Ldir:sequence command 218

Limited Warranty 14

linear fit 371

Listenfeld (Einzelselektion) (dialog element) 299

Listenfeld (Mehrfachselektion) (dialog element) 300

Load curve configuration 50

Load Curve Configuration:description 207

load file 58

Load File:Channel Selection 82, 85

load file:default directories 122

load file:DSP (Digiskop) 209

Load file:DSP format 85

load file:FAMOS binary 219

Load File:FAMOS format 82

Load File:Options 82

load file:user-defined (FAS) 213

Load File:WFT (Nicolet) format 86

Load File:WFT Options 86

load file:XLS 95

Load:File menu 41, 80

Load:sequence command 219

low-pass 359, 382, 386

- M -

macro 176

magnitude 70

Make Permanent:Variable menu 42

Max (function):example 67

Mdir:sequence command 221

Mean (function):example 68

mean value:waveform 68

Measure:Curve Window 60

measurement units 148

memory management 151

menu (dialog element) 307

menu item:Extra:Options 48

menu item:File:Last files 41

menu item:Help:Find 51

menu item:Project:Close 49

menu item:Project:Execute 49

menu item:Project:Project-Explorer 49

menu item:Project:Properties 49

menu item:Project:Save current session 49

menu item:Sequence:Close 44

menu item:Sequence:Continue 44

menu item:Sequence:Edit 44

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Breakpoint on/off 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Copy 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Cut 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Paste 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Redo 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Select all 33

menu item:Sequence:Edit:Undo 33

menu item:Sequence:Find 33, 44

menu item:Sequence:Find next 33, 44

menu item:Sequence:Format automatically 33, 44

menu item:Sequence:Inser boilerplate 33

410 Index


menu item:Sequence:Insert boilerplate 44

menu item:Sequence:Load 44

menu item:Sequence:New 44

menu item:Sequence:Page setup 38, 44

menu item:Sequence:Print 39, 44

menu item:Sequence:Print preview 39

menu item:Sequence:Replace 33

menu item:Sequence:Run 44

menu item:Sequence:Run line 44

menu item:Sequence:Save 44

menu item:Sequence:Save as 44

menu item:Sequence:Single step 44

menu item:Sequence:Single step in subsequence 44

menu item:Sequence:Start (Debug) 44

menu item:Sequence:Status 44

menu item:Start (Sequence-Editor) 184

menu item:Variable:Show 59

menu item:Window (Sequence-Editor) 206

menu item:Window:Close curve configuration 50

menu item:Window:Curve window list 50

menu item:Window:Customize configuration 50

menu item:Window:Default 50

menu item:Window:Load configuration 50, 55

menu item:Window:Load curve configuration 50

menu item:Window:Optimize curve window 50

menu item:Window:Save configuration 50, 55

menu item:Windows:Arrange windows 54

milli:unit prefix 148

More Waveforms...:in curve window 64

move (dialog elements) 286

multi-event waveforms:Waveform Editor 237

multi-line edit box (dialog element) 295

- N -

name:variable 222

New Name:Load dialog 80

No Time Comparison:Waveform Editor 247

non-linearity differential 378

notation:decimal 110

num. format:Waveform Editor 245, 247

- O -

Options menu:Directories 122

Options/File Browser:Load 268

Options:colors 37

Options:Data Manager 151

Options:Editor box 36

Options:Favorites 52

options:FFT 160

Options:File Browser:Display 266

Options:File Browser:file format and display filter 266

Options:File-Load:ASCII 88

Options:File-Load:Binary 91

Options:File-Load:XLS 95

Options:Page setup (Editor box) 38

Options:Variables list 27

output box 24

output box:description 40

Output window 56

overlapping (dialog elements) 287

overview of functions by group 175

Overwrite-mode (Editor box) 33

- P -

Page setup (Editor box) 38

parameters:at FAMOS' session start 19

parameters:formal 376

parameters:in quot. marks 191

parameters:sequences 188

Pause:sequence command 221

permanent variables 146

permanently loaded channels 268

phase 359

phase spectrum:curve window 71

placeholders:in export templates 101, 114

placeholders:printout of Editor box 38

Plug-in 154

Plug-in box 41

Plug-in window 56

point:decimal point or comma 110

polar plot 359

Pos function:example 72

power factor 374

predefined variables 147

Print preview (Editor box) 39

Print:Editor box 39

printing:Waveform Editor 251

Probability density function 378

Product improvement 16

project:close 49, 278

Index 411


project:create 274

project:delete 278

Project:Execute 49

project:project-favorites 277

Project:Properties 49

project:save 278

Project-Explorer 49

properties (dialog elements) 283

Properties dialog:example 61

Properties: Variable menu 42

- Q -

Quality Management 13

QuickView Window:opening 48

- R -

Readme (help file) 17

relative frequency 378

Relative Time Comparison:Waveform Editor 247

Rename:sequence command 222

Report Generator 217

Report Generator Kit 165

Report Generator:default directory 122

Report Generator:examples of layouting a document 392

Report Generator:Kit 207, 217

Request:sequence command 223

requirements:system 18

Restart:FAMOS 41

RI 128

- S -

Save file 98

Save File:FAMOS 69

Save File:FAMOS format 98

save files to:default directories 122

Save Individually:File menu 41

Save Together:File menu 41

Save:sequence command 224

scaling:y-axis 71

scroll-linking:tables and curve windows 250

Sdir:sequence command 225

Search:Waveform Editor 242

segmented waveforms:Waveform Editor 237

select (dialog elements) 282

semicolon 189

Sequence menu 44

Sequence:# (operator) 190

sequence:? (operator) 190

Sequence:bookmarks 35, 44

Sequence:Breakpoints 44, 185

sequence:calling 189

sequence:change 74

Sequence:Close 44

sequence:commands 187

Sequence:Continue 44, 184

sequence:create 72

sequence:default directories 122

Sequence:Edit 44

sequence:edit directories 190

sequence:execute 73, 226

Sequence:Find (text) 44

Sequence:Find next (text) 44

sequence:getting values or text 194

sequence:incrementing numbers 190

sequence:interrupt 221

sequence:interrupting execution 185

sequence:introduction 176

sequence:layout 392

Sequence:Load 44, 179

sequence:nesting 190

Sequence:New 44, 178

Sequence:Page preview 44

Sequence:Page setup 44

sequence:parameter in quot. marks 191

Sequence:Print 39, 44

Sequence:protection 181

sequence:response to errors 185

Sequence:Run 44

Sequence:Run active line 184

Sequence:Run line 44

Sequence:Save 44, 74, 180

Sequence:Save as 44

SEQUENCE:sequence command 226

sequence:sequence-status 186

Sequence:Single step 44, 184

Sequence:Single step in subsequence 44, 184

Sequence:Start (Debug) 44, 184

Sequence:Status 44

sequence:TESTSMO 364

sequence:use of text variables 191

sequence:with parameters 188, 189

Server (DDE) 256

412 Index


Server name (DDE) 259

setting default folders 57

Show Together: Variable menu 42

Show Variable (Waveform Editor) 237

Show:sequence command 227

Show:Variable menu 42

signed integers:binary format 91

single value window 67

single value:curve window 67

SI-units 148, 154

Slider control (dialog element) 296

Software License 14

Sound Kit 165

Spec (function):example 70

special characters:in text constants 130

spectrum 70, 364

spline:curve window 64

spreadsheet:Waveform Editor 235

start application 56

starting FAMOS 19

status bar (dialog element) 309

status line 24

symbols:in the Functions list 28

symbols:in the Variables list 124

syntax color coding 37

SYSTEM (DDE-topic) 261

system requirements:for FAMOS 18

- T -

Tabelle (dialog element) 304

Table menu (Waveform Editor):Close 236

Table menu (Waveform Editor):New 236

temporary files 151

temporary variables 146

text box (dialog element) 292

text variables 158

text variables:operator <...> 158, 191

text variables:use in sequences 191

time (dialog element) 299

TimeCopy:sequence command 228

TimeSet:sequence command 228

TimeStamp-ASCII-waveforms 130

tolerance 376

tolerance band 376

tolerance limit 376

toolbar 24

toolbar (dialog element) 307

transfer function 364, 369

trigger time set 228

trigger time:copy 228

Tutorial 56

two's complement 91

TXVARS (DDE-topic) 262

- U -

Ungroup:Variable menu 42

units 138, 148

units:assignment 359

units:with exponents 148

unsigned integers:binary format 91

update-info (help file) 17

user interface:customizing 54

user interface:FAMOS 24

- V -

value search:Waveform Editor 242

Variable menu 42

Variable menu:Delete 42, 70, 145

Variable menu:Export 42, 146

Variable menu:Group 42

Variable menu:Import 42, 146

Variable menu:Make Permanent 42

Variable menu:Play 146, 165

Variable menu:Properties 42, 61

Variable menu:Show 42

Variable menu:Show Together 42

Variable menu:Ungroup 42, 145

Variables list 24, 25, 56, 124

Variables list:context menu 25

Variables list:Drag&Drop 25

Variables list:operation 25

Variables list:Options dialog 27

Variables list:symbols 124

Variables menu:Show together 135

variables:[..] (index) 132

variables:deleting 70

variables:drag & drop 136

variables:Export 212

variables:Import 217

variables:indexing 132, 154

variables:names 125

variables:new name 80

Index 413


variables:permanent 146

variables:permanent (File Browser) 268

variables:predefined variables 147

variables:rename 222

variables:save 224

variables:Save (ASCII) 202

variables:save together 98

variables:show 59, 135, 227

variables:temporary 146

- W -

warnings 160

warnings:output 40

Waveform Editor 235

Waveform Editor:cell size 245

Waveform Editor:CHANGE mode 240

Waveform Editor:charact. values 244

Waveform Editor:column width 245, 247

Waveform Editor:context menu 236

Waveform Editor:Copy 241

Waveform Editor:copy to Clipboard 243

Waveform Editor:create variable 242

Waveform Editor:Cut 241

Waveform Editor:Delete 241

Waveform Editor:Delete Column 239

Waveform Editor:display modes 247

Waveform Editor:display of XY waveforms 237

Waveform Editor:Display options 243

Waveform Editor:editing values 240

Waveform Editor:entering and changing values 240

Waveform Editor:Extra menu 69

Waveform Editor:font 245

Waveform Editor:Go To... 242

Waveform Editor:index 245

Waveform Editor:input cell 240

Waveform Editor:INPUT mode 240

Waveform Editor:Insert New Column 239

Waveform Editor:Insert Values 241

Waveform Editor:marking 240

Waveform Editor:modes 240

Waveform Editor:multi-event waveforms 237

Waveform Editor:num. format 245, 247

Waveform Editor:open table 236

Waveform Editor:Paste 241

Waveform Editor:positioning and scrolling 240

Waveform Editor:Print 251

Waveform Editor:READY mode 240

Waveform Editor:scroll-linking 250

Waveform Editor:Search values 242

Waveform Editor:segmented waveforms 237

Waveform Editor:Show Curve 244

Waveform Editor:show variable 237

Waveform Editor:start 235

Waveform Editor:time scale 245

Waveform Editor:transfer to Rep. Gen. 253

Waveform Editor:vertical scroll-bar 240

Waveform Editor:x-scale 245

Waveform Editor:XY data 237

waveform:create a 359

waveforms:value table 235

weighting function 369

WFT (Nicolet) format 86

WFTLoad:sequence command 229

WHILE:sequence command 230

wildcards:in file name 213

window functions 369

Window menu 50

Window menu:Load curve configuration 135

working with different configurations 20

- X -

Xdelta:sequence command 231

XLS-export templates:definition 114

XLS-format 95, 112

Xoffset:sequence commands 233

Xunit:sequence command 232

XY data:Waveform Editor 237

- Y -

Yunit:sequence command 233

- Z -

Zoom:curve window 59

Documents

FAMOS Users Manual